Вы находитесь на странице: 1из 398

Your Operator's Manual

Digital form inside the vehicle


Familiarize yourself with the contents of the Operator's Manual directly via your
vehicle's multimedia system (Menu item "Vehicle").

Booklet inside the vehicle


In addition to the vehicle's Operator's Manual, you can obtain the complete multi-
media system Supplement from your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Digital form via the Internet


You can find the Operator's Manual on the Mercedes-Benz homepage.

Digital form as an App


The Mercedes-Benz Guides App is available for free on the Apple® App store or Google
Play.

Apple® iOS Android™

GLE
Operator's Manual
GLE Operator's Manual

É1665843808<ËÍ
1665843808

Order no. P166 0444 13 Part no. 166 584 38 08 Edition A 2018
Mercedes-Benz
Symbols (Y This symbol tells you where you can find Publication details
Registered trademarks: page) more information about a topic.
Internet
YY This symbol indicates a warning or an
RBluetooth® is a registered trademark of Blue-
instruction that is continued on the next
tooth SIG Inc. page. Further information about Mercedes-Benz vehi-
RDTS™ is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc. cles and about Daimler AG can be found on the
Dis‐ This text indicates a message on the following websites:
RDolby® and MLP™ are registered trademarks play multifunction display/multimedia dis-
of DOLBY Laboratories. play. http://www.mbusa.com (USA only)
RBabySmart™, ESP® and PRE-SAFE® are reg- http://www.mercedes-benz.ca (Canada only)
istered trademarks of Daimler AG.
RHomeLink® is a registered trademark of John-
son Controls. Editorial office
RiPod® and iTunes® are registered trademarks
of Apple Inc. You are welcome to forward any queries or sug-
gestions you may have regarding this Operator's
RLogic7® is a registered trademark of Harman
Manual to the technical documentation team at
International Industries. the following address:
RMicrosoft® and Windows media® are regis-
Customer Assistance Center
tered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
RSIRIUS® is a registered trademark of Sirius
3 Mercedes Drive
XM Radio Inc.
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
RHD Radio™ is a registered trademark of iBiq-
©Daimler AG: not to be reprinted, translated or
uity Digital Corporation.
otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part, with-
RGracenote® is a registered trademark of
out written permission from Daimler AG.
Gracenote, Inc.
RZAGAT Survey® and related brands are regis-
tered trademarks of Zagat Survey, LLC. Vehicle manufacturer
In this Operator's Manual you will find the fol-
lowing symbols: Daimler AG
G WARNING Mercedesstraße 137
Warning notes make you aware of dangers 70327 Stuttgart
which could pose a threat to your health or Germany
life, or to the health and life of others.

H Environmental note
Environmental notes provide you with infor-
mation on environmentally aware actions or
disposal.

! Notes on material damage alert you to dan-


gers that could lead to damage to your vehi-
cle.
i Practical tips or further information that
could be helpful to you.
X This symbol indicates an instruction
that must be followed.
X Several of these symbols in succession
indicate an instruction with several
steps. As at 08.03.2017
Welcome to the world of Mercedes-Benz Digital form via the Internet
We urge you to read this Operator's Manual The Operator's Manual on the Internet pro-
carefully and familiarize yourself with the vehi- vides easy access to all information
cle before driving. For your own safety and a regarding your vehicle and multimedia sys-
longer vehicle life, follow the instructions and tem. It also provides helpful animations,
warning notices in this Operator's Manual. interesting background information and a
Ignoring them could result in damage to the wide array of search options.
vehicle or personal injury to you or others. Digital form as an App
Vehicle damage caused by failure to follow Using the Mercedes-Benz Guides App, you
instructions is not covered by the Mercedes- can view all the information on your vehicle
Benz Limited Warranty. and multimedia system via mobile Internet
The equipment or product designation of your or download it independently of network
vehicle may vary depending on: access. Available for smartphones or tab-
lets.
RModel
ROrder You can also use the Mercedes-Benz Guides
App:
RCountry specification
RAvailability
Mercedes-Benz therefore reserves the right to
introduce changes in the following areas:
RDesign
REquipment
RTechnical features
The equipment in your vehicle may therefore
differ from that shown in the descriptions and
illustrations. Please note that the Mercedes-Benz Guides App
The following are integral components of the may not yet be available in your country.
vehicle: Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
RDigital Operator's Manual Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
RPrinted Operator's Manual A Daimler Company
RMaintenance Booklet
REquipment-dependent supplements
Keep these documents in the vehicle at all
times. If you sell the vehicle, always pass all
documents on to the new owner.
Your Operator's Manual:
Digital form inside the vehicle
The Digital Operator's Manual provides
comprehensive and specifically adapted
information on your vehicle's equipment
and multimedia system. It contains infor-
mative animations, individual language
settings and an intuitive search function.
Booklet inside the vehicle
In addition to this manual and the afore-
mentioned digital media, you also have the
option to obtain a comprehensive printed
version of the Supplement for your multi-
media system from your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.

1665843808 É1665843808<ËÍ
2 Contents

Memory function ................................. 108


Index ....................................................... 4
Lights and windshield wipers .......... 110
Digital Operator's Manual .................. 26 Exterior lighting ................................... 110
Introduction ........................................... 26 Interior lighting .................................... 114
Operation ............................................... 26 Replacing bulbs (vehicles with LED
headlamps) .......................................... 115
Introduction ......................................... 27 Replacing bulbs (vehicles with halo-
Protecting the environment ................... 27 gen headlamps) ................................... 115
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts ............... 27 Windshield wipers ................................ 117
Operator's Manual ................................. 28
Service and vehicle operation ................ 28 Climate control ................................. 122
Operating safety .................................... 30 Overview of climate control systems ... 122
QR codes for the rescue card ................ 32 Operating the climate control sys-
Data stored in the vehicle ...................... 32 tems .................................................... 127
Information on copyright ....................... 35 Setting the air vents ............................ 132

At a glance ........................................... 36 Driving and parking .......................... 134


Cockpit .................................................. 36 Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle ..... 134
Instrument cluster ................................. 37 Driving ................................................. 134
Multifunction steering wheel ................. 38 DYNAMIC SELECT controller ............... 142
Center console ...................................... 39 Automatic transmission ....................... 143
Overhead control panel ......................... 42 Refueling ............................................. 150
Door control panel ................................. 43 Parking ................................................ 156
Driving tips .......................................... 159
Safety ................................................... 44 Driving systems ................................... 169
Panic alarm ............................................ 44 Towing a trailer .................................... 219
Occupant safety .................................... 44 Bicycle rack ......................................... 225
Children in the vehicle ........................... 59
Pets in the vehicle ................................. 65 On-board computer and displays .... 228
Driving safety systems ........................... 66 Important safety notes ........................ 228
Protection against theft ......................... 75 Displays and operation ........................ 228
Menus and submenus ......................... 231
Opening and closing ........................... 77 Display messages ............................... 243
SmartKey ............................................... 77 Warning and indicator lamps in the
Doors ..................................................... 83 instrument cluster ............................... 274
Cargo compartment ............................... 84
Side windows ......................................... 88 Multimedia system ........................... 287
Sliding sunroof ....................................... 92 General notes ...................................... 287
Important safety notes ........................ 287
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors .... 97 Function restrictions ............................ 287
Correct driver's seat position ................ 97 Operating system ................................ 288
Seats ..................................................... 97
Steering wheel ..................................... 103 Stowage and features ...................... 295
Mirrors ................................................. 105 Stowage areas ..................................... 295
Contents 3

Features .............................................. 304

Maintenance and care ...................... 321


Engine compartment ........................... 321
ASSYST PLUS ...................................... 325
Care ..................................................... 326

Breakdown assistance ..................... 334


Where will I find...? .............................. 334
Flat tire ................................................ 335
Battery (vehicle) .................................. 340
Jump-starting ....................................... 342
Towing and tow-starting ...................... 345
Fuses ................................................... 348

Wheels and tires ............................... 351


Important safety notes ........................ 351
Operation ............................................ 351
Winter operation .................................. 353
Tire pressure ....................................... 354
Loading the vehicle .............................. 361
All about wheels and tires ................... 364
Changing a wheel ................................ 371
Wheel and tire combinations ............... 376
Emergency spare wheel ....................... 376

Technical data ................................... 381


Information regarding technical data ... 381
Vehicle electronics .............................. 381
Identification plates ............................. 382
Service products and filling capaci-
ties ...................................................... 383
Vehicle data ......................................... 390
Vehicle data for off-road driving .......... 392
Trailer tow hitch ................................... 394
4 Index

1, 2, 3 ... Function/notes ............................. 184


Active Lane Keeping Assist
4ETS (Electronic Traction System) Activating/deactivating (on-
see ETS/4ETS (Electronic Trac- board computer) ............................ 237
tion System) Display message ............................ 263
4MATIC (permanent four-wheel Function/information .................... 210
drive) .................................................. 213 Trailer towing ................................. 213
12 V socket Active light function ......................... 112
see Sockets ADAPTIVE BRAKE ................................. 72
115 V socket ...................................... 308 Adaptive Damping System
360° camera see ADS (Adaptive Damping System)
Cleaning ......................................... 330 Adaptive Highbeam Assist
Display in the multimedia system .. 200 Display message ............................ 256
Function/notes ............................. 198 Function/notes ............................. 113
Switching on/off ........................... 114
A Additives (engine oil) ........................ 388
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) Address book
Display message ............................ 244 see also Digital Operator's Man-
Function/notes ................................ 66 ual .................................................. 287
Important safety notes .................... 66 Adjusting the volume
Warning lamp ................................. 277 Multimedia system ........................ 288
Accident ADS (Adaptive Damping System)
Automatic measures after an acci- Function/notes ............................. 183
dent ................................................. 59 Air bags
Activating media mode Deployment ..................................... 56
General notes ................................ 293 Display message ............................ 253
Activating/deactivating cooling Front air bag (driver, front
with air dehumidification ................. 127 passenger) ....................................... 50
Active Blind Spot Assist Important safety notes .................... 49
Activating/deactivating (on- Introduction ..................................... 49
board computer) ............................ 237 Knee bag .......................................... 50
Display message ............................ 264 Occupant Classification System
Function/information .................... 208 (OCS) ............................................... 51
Trailer towing ................................. 210 PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator
Active Brake Assist lamps ............................................... 45
Activating or deactivating .............. 237 Side impact air bag .......................... 51
Display message ............................ 249 Window curtain air bag .................... 51
Function/notes ................................ 67 Air filter (display message) .............. 259
Active Brake Assist with cross- AIR FLOW ........................................... 128
traffic function Air vents
Activating or deactivating .............. 237 Glove box ....................................... 132
Display message ............................ 250 Important safety notes .................. 132
Function/notes ................................ 72 Rear ............................................... 133
Important safety notes .................... 73 Setting ........................................... 132
Warning lamp ................................. 285 Setting the center air vents ........... 132
Active Curve System Setting the side air vents ............... 132
Display message ............................ 261
Index 5

Air-conditioning system Authorized workshop


see Climate control see Qualified specialist workshop
AIRMATIC package AUTO lights
ADS (Adaptive Damping System) ... 183 Display message ............................ 255
Function/notes ............................. 183 see Lights
Alarm Automatic car wash (care) ............... 326
ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 75 Automatic engine start (ECO start/
Switching off (ATA) .......................... 75 stop function) .................................... 140
Switching the function on/off Automatic engine switch-off (ECO
(ATA) ................................................ 75 start/stop function) .......................... 139
Alarm system Automatic headlamp mode .............. 110
see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) Automatic transmission
AMG Accelerator pedal position ............. 146
Adaptive sport suspension sys- Changing gear ............................... 146
tem ................................................ 186 DIRECT SELECT lever ..................... 143
AMG menu (on-board computer) ..... 240 Display message ............................ 270
Anti-lock braking system Drive program ................................ 146
see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) Drive program display .................... 145
Anti-skid chains Driving tips .................................... 146
see Snow chains DYNAMIC SELECT controller ......... 142
Anti-Theft Alarm system Emergency running mode .............. 150
see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) Engaging drive position .................. 145
Approach/departure angle .............. 168 Engaging neutral ............................ 144
Ashtray ............................................... 307 Engaging park position automati-
Assistance display (on-board com- cally ............................................... 144
puter) .................................................. 236 Engaging reverse gear ................... 144
Assistance menu (on-board com- Engaging the park position ............ 144
puter) .................................................. 236 Important safety notes .................. 143
ASSYST PLUS Kickdown ....................................... 146
Displaying a service message ........ 325 Manual shifting .............................. 147
Hiding a service message .............. 325 Oil temperature (on-board com-
Resetting the service interval dis- puter, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ..... 240
play ................................................ 325 Overview ........................................ 143
Service message ............................ 325 Problem (malfunction) ................... 150
Special service requirements ......... 326 Pulling away ................................... 138
ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) Starting the engine ........................ 137
Activating/deactivating ................... 75 Steering wheel paddle shifters ...... 147
Function ........................................... 75 Trailer towing ................................. 146
Switching off the alarm .................... 75 Transmission position display ........ 145
ATTENTION ASSIST Transmission positions .................. 145
Activating/deactivating ................. 237 Automatic transmission emer-
Display message ............................ 260 gency mode ....................................... 150
Function/notes ............................. 202 AUX jacks
Audio menu (on-board computer) .... 234 CD/DVD drive ............................... 294
Authorized Mercedes-Benz Center Axle load, permissible (trailer tow-
see Qualified specialist workshop ing) ...................................................... 394
6 Index

B Brake linings
Display message ............................ 249
Back button ....................................... 288 Brakes
Bag hook ............................................ 300 ABS .................................................. 66
Ball coupling BAS .................................................. 67
Installing ........................................ 221 Brake fluid (notes) ......................... 388
Removing ....................................... 224 Braking assistance appropriate to
BAS (Brake Assist System) ................. 67 the situation ..................................... 69
Battery (SmartKey) Display message ............................ 244
Checking .......................................... 80 High-performance brake system .... 163
Important safety notes .................... 80 Hill start assist ............................... 139
Replacing ......................................... 80 Important safety notes .................. 161
Battery (vehicle) Maintenance .................................. 162
Charging ........................................ 342 Parking brake ................................ 157
Display message ............................ 257 Riding tips ...................................... 161
Important safety notes .................. 340 Warning lamp ................................. 276
Jump starting ................................. 342 Braking assistance appropriate to
Overview ........................................ 340 the situation
Belt Function/notes ................................ 69
see Seat belts Breakdown assistance
Belt warning ......................................... 48 Where will I find...? ........................ 334
Bicycle rack ....................................... 225 see Flat tire
Blind Spot Assist see Towing away
Activating/deactivating ................. 237 Brightness control (instrument
Display message ............................ 264 cluster lighting) ................................... 37
Notes/function .............................. 204 Bulbs
Trailer towing ................................. 206 see Replacing bulbs
see Active Blind Spot Assist
BlueTEC C
Adding DEF .................................... 153
BlueTEC (DEF) .................................... 386 California
Bluetooth® Important notice for retail cus-
Searching for a mobile phone ........ 291 tomers and lessees .......................... 28
Calling up a malfunction
Searching for a mobile phone
(device manager) ........................... 292 see Display messages
Car
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual .................................................. 287 see Vehicle
Care
Telephony ...................................... 291
Brake Assist 360° camera ................................. 330
see BAS (Brake Assist System) Car wash ........................................ 326
Brake fluid Carpets .......................................... 333
Display message ............................ 249 Display ........................................... 331
Notes ............................................. 388 Exhaust pipe .................................. 330
Brake force distribution Exterior lights ................................ 329
see EBD (electronic brake force Gear or selector lever .................... 332
distribution) Interior ........................................... 331
Brake lamps Matte finish ................................... 328
Display message ............................ 255 Notes ............................................. 326
Index 7

Paint .............................................. 328 Child-proof locks


Plastic trim .................................... 331 Important safety notes .................... 64
Power washer ................................ 327 Rear doors ....................................... 65
Rear view camera .......................... 330 Children
Roof lining ...................................... 333 Special seat belt retractor ............... 60
Seat belt ........................................ 332 Children in the vehicle
Seat cover ..................................... 332 Important safety notes .................... 59
Sensors ......................................... 330 Cigarette lighter ................................ 307
Side running board ........................ 330 Cleaning
Steering wheel ............................... 332 Mirror turn signal ........................... 330
Trim pieces .................................... 332 Trailer tow hitch ............................. 331
Washing by hand ........................... 327 Climate control
Wheels ........................................... 329 Automatic climate control (3-
Windows ........................................ 329 zone) .............................................. 125
Wiper blades .................................. 329 Controlling automatically ............... 128
Wooden trim .................................. 332 Cooling with air dehumidification .. 127
Cargo compartment cover Defrosting the windows ................. 130
Notes/how to use ......................... 300 Defrosting the windshield .............. 129
Cargo compartment enlargement Dual-zone automatic climate con-
Important safety notes .................. 298 trol ................................................. 123
Cargo compartment floor General notes ................................ 122
Important safety notes .................. 302 Indicator lamp ................................ 128
Opening/closing ............................ 303 Ionization ....................................... 131
Stowage well (under) ..................... 302 Maximum cooling .......................... 130
Cargo net Notes on using the automatic cli-
Attaching ....................................... 301 mate control .................................. 127
Important safety information ......... 301 Overview of systems ...................... 122
Cargo tie down rings ......................... 299 Problem with the rear window
CD defroster ........................................ 131
see also Digital Operator's Man- Problems with cooling with air
ual .................................................. 287 dehumidification ............................ 128
CD player (on-board computer) ........ 234 Rear control panel ......................... 125
Center console Refrigerant ..................................... 389
Lower section .................................. 40 Refrigerant filling capacity ............. 390
Upper section .................................. 39 Setting the air distribution ............. 129
Central locking Setting the air vents ...................... 132
Automatic locking (on-board com- Setting the airflow ......................... 129
puter) ............................................. 239 Setting the climate mode (AIR
Locking/unlocking (SmartKey) ........ 77 FLOW) ............................................ 128
Child Setting the temperature ................ 128
Restraint system .............................. 61 Switching air-recirculation mode
Child seat on/off ............................................ 131
Forward-facing restraint system ...... 64 Switching on/off ........................... 127
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat Switching residual heat on/off ...... 131
anchors ............................................ 62 Switching the rear window
On the front-passenger seat ............ 63 defroster on/off ............................ 130
Rearward-facing restraint system .... 64 Switching the ZONE function
Top Tether ....................................... 62 on/off ............................................ 129
8 Index

Coat hooks ......................................... 302 Storing and maintaining current


Cockpit speed ............................................. 170
Overview .......................................... 36 Cup holder
see Instrument cluster Center console .............................. 305
Collapsible spare wheel Important safety notes .................. 304
Inflating ......................................... 379 Rear compartment ......................... 305
see Emergency spare wheel Temperature controlled ................. 305
COMAND Customer Assistance Center
Driving dynamics display ............... 218 (CAC) ..................................................... 31
COMAND display Customer Relations Department ....... 31
Cleaning ......................................... 331
Combination switch .......................... 111 D
Connecting a USB device
Dashboard
see also Digital Operator's Man-
see Instrument cluster
ual .................................................. 287
Data
Consumption statistics (on-board
see Technical data
computer) .......................................... 231
Data carrier
Controller ........................................... 288
Selecting ........................................ 234
Convenience closing feature .............. 90 Daytime running lamps
Convenience opening feature ............ 89 Display message ............................ 255
Coolant (engine) Function/notes ............................. 110
Checking the level ......................... 324 Switching on/off (on-board com-
Display message ............................ 256 puter) ............................................. 238
Filling capacity ............................... 389 Declarations of conformity ................. 30
Important safety notes .................. 388 DEF
Temperature (on-board computer, Adding ........................................... 153
Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 240 Display message ............................ 259
Temperature gauge ........................ 229 Filling capacity ............................... 387
Warning lamp ................................. 283 Important safety notes .................. 386
Cooling
Diagnostics connection ...................... 31
see Climate control Differential lock (display mes-
Copyright ............................................. 35
sage) ................................................... 262
Cornering light function
Digital Operator's Manual
Display message ............................ 255
Help ................................................. 26
Crash-responsive emergency light-
Introduction ..................................... 26
ing ....................................................... 115
Digital speedometer ......................... 232
Crosswind Assist ................................. 72 DIRECT SELECT lever
Crosswind driving assistance ............ 72 Automatic transmission ................. 143
Cruise control Display messages
Activating ....................................... 170 ASSYST PLUS ................................ 325
Activation conditions ..................... 170 Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 243
Cruise control lever ....................... 170 Driving systems ............................. 260
Deactivating ................................... 171 Engine ............................................ 256
Display message ............................ 266 General notes ................................ 243
Driving system ............................... 169 Hiding (on-board computer) ........... 243
Function/notes ............................. 169 KEYLESS-GO .................................. 273
Important safety notes .................. 169 Lights ............................................. 255
Index 9

Safety systems .............................. 244 Off-road programs (vehicles with


SmartKey ....................................... 273 Off-Road Engineering package) ...... 215
Tires ............................................... 268 SETUP (on-board computer,
Vehicle ........................................... 270 Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 241
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC Drive programs
Activating ....................................... 173 Display (DIRECT SELECT lever) ...... 145
Activation conditions ..................... 173 Driver's door
Cruise control lever ....................... 173 see Doors
Display Message ............................ 265 Driving
Displays in the instrument cluster .. 176 Important safety notes .................. 134
Driving tips .................................... 177 Driving abroad
Function/notes ............................. 171 Mercedes-Benz Service ................. 326
Important safety notes .................. 171 Driving Assistance PLUS package ... 208
Setting the specified minimum Driving in mountainous terrain
distance ......................................... 175 Approach/departure angle ............ 168
Stopping ........................................ 174 Driving lamps
Switching off .................................. 175 see Daytime running lamps
Warning lamp ................................. 285 Driving off-road
Distance recorder see Off-road driving
see Odometer Driving safety system
see Trip odometer Active Brake Assist .......................... 67
Distance warning (warning lamp) .... 285 Braking assistance appropriate to
Distance warning function the situation ..................................... 69
Function/notes ................................ 68 Driving safety systems
Warning lamp ................................. 285 ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ....... 66
Doors Active Brake Assist with cross-
Automatic locking (on-board com- traffic function ................................. 72
puter) ............................................. 239 ADAPTIVE BRAKE ............................. 72
Automatic locking (switch) ............... 84 BAS (Brake Assist System) .............. 67
Central locking/unlocking Distance warning function ............... 68
(SmartKey) ....................................... 77 EBD (electronic brake force distri-
Control panel ................................... 43 bution) ............................................. 72
Display message ............................ 272 ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro-
Emergency locking ........................... 84 gram) ............................................... 70
Emergency unlocking ....................... 84 Important safety information ........... 66
Important safety notes .................... 83 Overview .......................................... 66
Opening (from inside) ...................... 83 STEER CONTROL ............................. 75
Overview .......................................... 83 Driving system
Power closing .................................. 84 AIRMATIC package ........................ 183
Downhill speed regulation Distance Pilot DISTRONIC ............. 171
see DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation) Distance Pilot DISTRONIC with
Drinking and driving ......................... 160 Steering Pilot ................................. 177
Drive program Parking assist PARKTRONIC .......... 187
Automatic transmission ................. 146 Parking Pilot .................................. 190
Off-Road program (vehicles with- Driving systems
out Off-Road Engineering pack- 360°camera .................................. 198
age) ............................................... 214 Active Blind Spot Assist ................. 208
Active Curve System ...................... 184
10 Index

Active Lane Keeping Assist ............ 210 see also Digital Operator's Man-
ADS ............................................... 183 ual .................................................. 287
AMG adaptive sport suspension DYNAMIC SELECT controller
system ........................................... 186 Automatic transmission ................. 142
ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 202
Blind Spot Assist ............................ 204 E
Cruise control ................................ 169
EASY-ENTRY feature
Display message ............................ 260
Activating/deactivating ................. 239
Driving Assistance Plus package ... 208
Function/notes ............................. 104
HOLD function ............................... 182
EASY-EXIT feature
Lane Keeping Assist ...................... 206
Crash-responsive ........................... 105
Level control (vehicle with the Off-
Function/notes ............................. 104
Road Engineering package) ........... 179
Switching on/off ........................... 239
Rear view camera .......................... 194
EASY-PACK cargo compartment
Traffic Sign Assist .......................... 203
Driving tips management system ........................ 302
EBD (electronic brake force distri-
Automatic transmission ................. 146
bution)
Brakes ........................................... 161
Break-in period .............................. 134 Display message ............................ 246
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC ............. 177 Function/notes ................................ 72
ECO display
Downhill gradient ........................... 161
Drinking and driving ....................... 160 Function/notes ............................. 160
Driving in winter ............................. 164 On-board computer ....................... 232
ECO start/stop function
Driving on flooded roads ................ 163
Driving on sand .............................. 167 Automatic engine start .................. 140
Driving on wet roads ...................... 163 Automatic engine switch-off .......... 139
Driving over obstacles ................... 168 Deactivating/activating ................. 140
Exhaust check ............................... 160 General information ....................... 139
Fuel ................................................ 159 Important safety notes .................. 139
General .......................................... 159 Introduction ................................... 139
Electronic Stability Program
Hydroplaning ................................. 163
Icy road surfaces ........................... 164 see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
Limited braking efficiency on sal- Emergency
ted roads ....................................... 162 Automatic measures after an acci-
Off-road driving .............................. 165 dent ................................................. 59
Off-road fording ............................. 164 Emergency release
Snow chains .................................. 353 Driver's door .................................... 84
The first 1000 miles (1500 km) ..... 134 Vehicle ............................................. 84
Tire ruts ......................................... 167 Emergency spare wheel
Towing a trailer .............................. 220 General notes ................................ 377
Traveling uphill ............................... 168 Important safety notes .................. 376
Wet road surface ........................... 162 Removing ....................................... 377
DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation) Storage location ............................ 377
Display message ............................ 262 Stowing .......................................... 377
Function/notes ............................. 213 Emergency Tensioning Devices
DVD video Activation ......................................... 56
Operating (on-board computer) ..... 234 Emergency unlocking
Tailgate ............................................ 88
Index 11

Emissions control ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction Sys-


Service and warranty information .... 28 tem) ...................................................... 70
Engine Exhaust check ................................... 160
Check Engine warning lamp ........... 283 Exhaust pipe (cleaning instruc-
Display message ............................ 256 tions) .................................................. 330
ECO start/stop function ................ 139 Exterior lighting
Engine number ............................... 383 see Lights
Irregular running ............................ 141 Exterior mirrors
Jump-starting ................................. 342 Adjusting ....................................... 105
Starting (important safety notes) ... 136 Dipping (automatic) ....................... 107
Starting problems .......................... 141 Folding in when locking (on-board
Starting the engine with the computer) ...................................... 240
SmartKey ....................................... 137 Folding in/out (automatically) ....... 106
Starting via smartphone ................ 137 Folding in/out (electrically) ........... 106
Starting with KEYLESS-GO ............. 137 Out of position (troubleshooting) ... 107
Switching off .................................. 157 Setting ........................................... 106
Tow-starting (vehicle) ..................... 348 Storing settings (memory func-
Engine electronics tion) ............................................... 108
Problem (malfunction) ................... 141 Storing the parking position .......... 107
Engine jump starting Eyeglasses compartment ................. 297
see Jump starting (engine)
Engine oil F
Adding ........................................... 323
Additives ........................................ 388 Favorites
Checking the oil level ..................... 322 Overview ........................................ 289
Checking the oil level using the Filler cap
dipstick .......................................... 323 see Refueling
Display message ............................ 258 Flat tire
Filling capacity ............................... 387 MOExtended tires .......................... 336
Notes about oil grades ................... 387 Preparing the vehicle ..................... 335
Notes on oil level/consumption .... 322 TIREFIT kit ...................................... 337
Temperature (on-board computer, see Emergency spare wheel
Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 240 Floormats ........................................... 319
Engine switch-off Fog lamps (extended range) ............. 113
see ECO start/stop function Folding the rear bench seat for-
Entering an address wards/back ....................................... 298
see also Digital Operator's Man- Fording
ual .................................................. 287 Off-road ......................................... 164
ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro- On flooded roads ........................... 163
gram) Frequencies
AMG menu (on-board computer) ... 241 Mobile phone ................................. 381
Characteristics ................................. 70 Two-way radio ................................ 381
Deactivating/activating ................... 71 Fuel
Display message ............................ 244 Additives ........................................ 385
Function/notes ................................ 70 Consumption statistics .................. 231
General notes .................................. 70 Displaying the current consump-
Important safety information ........... 70 tion ................................................ 232
Warning lamp ................................. 279 Displaying the range ...................... 232
12 Index

Driving tips .................................... 159 H


Flexible fuel vehicles ...................... 386
Fuel gauge ....................................... 37 Handbrake
Grade (gasoline) ............................ 384 see Parking brake
Important safety notes .................. 384 Hazard warning lamps ...................... 112
Low outside temperatures ............. 385 Head restraints
Problem (malfunction) ................... 153 Adjusting ......................................... 99
Quality (diesel) ............................... 385 Adjusting (electrically) ................... 100
Refueling ........................................ 150 Adjusting (manually) ........................ 99
Tank content/reserve fuel ............. 384 Adjusting (rear) .............................. 100
Fuel filler flap Installing/removing (rear) .............. 100
Opening ......................................... 152 Luxury ............................................ 100
Fuel filter (display message) ............ 259 Headlamps
Fuel level Fogging up ..................................... 114
Calling up the range (on-board see Automatic headlamp mode
computer) ...................................... 232 Heating
Fuel tank see Climate control
Capacity ........................................ 384 High beam flasher ............................. 111
Problem (malfunction) ................... 153 High-beam headlamps
Fuses Adaptive Highbeam Assist ............. 113
Allocation chart ............................. 348 Display message ............................ 255
Before changing ............................. 348 Replacing bulbs ............................. 116
Dashboard fuse box ....................... 349 Switching on/off ........................... 111
Fuse box in the engine compart- Highway mode ................................... 113
ment .............................................. 349 Hill start assist .................................. 139
Fuse box under rear bench seat .... 350 HOLD function
Important safety notes .................. 348 Deactivating ................................... 182
Display message ............................ 263
G Function/notes ............................. 182
Home address
Garage door opener see also Digital Operator's Man-
Clearing the memory ..................... 319 ual .................................................. 287
General notes ................................ 316 Hood
Important safety notes .................. 317 Closing ........................................... 322
Opening/closing the garage door .. 319 Display message ............................ 272
Problems when programming ........ 318 Important safety notes .................. 321
Programming (button in the rear- Opening ......................................... 321
view mirror) ................................... 317 Horn ...................................................... 36
Synchronizing the rolling code ....... 318 Hydroplaning ..................................... 163
Gear indicator (on-board com-
puter, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ....... 240 I
Genuine parts ...................................... 27
Glove box ........................................... 296 Ignition lock
Google™ Local Search see Key positions
see also Digital Operator's Man- Immobilizer .......................................... 75
ual .................................................. 287 Indicator lamps
GTW (Gross Trailer Weight) (defini- see Warning and indicator lamps
tion) .................................................... 370
Index 13

Indicators Knee bag .............................................. 50


see Turn signals
Insect protection on the radiator .... 322 L
Instrument cluster
Lamps
Overview .......................................... 37
see Warning and indicator lamps
Warning and indicator lamps ........... 37
Lane detection (automatic)
Instrument cluster lighting .............. 228
see Lane Keeping Assist
Intelligent Light System
Lane Keeping Assist
Activating/deactivating ................. 238
Activating/deactivating ................. 237
Display message ............................ 255
Display message ............................ 263
Overview ........................................ 112
Function/information .................... 206
Interior lighting
see Active Lane Keeping Assist
Automatic control .......................... 114
Lap time (RACETIMER) ...................... 241
Emergency lighting ........................ 115
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat
General notes ................................ 114
anchors ................................................ 62
Manual control ............................... 114
Level control
Overview ........................................ 114
Reading lamp ................................. 114 AIRMATIC ...................................... 185
Level control (display message) ...... 260
iPod®
Level control (vehicle with the Off-
see also Digital Operator's Man-
Road Engineering package)
ual .................................................. 287
Basic settings ................................ 179
Function/notes ............................. 179
J
Important safety notes .................. 179
Jack License plate lamp (display mes-
Storage location ............................ 335 sage) ................................................... 255
Using ............................................. 373 Light function, active
Jump starting (engine) ...................... 342 Display message ............................ 255
Light sensor (display message) ....... 255
K Light switch
Operation ....................................... 110
Key positions
Lights
KEYLESS-GO .................................. 135
Activating/deactivating the Intel-
SmartKey ....................................... 135
ligent Light System ........................ 238
KEYLESS-GO
Active light function ....................... 112
Activating ......................................... 78
Adaptive Highbeam Assist ............. 113
Convenience closing feature ............ 91
Automatic headlamp mode ............ 110
Deactivation ..................................... 78
Fog lamps (extended) .................... 113
Display message ............................ 273
Hazard warning lamps ................... 112
Locking ............................................ 78
High beam flasher .......................... 111
Removing the Start/Stop button ... 136
High-beam headlamps ................... 111
Start function ................................... 79
Highway mode ............................... 113
Start/Stop button .......................... 135
Light switch ................................... 110
Starting the engine ........................ 137
Low-beam headlamps .................... 111
Unlocking ......................................... 78
Off-road lights ................................ 113
Kickdown
Parking lamps ................................ 111
Driving tips .................................... 146
Rear fog lamp ................................ 111
Manual gearshifting ....................... 149
Standing lamps .............................. 111
14 Index

Switching the daytime running Remote fault diagnosis .................. 315


lamps on/off (on-board com- Remote vehicle locking .................. 314
puter) ............................................. 238 Roadside assistance button ........... 311
Turn signals ................................... 111 Search & Send ............................... 313
see Interior lighting Self-test ......................................... 310
see Replacing the bulbs Speed alert .................................... 316
Loading guidelines ............................ 295 System .......................................... 310
Locking Triggering the vehicle alarm ........... 316
see Central locking Vehicle remote unlocking .............. 314
Locking (doors) Mechanical key
Automatic ........................................ 84 Function/notes ................................ 79
Emergency locking ........................... 84 General notes .................................. 79
From inside (central locking but- Inserting .......................................... 79
ton) .................................................. 83 Locking vehicle ................................ 84
Locking centrally Removing ......................................... 79
see Central locking Unlocking the driver's door .............. 84
Locking verification signal (on- Media Interface
board computer) ............................... 239 USB port in the armrest of the
LOW RANGE center console ............................... 296
Display message ............................ 262 see Digital Operator's Manual
Off-road gear ................................. 216 Memory card (audio) ......................... 234
LOW RANGE off-road gear ................ 216 Memory function ............................... 108
Low-beam headlamps Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive
Display message ............................ 255 360°camera .................................. 198
Replacing bulbs ............................. 116 Active Blind Spot Assist ................. 208
Switching on/off ........................... 111 Active Lane Keeping Assist ............ 210
Lumbar support ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 202
Adjusting (on the seat) .................. 101 Blind Spot Assist ............................ 204
Luxury head restraints ..................... 100 Distance Pilot DISTRONIC ............. 171
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC with
M Steering Pilot ................................. 177
General notes ................................ 169
M+S tires ............................................ 353 Lane Keeping Assist ...................... 206
Malfunction message Parking Assist PARKTRONIC .......... 187
see Display messages Parking Pilot .................................. 190
Matte finish (cleaning instruc-
PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory
tions) .................................................. 328 occupant protection PLUS) .............. 59
mbrace Rear view camera .......................... 194
Call priority .................................... 313 Traffic Sign Assist .......................... 203
Display message ............................ 249 Message memory (on-board com-
Downloading destinations puter) .................................................. 243
(COMAND) ..................................... 313 Mirror
Downloading routes ....................... 316 Vanity mirror (sun visor) ................ 305
Emergency call .............................. 310 Mirror turn signal
General notes ................................ 310 Cleaning ......................................... 330
Geo fencing ................................... 316 Mirrors
Info call button .............................. 312 see Exterior mirrors
Locating a stolen vehicle ............... 315
Index 15

see Rear-view mirror O


see Vanity mirror (in the sun visor)
Mobile phone Occupant Classification System
(OCS)
Connecting (Bluetooth® inter-
Conditions ....................................... 52
face) .............................................. 291
Faults ............................................... 55
Connecting (device manager) ........ 292
Operation ......................................... 52
Frequencies ................................... 381
System self-test ............................... 54
Installation ..................................... 381
Occupant safety
Menu (on-board computer) ............ 235
Air bags ........................................... 49
Transmission output (maximum) .... 381
Modifying the programming Automatic measures after an acci-
dent ................................................. 59
(SmartKey) ........................................... 79
Belt warning ..................................... 48
MOExtended tires .............................. 336
Children in the vehicle ..................... 59
Mounting wheels
Important safety notes .................... 44
Lowering the vehicle ...................... 375
Introduction to the restraint sys-
Mounting a new wheel ................... 374
tem .................................................. 44
Preparing the vehicle ..................... 372
Occupant Classification System
Raising the vehicle ......................... 373
(OCS) ............................................... 51
Removing a wheel .......................... 374
PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator
Securing the vehicle against roll-
lamps ............................................... 45
ing away ........................................ 372
Pets in the vehicle ........................... 65
MP3
PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occu-
Operation ....................................... 234
pant protection) ............................... 58
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual .................................................. 287 PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory
Multifunction display occupant protection PLUS) .............. 59
Function/notes ............................. 230 Restraint system warning lamp ........ 45
Permanent display ......................... 238 Seat belt .......................................... 45
Multifunction steering wheel OCS
Operating the on-board computer .. 229 Conditions ....................................... 52
Overview .......................................... 38 Faults ............................................... 55
Multimedia system Operation ......................................... 52
Switching on and off ...................... 288 System self-test ............................... 54
Music files Odometer ........................................... 231
see also Digital Operator's Man- Off-road driving
ual .................................................. 287 Approach/departure angle ............ 393
Checklist after driving off-road ...... 167
N Checklist before driving off-road .... 166
Fording depth ................................ 392
Navigation General information ....................... 165
Entering a destination .................... 289 Important safety notes .................. 165
Menu (on-board computer) ............ 232 Maximum gradient climbing abil-
see also Digital Operator's Man- ity .................................................. 393
ual .................................................. 287 Traveling uphill ............................... 168
Notes on breaking-in a new vehi- Off-road lights .................................... 113
cle ....................................................... 134 Off-Road program (vehicles with-
out Off-Road Engineering package)
Function/notes ............................. 214
16 Index

Off-road programs (vehicles with Video DVD operation ..................... 234


Off-Road Engineering package) Operating safety
Function/notes ............................. 215 Declaration of conformity ................ 30
Off-road drive program .................. 215 Important safety notes .................... 30
Offroad Plus drive program ............ 216 Operating system
Off-road programs (vehicles with see On-board computer
the Off-Road Engineering package) Operation
Displays in the COMAND display ... 218 Digital Operator's Manual ................ 26
Off-road system Operator's Manual
4MATIC .......................................... 213 Overview .......................................... 28
DSR ............................................... 213 Vehicle equipment ........................... 28
LOW RANGE off-road gear ............. 216 Outside temperature display ........... 228
Off-road 4ETS .................................. 70 Overhead control panel ...................... 42
Off-road ABS .................................... 67 Override feature
Off-road ESP® .................................. 72 Rear side windows ........................... 65
Off-Road program (vehicles with-
out Off-Road Engineering pack- P
age) ............................................... 214
Paddle shifters
Off-road programs (vehicles with
see Steering wheel paddle shifters
Off-Road Engineering package) ...... 215
Oil Paint code number ............................ 382
see Engine oil Paintwork (cleaning instructions) ... 328
On and Offroad menu (on-board Panic alarm .......................................... 44
computer) .......................................... 240 Panorama roof with power tilt/
On-board computer sliding panel
AMG menu ..................................... 240 Important safety notes .................... 92
Assistance menu ........................... 236 Opening/closing the roller sun-
Audio menu ................................... 234 blind ................................................. 95
Convenience submenu .................. 239 Operating ......................................... 94
Display messages .......................... 243 Operating the roller sunblinds for
Displaying a service message ........ 325 the sliding sunroof ........................... 94
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC ............. 176 Problem (malfunction) ..................... 95
Factory settings submenu ............. 240 Reversing feature ............................. 93
Important safety notes .................. 228 Parking
Instrument cluster submenu .......... 238 Important safety notes .................. 156
Lighting submenu .......................... 238 Parking brake ................................ 157
Menu overview .............................. 231 Position of exterior mirror, front-
Message memory .......................... 243 passenger side ............................... 107
Navigation menu ............................ 232 Rear view camera .......................... 194
On and Offroad menu .................... 240 see PARKTRONIC
Operation ....................................... 229 Parking aid
RACETIMER ................................... 241 Parking Pilot .................................. 190
Service menu ................................. 237 see 360° camera
Settings menu ............................... 238 see Exterior mirrors
Standard display ............................ 231 see PARKTRONIC
Telephone menu ............................ 235 Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
Trip menu ...................................... 231 Deactivating/activating ................. 189
Vehicle submenu ........................... 239 Driving system ............................... 187
Index 17

Function/notes ............................. 187 PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory


Important safety notes .................. 187 occupant protection PLUS)
Problems (malfunctions) ................ 190 Display message ............................ 250
Sensor range ................................. 188 Operation ......................................... 59
Towing a trailer .............................. 187 Protection against theft
Warning display ............................. 189 ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 75
Parking assistance Immobilizer ...................................... 75
see Driving system Protection of the environment
Parking brake General notes .................................. 27
Applying automatically ................... 158 Pulling away
Applying or releasing manually ...... 158 Automatic transmission ................. 138
Display message ............................ 246 General notes ................................ 138
Electric parking brake .................... 157 Hill start assist ............................... 139
Emergency braking ........................ 159 Trailer ............................................ 138
General notes ................................ 157
Releasing automatically ................. 158 Q
Warning lamp ................................. 282
Parking lamps QR code
Switching on/off ........................... 111 Mercedes-Benz Guide App ................. 1
Parking Pilot Rescue card ..................................... 32
Canceling ....................................... 194 Qualified specialist workshop ........... 31
Detecting parking spaces .............. 191
Display Message ............................ 264 R
Exiting a parking space .................. 193 RACE TIMER (on-board computer,
Function/notes ............................. 190 Mercedes-AMG vehicles) .................. 241
Important safety notes .................. 190 Radiator cover ................................... 322
Parking .......................................... 192 Radio
PASSENGER AIR BAG Selecting a station ......................... 234
Display message ............................ 253 Radio mode
Indicator lamps ................................ 45 see also Digital Operator's Man-
Problem (malfunction) ................... 253 ual .................................................. 287
Pets in the vehicle ............................... 65 Radio-controlled devices (instal-
Phone book ling) ..................................................... 320
see also Digital Operator's Man- Radio-wave reception/transmis-
ual .................................................. 287 sion in the vehicle
Plastic trim (cleaning instruc- Declaration of conformity ................ 30
tions) .................................................. 331 Reading lamp ..................................... 114
Power locks ......................................... 84 Rear bench seat
Power washers .................................. 327 Folding forwards/back .................. 299
Power windows Rear compartment
see Side windows Setting the air vents ...................... 133
PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant Setting the temperature ................ 128
protection) Rear fog lamp
Display message ............................ 250 Display message ............................ 255
Operation ......................................... 58 Switching on/off ........................... 111
Rear Seat Entertainment System
AUX jacks ...................................... 294
18 Index

AUX jacks CD/DVD drive .............. 294 Warning lamp ................................. 282
Rear seats Warning lamp (function) ................... 45
Adjusting ....................................... 100 Reversing feature
Rear view camera Panorama sliding sunroof ................ 93
Cleaning instructions ..................... 330 Roller sunblinds ............................... 94
Display in the multimedia system .. 195 Side windows ................................... 89
Function/notes ............................. 194 Sliding sunroof ................................. 93
Switching on/off ........................... 195 Tailgate ............................................ 85
Rear window defroster Reversing lamps (display mes-
Problem (malfunction) ................... 131 sage) ................................................... 255
Switching on/off ........................... 130 Roadside Assistance (breakdown) .... 29
Rear window wiper Roller sunblind
Replacing the wiper blade .............. 120 Panorama roof with power tilt/
Switching on/off ........................... 118 sliding panel ..................................... 94
Rear-view mirror Rear side windows ......................... 306
Anti-glare (manual) ........................ 105 Roof carrier ........................................ 304
Dipping (automatic) ....................... 107 Roof lining and carpets (cleaning
Reflective safety jacket .................... 334 guidelines) ......................................... 333
Refrigerant (air-conditioning sys- Roof load (maximum) ........................ 390
tem) Route (navigation)
Important safety notes .................. 389 see Route guidance (navigation)
Refueling Route guidance
Fuel gauge ....................................... 37 see also Digital Operator's Man-
Important safety notes .................. 150 ual .................................................. 287
Refueling process .......................... 151 Route guidance (navigation) ............ 232
see Fuel Route guidance active ...................... 233
Remote control
Garage door opener ....................... 316 S
Replacing bulbs
General notes ................................ 115 Safety
High-beam headlamps ................... 116 Children in the vehicle ..................... 59
Important safety notes .................. 115 see Occupant safety
Installing/removing the cover see Operating safety
(front wheel arch) .......................... 116 Safety system
Low-beam headlamps .................... 116 see Driving safety systems
Overview of bulb types .................. 115 SD card
Turn signals (front) ......................... 117 Inserting ........................................ 293
Reporting safety defects .................... 32 Inserting/removing ........................ 293
Rescue card ......................................... 32 Removing ....................................... 293
Reserve (fuel tank) SD memory card
see Fuel see also Digital Operator's Man-
Reserve fuel ual .................................................. 287
Display message ............................ 258 Selecting ........................................ 234
Warning lamp ................................. 283 Search & Send
Residual heat (climate control) ........ 131 see also Digital Operator's Man-
Restraint system ual .................................................. 287
Display message ............................ 251 Seat
Introduction ..................................... 44 Correct driver's seat position ........... 97
Index 19

Seat belts Important safety notes .................. 383


Adjusting the driver's and front- Refrigerant (air-conditioning sys-
passenger seat belt ......................... 48 tem) ............................................... 389
Adjusting the height ......................... 48 Washer fluid ................................... 389
Cleaning ......................................... 332 Setting the air distribution ............... 129
Correct usage .................................. 47 Setting the airflow ............................ 129
Fastening ......................................... 48 Setting the date/time format
Important safety guidelines ............. 46 see also Digital Operator's Man-
Introduction ..................................... 45 ual .................................................. 287
Releasing ......................................... 48 Setting the language
Switching belt adjustment on/off see also Digital Operator's Man-
(on-board computer) ...................... 239 ual .................................................. 287
Warning lamp ................................. 274 Setting the time
Warning lamp (function) ................... 48 see also Digital Operator's Man-
Seats ual .................................................. 287
Adjusting (electrically) ..................... 98 Settings
Adjusting the 4-way lumbar sup- Factory (on-board computer) ......... 240
port ................................................ 101 On-board computer ....................... 238
Adjusting the head restraint ............ 99 SETUP (on-board computer,
Calling up a stored setting (mem- Mercedes-AMG vehicles) .................. 241
ory function) .................................. 109 Side impact air bag ............................. 51
Cleaning the cover ......................... 332 Side marker lamp (display mes-
Folding the rear bench seat for- sage) ................................................... 255
wards/back ................................... 298 Side windows
Important safety notes .................... 97 Cleaning ......................................... 329
Overview .......................................... 97 Convenience closing feature ............ 90
Seat heating problem .................... 103 Convenience opening feature .......... 89
Seat ventilation problem ................ 103 Important safety information ........... 88
Storing settings (memory func- Opening/closing .............................. 89
tion) ............................................... 108 Overview .......................................... 88
Switching seat heating on/off ....... 101 Problem (malfunction) ..................... 91
Switching seat ventilation on/off .. 102 Resetting ......................................... 91
Section Reversing feature ............................. 89
Sliding sunroof ................................. 92 SIRIUS services
Securing hooks .................................. 300 see also Digital Operator's Man-
Selector lever ual .................................................. 287
Cleaning ......................................... 332 Sliding sunroof
Sensors (cleaning instructions) ....... 330 Important safety notes .................... 92
Service menu (on-board com- Opening/closing .............................. 93
puter) .................................................. 237 Problem (malfunction) ..................... 95
Service message Resetting ......................................... 93
see ASSYST PLUS see Panorama roof with power
Service products tilt/sliding panel
Brake fluid ..................................... 388 SmartKey
Coolant (engine) ............................ 388 Changing the battery ....................... 80
DEF special additives ..................... 386 Changing the programming ............. 79
Engine oil ....................................... 387 Checking the battery ....................... 80
Fuel ................................................ 384
20 Index

Convenience closing feature ............ 90 Display message ............................ 266


Convenience opening feature .......... 89 Steering wheel
Display message ............................ 273 Adjusting (electrically) ................... 104
Door central locking/unlocking ....... 77 Adjusting (manually) ...................... 103
Important safety notes .................... 77 Button overview ............................... 38
KEYLESS-GO start function .............. 79 Buttons (on-board computer) ......... 229
Loss ................................................. 81 Cleaning ......................................... 332
Mechanical key ................................ 79 Important safety notes .................. 103
Overview .......................................... 77 Steering wheel heating .................. 104
Positions (ignition lock) ................. 135 Storing settings (memory func-
Problem (malfunction) ..................... 81 tion) ............................................... 108
Starting the engine ........................ 137 Steering wheel heating
Smartphone Problem (malfunction) ................... 104
Starting the engine ........................ 137 Switching on/off ........................... 104
SMS Steering wheel paddle shifters ........ 147
see also Digital Operator's Man- Stopwatch (RACETIMER) ................... 241
ual .................................................. 287 Stowage areas ................................... 295
Snow chains Stowage compartments
Information .................................... 353 Armrest (under) ............................. 296
Sockets Center console .............................. 297
Center console .............................. 308 Center console (rear) ..................... 297
General notes ................................ 308 Cup holders ................................... 304
Luggage compartment ................... 308 Eyeglasses compartment ............... 297
Rear compartment ......................... 308 Glove box ....................................... 296
Sound Important safety information ......... 295
Switching on/off ........................... 288 Stowage net ................................... 297
Special seat belt retractor .................. 60 Stowage net ....................................... 297
Specialist workshop ............................ 31 Summer tires
Speed, controlling In winter ........................................ 353
see Cruise control Sun visor ............................................ 305
Speedometer Suspension setting
Digital ............................................ 232 AIRMATIC ...................................... 183
In the Instrument cluster ................. 37 AMG adaptive sport suspension
Segments ...................................... 228 system ........................................... 186
Selecting the display unit ............... 238 Suspension tuning
Standing lamps SETUP (on-board computer,
Display message ............................ 255 Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 241
Switching on/off ........................... 111 SUV
Start/Stop button (Sport Utility Vehicle) ....................... 30
Starting the engine ........................ 137 Switching air-recirculation mode
Start/stop function on/off ................................................. 131
see ECO start/stop function Switching on media mode
Starting (engine) ................................ 136 Via the device list .......................... 293
STEER CONTROL .................................. 75
Steering T
Display message ............................ 272
Steering Pilot Tachometer ........................................ 228
Activating/deactivating ................. 236
Index 21

Tailgate Setting (climate control) ................ 128


Display message ............................ 271 Transmission oil (on-board com-
Emergency unlocking ....................... 88 puter, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ..... 240
Important safety notes .................... 84 Through-loading feature ................... 298
Limiting the opening angle ............... 88 Timing (RACETIMER) ......................... 241
Opening dimensions ...................... 390 Tire pressure
Opening/closing (automatically Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 358
from inside) ...................................... 87 Checking manually ........................ 357
Opening/closing (automatically Display message ............................ 268
from outside) ................................... 86 Maximum ....................................... 357
Opening/closing (from outside) ....... 85 Not reached (TIREFIT) .................... 338
Power closing .................................. 84 Notes ............................................. 356
Tank Reached (TIREFIT) .......................... 339
see Fuel tank Recommended ............................... 354
Tank content Tire pressure loss warning system
Fuel gauge ....................................... 37 General notes ................................ 357
Technical data Important safety notes .................. 358
Capacities ...................................... 383 Restarting ...................................... 358
Information .................................... 381 Tire pressure monitor
Tires/wheels ................................. 376 Checking the tire pressure elec-
Trailer loads ................................... 394 tronically ........................................ 360
Vehicle data ................................... 390 Function/notes ............................. 358
Telephone General notes ................................ 358
Accepting a call (multifunction Important safety notes .................. 359
steering wheel) .............................. 235 Radio type approval for the tire
Authorizing a mobile phone (con- pressure monitor ........................... 361
necting) ......................................... 291 Restarting ...................................... 361
Authorizing a mobile phone via the Warning lamp ................................. 286
device manager (connecting) ......... 292 Warning message .......................... 360
Connecting a mobile phone Tire pressure table ............................ 355
(device manager) ........................... 292 TIREFIT kit
Connecting a mobile phone (gen- Important safety notes .................. 337
eral information) ............................ 291 Storage location ............................ 335
Display message ............................ 272 Tire pressure not reached .............. 338
Menu (on-board computer) ............ 235 Tire pressure reached .................... 339
Number from the phone book ........ 235 Using ............................................. 337
Redialing ........................................ 235 Tires
Rejecting/ending a call ................. 235 Aspect ratio (definition) ................. 370
see also Digital Operator's Man- Average weight of the vehicle
ual .................................................. 287 occupants (definition) .................... 369
Temperature Bar (definition) ............................... 369
Coolant (display in the instrument Changing a wheel .......................... 371
cluster) .......................................... 229 Characteristics .............................. 369
Coolant (on-board computer, Checking ........................................ 351
Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 240 Curb weight (definition) ................. 370
Engine oil (on-board computer, Definition of terms ......................... 369
Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 240 Direction of rotation ...................... 372
Outside temperature ...................... 228 Display message ............................ 268
22 Index

Distribution of the vehicle occu- TIN (Tire Identification Number)


pants (definition) ............................ 371 (definition) ..................................... 371
DOT (Department of Transporta- Tire bead (definition) ...................... 370
tion) (definition) ............................. 369 Tire pressure (definition) ................ 370
DOT, Tire Identification Number Tire pressures (recommended) ...... 369
(TIN) ............................................... 368 Tire size (data) ............................... 376
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) Tire size designation, load-bearing
(definition) ..................................... 369 capacity, speed rating .................... 366
GTW (Gross Trailer Weight) (defi- Tire tread ....................................... 352
nition) ............................................ 370 Tire tread (definition) ..................... 370
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) (def- Total load limit (definition) ............. 371
inition) ........................................... 370 Traction ......................................... 365
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat- Traction (definition) ....................... 371
ing) (definition) .............................. 370 Tread wear ..................................... 365
Important safety notes .................. 351 TWR (permissible trailer drawbar
Increased vehicle weight due to noseweight) (definition) ................. 371
optional equipment (definition) ...... 369 Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Information on driving .................... 351 Standards ...................................... 364
Kilopascal (kPa) (definition) ........... 370 Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Labeling (overview) ........................ 366 Standards (definition) .................... 369
Load bearing index (definition) ...... 371 Wear indicator (definition) ............. 371
Load index ..................................... 368 Wheel and tire combination ........... 376
Load index (definition) ................... 370 Wheel rim (definition) .................... 369
M+S tires ....................................... 353 see Flat tire
Maximum load on a tire (defini- Top Tether ............................................ 62
tion) ............................................... 370 Tow-starting
Maximum loaded vehicle weight Emergency engine starting ............ 348
(definition) ..................................... 370 Important safety notes .................. 345
Maximum permissible tire pres- Towing a trailer
sure (definition) ............................. 370 Axle load, permissible .................... 394
Maximum tire load ......................... 368 Cleaning the trailer tow hitch ......... 331
Maximum tire load (definition) ....... 370 Coupling up a trailer ...................... 222
MOExtended tires .......................... 353 Decoupling a trailer ....................... 224
Optional equipment weight (defi- Driving tips .................................... 220
nition) ............................................ 371 Important safety notes .................. 219
PSI (pounds per square inch) (def- Installing the ball coupling ............. 221
inition) ........................................... 370 Lights display message .................. 255
Replacing ....................................... 371 Mounting dimensions .................... 394
Service life ..................................... 352 Parking Assist PARKTRONIC .......... 187
Sidewall (definition) ....................... 371 Power supply ................................. 225
Snow chains .................................. 353 Pulling away with a trailer .............. 138
Speed rating (definition) ................ 370 Removing the ball coupling ............ 224
Storing ........................................... 372 Trailer loads ................................... 394
Structure and characteristics Towing away
(definition) ..................................... 369 Important safety guidelines ........... 345
Summer tires in winter .................. 353 Installing the towing eye ................ 346
Temperature .................................. 365 Notes for 4MATIC vehicles ............ 348
Removing the towing eye ............... 346
Index 23

Transporting the vehicle ................ 347 Two-way radio


With both axles on the ground ....... 346 Frequencies ................................... 381
Towing eye ......................................... 335 Installation ..................................... 381
Traffic reports Transmission output (maximum) .... 381
see also Digital Operator's Man- TWR (Tongue Weight Rating) (defi-
ual .................................................. 287 nition) ................................................. 371
Traffic Sign Assist Type identification plate
Activating/deactivating the warn- see Vehicle identification plate
ing function .................................... 236
Display message ............................ 263 U
Function/notes ............................. 203
Unlocking
Important safety notes .................. 204
Emergency unlocking ....................... 84
Instrument cluster display ............. 204
Trailer coupling From inside the vehicle (central
unlocking button) ............................. 83
see Towing a trailer
Upshift indicator (on-board com-
Trailer loads and drawbar nose-
puter, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ....... 240
weights ............................................... 224
USB devices
Trailer towing
Connecting to the Media Inter-
Active Blind Spot Assist ................. 210
face ............................................... 294
Active Lane Keeping Assist ............ 213
Blind Spot Assist ............................ 206
Permissible trailer loads and V
drawbar noseweights ..................... 224 Vanity mirror (in the sun visor) ........ 306
Transfer case ..................................... 150 Vehicle
Transmission Correct use ...................................... 31
see Automatic transmission Data acquisition ............................... 32
Transmission position display ......... 145 Display message ............................ 270
Transporting the vehicle .................. 347 Equipment ....................................... 28
Traveling uphill Individual settings .......................... 238
Brow of hill ..................................... 169 Limited Warranty ............................. 32
Driving downhill ............................. 169 Loading .......................................... 361
Maximum gradient-climbing capa- Locking (in an emergency) ............... 84
bility ............................................... 168 Locking (SmartKey) .......................... 77
Trim pieces (cleaning instruc- Lowering ........................................ 375
tions) .................................................. 332 Maintenance .................................... 29
Trip computer (on-board com- Operating safety .............................. 30
puter) .................................................. 231 Parking .......................................... 156
Trip odometer Parking for a long period ................ 159
Calling up ....................................... 231 Pulling away ................................... 138
Resetting (on-board computer) ...... 232 Raising ........................................... 373
Trunk Reporting problems ......................... 31
see Tailgate Securing from rolling away ............ 372
Turn signals Towing away .................................. 345
Display message ............................ 255 Transporting .................................. 347
Replacing bulbs (front) ................... 117 Unlocking (in an emergency) ........... 84
Switching on/off ........................... 111 Unlocking (SmartKey) ...................... 77
Vehicle data ................................... 390
24 Index

Vehicle battery Weather display (COMAND)


see Battery (vehicle) see also Digital Operator's Man-
Vehicle data ....................................... 390 ual .................................................. 287
Vehicle data (off-road driving) Wheel and tire combinations
Approach/departure angle ............ 393 Tires ............................................... 376
Fording depth ................................ 392 Wheel bolt tightening torque ........... 375
Maximum gradient climbing abil- Wheel chock ...................................... 372
ity .................................................. 393 Wheels
Vehicle dimensions ........................... 390 Changing a wheel .......................... 371
Vehicle emergency locking ................ 84 Checking ........................................ 351
Vehicle identification number Cleaning ......................................... 329
see VIN Emergency spare wheel ................. 376
Vehicle identification plate .............. 382 Important safety notes .................. 351
Vehicle level Information on driving .................... 351
AIRMATIC ...................................... 185 Interchanging/changing ................ 371
Vehicle level (display message) ....... 260 Mounting a new wheel ................... 374
Vehicle tool kit .................................. 335 Mounting a wheel .......................... 372
Video Overview ........................................ 351
Operating the DVD ......................... 234 Removing a wheel .......................... 374
see also Digital Operator's Man- Snow chains .................................. 353
ual .................................................. 287 Storing ........................................... 372
VIN ...................................................... 382 Tightening torque ........................... 375
Seat ............................................... 383 Wheel size/tire size ....................... 376
Type plate ...................................... 382 Window curtain air bag
Display message ............................ 252
W Operation ......................................... 51
Windows
Warning and indicator lamps see Side windows
ABS ................................................ 277 Windshield
Brakes ........................................... 276 Defrosting ...................................... 129
Coolant .......................................... 283 Infrared reflective .......................... 320
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC ............. 285 Windshield washer fluid
Distance warning ........................... 285 see Windshield washer system
Engine diagnostics ......................... 283 Windshield washer system
ESP® .............................................. 279 Adding washer fluid ....................... 325
ESP® OFF ....................................... 280 Important safety notes .................. 389
Fuel tank ........................................ 283 Windshield wipers
Overview .......................................... 37 Problem (malfunction) ................... 121
Parking brake ................................ 282 Rear window wiper ........................ 118
PASSENGER AIR BAG ...................... 45 Replacing the wiper blades ............ 118
Reserve fuel ................................... 283 Replacing the wiper blades
Restraint system ............................ 282 (MAGIC VISION CONTROL) ............ 119
Seat belt ........................................ 274 Switching on/off ........................... 117
Tire pressure monitor .................... 286 Winter driving
Warranty .............................................. 28 Slippery road surfaces ................... 164
Washer fluid Winter operation
Display message ............................ 272 Overview ........................................ 353
Radiator cover ............................... 322
Index 25

Winter tires
M+S tires ....................................... 353
Wiper blades
Cleaning ......................................... 329
Replacing ....................................... 118
Replacing (rear window) ................ 120
Replacing (windshield) ................... 118
Wooden trim (cleaning instruc-
tions) .................................................. 332
Workshop
see Qualified specialist workshop

Z
ZONE function
Switching on/off ........................... 129
26 Digital Operator's Manual

Introduction Operating the Digital Operator's Man-


ual
The printed Operator's Manual provides infor-
mation about the safe operation of your vehicle. General notes
The Digital Operator's Manual provides compre-
Please observe the information about the oper-
hensive and specifically adapted information on
ation of the controller (Y page 288).
your vehicle's equipment and multimedia sys-
tem. You can call up the Digital Operator's Man-
ual via the multimedia system. Content pages
i You will not incur any costs when calling up The content pages can be accessed by means of
the Digital Operator's Manual. The Digital a visual search, a keyword search or using the
Operator's Manual works without connecting contents.
to the Internet.
There are three ways to access the topics of the
Digital Operator's Manual:
RVisual search
The visual search allows you to explore your
vehicle "virtually". Starting from either the
vehicle exterior view or interior view, you can
access many of the different topics covered
by the Digital Operator's Manual. To access
the vehicle interior section, select the "Vehi-
cle interior" view.
RKeyword search
X To scroll forward/back: turn 3 the con-
The keyword search allows you to search for a
troller.
keyword by entering characters. Further
information can be found in the Digital Oper- X To display in full-screen or animation: slide
ator's Manual in the "Audio 20" or "COMAND" 8 the controller to the left :.
section under the "Character entry (teleph- X To select information text or save book-
ony)" keyword. marks: slide 9 the controller to the
RContents right ;.
You can select individual sections in the con- X To select a link: slide 6 the controller
tents. down =.
i The Digital Operator's Manual is deactiva- X To exit a content page: select the %
ted for safety reasons while driving. symbol ?.
X To call up the menu of the Digital Opera-
tor's Manual: select Þ symbol A.
Operation
Calling up the Digital Operator's Man-
ual
X Press the Ø button on the center console.
The overview relating to the vehicle appears.
X Select the "Operator's Manual" menu item by
turning 3 or pressing 7 the controller.
X Confirm 7 the message about the warning
and safety notes.
The menu for the Digital Operator's Manual
appears.
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts 27

Protecting the environment Rchange gear in good time and use each gear
only up to Ô of its maximum engine speed.
General notes
Rswitch off the engine in stationary traffic.

Introduction
H Environmental note Rkeep an eye on the vehicle's fuel consump-
Daimler's declared policy is one of compre- tion.
hensive environmental protection.
The objectives are for the natural resources
that form the basis of our existence on this Environmental concerns and recom-
planet to be used sparingly and in a manner mendations
that takes the requirements of both nature Wherever the operating instructions require you
and humanity into account. to dispose of materials, first try to regenerate or
You too can help to protect the environment re-use them. Observe the relevant environmen-
by operating your vehicle in an environmen- tal rules and regulations when disposing of
materials. In this way you will help to protect the
tally responsible manner.
environment.
Fuel consumption and the rate of engine,
transmission, brake and tire wear are affected
by these factors: Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts
Roperating conditions of your vehicle
Ryour personal driving style H Environmental note
You can influence both factors. You should Daimler AG also supplies reconditioned major
bear the following in mind: assemblies and parts which are of the same
Operating conditions: quality as new parts. They are covered by the
same Limited Warranty entitlements as new
Ravoid short trips as these increase fuel con-
parts.
sumption.
Ralways make sure that the tire pressures ! Air bags and Emergency Tensioning Devi-
are correct. ces, as well as control units and sensors for
these restraint systems, may be installed in
Rdo not carry any unnecessary weight.
the following areas of your vehicle:
Rremove roof racks once you no longer need
Rdoors
them. Rdoor pillars
Ra regularly serviced vehicle will contribute Rdoor sills
to environmental protection. You should Rseats
therefore adhere to the service intervals. Rcockpit
Ralways have service work carried out at a Rinstrument cluster
qualified specialist workshop. Rcenter console
Personal driving style: Do not install accessories such as audio sys-
Rdo not depress the accelerator pedal when tems in these areas. Do not carry out repairs
or welding. You could impair the operating
starting the engine. efficiency of the restraint systems.
Rdo not warm up the engine when the vehicle Have aftermarket accessories installed at a
is stationary. qualified specialist workshop.
Rdrive carefully and maintain a safe distance You could jeopardize the operating safety of
from the vehicle in front. your vehicle if you use parts, tires and wheels as
Ravoid frequent, sudden acceleration and well as accessories relevant to safety which
have not been approved by Mercedes-Benz. This
braking.
could lead to malfunctions in safety-relevant

Z
28 Service and vehicle operation

systems, e.g. the brake system. Use only genu- Service and vehicle operation
ine Mercedes-Benz parts or parts of equal qual-
ity. Only use tires, wheels and accessories that Warranty
have been specifically approved for your vehi-
Introduction

cle. The Limited Warranty for your vehicle applies in


Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are subject to accordance with the warranty terms and condi-
strict quality control. Every part has been spe- tions in the Service and Warranty Information
cifically developed, manufactured or selected booklet.
for and adapted to Mercedes-Benz vehicles. Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will
Therefore, only genuine Mercedes-Benz parts replace and repair all factory-installed parts in
should be used. accordance with the following warranty terms
More than 300,000 different genuine and conditions:
Mercedes-Benz parts are available for RNew Vehicle Limited Warranty
Mercedes-Benz models. REmission System Warranty
All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers maintain REmission Performance Warranty
a supply of genuine Mercedes-Benz parts for RCalifornia, Connecticut, Maine, Massachu-
necessary service and repair work. In addition, setts, New York, Pennsylvania, Rhode Island
strategically located parts delivery centers pro- and Vermont Emission Control System War-
vide quick and reliable parts service. ranty
Always specify the vehicle identification number RState warranty enforcement laws (lemon
(VIN) when ordering genuine Mercedes-Benz laws)
parts (Y page 382).
Replacement parts and accessories are covered
by the Mercedes-Benz Parts and Accessories
warranties. These are available at any author-
Operator's Manual ized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Vehicle equipment i Should you lose your Service and Warranty
Information booklet, have an authorized
i This Operator's Manual describes all models Mercedes-Benz Center arrange for a replace-
and all standard and optional equipment of ment. The new Service and Warranty Infor-
your vehicle available at the time of going to mation booklet will be posted to you.
print. Country-specific differences are possi-
ble. Bear in mind that your vehicle may not
feature all functions described here. This also
applies to safety-relevant systems and func- Information for customers in Califor-
tions. The equipment in your vehicle may nia
therefore differ from that shown in the Under California law you may be entitled to a
descriptions and illustrations. replacement of your vehicle or a refund of the
The original purchase contract documentation purchase price or lease price, if after a reason-
for your vehicle contains a list of all the systems able number of repair attempts Mercedes-Benz
in your vehicle. USA, LLC and/or its authorized repair or service
Should you have any questions concerning facilities fail to fix one or more substantial
equipment and operation, please consult an defects or malfunctions in the vehicle that are
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. covered by its express warranty.
The Operator's Manual and Maintenance Book- During the period of 18 months from original
let are important documents and should be kept delivery of the vehicle or the accumulation of
in the vehicle. 18,000 miles (approximately 29,000 km) on the
odometer of the vehicle, whichever occurs first,
a reasonable number of repair attempts is pre-
sumed for a retail buyer or lessee if one or more
of the following occurs:
(1) the same substantial defect or malfunction
results in a condition that is likely to cause
Service and vehicle operation 29

death or serious bodily injury if the vehicle is Change of address or change of own-
driven, that defect or malfunction has been ership
subject to repair two or more times, and you
have directly notified Mercedes-Benz USA, In the event of a change of address, please send

Introduction
LLC in writing of the need for its repair. us the "Notification of Address Change" in the
(2) the same substantial defect or malfunction Service and Warranty Booklet or simply call the
of a less serious nature than category (1) Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
has been subject to repair four or more (USA) at the hotline number
times and you have directly notified 1-800 FOR-MERCEDES (1-800-367-6372) or
Mercedes-Benz in writing of the need for its Customer Service Center (Canada) at
repair. 1-800-387-0100. This will assist us in contact-
(3) the vehicle is out of service by reason of ing you in a timely manner should the need arise.
repair of the same or different substantial If you sell your Mercedes, please leave all liter-
defects or malfunctions for a cumulative ature in the vehicle so that it is available to the
total of more than 30 calendar days. next owner.
Please send your written notice to: If you have purchased a used car, please send us
the "Notification of Used Car Purchase" in the
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC Service and Warranty Booklet or simply call the
Customer Assistance Center Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
One Mercedes Drive (USA) at the hotline number
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350 1-800 FOR-MERCEDES (1-800-367-6372) or
Customer Service (Canada) at 1-800-387-0100.

Maintenance
Vehicle operation outside the USA
USA only: and Canada
Always have the Service and Warranty Booklet
with you when you bring the vehicle to an When you are abroad with your vehicle, observe
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The service the following points:
advisor will record every service for you in the RService facilities or replacement parts may
Service and Warranty Booklet. not be readily available.
Canada only: RLead-free fuel for vehicles with a catalytic
Have every service in a qualified specialist work- converter may not be available. Leaded fuel
shop confirmed in the service report. can cause damage to the catalytic converter.
RThe fuel may have a considerably lower
octane number. Unsuitable fuel can cause
Roadside Assistance engine damage.
Some Mercedes-Benz models are available for
The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Pro- delivery in Europe through our European Deliv-
gram offers technical help in the event of a ery Program. For details, consult an authorized
breakdown. Calls to the toll-free Roadside Assis- Mercedes-Benz Center or write to one of the
tance Hotline are answered by our agents 24 following addresses.
hours a day, 365 days a year.
In the USA
1-800 FOR-MERCEDES (1-800-367-6372)
(USA) Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
1-800-387-0100 (Canada) European Delivery Department
For additional information, refer to the One Mercedes Drive
Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Program Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
brochure (USA) or the "Roadside Assistance" In Canada
section in the Service and Warranty Booklet Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
(Canada). You will find both in the vehicle docu- European Delivery Department
ment wallet.
98 Vanderhoof Avenue
Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9
Z
30 Operating safety

Sports Utility Vehicle G WARNING


Modifications to electronic components, their
G WARNING
software as well as wiring can impair their
Introduction

Due to the high center of gravity, the vehicle function and/or the function of other net-
may start to skid and roll over in the event of worked components. In particular, systems
an abrupt steering maneuver and/or when relevant to safety could also be affected. As a
the vehicle's speed is not adapted to the road result, these may no longer function as inten-
conditions. There is a risk of an accident. ded and/or jeopardize the operating safety of
Always adapt your speed and driving style to the vehicle. There is an increased risk of an
the vehicle's driving characteristics and to the accident and injury.
prevailing road and weather conditions. Never tamper with the wiring as well as elec-
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher roll- tronic components or their software. You
over rate than other types of vehicles. should have all work to electrical and elec-
Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result tronic equipment carried out at a qualified
in an accident, rollover of the vehicle, and severe specialist workshop.
or fatal injury.
In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is signif- ! There is a risk of damage to the vehicle if:
icantly more likely to die than a person wearing Rthe vehicle becomes stuck, e.g. on a high
a seat belt. curb or an unpaved road
You and all vehicle occupants should always Ryou drive too fast over an obstacle, e.g. a
wear your seat belts. curb, a speed bump or a pothole in the road
Ra heavy object strikes the underbody or
parts of the chassis
Operating safety In situations like this, the body, the under-
body, chassis parts, wheels or tires could be
Important safety notes damaged without the damage being visible.
Components damaged in this way can unex-
G WARNING pectedly fail or, in the case of an accident, no
If you do not have the prescribed service/ longer withstand the loads they are designed
maintenance work or any required repairs to.
carried out, this can result in malfunctions or If the underbody paneling is damaged, com-
system failures. There is a risk of an accident. bustible materials such as leaves, grass or
twigs can gather between the underbody and
Always have the prescribed service/mainte- the underbody paneling. If these materials
nance work as well as any required repairs come in contact with hot parts of the exhaust
carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. system, they can catch fire.
In such situations, have the vehicle checked
G WARNING and repaired immediately at a qualified spe-
Flammable material such as leaves, grass or cialist workshop. If on continuing your jour-
ney you notice that driving safety is impaired,
twigs may ignite if they come into contact with pull over and stop the vehicle immediately,
hot parts of the exhaust system. There is a risk paying attention to road and traffic condi-
of fire. tions. In such cases, consult a qualified spe-
When driving off road or on unpaved roads, cialist workshop.
check the vehicle's underside regularly. In
particular, remove parts of plants or other
flammable materials which have become Declarations of conformity
trapped. In the case of damage, contact a USA: "The wireless devices of this vehicle com-
qualified specialist workshop. ply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is
subject to the two following two conditions: 1)
Operating safety 31

These devices may not cause harmful interfer- mation being reset, for example. This may lead
ence, and 2) These devices must accept any to the vehicle failing to meet the requirements of
interference received, including interference the next emissions test during the main inspec-
that may cause undesired operation. Changes tion.

Introduction
or modifications not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment." Qualified specialist workshop
Canada: "The wireless devices of this vehicle
comply with Industry Canada license-exempt An authorized Mercedes-Benz Center is a quali-
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the fol- fied specialist workshop. It has the necessary
lowing two conditions: (1) These devices may specialist knowledge, tools and qualifications to
not cause interference, and (2) These devices correctly carry out the work required on your
must accept any interference, including inter- vehicle. This is especially the case for work rel-
ference that may cause undesired operation of evant to safety.
the device." Always have the following work carried out at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center:
Rwork relevant to safety
Diagnostics connection Rservice and maintenance work

The diagnostics connection is only intended for Rrepair work


the connection of diagnostic equipment at a Ralterations, installation work and modifica-
qualified specialist workshop. tions
Rwork on electronic components
G WARNING
If you connect equipment to a diagnostics
connection in the vehicle, it may affect the Correct use
operation of vehicle systems. As a result, the
operating safety of the vehicle could be affec- If you remove any warning stickers, you or oth-
ers could fail to recognize certain dangers.
ted. There is a risk of an accident.
Leave warning stickers in position.
Only connect equipment to a diagnostics con- Observe the following information when driving
nection in the vehicle, which is approved for your vehicle:
your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. Rthe safety notes in this manual
Rthe vehicle technical data
G WARNING Rtraffic rules and regulations
Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the Rlaws and safety standards pertaining to motor
pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal. vehicles
The operating and road safety of the vehicle is
jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.
Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are Problems with your vehicle
stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter If you should experience a problem with your
the driver's footwell. Install the floormats vehicle, particularly one that you believe may
securely and as specified in order to ensure affect its safe operation, we urge you to contact
sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immedi-
loose floormats and do not place floormats on ately to have the problem diagnosed and recti-
top of one another. fied. If the problem is not resolved to your sat-
isfaction, please discuss the problem again with
the Mercedes-Benz Center or, if necessary, con-
! If the engine is switched off and equipment tact us at one of the following addresses.
on the diagnostics connection is used, the
starter battery may discharge. In the USA
Customer Assistance Center
Connecting equipment to the diagnostics con-
nection can lead to emissions monitoring infor- Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC

Z
32 Data stored in the vehicle

3 Mercedes Drive QR codes for the rescue card


Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
In Canada The QR codes are secured in the fuel filler flap
Introduction

Customer Relations Department and on the opposite side on the B-pillar. In the
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. event of an accident, rescue services can use
the QR code to quickly find the appropriate res-
98 Vanderhoof Avenue
cue card for your vehicle. The current rescue
Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9 card contains the most important information
about your vehicle in a compact form, e.g. the
routing of the electric cables.
Reporting safety defects You can find more information at
www.mercedes-benz.de/qr-code.
USA only:
The following text is reproduced as required of
all manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S.
Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the Data stored in the vehicle
National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of
1966. Information from electronic control
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
units
which could cause a crash or could cause injury There are electronic control units installed in
or death, you should immediately inform the your vehicle. Some of these are necessary for
National Highway Traffic Safety Administration your vehicle to operate safely, while some offer
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz support during driving (driver assistance sys-
USA, LLC. tems). In addition, your vehicle offers comfort
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may and entertainment functions that are also made
open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety possible by electronic control units.
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order Electronic control units contain data storage
a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA systems that can temporarily or permanently
cannot become involved in individual problems save technical information concerning the vehi-
between you, your dealer, or Mercedes-Benz cle's condition, component stress and mainte-
USA, LLC. nance requirements as well as technical events
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle and malfunctions.
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 This information generally documents the con-
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http:// dition of a component, a module, a system or the
www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, surroundings, for example:
NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, Roperating states of system components (e.g.
DC 20590.
fill levels, battery status, tire pressure)
You can also obtain other information about Rstatus messages concerning the vehicle or its
motor vehicle safety from
individual components (e.g. wheel rpm/
http://www.safercar.gov speed, deceleration, lateral acceleration, indi-
cation of whether seat belts are fastened)
Rmalfunctions and defects in important system
Limited Warranty components (e.g. lights, brakes)
Rinformation about events leading to vehicle
! Observe the notes in this Operator's Manual
regarding the correct operation of your vehi- damage
cle and possible damage to the vehicle. Dam- Rsystem responses in special driving situations
age to the vehicle which is caused by violation (e.g. air bag deployment, intervention of sta-
of these notes is not covered by the bility control systems)
Mercedes-Benz implied warranty or the new Rambient conditions (e.g. temperature, rain
or used-vehicle warranty. sensor)
In addition to performing the actual control unit
function, these data are used by manufacturers
Data stored in the vehicle 33

to detect and rectify malfunctions and to opti- If your vehicle is equipped appropriately, you
mize vehicle functions. Most of these data are can connect your smartphone or another mobile
volatile and processed only in the vehicle itself. end device to the vehicle. You can control this by
Only a small part of the data is stored in event or means of the control elements integrated in the

Introduction
malfunction memories. vehicle. The smartphone's picture and sound
When you use services, the technical data from can be output via the multimedia system. Spe-
the vehicle can be read out by service network cific items of information are also sent to your
employees or third parties. Services can include smartphone.
repair services, maintenance processes, war- Depending on the type of integration, this can
ranty cases and quality assurance measures. include:
The data is read out via the legally prescribed Rgeneral vehicle information
diagnostics connection in the vehicle. The rele-
Rposition data
vant offices in the service network or third par-
ties collect, process and use the data. These This allows the use of selected smartphone
data document the vehicle's technical states, apps, such as navigation or music player apps.
are used to help in finding malfunctions and There is no additional interaction between the
improving quality and are sent to the manufac- smartphone and the vehicle, particularly active
turer where necessary. In addition, the manu- access to vehicle data. The type of additional
facturer is subject to product liability. The man- data processing is determined by the provider of
ufacturer needs technical data from vehicles for the app being used. Whether you can configure
this purpose. settings for it and, if so, which ones, depends on
Malfunction memories in the vehicle can be the app and your smartphone's operating sys-
reset by a service center during repair or service tem.
work.
You can incorporate data into the vehicle's com-
fort and infotainment functions yourself as part Service provider
of the selected equipment.
Wireless network connection
These include, for example:
Rmultimedia data such as music, films or pho- If your vehicle has a wireless network connec-
tos for playback in an integrated multimedia tion, data can be exchanged between your vehi-
system cle and other systems. The wireless network
Raddress book data for use in conjunction with
connection is made possible by the vehicle's
an integrated hands-free system or an inte- own transmitter and receiver or by mobile devi-
grated navigation system ces that you have brought into the vehicle (e.g.
smartphones). Online functions can be used via
Rnavigation destinations that have been
this wireless network connection. These include
entered online services and applications/Apps provided
Rdata about using Internet services by the manufacturer or other providers.
These data can be saved locally in the vehicle or
are located on a device that you have connected Services provided by the manufacturer
to the vehicle. If this data is saved in the vehicle,
you can delete it at any time. These data are sent In the case of the manufacturer's online serv-
to third parties only at your request, particularly ices, the manufacturer describes the functions
when you use online services in accordance with in a suitable place and the associated informa-
the settings that you have selected. tion subject to data protection legislation. Per-
You can save and change comfort settings/ sonal data can be used in order to provide online
customizations in the vehicle at any time. services. The data exchange for this takes place
via a secure connection, e.g. with the manufac-
Depending on the piece of equipment in ques-
turer's IT systems intended for the purpose. Col-
tion, these can include, for example:
lecting, processing and using personal data
Rseat and steering wheel position settings beyond the provision of services is permitted
Rsuspension and climate control settings only on the basis of a statutory permit or decla-
Rcustom settings such as interior lighting ration of consent.

Z
34 Data stored in the vehicle

You can usually activate and deactivate the serv- The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record
ices and functions (some of which are subject to such data as:
charge). In many cases, this also applies to the RHow various systems in your vehicle were
vehicle's entire data connection. However, this
Introduction

operating
does not apply in particular to legally prescribed
RWhether or not the driver and passenger
functions and services such as the "eCall" emer-
gency call system. safety belts were buckled/fastened
RHow far (if at all) the driver was depressing the

Services from third parties accelerator and/or brake pedal and


RHow fast the vehicle was traveling
If it is possible to use online services from other These data can help provide a better under-
providers, these services are the responsibility standing of the circumstances in which crashes
of the provider in question and subject to that and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recor-
provider's data protection conditions and terms ded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash
of use. The manufacturer has no influence over situation occurs; no data are recorded by the
the content exchanged here. EDR under normal driving conditions and no
For this reason, please ask the service provider personal data (e.g. name, gender, age and crash
for information about the type, extent and pur- location) are recorded. However, other parties,
pose of the collection and use of personal data such as law enforcement could combine the
when services are provided by third parties. EDR data with the type of personally identifying
data routinely acquired during a crash investi-
gation.
COMAND/mbrace Access to the vehicle and/or the EDR is needed
to read data that is recorded by an EDR, and
If the vehicle is equipped with COMAND or special equipment is required. In addition to the
mbrace, additional data about the vehicle's vehicle manufacturer, other parties that have
operation, the use of the vehicle in certain sit- the special equipment, such as law enforce-
uations, and the location of the vehicle may be ment, can read the information by accessing the
compiled through COMAND or the mbrace sys- vehicle or the EDR.
tem.
EDR data may be used in civil and criminal mat-
For additional information please refer to the ters as a tool in accident reconstruction, acci-
COMAND User Manual or the Digital Operator's dent claims and vehicle safety. Since the Crash
Manual and/or the mbrace Terms and Condi- Data Retrieval CDR tool that is used to extract
tions. data from the EDR is commercially available,
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC ("MBUSA") expressly
disclaims any and all liability arising from the
Event data recorders extraction of this information by unauthorized
Mercedes-Benz personnel.
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
MBUSA will not share EDR data with others
recorder (EDR). This vehicle is equipped with an
without the consent of the vehicle owners or, if
event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of
the vehicle is leased, without the consent of the
an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near
lessee. Exceptions to this representation
crash-like situations, such as an air bag deploy-
include responses to subpoenas by law enforce-
ment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
ment; by federal, state or local government; in
assist in understanding how a vehicle's systems
connection with or arising out of litigation involv-
performed. The EDR is designed to record data
ing MBUSA or its subsidiaries and affiliates; or,
relating to vehicle dynamics and safety systems
as required by law.
for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds
or less. Warning: The EDR is a component of the
Restraint System Module. Tampering with, alter-
ing, modifying or removing the EDR component
may result in a malfunction of the Restraint Sys-
tem Module and other systems.
State laws or regulations regarding EDRs that
conflict with federal regulation are pre-empted.
Information on copyright 35

This means that in the event of such conflict, the


federal regulation governs. As of February 2013,
13 states have enacted laws relating to EDRs.

Introduction
Information on copyright
Free and open-source software
Information on license for free and open-source
software used in your vehicle can be found on
the data carrier in your vehicle document wallet
and, including updates, on the following web-
site:
http://www.mercedes-benz.com/
opensource

Z
36 Cockpit

Cockpit
At a glance

Function Page Function Page


: Steering wheel paddle shifter 147 F Adjusts the steering wheel
manually 103
; Combination switch 111
G Adjusts the steering wheel
= Instrument cluster 37 electrically 103
? Horn Steering wheel heating 104
A DIRECT SELECT lever 143 H Cruise control lever 170
B Parking Assist PARKTRONIC I Opens the hood 321
warning display 189
J Diagnostics connection 31
C Overhead control panel 42
K Electric parking brake 157
D Climate control systems 122
L Light switch 110
E Ignition lock 135
Start/Stop button 135
Instrument cluster 37

Instrument cluster

At a glance
Function Page Function Page
: Speedometer with segments 228 ? Tachometer 228
Warning and indicator lamps: Warning and indicator lamps:
å ESP® OFF 279 R Rear fog lamp 111
! ABS 277 ; Check Engine 283
Brakes 276 h Tire pressure monitor 286
$ (USA only) 6 Restraint system 45
J (Canada only) ü Seat belts 274
L Low-beam headlamps 111 % Diesel engine: preglow 137
T Parking lamps 111 é RBS (Recuperative
÷ ESP® 279 Brake System)
K High-beam headlamps 111 A Coolant temperature gauge 229
Electric parking brake (red) 282 Warning and indicator lamps:
F (USA only) ? Coolant 283
! (Canada only)
B Fuel level indicator
! Electric parking brake
(yellow) 282 Warning and indicator lamps:
· Distance warning 285 8 Reserve fuel with fuel
filler flap location indicator
; #! Turn signals 111 (right-hand side) 283
= Multifunction display 230 C Instrument cluster lighting 228

i Information on displaying the outside tem- found under "Outside temperature display"
perature in the multifunction display can be (Y page 228).
38 Multifunction steering wheel

Multifunction steering wheel


At a glance

Function Page Function Page


: Multifunction display 230 ? =;
; Multimedia system display Selects a menu 229
9:
= ? Selects a submenu or scrolls
Switches on voice-operated through lists 229
navigation or the Voice Con- a
trol System
Confirms a selection 229
8
Hides display messages 243
Mute
%
WX
Back 229
Adjusts the volume
Switches off voice-operated
~ navigation or the Voice Con-
Rejects or ends a call 235 trol System
Exits phone book/redial
memory
6
Makes or accepts a call
Switches to the redial mem-
ory

i In vehicles with multimedia system i In vehicles with multimedia system Audio 20


COMAND you can find further information: you can find further information:
Ron the multimedia system in the Digital Ron the multimedia system in the Digital
Operator's Manual Operator's Manual
Ron the DVD changer or single DVD drive in Ron the voice-operated control of the navi-
the Digital Operator's Manual gation in the manufacturer's operating
Ron the Voice Control System in the sepa- instructions
rate operating instructions
Center console 39

Center console
Center console, upper section

At a glance
Function Page Function Page
: Multimedia system; see the B £ Hazard warning lamps 112
Digital Operator's Manual
C PASSENGER AIRBAG indica-
; c Seat heating 101 tor lamps 45
= s Seat ventilation 102 Anti-theft alarm system indi-
cator lamp 75
? c Parking Assist
D å ESP® 70
PARKTRONIC 187
A è ECO start/stop func-
tion 139
40 Center console

Center console, lower section


At a glance

i Vehicles with the Off-Road Engineering Function Page


package
L Touchpad; see Digital Opera-
Function Page tor's Manual
F Stowage compartment 297 M % Back button (see the
Cup holder 304 Digital Operator's Manual)
Ashtray 307 N Multimedia system control-
Cigarette lighter 307 ler; see Digital Operator's
Socket 308 Manual
G Selector wheel for level con- O g Switches to the favor-
trol 179 ites button (see the Digital
Operator's Manual)
H Ã DSR (Downhill Speed
Regulation) 213 P Switches to the vehicle set-
tings display (see the Digital
I r Manual gearshifting Operator's Manual)
(permanent setting) 147
Q + LOW RANGE off-road
J DYNAMIC SELECT controller 142 gear 216
K Stowage compartment with
Media Interface 296
Center console 41

At a glance
i Vehicles with the AIRMATIC package and Function Page
Mercedes-AMG vehicles
L % Back button (see the
Function Page Digital Operator's Manual)
F Stowage compartment 297 M Multimedia system control-
Cup holder 304 ler; see Digital Operator's
Ashtray 307 Manual
Cigarette lighter 307 N g Switches to the favor-
Socket 308 ites button (see the Digital
Operator's Manual)
G Ã DSR (Downhill Speed
Regulation) 213 O Switches to the vehicle set-
tings display (see the Digital
H r Manual gearshifting Operator's Manual)
(permanent setting) 147
AMG adaptive sport suspen-
I DYNAMIC SELECT controller 142 sion system (Mercedes-AMG
vehicles) 186
J Stowage compartment with
Media Interface 296 P Á Level control 185
K Touchpad; see Digital Opera-
tor's Manual
42 Overhead control panel

Overhead control panel


At a glance

Function Page Function Page


: p Switches the left-hand C Eyeglasses compartment 297
reading lamp on/off 114
D F Breakdown assistance
; c Switches the front inte- call button (mbrace system) 311
rior lighting on 114
E G SOS button (mbrace
= u Switches the rear inte- system) 310
rior lighting on or off 114
F ï Info call button
? | Switches the front inte- (mbrace system) 312
rior lighting/automatic inte-
rior lighting control off 114 G Rear-view mirror 105

A p Switches the right- H Buttons for the garage door


hand reading lamp on/off 114 opener 319

B 3 Opens/closes the pan- I Microphone for mbrace


orama roof with power tilt/ (emergency call system),
sliding panel and roller sun- telephone and the Voice
blinds 94 Control System1

1 The Voice Control System is only available in combination with COMAND. Please observe the separate oper-
ating instructions.
Door control panel 43

Door control panel

At a glance
Function Page Function Page
: Opens the door 83 B W Opens/closes the side
windows 89
; % & Unlocks/locks
the vehicle 83 C q Opens/closes the tail-
gate 87
= r45=
Stores settings for the seat, D 6 Plug-in hybrid: Unlocks
exterior mirrors and steering the fuel filler flap
column (memory function) 108
E n Activates/deactivates
? Adjusts the seats 97 the override feature for the
side windows in the rear
A 7Zö\ compartment 65
Adjusts and folds the exterior
mirrors in/out electrically 105
44 Occupant safety

Panic alarm As the driver, you also have to make sure that
the steering wheel is adjusted correctly.
Observe the information relating to the correct
driver's seat position (Y page 97).
You also have to make sure that an air bag can
inflate properly if deployed (Y page 49).
An air bag supplements a correctly worn seat
belt. As an additional safety device, the air bag
increases the level of protection for vehicle
Safety

occupants in the event of an accident. For exam-


ple, if, in the event of an accident, the protection
offered by the seat belt is sufficient, the air bags
are not deployed. When an accident occurs, only
the air bags that increase protection in that par-
ticular accident situation are deployed. How-
X To activate: press ! button : for ever, seat belts and air bags generally do not
approximately one second. protect against objects penetrating the vehicle
A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the from the outside.
alarm system is armed. Information on restraint system operation can
X To deactivate: press ! button : again. be found under "Triggering of the Emergency
or Tensioning Devices and air bags" (Y page 56).
X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. See "Children in the vehicle" for information on
or, on vehicles with KEYLESS‑GO: children traveling with you in the vehicle as well
X Press the Start/Stop button.
as on child restraint systems (Y page 59).
The SmartKey must be in the vehicle.
Important safety notes
Occupant safety G WARNING
Introduction to the restraint system Modifications to the restraint system may
cause it to no longer work as intended. The
The restraint system can reduce the risk of vehi- restraint system may then not perform its
cle occupants coming into contact with parts of intended protective function and may fail in an
the vehicle's interior in the event of an accident.
accident or trigger unexpectedly, for example.
The restraint system can also reduce the forces
to which vehicle occupants are subjected during This poses an increased risk of injury or even
an accident. fatal injury.
The restraint system comprises: Never modify parts of the restraint system.
RSeat belt system Never tamper with the wiring, the electronic
RAir bags components or their software.
RChild restraint system
If it is necessary to modify components of the
RChild seat securing systems restraint system to accommodate a person with
The components of the restraint system work in disabilities, contact an authorized Mercedes-
conjunction with each other. They can only Benz Center for details. USA only: for further
deploy their protective function if, at all times, all information contact our Customer Assistance
vehicle occupants: Center at 1-800 FOR-MERCEDES
Rhave fastened their seat belts correctly (1‑800‑367‑6372).
(Y page 47) Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use
Rhave the seat and head restraint adjusted driving aids which have been approved specifi-
properly (Y page 97) cally for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.
Occupant safety 45

Restraint system warning lamp The indicator lamps display the status of the
front-passenger front air bag.
The functions of the restraint system are RPASSENGER AIR BAG ON lights up for 60 sec-
checked after the ignition is switched on and at
regular intervals while the engine is running. onds, subsequently both indicator lamps are
Therefore, malfunctions can be detected in off (PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and OFF): the
good time. front-passenger front air bag is able to deploy
in the event of an accident.
The 6 restraint system warning lamp on the RPASSENGER AIR BAG OFF lights up: the front-
instrument cluster lights up when the ignition is
passenger front air bag is deactivated. It will

Safety
switched on. It goes out no later than a few sec-
then not be deployed in the event of an acci-
onds after the vehicle is started. The compo-
dent.
nents of the restraint system are in operational
readiness. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is
off, only the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
A malfunction has occurred if the 6 restraint
lamp shows the status of the front-passenger
system warning lamp:
front air bag. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
Rdoes not light up after the ignition is switched indicator lamp may be lit continuously or be off.
on Depending on the person in the front-passenger
Rdoes not go out after a few seconds with the seat, the front-passenger front air bag must
engine running either be deactivated or enabled; see the fol-
Rlights up again while the engine is running lowing points. You must make sure of this both
before and during a journey.
G WARNING
RChildren in a child restraint system:
If the restraint system is malfunctioning, whether the front-passenger front air bag is
restraint system components may be trig- enabled or deactivated depends on the instal-
gered unintentionally or may not deploy as led child restraint system, and the age and
intended during an accident. This can affect size of the child. Therefore, be sure to observe
for example the Emergency Tensioning the notes on the "Occupant Classification
System (OCS)" (Y page 51) and on "Chil-
Device or the air bag. This poses an increased dren in the vehicle" (Y page 59). There you
risk of injury or even fatal injury. will also find instructions on rearward and
Have the restraint system checked and forward-facing child restraint systems on the
repaired in a qualified specialist workshop as front-passenger seat.
soon as possible. RAll other persons: depending on the classi-
fication of the person in the front-passenger
seat, the front-passenger front air bag is ena-
bled or deactivated (Y page 51). Be sure to
PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamp observe the notes on "Seat
belts“ (Y page 45) and "Air bags"
(Y page 49). There you can also find infor-
mation on the correct seat position.

Seat belts
Introduction
Seat belts are the most effective means of
restricting the movement of vehicle occupants
in the event of an accident or the vehicle rolling
over. This reduces the risk of vehicle occupants
PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp : and coming into contact with parts of the vehicle
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp ; are interior or being ejected from the vehicle. Fur-
part of the Occupant Classification System thermore, the seat belt helps to keep the vehicle
(OCS).
Z
46 Occupant safety

occupant in the best position in relation to the injuries, for example, in the event of an acci-
air bag. dent or when braking or changing direction
The seat belt system comprises: abruptly. This poses an increased risk of injury
RSeat belts or even fatal injury.
REmergency Tensioning Devices for the front Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have
seat belts and the outer seat belts in the rear their seat belts fastened correctly and are sit-
RSeat belt force limiters
ting properly.
If the seat belt is pulled out of the belt outlet
Safety

quickly or with a jerky movement, the belt The components of the restraint system work in
retractor locks. The belt strap cannot be extrac- conjunction with each other. They can only
ted any further. deploy their protective function if, at all times, all
The Emergency Tensioning Device tightens the vehicle occupants:
seat belt in an accident, pulling the belt close Rhave fastened their seat belts correctly
against the body. However it does not pull the (Y page 47)
vehicle occupant back in the direction of the
Rhave the seat and head restraint adjusted
backrest.
properly (Y page 97)
The Emergency Tensioning Device does not cor-
rect an incorrect seat position or the routing of G WARNING
an incorrectly fastened seat belt.
The seat belt does not offer the intended level
When triggered, a seat belt force limiter helps to of protection if you have not moved the back-
reduce the force exerted by the seat belt on the
vehicle occupant. rest to an almost vertical position. When brak-
The seat belt force limiters for the front seats are ing or in the event of an accident, you could
synchronized with the front air bags, which slide underneath the seat belt and sustain
absorb part of the deceleration force. This can abdomen or neck injuries, for example. This
reduce the force exerted on the vehicle occu- poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal
pants during an accident. injury.
! If the front-passenger seat is not occupied, Adjust the seat properly before beginning
do not engage the seat belt tongue in the your journey. Always ensure that the backrest
buckle on the front-passenger seat. Other- is in an almost vertical position and that the
wise, in addition to other systems, the Emer- shoulder section of your seat belt is routed
gency Tensioning Device could also be trig-
gered in the event of an accident and would across the center of your shoulder.
need to be replaced.
G WARNING
Important safety notes Persons less than 5 ft (1.50 m) tall cannot
wear the seat belt correctly without an addi-
The use of seat belts and child restraint systems
is required by law in: tional and suitable restraint system. If the
seat belt is not worn correctly, it cannot per-
Rall 50 states
form its intended protective function. An
Rthe U.S. territories
incorrectly fastened seat belt can also cause
Rthe District of Columbia
injuries, for example, in the event of an acci-
Rall Canadian provinces dent or when braking or changing direction
Even where this is not required by law, all vehicle abruptly. This poses an increased risk of injury
occupants should correctly fasten their seat or even fatal injury.
belts before starting the journey.
For this reason, always secure persons under
G WARNING 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in suitable additional restraint
If the seat belt is not worn correctly, it cannot systems.
perform its intended protective function. An
incorrectly fastened seat belt can also cause
Occupant safety 47

If a child younger than twelve years old and Proper use of the seat belts
under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height is traveling in the
vehicle: Observe the safety notes on the seat belt
(Y page 46).
Ralways secure the child in a child restraint
system suitable for this Mercedes-Benz vehi- All vehicle occupants must be wearing the seat
cle. The child restraint system must be appro- belt correctly before beginning the journey. Also
priate to the age, weight and size of the child make sure that all vehicle occupants are always
wearing the seat belt correctly while the vehicle
Ralways observe the instructions and safety
is in motion.
notes on "Children in the vehicle"

Safety
(Y page 59) in addition to the child restraint When fastening the seat belt, always make sure
system manufacturer's installation and oper- that:
ating instructions Rthe seat belt buckle tongue is inserted only
Ralways observe the instructions and safety into the belt buckle belonging to that seat
notes on the "Occupant classification system Rthe seat belt is pulled tight across your body
(OCS)" (Y page 51) Avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a winter
coat.
G WARNING
Rthe seat belt is not twisted
The seat belts may not perform their intended
Only then can the forces which occur be dis-
protective function if: tributed over the area of the belt.
Rthey are damaged, modified, extremely Rthe shoulder section of the belt is routed
dirty, bleached or dyed across the center of your shoulder
Rthe seat belt buckle is damaged or The shoulder section of the seat belt should
not touch your neck or be routed under your
extremely dirty
arm or behind your back. Where possible,
Rthe Emergency Tensioning Devices, belt adjust the seat belt to the appropriate height.
anchorages or inertia reels have been modi- Rthe lap belt is taut and passes across your lap
fied. as low down as possible
Seat belts may be damaged in an accident, The lap belt must always be routed across
although the damage may not be visible, e.g. your hip joints and not across your abdomen.
due to splinters of glass. Modified or damaged This applies particularly to pregnant women.
If necessary, push the lap belt down to your
seat belts may tear or fail, e.g. in an accident. hip joint and pull it tight using the shoulder
Modified Emergency Tensioning Devices section of the belt.
could accidentally trigger or fail to deploy Rthe seat belt is not routed across sharp, poin-
when necessary. This poses an increased risk ted or fragile objects
of injury or even fatal injury. If you have such items located on or in your
Never modify the seat belts, Emergency Ten- clothing, e.g. pens, keys or eyeglasses, store
sioning Devices, belt anchorages and inertia these in a suitable place.
reels. Make sure that the seat belts are Ronly one person is using a seat belt

undamaged, not worn out and clean. Follow- Infants and children must never travel sitting
ing an accident, have the seat belts checked on the lap of a vehicle occupant. In the event
of an accident, they could be crushed
immediately at a qualified specialist work- between the vehicle occupant and seat belt.
shop. Robjects are never secured with a seat belt if
the seat belt is also being used by one of the
Only use seat belts that have been approved for
vehicle's occupants
your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.
Also ensure that there are never objects
between a person and the seat, e.g. cushions.
Seat belts are only intended to secure and
restrain vehicle occupants. Always observe the
"Loading guidelines" for securing objects, lug-
gage or loads (Y page 295).
Z
48 Occupant safety

Fastening and adjusting the seat belts Releasing seat belts


Observe the safety notes on the seat belt ! Make sure that the seat belt is fully rolled up.
(Y page 46) and the notes on correct use of seat Otherwise, the seat belt or belt tongue will be
belts (Y page 47). trapped in the door or in the seat mechanism.
This could damage the door, the door trim
panel and the seat belt. Damaged seat belts
can no longer fulfill their protective function
and must be replaced. Visit a qualified spe-
cialist workshop.
Safety

X Press the release button in the belt buckle,


hold the belt tongue firmly and guide the belt
back.

Seat belt adjustment


The belt adjustment is a convenience function
Basic illustration integrated into PRE-SAFE®. With this function,
X Adjust the seat (Y page 97). the driver's and front-passenger seat belts are
The seat backrest must be in an almost adjusted to the upper body of the vehicle occu-
upright position. pant.
X Pull the seat belt smoothly from the belt outlet The seat belt strap will slightly tighten if:
and engage belt tongue ; into belt Rthe belt tongue is inserted into the buckle and
buckle :. Rthe ignition is switched on
The seat belt on the driver’s seat and the
The seat belt adjustment will apply a certain
front-passenger seat may be tightened auto-
tightening force if any slack is detected between
matically, see "Belt adjustment"
the vehicle occupant and the seat belt. Do not
(Y page 48).
grab hold of the seat belt.
X If necessary, pull up on the shoulder section
The belt adjustment can be switched on and off
of the seat belt to tighten the belt across your
using the on-board computer (Y page 239).
body.
The shoulder section of the seat belt must Belt warning for the driver and front
always be routed across the center of the shoul- passenger
der. Adjust the belt outlet if necessary.
X To raise: slide the belt outlet up. The 7 seat belt warning lamp in the instru-
The belt outlet will engage in various posi- ment cluster is a reminder that all vehicle occu-
tions. pants must wear their seat belts. It may light up
continuously or flash. In addition, there may be
X To lower: hold belt outlet release = and slide
a warning tone.
the belt outlet down.
Regardless of whether the driver's seat belt has
X Let go of belt outlet release = in the desired
already been fastened, the 7 seat belt warn-
position and make sure that the belt outlet ing lamp lights up for six seconds each time the
engages. engine is started. If the front doors are closed
All seat belts except the driver's seat belt are and the driver's or front-passenger seat belt has
equipped with a special seat belt retractor to not been fastened, the 7 seat belt warning
securely fasten child restraint systems in the lamp lights up again after the six seconds. As
vehicle. Further information can be found under soon as the driver's and front-passenger seat
"Special seat belt retractor" (Y page 60). belts are fastened or a front door is opened
again, the 7 seat belt warning lamp goes out.
If the driver's seat belt is not fastened after the
engine is started, an additional warning tone will
sound. The warning tone switches off after six
Occupant safety 49

seconds or once the driver's seat belt is fas- Always make sure that there are no objects
tened. between the air bag and the vehicle's occu-
If the vehicle's speed exceeds 15 mph pants.
(25 km/h) once and the driver's and front-
passenger seat belts are not fastened, a warning RAdjust the seats properly before beginning
tone sounds. A warning tone also sounds with your journey. Always make sure that the seat
increasing intensity for 60 seconds or until the is in an almost upright position. The center of
driver or front passenger have fastened their the head restraint must support the head at
seat belts. about eye level.

Safety
If the driver or front passenger unfasten their RMove the driver's and front-passenger seats
seat belts during the journey, the seat belt warn- as far back as possible. The driver's seat posi-
ing is activated again. tion must allow the vehicle to be driven safely.
ROnly hold the steering wheel on the outside.
This allows the air bag to be fully deployed.
Air bags RAlways lean against the backrest while driv-

Introduction ing. Do not lean forward or lean against the


door or side window. You may otherwise be in
The installation point of an air bag can be rec- the deployment area of the air bags.
ognized by the AIRBAG marking. RAlways keep your feet in the footwell in front
An air bag complements the correctly fastened of the seat. Do not put your feet on the dash-
seat belt. It is no substitute for the seat belt. The board, for example. Your feet may otherwise
air bag provides additional protection in appli- be in the deployment area of the air bag.
cable accident situations. RFor this reason, always secure persons less
Not all air bags are deployed in an accident. The than 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in suitable restraint sys-
different air bag systems function independ- tems. Up to this height, the seat belt cannot
ently from one another (Y page 56). be worn correctly.
However, no system available today can com- If a child is traveling in your vehicle, also
pletely eliminate injuries and fatalities. observe the following notes:
It is also not possible to rule out a risk of injury RAlways secure children under twelve years of
caused by an air bag due to the high speed at age and less than 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in suitable
which the air bag must be deployed. child restraint systems.
RChild restraint systems should be installed on
Important safety notes the rear seats.
ROnly secure a child in a rearward-facing child
G WARNING restraint system on the front-passenger seat
If you do not sit in the correct seat position, when the front-passenger front air bag is
the air bag cannot protect as intended and deactivated. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
indicator lamp is permanently lit, the front-
could even cause additional injury when
passenger front air bag is deactivated
deployed. This poses an increased risk of (Y page 45).
injury or even fatal injury. RAlways observe the instructions and safety
To avoid hazardous situations, always make notes on the "Occupant Classification System
sure that all of the vehicle's occupants: (OCS)" (Y page 51) and on "Children in the
vehicle" (Y page 59) in addition to the child
Rhave fastened their seat belts correctly, restraint system manufacturer's installation
including pregnant women and operating instructions.
Rare sitting correctly and maintain the great-
est possible distance to the air bags
Rfollow the following instructions

Z
50 Occupant safety

Objects in the vehicle interior may prevent the front-passenger side may be triggered
an air bag from functioning correctly. Before and have to be replaced.
starting your journey and to avoid risks resulting
from the speed of the air bag as it deploys, make
sure that:
Rthere are no people, animals or objects
between the vehicle occupants and an air bag
Rthere are no objects between the seat, door
and B-pillar
Safety

Rthere are no hard objects, e.g. coat hangers,


hanging on the grab handles or coat hooks
Rno accessories, such as cup holders, are
attached to the vehicle within the deployment
area of an air bag, e.g. to doors, side windows,
rear side trim or side walls Driver's air bag : deploys in front of the steer-
Rno heavy, sharp-edged or fragile objects are in ing wheel. Front-passenger front air bag ;
the pockets of your clothing. Store such deploys in front of and above the glove box.
objects in a suitable place When deployed, the front air bags offer addi-
tional head and thorax protection for the occu-
G WARNING pants in the front seats.
If you modify the air bag cover or affix objects The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
such as stickers to it, the air bag can no longer informs you about the status of the front-
function correctly. There is an increased risk passenger front air bag (Y page 45).
of injury. The front-passenger front air bag will only
deploy if:
Never modify an air bag cover or affix objects
to it. Rthe system, based on the OCS weight sensor
readings, detects that the front-passenger
seat is occupied (Y page 51). The
G WARNING PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is
Sensors to control the air bags are located in not lit (Y page 52)
the doors. Modifications or work not per- Rthe restraint system control unit predicts a
formed correctly to the doors or door panel- high accident severity
ing, as well as damaged doors, can lead to the
function of the sensors being impaired. The air Driver's knee bag
bags might therefore not function properly
anymore. Consequently, the air bags cannot
protect vehicle occupants as they are
designed to do. There is an increased risk of
injury.
Never modify the doors or parts of the doors.
Always have work on the doors or door pan-
eling carried out at a qualified specialist work-
shop.

Front air bags


Driver's knee bag : deploys under the steering
! Do not place heavy objects on the front- column. The driver's knee bag is deployed
passenger seat. This could cause the system together with the front air bag.
to identify the seat as being occupied. In the
event of an accident, the restraint systems on
Occupant safety 51

The driver's knee bag offers additional thigh, If the belt tongue is engaged in the belt buckle,
knee and lower leg protection for the occupant the side impact air bag on the front-passenger
in the driver's seat. side deploys if an appropriate accident situation
occurs. In this case, deployment is independent
Side impact air bags of whether the front-passenger seat is occupied
or not.
G WARNING
Unsuitable seat covers can obstruct or pre- Window curtain air bags
vent deployment of the air bags integrated

Safety
into the seats. Consequently, the air bags
cannot protect vehicle occupants as they are
designed to do. In addition, the operation of
the occupant classification system (OCS)
could be adversely affected. This poses an
increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
You should only use seat covers that have
been approved for the respective seat by
Mercedes-Benz.

Window curtain air bags : are integrated into


the side of the roof frame and deployed in the
area from the A-pillar to the C-pillar.
When deployed, the window curtain air bag
enhances the level of protection for the head.
However, it does not protect the chest or arms.
If the restraint system control unit detects a side
impact, the window curtain air bag is deployed
on the side on which the impact occurs.
If the system determines that they can offer
additional protection to that provided by the
seat belt, a window curtain air bag may be
Front side impact air bags : and rear side deployed in other accident situations
impact air bags ; deploy next to the outer bol- (Y page 56).
ster of the seat backrest.
When deployed, the side impact air bag offers
additional thorax protection. It also offers addi- Occupant Classification System
tional pelvis protection for occupants in the (OCS)
front seats. However, it does not protect the:
RHead Introduction
RNeck
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) cat-
RArms egorizes the person in the front-passenger seat.
If the restraint system control unit detects a side Depending on that result, the front-passenger
impact, the side impact air bag is deployed on front air bag is either enabled or deactivated.
the side on which the impact occurs. The system does not deactivate:
The side impact air bag on the front-passenger Rthe side impact air bag
side deploys under the following conditions:
Rthe window curtain air bag
Rthe OCS system detects that the front-
Rthe Emergency Tensioning Devices
passenger seat is occupied or
Rthe seat belt buckle tongue is engaged in the
belt buckle of the front-passenger seat

Z
52 Occupant safety

In the following situation, the side impact air bag Occupant Classification System opera-
and the Emergency Tensioning Device are deac- tion (OCS)
tivated:
ROCS has not categorized the person on the
front-passenger seat as an adult or a person
of corresponding stature and
Rthe seat belt buckle tongue of the seat belt is
not inserted into the front-passenger seat belt
buckle
Safety

Requirements
To be classified correctly, the front passenger
must sit:
Rwith the seat belt fastened correctly : PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp
Rin an almost upright position with their back ; PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
against the seat backrest
The indicator lamps inform you whether the
Rwith their feet resting on the floor, if possible
front-passenger front air bag is deactivated or
If the front passenger does not observe these enabled.
conditions, OCS may produce a false classifica-
X Press the Start/Stop button once or twice, or
tion, e.g. because the front passenger:
turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
Rtransfers their weight by supporting them- ignition lock.
selves on a vehicle armrest The system carries out self-diagnostics.
Rsits in such a way that their weight is raised
The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and PASSENGER
from the seat cushion AIR BAG ON indicator lamps must light up simul-
If it is absolutely necessary to install a child taneously for approximately six seconds.
restraint system on the front-passenger seat, be The indicator lamps display the status of the
sure to observe the correct positioning of the front-passenger front air bag.
child restraint system. Never place objects
under or behind the child restraint system, e.g. a RPASSENGER AIR BAG ON lights up for 60 sec-
cushion. The entire base of the child restraint onds, subsequently both indicator lamps are
system must always rest on the seat cushion of off (PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and OFF): the
the front-passenger seat. The backrest of the front-passenger front air bag is able to deploy
forward-facing child restraint system must lie as in the event of an accident.
flat as possible against the backrest of the front- RPASSENGER AIR BAG OFF lights up: the front-
passenger seat. passenger front air bag is deactivated. It will
The child restraint system must not touch the then not be deployed in the event of an acci-
roof or be subjected to a load by the head dent.
restraint. Adjust the angle of the seat backrest If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is
and the head restraint position accordingly. off, only the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
Only then can OCS be guaranteed to function lamp shows the status of the front-passenger
correctly. Always observe the child restraint sys- front air bag. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
tem manufacturer's installation and operating indicator lamp may be lit continuously or be off.
instructions. If the status of the front-passenger front air bag
changes while the vehicle is in motion, an air bag
display message appears in the instrument clus-
ter (Y page 253). When the front-passenger
seat is occupied, always pay attention to the
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp. Be
aware of the status of the front-passenger front
air bag both before and during the journey.
Occupant safety 53

G WARNING G WARNING
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator If you secure a child in a forward-facing child
lamp is lit, the front-passenger front air bag is restraint system on the front-passenger seat
disabled. It will not be deployed in the event of and you position the front-passenger seat too
an accident and cannot perform its intended close to the dashboard, the child could, in the
protective function. A person in the front- event of an accident:
passenger seat could then, for example, come Rcome into contact with the vehicle's inte-
into contact with the vehicle's interior, espe- rior if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi-

Safety
cially if the person is sitting too close to the cator lamp is lit, for example
dashboard. This poses an increased risk of
Rbe struck by the air bag if the PASSENGER
injury or even fatal injury.
AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off
When the front-passenger seat is occupied,
This poses an increased risk of injury or even
always ensure that:
fatal injury.
Rthe classification of the person in the front-
Move the front-passenger seat as far back as
passenger seat is correct and the front- possible. Always make sure that the shoulder
passenger front air bag is enabled or disa- belt strap is correctly routed from the vehicle
bled in accordance with the person in the belt sash guide to the shoulder belt guide on
front-passenger seat the child restraint system. The shoulder belt
Rthe front-passenger seat has been moved strap must be routed forwards and down-
back as far back as possible. wards from the vehicle belt sash guide. If nec-
Rthe person is seated correctly. essary, adjust the vehicle belt sash guide and
Make sure, both before and during the jour- the front-passenger seat accordingly. Always
ney, that the status of the front-passenger observe the child restraint system manufac-
front air bag is correct. turer's installation instructions.

If OCS determines that:


G WARNING
RThe front-passenger seat is unoccupied, the
If you secure a child in a rearward-facing child
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
restraint system on the front-passenger seat lights up after the system self-test and
and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator remains lit. This indicates that the front-
lamp is off, the front-passenger front air bag passenger front air bag is deactivated.
can deploy in the event of an accident. The RThe front-passenger seat is occupied by a
child could be struck by the air bag. This poses child of up to twelve months old, in a standard
an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. child restraint system, the PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF indicator lamp lights up after the
Make sure that the front-passenger front air system self-test and remains lit. This indi-
bag has been deactivated. The PASSENGER cates that the front-passenger front air bag is
AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit. deactivated.
NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint But even in the case of a twelve-month-old
on a seat protected by an ACTIVE FRONT AIR- child, in a standard child restraint system, the
BAG in front of it; DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp can
go out after the system self-test. This indi-
to the child can occur.
cates that the front-passenger front air bag is
activated. The result of the classification is
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
dependent on, among other factors, the child
stays off, do not install a rearward-facing child
restraint system and the child's stature. It is
restraint system on the front-passenger seat.
recommended that you install the child
You can find more information on OCS under
restraint system on a suitable rear seat.
"Problems with the Occupant Classification Sys-
tem" (Y page 55).
Z
54 Occupant safety

RThe front-passenger seat is occupied by a System self-test


person of smaller stature (e.g. a teenager or
small adult), the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF G DANGER
indicator lamp lights up and remains lit after If both the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and
the system self-test depending on the result
of the classification or, alternatively, goes out. PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps do
- If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
not light up during the system self-test, the
lamp is off, move the front-passenger seat system is malfunctioning. The front-
as far back as possible. Alternatively, a per- passenger front air bag might be triggered
Safety

son of smaller stature can sit on a rear seat. unintentionally or might not be triggered at all
- If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator in the event of an accident with high deceler-
lamp is lit, a person of smaller stature ation. This poses an increased risk of injury or
should not use the front-passenger seat. even fatal injury.
RThe front-passenger seat is occupied by an
In this case the front-passenger seat may not
adult or a person of adult stature, the
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp be used. Do not install a child restraint system
goes out after the system self-test. This indi- on the front-passenger seat. Have the Occu-
cates that the front-passenger front air bag is pant Classification System (OCS) checked
activated. and repaired immediately at a qualified spe-
If children are traveling in the vehicle, be sure to cialist workshop.
observe the notes on "Children in the vehicle"
(Y page 59). G WARNING
When the Occupant Classification System If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
(OCS) is malfunctioning, the red 6 restraint
system warning lamp on the instrument cluster lamp remains lit after the system self-test, the
and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator front-passenger front air bag is disabled. It will
lamp light up simultaneously. The front- not be deployed in the event of an accident. In
passenger front air bag is deactivated in this this case, the front-passenger front air bag
case and does not deploy during an accident. cannot perform its intended protective func-
Have the Occupant Classification System (OCS) tion, e.g. when a person is seated in the front-
checked and repaired immediately at a qualified
specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recom- passenger seat.
mends that you use an authorized Mercedes- That person could, for example, come into
Benz Center for this purpose. contact with the vehicle's interior, especially
If the front-passenger seat, the seat cover or the if the person is sitting too close to the dash-
seat cushion are damaged, have the necessary board. This poses an increased risk of injury or
repair work carried out at a qualified specialist even fatal injury.
workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that
you use an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center When the front-passenger seat is occupied,
for this purpose. always ensure that:
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom- Rthe classification of the person in the front-
mends that you only use seat accessories that passenger seat is correct and the front-
have been approved by Mercedes-Benz.
passenger front air bag is enabled or disa-
If the driver's air bag deploys, this does not
bled in accordance with the person in the
mean that the front-passenger front air bag will
also deploy. The Occupant Classification Sys- front-passenger seat
tem (OCS) categorizes the occupant on the Rthe person is seated properly with a cor-
front-passenger seat. Depending on that result, rectly fastened seatbelt
the front-passenger front air bag is either ena-
Rthe front-passenger seat has been moved
bled or deactivated.
as far back as possible
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp remains lit when it should not, the front-
Occupant safety 55

passenger seat may not be used. Do not facing child restraint system must, as far as
install a child restraint system on the front- possible, be resting on the backrest of the
passenger seat. Have the Occupant Classifi- front-passenger seat. Always comply with the
cation System (OCS) checked and repaired child restraint system manufacturer's instal-
immediately at a qualified specialist work- lation instructions.
shop.
After the system self-test, the PASSENGER AIR
G WARNING BAG OFF or PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator
lamp displays the status of the front-passenger

Safety
Objects between the seat surface and the front air bag (Y page 52). If the front-passenger
child restraint system could affect OCS oper- front air bag is enabled, the PASSENGER AIR
ation. This could result in the front-passenger BAG ON indicator lamp lights up for 60 seconds
air bag not functioning as intended during an and then goes out.
accident. This poses an increased risk of If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is
injury or even fatal injury. off, only the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp shows the status of the front-passenger
Do not place any objects between the seat front air bag. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
surface and the child restraint system. The indicator lamp may be lit continuously or be off.
entire base of the child restraint system must For more information about the OCS, see "Prob-
always rest on the seat cushion of the front- lems with the Occupant Classification System"
passenger seat. The backrest of the forward- (Y page 55).

Problems with the Occupant Classification System (OCS)


Be sure to observe the notes on "System self-test" (Y page 54).

Z
56 Occupant safety

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions


The PASSENGER AIR The classification of the person on the front-passenger seat is incor-
BAG OFF indicator lamp rect.
lights up and remains lit, X Make sure the conditions for a correct classification of the person
even though the front- on the front-passenger seat are met (Y page 52).
passenger seat is occu-
X If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit, the front-
pied by an adult or a per-
passenger seat may not be used.
son of a stature corre-
X Have OCS checked as soon as possible at an authorized Mercedes-
Safety

sponding to that of an
adult. Benz Center.

The PASSENGER AIR OCS is malfunctioning.


BAG OFF indicator lamp X Make sure there is nothing between the seat cushion and the child
does not light up and/or seat.
does not stay on.
X Make sure that the entire base of the child restraint system rests on
The front-passenger seat the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. The backrest of the
is: forward-facing child restraint system must lie as flat as possible
Runoccupied against the backrest of the front-passenger seat. If necessary,
Roccupied by the adjust the position of the front-passenger seat.
weight of a child up to X When installing the child restraint system, make sure that the seat
twelve months old in a belt is tight. Do not pull the seat belt tight using the front-passenger
child restraint system seat adjustment. This could result in the seat belt and the child
restraint system being pulled too tightly.
X Check for correct installation of the child restraint system.
Make sure that the head restraint does not apply a load to the child
restraint system. If necessary, adjust the head restraint accord-
ingly.
X Make sure that no objects are applying additional weight onto the
seat.
X If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains off and/or
the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp lights up, do not install
a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. It is recom-
mended that you install the child restraint system on a suitable rear
seat.
X Have OCS checked as soon as possible at an authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center.

Deployment of Emergency Tensioning G WARNING


Devices and air bags A deployed air bag no longer offers any pro-
tection and cannot provide the intended pro-
Important safety notes
tection in an accident. There is an increased
G WARNING risk of injury.
The air bag parts are hot after an air bag has Have the vehicle towed to a qualified special-
been deployed. There is a risk of injury. ist workshop in order to have a deployed air
Do not touch the air bag parts. Have a bag replaced.
deployed air bag replaced at a qualified spe-
It is important for your safety and that of your
cialist workshop as soon as possible. passenger to have deployed air bags replaced
and to have any malfunctioning air bags
Occupant safety 57

repaired. This will help to make sure the air bags An Emergency Tensioning Device can only be
continue to perform their protective function for triggered, if:
the vehicle occupants in the event of a crash. Rthe ignition is switched on
G WARNING Rthe components of the restraint system are

Emergency Tensioning Devices that have operational. You can find further information
under "Restraint system warning lamp"
deployed pyrotechnically are no longer opera- (Y page 45)
tional and are unable to perform their inten- Rthe seat belt buckle tongue has engaged in
ded protective function. This poses an the belt buckle of the respective front seat

Safety
increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. The Emergency Tensioning Devices in the rear
Have pyrotechnically triggered Emergency compartment are triggered independently of the
Tensioning Devices replaced immediately at a lock status of the seat belts.
qualified specialist workshop. If the restraint system control unit detects a
more severe accident, further components of
An electric motor is used by PRE-SAFE® to trig- the restraint system are activated independ-
ger the tightening of the seat belt in hazardous ently of each other in certain frontal collision
situations. This procedure is reversible. situations:
If Emergency Tensioning Devices are triggered RFront air bags and driver's knee bag
or air bags are deployed, you will hear a bang, RWindow curtain air bag, if the system deter-
and some powder may also be released. The mines that deployment can offer additional
6 restraint system warning lamp lights up. protection to that provided by the seat belt
Only in rare cases will the bang affect your hear- The front-passenger front air bag is activated or
ing. The powder that is released generally does deactivated depending on the person on the
not constitute a health hazard, but it may cause front-passenger seat. The front-passenger front
short-term breathing difficulties in people with air bag can only deploy in an accident if the
asthma or other respiratory problems. Provided PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off.
it is safe to do so, you should leave the vehicle Observe the information on the PASSENGER AIR
immediately or open the window in order to pre- BAG indicator lamps (Y page 45).
vent breathing difficulties. Your vehicle has two-stage front air bags. In the
Air bags and pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning first deployment stage, the front air bag is filled
Devices (ETDs) contain perchlorate material, with propellant gas. The front air bag is fully
which may require special handling and regard deployed with the maximum amount of propel-
for the environment. National guidelines must lant gas if a second deployment threshold is
be observed during disposal. In California, see reached within a few milliseconds.
www.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/ The activation threshold of the Emergency Ten-
Perchlorate/index.cfm. sioning Devices and the air bags is determined
by evaluating the rate of vehicle deceleration or
Method of operation acceleration which occurs at various points in
the vehicle. This process is pre-emptive in
During the first stage of a collision, the restraint nature. Deployment should take place in good
system control unit evaluates important physi- time at the start of the collision.
cal data relating to vehicle deceleration or accel- The rate of vehicle deceleration or acceleration
eration, such as: and the direction of the force are essentially
Rduration determined by:
Rdirection Rthe distribution of forces during the collision
Rintensity Rthe collision angle
Based on the evaluation of this data, the Rthe deformation characteristics of the vehicle
restraint system control unit triggers the Emer- Rthe characteristics of the object with which
gency Tensioning Devices during a frontal or the vehicle has collided
rear collision.
Factors which can only be seen and measured
after a collision has occurred do not play a deci-
sive role in the deployment of an air bag. Nor do
Z
58 Occupant safety

they provide an indication of air bag deploy- PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant


ment.
protection system)
The vehicle can be deformed considerably, with-
out an air bag being deployed. This is the case if Introduction
only parts which are relatively easily deformed
are affected and the rate of deceleration is not In certain hazardous situations, PRE-SAFE®
high. Conversely, air bags may be deployed even takes pre-emptive measures to protect the vehi-
though the vehicle suffers only minor deforma- cle occupants.
tion. This is the case if, for example, very rigid
Safety

vehicle parts such as longitudinal body mem- Important safety notes


bers are hit, and sufficient deceleration occurs
as a result. ! Make sure that there are no objects in the
If the restraint system control unit detects a side footwell or behind the seats. There is a danger
impact or if the vehicle rolls over, the applicable that the seats and/or objects could be dam-
components of the restraint system are aged when PRE-SAFE® is activated.
deployed independently of each other depend- Although your vehicle is equipped with PRE-
ing on the apparent type of accident.
SAFE®, the possibility of injury in the event of an
RSide impact air bags on the side where the
accident cannot be ruled out. Always adapt your
impact takes place, independently of the driving style to suit the prevailing road and
Emergency Tensioning Device and the use of weather conditions and maintain a safe distance
the seat belt on the driver's seat and outer from the vehicle in front. Drive carefully.
seats in the second row
The side impact air bag on the front- Function
passenger side deploys under the following
conditions: PRE-SAFE® intervenes:
- the OCS system detects that the front-
Rin emergency braking situations, e.g. when
passenger seat is occupied or BAS is activated
- the seat belt buckle tongue is engaged in
Rin critical driving situations, e.g. when physi-
the belt buckle of the front-passenger seat cal limits are exceeded and the vehicle under-
RWindow curtain air bag on the side of impact, steers or oversteers severely
independently of the use of the seat belt and Ron vehicles with the Driving Assistance PLUS
independently of whether the front- package: when Active Brake Assist intervenes
passenger seat is occupied powerfully or the radar sensor system detects
REmergency Tensioning Devices, if the system an imminent danger of collision in certain sit-
determines that deployment can offer addi- uations
tional protection in this situation
PRE-SAFE® takes the following measures
RWindow curtain air bags on the driver's and
depending on the hazardous situation detected:
front-passenger side in certain situations
when the vehicle rolls over, if the system Rthe front seat belts are pre-tensioned.
determines that deployment can offer addi- Rif the vehicle skids, the side windows and the
tional protection to that provided by the seat sliding sunroof are closed.
belt Rvehicles with the memory function: the front-

i Not all air bags are deployed in an accident. passenger seat is adjusted if it is in an unfav-
The different air bag systems work independ- orable position.
ently of each other. Rvehicles with a multicontour seat: the air pres-

How the air bag system works is determined sure in the side bolsters of the seat backrest
by the severity of the accident detected, is increased.
especially the vehicle deceleration or accel- If the hazardous situation passes without result-
eration and the apparent type of accident: ing in an accident, PRE-SAFE® slackens the belt
pre-tensioning. On vehicles with multicontour
RFrontal collision
seats, the air pressure in the side bolsters is
RSide impact
reduced again. All settings made by PRE-SAFE®
RRollover can then be reversed.
Children in the vehicle 59

If the seat belt pre-tensioning is not reduced: PRE-SAFE® PLUS takes the following measures
X Move the seat backrest or seat back slightly depending on the hazardous situation detected:
when the vehicle is stationary. Rif the radar sensor system detects that a
The seat belt pre-tensioning is reduced and head-on collision is imminent, the seat belts
the locking mechanism is released. are pre-tensioned.
The seat-belt adjustment is an integral part of Rif the radar sensor system detects that a rear-
the PRE-SAFE® convenience function. Informa- end collision is imminent:
tion about the convenience function can be - the brake pressure is increased if the driver
found under "Belt adjustment" (Y page 48). applies the brakes when the vehicle is sta-

Safety
tionary.
- the seat belts are pre-tensioned.
PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory occu- The PRE-SAFE® PLUS braking application is can-
pant protection system PLUS) celed:
Rif the accelerator pedal is depressed when a
Introduction gear is engaged
PRE-SAFE® PLUS is only available in vehicles Rif the risk of a collision passes or is no longer
with the Driving Assistance PLUS package. detected
Using the radar sensor system, PRE-SAFE® Rif Distance Pilot DISTRONIC indicates an
PLUS is able to detect that a head-on or rear-end intention to pull away
collision is imminent. In certain hazardous sit- If the hazardous situation passes without result-
uations, PRE-SAFE® PLUS takes pre-emptive ing in an accident, the original settings are
measures to protect the vehicle occupants. restored.

Important safety notes


Automatic measures after an acci-
The intervention of PRE-SAFE® PLUS cannot dent
prevent an imminent collision.
The driver is not warned about the intervention Immediately after an accident, the following
of PRE-SAFE® PLUS. measures are implemented, depending on the
type and severity of the impact:
PRE-SAFE® PLUS does not intervene if the vehi-
Rthe hazard warning lamps are activated
cle is backing up.
Rthe emergency lighting is activated
When driving, or when parking or exiting a park-
ing space with assistance from Parking Pilot, Rthe vehicle doors are unlocked
PRE-SAFE® PLUS will not apply the brakes. Rthe front side windows are lowered
Rvehicles with a memory function: the electri-
Function cally adjustable steering wheel is raised when
the driver's door is opened
PRE-SAFE® PLUS intervenes in certain situa- Rthe engine is switched off and the fuel supply
tions if the radar sensor system detects an is cut off
imminent head-on or rear-end collision. Rvehicles with mbrace: automatic emergency
call

Children in the vehicle


Important safety notes
Accident statistics show that children secured
in the rear seats are safer than children secured
in the front-passenger seat. For this reason,
Mercedes-Benz strongly advises that you install

Z
60 Children in the vehicle

a child restraint system on a rear seat. Children tect it with a blanket, for example. If the child
are generally better protected there. restraint system has been exposed to direct
If a child younger than twelve years old and sunlight, let it cool down before securing the
under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height is traveling in the
vehicle: child in it. Never leave children unattended in
the vehicle.
Ralways secure the child in a child restraint
system suitable for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have
The child restraint system must be appropri- their seat belts fastened correctly and are sitting
ate to the age, weight and size of the child properly. Particular attention must be paid to
Safety

Rbe sure to observe the instructions and safety children.


notes in this section in addition to the child Observe the safety notes on the seat belt
restraint system manufacturer's installation (Y page 46) and the notes on correct use of seat
instructions belts (Y page 47).
Rbe sure to observe the instructions and safety
A booster seat may be necessary to achieve
notes on the "Occupant classification system proper seat belt positioning for children over
(OCS)" (Y page 51) 40 lbs (18 kg) until they reach a height where a
G WARNING three-point seat belt can be properly fastened
without a booster seat.
If you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-
cle, they could set it in motion by, for example:
Rrelease the parking brake. Special seatbelt retractor
Rshift the automatic transmission out of the G WARNING
parking position P.
If the seat belt is released while driving, the
Rstart the engine.
child restraint system will no longer be
In addition, they may operate vehicle equip- secured properly. The special seat belt retrac-
ment and become trapped. There is a risk of tor is disabled and the inertia real draws in a
an accident and injury. portion of the seat belt. The seat belt cannot
When leaving the vehicle, always take the be immediately refastened. There is an
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. Stop the vehicle immediately, paying atten-
tion to road and traffic conditions. Reactivate
G WARNING the special seat belt retractor and secure the
If persons, particularly children are subjected child restraint system properly.
to prolonged exposure to extreme heat or
cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even All seat belts in the vehicle, except the driver's
seat belt, are equipped with a special seat belt
fatal. Never leave children unattended in the
retractor. When activated, the special seat belt
vehicle. retractor ensures that the seat belt cannot
slacken once the child seat is secured.
G WARNING Installing a child restraint system:
If the child restraint system is subjected to X Make sure you observe the child restraint
direct sunlight, parts may get very hot. Chil- system manufacturer's installation instruc-
dren may burn themselves on these parts, tions.
particularly on the metal parts of the child X Pull the seat belt smoothly from the belt out-
restraint system. There is a risk of injury. let.
If you leave the vehicle, taking the child with X Engage seat belt tongue in belt buckle.
you, always ensure that the child restraint
system is not exposed to direct sunlight. Pro-
Children in the vehicle 61

Activating the special seat belt retractor: designed for them. Only replace damaged
X Pull the seat belt out fully and let the inertia covers with genuine covers.
reel retract it again.
While the seat belt is retracting, you should G WARNING
hear a ratcheting sound. The special seat belt
retractor is enabled. If the child restraint system is installed incor-
X Push the child restraint system down so that rectly or is not secured, it can come loose in
the seat belt is tight and does not loosen. the event of an accident, heavy braking or a
sudden change in direction. The child

Safety
Removing the child restraint system and deac-
tivating the special seat belt retractor: restraint system could be thrown about, strik-
ing vehicle occupants. There is an increased
X Make sure you observe the child restraint
risk of injury, possibly even fatal.
system manufacturer's installation instruc-
tions. Always install child restraint systems prop-
X Press the release button of the seat belt erly, even if they are not being used. Make
buckle and guide the seat belt tongue back sure that you observe the child restraint sys-
towards the belt sash guide. tem manufacturer's installation instructions.
The special seat belt retractor is deactivated.
You will find further information on stowing
objects, luggage or loads under "Loading guide-
Child restraint system lines" (Y page 295).

The use of seat belts and child restraint systems G WARNING


is required by law in: Child restraint systems or their securing sys-
Rall 50 states tems which have been damaged or subjected
Rthe U.S. territories to a load in an accident can no longer protect
Rthe District of Columbia as intended. The child cannot then be
Rall Canadian provinces restrained in the event of an accident, heavy
If you install a rearward-facing child restraint braking or sudden changes of direction. There
system on the center rear seat, the rear arm rest is an increased risk of injury, possibly even
must be folded back as far as possible. fatal.
You can obtain further information about the Replace child restraint systems which have
correct child restraint system from any author- been damaged or subjected to a load in an
ized Mercedes-Benz Center. accident as soon as possible. Have the secur-
G WARNING ing systems on the child restraint system
If the child restraint system is installed incor- checked at a qualified specialist workshop,
rectly on a suitable seat, it cannot protect as before you install a child restraint system
intended. The child cannot then be restrained again.
in the event of an accident, heavy braking or The securing systems of child restraint systems
sudden changes of direction. There is an are:
increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.
Rthe seat belt system
Make sure that you observe the child restraint Rthe LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings
system manufacturer's installation instruc- Rthe Top Tether anchorages
tions and the notes on use. Please ensure,
If it is absolutely necessary to carry a child on
that the base of the child restraint system is the front-passenger seat, be sure to observe the
always resting completely on the seat cush- information on the "Occupant Classification
ion. Never place objects, e.g. cushions, under System (OCS)" (Y page 51). There you will also
or behind the child restraint system. Only use find information on deactivating the front-
child restraint systems with the original cover passenger front air bag.

Z
62 Children in the vehicle

All child restraint systems must meet the fol- Before every trip, make sure that the LATCH-
lowing standards: type (ISOFIX) child restraint system is engaged
RU.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards correctly in both LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing
213 and 225 rings
RCanadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards ! When installing the child restraint system,
213 and 210.2 make sure that the seat belt for the middle
Confirmation that the child restraint system cor- seat does not get trapped. The seat belt could
responds to the standards can be found on an otherwise be damaged.
instruction label on the child restraint system.
Safety

This confirmation can also be found in the instal-


lation instructions that are included with the
child restraint system.
Observe the warning labels in the vehicle inte-
rior and on the child restraint system.

LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat secur-


ing system
G WARNING
For LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint sys- X Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint
tems in which the child is secured using the system on both LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing
rings :.
safety belt integrated in the child restraint
system, the maximum permissible weight of LATCH-type (ISOFIX) is a standardized securing
the child and child restraint system together system for specially designed child restraint
systems on the rear seats. LATCH-type (ISOFIX)
is 73 lbs (33 kg). securing rings for two LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child
If the child and the child restraint system restraint systems are installed on the left and
together weigh more than 73 lbs (33 kg), the right of the rear seats.
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system Non-LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seats may also
with integrated safety belt no longer offers be used and can be installed using the vehicle's
sufficient protection. The LATCH-type (ISO- seat belt system. Install the child seat according
to the manufacturer's instructions.
FIX) child seat securing system may be over-
loaded, and the child may not be restrained in
an accident, for example. This poses an
Top Tether
increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
If the child and the child restraint system Introduction
together weigh more than 73 lbs (33 kg), use Top Tether provides an additional connection
only a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint sys- between the child restraint system secured with
tem in which the child is also secured with the a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) system and the vehicle.
vehicle seat belt. Also secure the child This helps reduce the risk of injury even further.
restraint system with the Top Tether belt, if If the child restraint system is equipped with a
available. Top Tether belt, this should always be used.

Regularly check that the permissible gross Important safety notes


weight of the child together with the child
restraint system is still maintained. G WARNING
Always comply with the manufacturer's instal- If the rear seat backrests are not locked, they
lation and operating instructions for the child could fold forwards in the event of an acci-
restraint system used. dent, heavy braking or sudden changes of
Children in the vehicle 63

direction. As a result, child restraint systems X Guide Top Tether belt B down between cargo
cannot perform their intended protective compartment cover : and seat backrest ;.
X Hook Top Tether hook A of Top Tether belt
function. Rear seat backrests that are not
B into Top Tether anchorage ?.
locked can also cause additional injuries, e.g.
Make sure that:
in the event of an accident. This poses an
increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. RTop Tether hook A is hooked into Top
Tether anchorage ? as shown.
Always lock rear seat backrests after instal-
RTop Tether belt B is not twisted.
ling a Top Tether belt. Adjust the rear seat

Safety
RTop Tether belt B is routed between seat
backrests so that they are in an upright posi-
backrest ; and cargo compartment
tion. cover : if cargo compartment cover : is
installed.
Make sure that the backrest in the rear com-
RTop Tether belt B is routed between seat
partment engages fully. To do so, pull firmly on
the seat backrest. backrest ; and the cargo net if the cargo
net is installed.
X Tension Top Tether belt B. Always comply
Top Tether anchorages with the child restraint system manufactur-
er's installation instructions when doing so.
X Move head restraint = back down again
slightly if necessary (Y page 100). Make sure
that you do not interfere with the correct rout-
ing of Top Tether belt B.

Child restraint system on the front-


passenger seat
General notes
Top Tether anchorages ? are located on the Accident statistics show that children secured
rear side of the seat backrests. in the rear seats are safer than children secured
in the front-passenger seat. For this reason,
Mercedes-Benz strongly advises that you install
the child restraint system on a rear seat.
If it is absolutely necessary to install a child
restraint system on the front-passenger seat,
always observe the instructions and safety
notes on the "Occupant Classification System
(OCS)" (Y page 51).
You can thus avoid the risks that could arise as
a result of:
Ran incorrectly categorized person in the front-
passenger seat
X Move head restraint = upwards Rthe unintentional deactivation of the front-
(Y page 100). passenger front air bag
X Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint Rthe unsuitable positioning of the child
system with Top Tether. Always comply with restraint system, e.g. too close to the dash-
the child restraint system manufacturer's board
installation instructions when doing so.
X Route Top Tether belt B under head restraint
= between the two head restraint bars.

Z
64 Children in the vehicle

Rearward-facing child restraint system Child-proof locks


If it is absolutely necessary to install a rearward- Important safety notes
facing child restraint system on the front-
passenger seat, always make sure that the G WARNING
front-passenger front air bag is deactivated.
Only if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator If children are traveling in the vehicle, they
lamp is permanently lit (Y page 45) is the front- could:
passenger front air bag deactivated. Ropen doors, thus endangering other people
Always observe the child restraint system man-
Safety

or road users
ufacturer's installation and operating instruc-
tions. Rexit the vehicle and be caught by oncoming
traffic
Forward-facing child restraint system Roperate vehicle equipment and become
trapped
If it is absolutely necessary to install a forward-
facing child restraint system on the front- There is a risk of an accident and injury.
passenger seat, always move the front- Always activate the child-proof locks and
passenger seat as far back as possible. The override feature if children are traveling in the
entire base of the child restraint system must
always rest on the seat cushion of the front- vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take
passenger seat. The backrest of the child the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never
restraint system must lie as flat as possible leave children unattended in the vehicle.
against the backrest of the front-passenger
seat. The child restraint system must not touch Override feature for:
the roof or be subjected to a load by the head Rthe rear doors (Y page 65)
restraint. Adjust the angle of the seat backrest Rthe rear side windows (Y page 65)
and the head restraint position accordingly.
Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is G WARNING
correctly routed from the vehicle belt outlet to
the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint If you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-
system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed cle, they could set it in motion by, for example:
forward and down from the vehicle belt outlet. If Rrelease the parking brake.
necessary, adjust the vehicle belt outlet and the
front-passenger seat accordingly. Rshift the automatic transmission out of the
Always observe the child restraint system man- parking position P.
ufacturer's installation and operating instruc- Rstart the engine.
tions. In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-
ment and become trapped. There is a risk of
an accident and injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

G WARNING
If persons, particularly children are subjected
to prolonged exposure to extreme heat or
cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even
fatal. Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
Pets in the vehicle 65

G WARNING Override feature for the rear side win-


If the child restraint system is subjected to dows
direct sunlight, parts may get very hot. Chil-
dren may burn themselves on these parts,
particularly on the metal parts of the child
restraint system. There is a risk of injury.
If you leave the vehicle, taking the child with
you, always ensure that the child restraint

Safety
system is not exposed to direct sunlight. Pro-
tect it with a blanket, for example. If the child
restraint system has been exposed to direct
sunlight, let it cool down before securing the
child in it. Never leave children unattended in
the vehicle. X To activate/deactivate: press button :.
If indicator lamp ; is lit, operation of the rear
side windows is disabled. Operation is only
Child-proof locks for the rear doors possible using the switches in the driver's
door. If indicator lamp ; is off, operation is
possible using the switches in the rear com-
partment.

Pets in the vehicle

G WARNING
If you leave animals unattended or unsecured
in the vehicle, they could press buttons or
switches, for example.
You secure each door individually with the child- As a result, they could:
proof locks on the rear doors. A door secured
Ractivate vehicle equipment and become
with a child-proof lock cannot be opened from
inside the vehicle. When the vehicle is unlocked, trapped, for example
the door can be opened from the outside. Ractivate or deactivate systems, thereby
X To activate: press the child-proof lock lever endangering other road users
up in the direction of arrow :. Unsecured animals could also be flung around
X Make sure that the child-proof locks are work- the vehicle in the event of an accident or sud-
ing properly. den steering or braking, thereby injuring vehi-
X To deactivate: press the child-proof lock
cle occupants. There is a risk of an accident
lever down in the direction of arrow ;.
and injury.
Never leave animals unattended in the vehi-
cle. Always secure animals properly during
the journey, e.g. use a suitable animal trans-
port box.

Z
66 Driving safety systems

Driving safety systems ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)


Overview of driving safety systems General information
In this section, you will find information about ABS regulates brake pressure in such a way that
the following driving safety systems: the wheels do not lock when you brake. This
RABS (Anti-lock Braking System) allows you to continue steering the vehicle when
(Y page 66) braking.
RBAS (Brake Assist System) (Y page 67) The ! ABS warning lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up when the ignition is switched
Safety

RActive Brake Assist (Y page 67)


on. It goes out when the engine is running.
RESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
ABS works from a speed of about 5 mph
(Y page 70) (8 km/h), regardless of road-surface conditions.
REBD (Electronic Brake force Distribution) ABS works on slippery surfaces, even when you
(Y page 72) only brake gently.
RADAPTIVE BRAKE (Y page 72)
RActive Brake Assist with cross-traffic function Important safety notes
(Y page 72)
RSteering Pilot STEER CONTROL
i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
tion (Y page 66).
(Y page 75)
G WARNING
If ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock when
Important safety notes braking. The steerability and braking charac-
If you fail to adapt your driving style or if you are teristics may be severely impaired. Addition-
inattentive, the driving safety systems can nei- ally, further driving safety systems are deac-
ther reduce the risk of an accident nor override tivated. There is an increased danger of skid-
the laws of physics. Driving safety systems are ding and accidents.
merely aids designed to assist driving. You are
responsible for maintaining the distance to the Drive on carefully. Have ABS checked imme-
vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in diately at a qualified specialist workshop.
good time, and for staying in lane. Always adapt
your driving style to suit the prevailing road and When ABS is malfunctioning, other systems,
weather conditions and maintain a safe distance including driving safety systems, will also
from the vehicle in front. Drive carefully. become inoperative. Observe the information
The driving safety systems described only work on the ABS warning lamp (Y page 277) and dis-
as effectively as possible when there is ade- play messages which may be shown in the
quate contact between the tires and the road instrument cluster (Y page 244).
surface. Pay particular attention to the informa-
tion regarding tires, recommended minimum Braking
tire tread depths etc. in the "Wheels and tires"
section (Y page 351). X If ABS intervenes: continue to depress the
brake pedal vigorously until the braking sit-
In wintry driving conditions, always use winter
uation is over.
tires (M+S tires) and if necessary, snow chains.
Only in this way will the driving safety systems X To make a full brake application: depress
described in this section work as effectively as the brake pedal with full force.
possible. If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel a
pulsing in the brake pedal.
The pulsating brake pedal can be an indication
of hazardous road conditions, and functions as a
reminder to take extra care while driving.
Driving safety systems 67

Off-road ABS Active Brake Assist


An ABS system specifically suited to off-road General information
terrain is activated automatically once the off-
road program is activated on: i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
RVehicles without the Offroad Engineering tion (Y page 66).
package (Y page 214) Active Brake Assist consists of a distance warn-
RVehicles with the Off-Road Engineering pack- ing function with an autonomous braking func-
age (Y page 215) tion and situation-dependent braking assis-

Safety
At speeds below 20 mph (30 km/h), the front tance
wheels lock cyclically during braking. The dig- Active Brake Assist can help you to minimize the
ging-in effect achieved in the process reduces risk of a collision with the vehicle traveling in
the stopping distance on off-road terrain. This front or reduce the effects of such a collision.
limits steering capability. If Active Brake Assist detects that there is a risk
of collision, you will be warned visually and
acoustically. If you do not react to the visual and
BAS (Brake Assist System) audible collision warning, autonomous braking
can be initiated in critical situations. If you apply
General information the brake yourself in a critical situation, Adap-
tive Brake Assist supports you with situation-
BAS operates in emergency braking situations. dependent braking assistance.
If you depress the brake pedal quickly, BAS Active Brake Assist is only available in certain
automatically boosts the braking force, thus countries.
shortening the stopping distance.
Important safety notes
Important safety notes
In particular, the detection of obstacles can be
i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- impaired if:
tion (Y page 66).
Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else
G WARNING covering the sensors
If BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distance Rthere is snow or heavy rain
in an emergency braking situation is Rthere is interference by other radar sources
increased. There is a risk of an accident. Rthere are strong radar reflections, for exam-
In an emergency braking situation, depress ple in parking garages
the brake pedal with full force. ABS prevents Ra narrow vehicle is traveling in front, e.g. a

the wheels from locking. motorbike


Ra vehicle is traveling in front on a different line
Ryou are driving a new vehicle or servicing on
Braking the Active Brake Assist system has just been
X Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed until carried out
the emergency braking situation is over. Observe the notes in the section on breaking-
ABS prevents the wheels from locking. in (Y page 134).
The brakes will function as usual once you Following damage to the front end of the vehicle,
release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated. have the configuration and operation of the
radar sensor checked at a qualified specialist
workshop. This also applies to collisions at slow
speeds where there is no visible damage to the
front of the vehicle.

Z
68 Driving safety systems

Activating/deactivating In such cases, the distance warning function


Active Brake Assist is automatically active after may:
switching on the ignition. Rgive an unnecessary warning
You can activate or deactivate Active Brake Rnot give a warning
Assist (Y page 237) in the on-board computer.
When deactivated, the distance warning func- There is a risk of an accident.
tion and the autonomous braking function are Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-
also deactivated. uation and do not rely solely on the distance
Safety

If Active Brake Assist is deactivated, the æ warning function.


symbol appears in the assistance graphic dis-
play. Function
If DSR (Y page 213) is activated, Active Brake Starting at a speed of around 4 mph (7 km/h),
Assist is deactivated. the distance warning function warns you if you
rapidly approach a vehicle in front. An intermit-
Distance warning function tent warning tone will then sound, and the ·
distance warning lamp will light up in the instru-
General information ment cluster.
The distance warning function can help you to X Brake immediately in order to increase the
minimize the risk of a front-end collision with a distance from the vehicle in front.
vehicle ahead or reduce the effects of such a or
collision. If the distance warning function X Take evasive action, provided it is safe to do
detects that there is a risk of a collision, you will
so.
be warned visually and acoustically.
Due to the nature of the system, particularly
Important safety notes complicated but non-critical driving conditions
i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- may also cause the system to display a warning.
tion for driving safety systems (Y page 66). With the help of the radar sensor system, the
distance warning function can detect obstacles
G WARNING that are in the path of your vehicle for an exten-
The distance warning function does not react: ded period of time.
Up to a speed of around 44 mph (70 km/h), the
Rto people or animals distance warning function can also react to sta-
Rto oncoming vehicles tionary obstacles, such as stopped or parked
Rto crossing traffic vehicles.
Rwhen cornering
Autonomous braking function
The distance warning function may not give
warnings in all critical situations. There is a If the driver does not react to the distance warn-
risk of an accident. ing signal in a critical situation, Active Brake
Assist can assist the driver with the autonomous
Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit- braking function.
uation and be ready to brake. Vehicles without Distance Pilot DISTRONIC:
Always adapt your speed to suit the prevailing the autonomous braking function is available in
road and traffic conditions. the following speed ranges:
R4 - 65 mph (7 - 105 km/h) for moving objects
G WARNING R4 - 31 mph (7 - 50 km/h) for stationary
The distance warning function cannot always objects
clearly identify objects and complex traffic
situations.
Driving safety systems 69

Vehicles with Distance Pilot DISTRONIC: the X Keep the brake pedal depressed until the
autonomous braking function is available in the emergency braking situation is over.
following speed ranges: ABS prevents the wheels from locking.
R4 - 124 mph (7 - 200 km/h) for moving The brakes will work normally again if:
objects Ryou release the brake pedal.
R4 - 31 mph (7 - 50 km/h) for stationary
Rthere is no longer any danger of a collision.
objects
Rno obstacle is detected in front of your vehi-
Due to the nature of the system, particularly cle.
complicated but non-critical driving conditions

Safety
may also cause the Autonomous Braking Func- Situation-dependent braking assistance is then
tion to intervene. deactivated.
If the autonomous braking function requires a Important safety notes
particularly high braking force, preventative
passenger protection measures (PRE-SAFE®)
i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
tion for driving safety systems (Y page 66).
are activated simultaneously (Y page 58).
G WARNING
Situation-dependent braking assis- Adaptive Brake Assist cannot always clearly
tance identify objects and complex traffic situa-
tions.
General information
In such cases, Adaptive Brake Assist might:
i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
tion (Y page 66). Rintervene unnecessarily
With the help of the radar sensor system, Adap- Rnot intervene
tive Brake Assist can detect obstacles that are in There is a risk of an accident.
the path of your vehicle for an extended period
of time. Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-
uation and be ready to brake. Terminate the
If Adaptive Brake Assist detects a risk of colli-
sion with the vehicle in front, it calculates the intervention in a non-critical driving situation.
brake pressure necessary to avoid a collision. If
you apply the brakes forcefully, situation- G WARNING
dependent braking assistance adapts to the sit- Adaptive Brake Assist does not react:
uation and automatically increases the brake
pressure to a degree appropriate to the traffic Rto people or animals
situation. Rto oncoming vehicles
Situation-dependent braking assistance pro- Rto crossing traffic
vides braking assistance in hazardous situations
at speeds above 4 mph (7 km/h). It uses radar Rwhen cornering
sensor technology to assess the traffic situa- As a result, Adaptive Brake Assist may not
tion. intervene in all critical conditions. There is a
Situation-dependent braking assistance is capa- risk of an accident.
ble of reacting to moving objects that have
already been detected as such at least once Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-
over the period of observation, up to vehicle uation and be ready to brake.
speeds of around 155 mph (250 km/h).
Situation-dependent braking assistance reacts Due to the nature of the system, complex but
to stationary obstacles up to a speed of approx- non-critical driving conditions may also cause
imately 44 mph (70 km/h). Active Brake Assist to intervene.
If situation-dependent braking assistance Even if Active Brake Assist is not available due to
demands particularly high brake pressure, pre- a malfunction in the radar sensor system, the
ventative passenger protection measures (PRE- brake system is still available with full brake
boosting effect and BAS.
SAFE®) are triggered simultaneously
(Y page 58).
Z
70 Driving safety systems

ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) Important safety notes

General notes G WARNING


If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® is unable to
i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
tion (Y page 66). stabilize the vehicle. Additionally, further driv-
ing safety systems are deactivated. This
ESP® monitors driving stability and traction, i.e. increases the risk of skidding and an accident.
power transmission between the tires and the
road surface. Drive on carefully. Have ESP® checked at a
Safety

If ESP® detects that the vehicle is deviating from qualified specialist workshop.
the direction desired by the driver, one or more
wheels are braked to stabilize the vehicle. The ! Vehicles with 4MATIC: only operate the
engine output is also modified to keep the vehi- vehicle for a maximum of ten seconds on a
cle on the desired course within physical limits. brake test dynamometer. Switch off the igni-
ESP® assists the driver when pulling away on tion.
wet or slippery roads. ESP® can also stabilize Application of the brakes by ESP® may oth-
the vehicle during braking. erwise destroy the brake system.
! Vehicles with 4MATIC: function or perform-
ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System) ance tests may only be carried out on a 2-axle
dynamometer. Before you operate the vehicle
ETS traction control is part of ESP®. On vehicles on such a dynamometer, please consult a
with 4MATIC, 4ETS is part of ESP®. qualified workshop. You could otherwise
Traction control brakes the drive wheels indi- damage the drive train or the brake system.
vidually if they spin. This enables you to pull
away and accelerate on slippery surfaces, for ESP® is only deactivated if the å warning
example if the road surface is slippery on one lamp is lit continuously.
side. In addition, more drive torque is transfer- If the ÷ warning lamp and the å warning
red to the wheel or wheels with traction. lamp are lit continuously, ESP® is not available
Traction control remains active, even if you due to a malfunction.
deactivate ESP®. Observe the information on warning lamps
In appropriate driving situations, activate the (Y page 279) and display messages which may
offroad program: be shown in the instrument cluster
(Y page 244).
X Vehicles without the Offroad Engineering
package (Y page 214) i Only use wheels with the recommended tire
X Vehicles with the Off-Road Engineering pack- sizes. Only then will ESP® function properly.
age (Y page 215)
Characteristics of ESP®
Offroad 4ETS (Electronic Traction Sys-
General information
tem)
If the ÷ ESP warning lamp goes out before
An ETS system specifically suited to off-road beginning the journey, ESP® is automatically
terrain is activated automatically once an off- active.
road program is activated:
If ESP® intervenes, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp
RVehicles without the Offroad Engineering flashes in the instrument cluster.
package (Y page 214)
RVehicles with the Off-Road Engineering pack-
age (Y page 215)
Driving safety systems 71

If ESP® intervenes: ! Avoid spinning the driven wheels for an


X Do not deactivate ESP®
under any circum- extended period with ESP® deactivated. You
stances. could otherwise damage the drivetrain.
X Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as Deactivating/activating ESP®
necessary when pulling away.
X Adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing
road and weather conditions.

ECO start/stop function

Safety
The ECO start/stop function switches the
engine off automatically when the vehicle stops
moving. The engine starts automatically when
the driver wants to pull away again. ESP®
remains in its previously selected status, e.g. if
ESP® was deactivated before the engine was
automatically switched off.
X To deactivate: press button :.
Deactivating/activating ESP® The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the
instrument cluster lights up.
Important safety notes
X To activate: press button :.
i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
tion (Y page 66). The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the
instrument cluster goes out.
You can select between the following states of
ESP®: Characteristics when ESP® is deactivated
RESP® is activated. If ESP® is deactivated and one or more wheels
RESP® is deactivated. start to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp in the
instrument cluster flashes. In such situations,
G WARNING ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle.
If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer sta- If you deactivate ESP®:
bilizes the vehicle. There is an increased risk RESP® no longer improves driving stability.
of skidding and an accident. REngine torque is no longer limited and the
Only deactivate ESP® in the situations descri- drive wheels are able to spin.
bed in the following. RTraction control is still activated.
RActive Brake Assist is no longer available; nor
It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the follow- is it activated if you brake firmly with assis-
ing situations: tance from ESP®
Rwhen using snow chains RPRE-SAFE® is no longer available, nor is it
Rin deep snow activated if you brake firmly and ESP® inter-
Ron sand or gravel venes.
Spinning the wheels results in a cutting action RActive Brake Assist with cross-traffic function
which provides better grip. is no longer available; nor is it activated if you
brake firmly with assistance from ESP®
i Activate ESP® as soon as the situations RESP® still provides support when you brake
described above no longer apply. ESP® will
firmly.
otherwise not be able to stabilize the vehicle if
the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel starts to
spin.

Z
72 Driving safety systems

Offroad ESP® (vehicles with Offroad G WARNING


Engineering package) If EBD is malfunctioning, the rear wheels can
An ESP® system specifically suited to off-road lock, e.g. under full braking. This increases the
terrain is activated automatically once the off- risk of skidding and an accident.
road program is activated on: You should therefore adapt your driving style
RVehicles without the Offroad Engineering to the different handling characteristics. Have
package (Y page 214) the brake system checked at a qualified spe-
RVehicles with the Off-Road Engineering pack- cialist workshop.
Safety

age (Y page 215)


Offroad ESP® intervenes with a delay if there is Observe information regarding indicator and
oversteering or understeering, thus improving warning lamps (Y page 277) as well as display
traction. messages (Y page 246).

Crosswind Assist
ADAPTIVE BRAKE
General information ADAPTIVE BRAKE enhances braking safety and
Strong crosswind gusts can impair the ability of offers increased braking comfort. In addition to
your vehicle to drive straight ahead. The cross- the braking function, ADAPTIVE BRAKE also has
wind driving assistance function integrated in the HOLD function (Y page 182) and hill start
ESP® noticeably reduces these impairments. assist (Y page 139).
ESP® intervenes automatically according to the
direction and intensity of the crosswinds affect-
ing your vehicle. Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic
ESP® intervenes with stabilizing braking to function
assist you in keeping the vehicle in the lane.
Crosswind Assist is active at vehicle speeds General information
above 50 mph (80 km/h) when driving straight i Pay attention to the important safety notes
ahead or cornering gently. in the "Driving safety systems" section
Important safety notes (Y page 66).
Crosswind Assist does not work if ESP® is Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function
switched off or deactivated because of a mal- can help you to minimize the risk of a collision
function. with a vehicle in front or a pedestrian and reduce
the effects of such a collision. If the Active Brake
Assist with cross-traffic function detects a risk
of collision, you will be warned visually and
EBD (electronic brake force distribu- acoustically and, if necessary, your brake appli-
tion) cation will be assisted according to the situa-
tion. If you do not react, the system can also
General information react by braking automatically. In the event of a
detected risk of collision due to crossing traffic,
EBD monitors and controls the brake pressure
you will also be visually and acoustically warned
on the rear wheels to improve driving stability
as well as assisted by the brake boosting effect
while braking.
according to the situation.
Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function is
Important safety notes only available in vehicles with the Driving Assis-
i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- tance Plus package.
tion for driving safety systems (Y page 66). For Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic func-
tion to assist you when driving, the radar sensor
system and the camera system must be opera-
tional.
Driving safety systems 73

If the radar sensor system or the camera system Always pay particular attention to the traffic
is malfunctioning, Active Brake Assist with situation and be prepared to brake, especially
cross-traffic function is restricted or no longer
available. The brake system is still available with if Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic func-
complete brake boosting effect and BAS. tion alerts you. Terminate the intervention in a
The radar sensor system and camera system non-critical driving situation.
help Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic func-
tion to detect obstacles that are in the path of G WARNING
your vehicle for an extended period of time. Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function

Safety
In addition, pedestrians in the path of your vehi- cannot always clearly identify people, partic-
cle can be detected.
ularly if they are moving. Active Brake Assist
Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function with cross-traffic function cannot intervene in
detects pedestrians using typical characteris-
tics such as body contours and the posture of a these cases. There is a risk of an accident.
person standing upright. Always pay particular attention to the traffic
situation and be prepared to brake, especially
i Observe the restrictions described in the
"Important safety notes" section if Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic func-
(Y page 73). tion alerts you.

Important safety notes In order to maintain the appropriate distance to


the vehicle in front and thus prevent a collision,
G WARNING you must apply the brakes yourself.
Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function G WARNING
will initially brake your vehicle by a partial Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function
application of the brakes if a danger of colli- does not react:
sion is detected. There may be a collision Rto small people, e.g. children
unless you brake yourself. Even after subse-
Rto animals
quent full application of the brakes a collision
cannot always be avoided, particularly when Rto oncoming vehicles
approaching at too high a speed. There is a Rwhen cornering
risk of an accident. As a result, Active Brake Assist with cross-
Always apply the brakes yourself and try to traffic function may not warn you or engage in
take evasive action, provided it is safe to do all critical situations. There is a risk of an acci-
so. dent.
Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-
In the event of a partial application of the brakes,
uation and be ready to brake.
the vehicle is braked with up to 50% of the full
braking pressure.
In the event of snowfall or heavy rain, the rec-
G WARNING ognition can be impaired.
Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function Recognition by the radar sensor system is also
impaired if:
cannot always clearly identify objects and
complex traffic situations. Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else
covering the sensors
In such cases, Active Brake Assist with cross-
Rthere is interference by other radar sources
traffic function might:
Rthere are strong radar reflections, for exam-
Rissue an unnecessary warning or engage ple in parking garages
Rneither give a warning nor intervene Ra narrow vehicle is traveling in front, e.g. a

There is a risk of an accident. motorbike

Z
74 Driving safety systems

Ra vehicle is traveling in front on a different line Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function
relative to the center of your vehicle can also brake the vehicle automatically under
Rvehicles quickly move into the radar sensor the following conditions:
system detection range Rthe driver and front-passenger have their seat
Recognition by the camera system is also belts fastened
impaired in the event of: and
Rdirt on the camera or if the camera is covered Rthe vehicle speed is between approximately
Rglare on the camera system, e.g. from the sun 4 mph (7 km/h) and 124 mph (200 km/h)
being low in the sky Up to a speed of approximately 44 mph
Safety

Rdarkness (70 km/h), Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic


Ror if: function may react to:
- pedestrians move quickly, e.g. into the path Rstationary objects in the path of your vehicle,
of the vehicle e.g. stopped or parked vehicles
- the camera system no longer recognizes a Rpedestrians in the path of your vehicle
pedestrian as a person due to special cloth- i If there is an increased risk of a collision,
ing or other objects preventive passenger protection measures
- a pedestrian is concealed by other objects
(PRE-SAFE®) are triggered (Y page 58).
- the typical outline of a person is not distin-
If the risk of collision with the vehicle in front
guishable from the background
remains and you do not brake, take evasive
Following damage to the front end of the vehicle, action or accelerate significantly, the vehicle
have the configuration and operation of the may perform automatic emergency braking, up
radar sensors checked at a qualified specialist to the point of full brake application. Automatic
workshop. This also applies to collisions at slow emergency braking is not performed until imme-
speeds where there is no visible damage to the diately prior to an imminent accident.
front of the vehicle.
If you apply the brake yourself in a critical sit-
Following damage to the windshield, have the uation or during autonomous braking, braking
configuration and operation of the camera sys- assistance is provided according to the situa-
tem checked at a qualified specialist workshop. tion. If necessary, this increases the brake pres-
sure up to full brake application.
Function To avoid a collision, Active Brake Assist with
cross-traffic function calculates the brake force
X To activate or deactivate: activate or deac-
necessary if:
tivate Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic
function using the on-board computer Ryou approach an obstacle, and
(Y page 237). RActive Brake Assist with cross-traffic function
If the Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic has detected a risk of a collision
function is deactivated, the æ symbol When driving at a speed under 20 mph
appears in the multifunction display. (30 km/h): if you depress the brake pedal,
If you have activated DSR (Y page 213), the Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function is
Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function is activated. The increase in brake pressure from
deactivated. Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function is
Starting at a speed of around 4 mph (7 km/h), carried out at the last possible moment.
this function warns you if you rapidly approach a When driving at a speed above 20 mph
vehicle in front. An intermittent warning tone (30 km/h): if you depress the brake pedal
will then sound and the · distance warning sharply, Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic
lamp will light up in the instrument cluster. function automatically increases the brake pres-
X Brake immediately to defuse the situation. sure to a degree suited to the traffic situation.
or Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function
provides braking assistance in hazardous situa-
X Take evasive action provided it is safe to do
tions with vehicles in front within a speed range
so. between 4 mph (7 km/h) and 155 mph
(250 km/h).
Protection against theft 75

Up to a speed of approximately 44 mph No steering assistance is provided from STEER


(70 km/h) the Active Brake Assist with cross- CONTROL, if:
traffic function assists you with braking in haz- RESP® is deactivated
ardous situations with:
RESP® is malfunctioning
Rstationary obstacles in the path of the vehicle,
Rthe steering is malfunctioning
e.g. stopped or parked vehicles
Rstationary pedestrians in the path of the vehi- If ESP® is malfunctioning, you will be assisted
cle further by the electrical power steering.
Robstacles crossing your path that move in the

Safety
detection range of the sensors and are detec-
ted Protection against theft
X Keep the brake pedal depressed until the
Immobilizer
emergency braking situation is over.
ABS prevents the wheels from locking. X To activate with the SmartKey: remove the
You can prevent the intervention of Active Brake SmartKey from the ignition lock.
Assist with cross-traffic function at any time by: X To activate with KEYLESS-GO: switch the

Rdepressing the accelerator pedal further


ignition off and open the driver's door.
X To deactivate: switch on the ignition.
Ractivating kickdown
Rreleasing the brake pedal The immobilizer prevents your vehicle from
The braking application of Active Brake Assist being started without the correct SmartKey.
with cross-traffic function is ended automati- When leaving the vehicle, always take the
cally if: SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Anyone
can start the engine if a valid SmartKey has been
Ryou maneuver to avoid the obstacle
left inside the vehicle.
Rthere is no longer a risk of collision
Rthere is no longer an obstacle detected in i The immobilizer is always deactivated when
front of your vehicle you start the engine.
In the event that the engine cannot be started
(yet the vehicle's battery is charged), the sys-
tem is not operational. Contact an authorized
STEER CONTROL Mercedes-Benz Center or call
General information 1-800 FOR-MERCEDES (in the USA) or
1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).
STEER CONTROL helps you by transmitting a
noticeable steering force to the steering wheel
in the direction required for vehicle stabilization. ATA (anti-theft alarm system)
This steering assistance is provided in particular
if:
Rboth right wheels or both left wheels are on a
wet or slippery road surface when you brake
Rthe vehicle starts to skid

Important safety notes


i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
tion (Y page 66).

Z
76 Protection against theft

X To arm: lock the vehicle with the SmartKey or i If the alarm continues for more than
KEYLESS-GO. 30 seconds, the mbrace emergency call sys-
Indicator lamp : flashes. The alarm system tem automatically notifies the Customer
is armed after approximately 15 seconds. Assistance Center. This is done either by text
X To switch off using the SmartKey: unlock message or data connection. The emergency
the vehicle with the SmartKey. call system sends the message or data provi-
or ded that:
X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. Ryou have subscribed to the mbrace service.
X To switch off using KEYLESS-GO: unlock Rthe mbrace service has been activated
Safety

the vehicle with KEYLESS-GO. properly.


or Rthe necessary mobile phone network is

X Press the Start/Stop button on the dash-


available.
board. The SmartKey must be inside the vehi-
cle.
A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the
alarm system is armed and you open:
Ra door
Rthe vehicle with the mechanical key
Rthe tailgate
Rthe hood
X To switch the alarm off with the Smart-
Key: press the % or & button on the
SmartKey.
The alarm is stopped.
or
X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
The alarm is stopped.
X To stop the alarm using KEYLESS-GO:
grasp the outside door handle. The SmartKey
must be outside the vehicle.
The alarm is stopped.
or
X Press the Start/Stop button on the dash-
board. The SmartKey must be inside the vehi-
cle.
The alarm is stopped.
The alarm is not switched off, even if you close
the open door that triggered it, for example.
SmartKey 77

SmartKey Do not keep the KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS-GO


Start function key in the temperature-controlled
Important safety notes cup holder. Otherwise, the KEYLESS-GO or KEY-
LESS-GO Start function key will not be detected.
G WARNING Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start function: do
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, not keep the SmartKey in the cargo compart-
they could: ment. Otherwise, the SmartKey may not be
detected, e.g. when starting the engine using
Ropen the doors, thus endangering other the Start/Stop button.
people or road users.
Rget out and disrupt traffic.
SmartKey functions

Opening and closing


Roperate the vehicle's equipment.
Additionally, children could set the vehicle in
motion if, for example, they:
Rrelease the parking brake.
Rshifting the automatic transmission out of
park position P
RStart the engine.
There is a risk of an accident and injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children or animals unattended in the : & To lock the vehicle
vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of ; F To open/close the tailgate
reach of children. = % To unlock the vehicle

G WARNING X To unlock centrally: press the % button.


If you do not open the vehicle within approx-
If you attach heavy or large objects to the imately 40 seconds of unlocking:
SmartKey, the SmartKey could be uninten-
Rthe vehicle is locked again.
tionally turned in the ignition lock. This could
Ranti-theft protection is reactivated.
cause the engine to be switched off. There is a
risk of an accident. X To lock centrally: press the & button.
Do not attach any heavy or large objects to the The SmartKey centrally locks and unlocks the
SmartKey. Remove any bulky key rings before following components:
inserting the SmartKey into the ignition lock. Rthe doors
Rthe tailgate
! Keep the SmartKey away from strong mag- Rthe fuel filler flap
netic fields. Otherwise, the remote control
function could be affected. The turn signals flash once when unlocking and
three times when locking.
Strong magnetic fields can occur in the vicin-
ity of powerful electrical installations. You can also set an audible signal to confirm
that the vehicle has been locked. The audible
Do not keep the SmartKey: signal can be activated and deactivated using
Rwith electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phone the on-board computer (Y page 239).
or another SmartKey. You will receive visual and acoustic locking con-
Rwith metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal foil. firmation if all components were able to be
Rinside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case. locked.
This can affect the functionality of the Smart-
Key.

Z
78 SmartKey

If activated in the multimedia system, the loca-


tor lighting also lights up in the dark (see the
Digital Operator's Manual).
X To open the tailgate automatically from
outside the vehicle: press and hold the F
button until the tailgate opens.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO:
X To close the tailgate automatically from
outside the vehicle: if the SmartKey is loca-
ted in the immediate vicinity of the vehicle,
press the F button on the SmartKey.
Opening and closing

When the tailgate closes you can then release X To unlock the vehicle: touch the inner sur-
the button. face of the door handle.
X To lock the vehicle: touch sensor surface :
or ;.
KEYLESS-GO Make sure that you do not touch the inner
surface of the door handle.
General notes X Convenience closing feature: touch
Bear in mind that the engine can be started by recessed sensor surface ; for an extended
any of the vehicle occupants if there is a KEY- period.
LESS-GO key in the vehicle (Y page 137). Further information on the convenience closing
feature (Y page 90).
Locking/unlocking centrally If you pull on the handle of the tailgate, only the
cargo compartment of the vehicle is unlocked.
You can start, lock or unlock the vehicle using
KEYLESS-GO. To do this, you only need carry the
SmartKey with you. You can combine the func- Deactivating and activating
tions of KEYLESS-GO with those of a conven-
If you do not intend to use a SmartKey for an
tional SmartKey. Unlock the vehicle by using
extended period of time, you can deactivate the
KEYLESS-GO, for instance, and lock it using the
KEYLESS-GO function of the SmartKey. The
& button on the SmartKey.
SmartKey will then use very little power, thereby
The driver's door and the door at which the han- conserving battery power. For the purposes of
dle is used, must both be closed. The SmartKey activation/deactivation, the vehicle must not be
must be outside the vehicle. When locking or nearby.
unlocking with KEYLESS-GO, the distance
X To deactivate: press the & button on the
between the SmartKey and the corresponding
door handle must not be greater than 3 ft (1 m). SmartKey twice in rapid succession.
The battery check lamp of the SmartKey
KEYLESS-GO checks whether a valid SmartKey flashes twice briefly and lights up once, KEY-
is in the vehicle by periodically establishing a LESS-GO is deactivated (Y page 80).
radio connection between the vehicle and the
X To activate: press any button on the Smart-
SmartKey. This happens:
Key.
Rwhen starting the engine
or
Rwhile driving
X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
Rwhen the external door handles are touched KEYLESS-GO and all of its associated features
Rduring convenience closing are available again.
SmartKey 79

KEYLESS-GO start function Mechanical key


General notes General notes
Bear in mind that the engine can be started by If the vehicle can no longer be locked or
any of the vehicle occupants if there is a Smart- unlocked with the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-
Key in the vehicle (Y page 137). GO, use the mechanical key.
If you use the mechanical key to unlock and
open the driver's door, the anti-theft alarm sys-
Changing the settings of the locking tem will be triggered. Switch off the alarm
system (Y page 75).
If you unlock the vehicle using the mechanical
You can change the settings of the locking sys-

Opening and closing


key, the fuel filler flap will not be unlocked auto-
tem. This means that only the driver's door and matically.
the fuel filler flap are unlocked when the vehicle
is unlocked. This is useful if you frequently travel X To unlock the fuel filler flap: insert the
alone. SmartKey into the ignition lock.
X To change the setting: press and hold down
the % and & buttons simultaneously Removing the mechanical key
for about six seconds until the battery indica-
tor lamp flashes twice (Y page 80).
If the setting of the locking system is changed
within the signal range of the vehicle, pressing
the & or % button:
Rlocks or
Runlocks the vehicle
The SmartKey now functions as follows:
X To unlock: press the % button once.
X To unlock centrally: press the % button
twice.
X To lock centrally: press the & button. X Push release catch : in the direction of the
The KEYLESS-GO function is changed as fol- arrow and at the same time remove mechan-
lows: ical key ; from the SmartKey.
X To unlock the driver's door: touch the inner For further information about:
surface of the door handle on the driver's RUnlocking the driver's door (Y page 84)
door. RUnlocking the cargo compartment
X To unlock centrally: touch the inner surface (Y page 88)
of the door handle on the front-passenger RLocking the vehicle (Y page 84)
door or the rear door.
X To lock centrally: touch the outer sensor Inserting the mechanical key
surface on one of the door handles
(Y page 78). X Push mechanical key ; completely into the
SmartKey until it engages and release
X To restore the factory settings: press and catch : is back in its basic position.
hold down the % and & buttons simul-
taneously for approximately six seconds until
the battery check lamp flashes twice
(Y page 80).

Z
80 SmartKey

SmartKey battery Checking the battery

Important safety notes


G WARNING
Batteries contain toxic and corrosive substan-
ces. If batteries are swallowed, it can result in
severe health problems. There is a risk of fatal
injury.
Keep batteries out of the reach of children. If
a battery is swallowed, seek medical attention
Opening and closing

immediately.
X Press the & or % button.
H Environmental note The battery is working properly if battery
Batteries contain dangerous check lamp : lights up briefly.
substances. It is against the The battery is discharged if battery check
law to dispose of them with lamp : does not light up briefly.
the household rubbish. They X Change the battery (Y page 80).
must be collected separately If the SmartKey battery is checked within the
and recycled to protect the signal reception range of the vehicle, pressing
environment. the & or % button:
Dispose of batteries in an Rlocks or
environmentally friendly Runlocks the vehicle
manner. Take discharged i You can get a battery at any qualified spe-
batteries to a qualified spe- cialist workshop.
cialist workshop or a special
collection point for used bat- Replacing the battery
teries.
You require a CR 2025 3 V cell battery.
The SmartKey batteries contain perchlorate X Take the mechanical key out of the SmartKey
material, which may require special handling (Y page 79).
and regard for the environment. National guide-
lines must be observed during disposal. In Cal-
ifornia, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/
HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/index.cfm.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the
batteries replaced at a qualified specialist work-
shop.

X Press mechanical key ; into the SmartKey


opening in the direction of the arrow until bat-
tery compartment cover : opens. Do not
hold battery compartment cover : closed
while doing so.
X Remove battery compartment cover :.
SmartKey 81

X Insert the front tabs of battery compartment


cover : into the housing first and then press
to close it.
X Insert mechanical key ; into the SmartKey
(Y page 79).
X Check the function of all SmartKey buttons on
the vehicle.

Opening and closing


X Repeatedly tap the SmartKey against your
palm until battery = falls out.
X Insert the new battery with the positive ter-
minal facing upwards. Use a lint-free cloth to
do so.
X Make sure that the surface of the battery is
free of lint, grease and other contaminants.

Problems with the SmartKey


Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
You can no longer lock or The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.
unlock the vehicle using X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 80) and replace it if necessary
the SmartKey. (Y page 80).
If this does not work:
X Unlock (Y page 84) or lock (Y page 84) the vehicle using the
mechanical key.

There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.


X Unlock (Y page 84) or lock (Y page 84) the vehicle using the
mechanical key.

The SmartKey is faulty.


X Unlock (Y page 84) or lock (Y page 84) the vehicle using the
mechanical key.
X Have the SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

You can no longer lock or KEYLESS-GO was deactivated.


unlock the vehicle using X Reactivate KEYLESS-GO (Y page 78).
KEYLESS-GO.
The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.
X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 80) and replace it if necessary
(Y page 80).
If this does not work:
X Unlock (Y page 84) or lock (Y page 84) the vehicle using the
mechanical key.

Z
82 SmartKey

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions


There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.
X Unlock (Y page 84) or lock (Y page 84) the vehicle using the
mechanical key.

KEYLESS-GO is malfunctioning.
X Lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of the
SmartKey.
X Have the vehicle and SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist
workshop.
Opening and closing

If the vehicle can also not be locked/unlocked using the remote con-
trol function:
X Unlock (Y page 84) or lock (Y page 84) the vehicle using the
mechanical key.
X Have the vehicle and SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist
workshop.
The engine cannot be The on-board voltage is too low.
started using the Smart- X Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. seat heating or interior
Key. lighting, and try to start the engine again.
If this does not work:
X Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary (Y page 342).
or
X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 342).
or
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The engine cannot be The vehicle is locked.


started using the Start/ X Unlock the vehicle and try to start the vehicle again.
Stop button. The Smart-
Key is in the vehicle. The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.
X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 80) and replace it if necessary
(Y page 80).
If this does not work:
X Start your vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.

There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.


X Start your vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.

You have lost a Smart- X Have the SmartKey deactivated at a qualified specialist workshop.
Key. X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.
X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.

You have lost the X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.
mechanical key. X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.
Doors 83

Doors X Front door: pull door handle ;.


If the door is locked, locking knob : pops up.
Important safety notes The door is unlocked and can be opened.
X Rear door: pull door handle ;.
G WARNING If the door is locked, locking knob : pops up
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, and the door unlocks.
they could: X Pull door handle ; again.
The door can be opened.
Ropen the doors, thus endangering other
people or road users.
Rget out and disrupt traffic.
Centrally locking and unlocking the

Opening and closing


Roperate the vehicle's equipment. vehicle from the inside
Additionally, children could set the vehicle in You can centrally lock or unlock the vehicle from
motion if, for example, they: the inside. The buttons are located on both front
Rrelease the parking brake. doors.
Rshifting the automatic transmission out of
park position P
RStart the engine.
There is a risk of an accident and injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children or animals unattended in the
vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of
reach of children.

X To unlock: press button :.


Unlocking and opening doors from X To lock: press button ;.
the inside If the front-passenger door is closed, the vehi-
cle locks.
You can open a door from inside the vehicle
even if it has been locked. You can only open the Meanwhile, the fuel filler flap will not be locked
rear doors from inside the vehicle if they are not or unlocked.
secured by the child-proof locks (Y page 65). You cannot unlock the vehicle centrally from the
If the vehicle has previously been locked from inside if the vehicle has been locked from the
the outside, opening a door from the inside will outside.
trigger the anti-theft alarm system. Switch off You can open a front door from inside the vehi-
the alarm (Y page 75). cle even if it has been locked.
If a locked door is opened from the inside, the
previous unlock status of the vehicle will be
taken into consideration if:
Rthe vehicle was locked using the locking but-
ton for the central locking, or
Rif the vehicle was locked automatically
The vehicle will be fully unlocked if it had previ-
ously been fully unlocked. If only the driver's
door had been previously unlocked, only the
door which has been opened from the inside is
unlocked.

Z
84 Cargo compartment

Automatic locking feature Unlocking/locking the driver's door


using the mechanical key
i If you want to centrally lock the vehicle using
the mechanical key, begin by pressing the
locking button for the interior locking mech-
anism while the driver's door is open. Then
proceed to lock the driver's door using the
mechanical key.
Opening and closing

X To deactivate: press and hold button : for


about five seconds until a tone sounds.
X To activate: press and hold button ; for
about five seconds until a tone sounds.
If you press one of the two buttons and do not
hear a tone, the relevant setting has already
been selected.
The vehicle is locked automatically when the X Insert the mechanical key into the lock of the
ignition is switched on and the wheels are turn- driver's door as far as it will go.
ing. X To unlock: turn the mechanical key counter-
You could therefore be locked out if: clockwise to position 1.
X To lock: turn the mechanical key clockwise as
Rthe vehicle is being pushed.
far as it will go to position 1.
Rthe vehicle is being towed.
Rthe vehicle is on a roller dynamometer. If you use the mechanical key to unlock and
open the driver's door, the anti-theft alarm sys-
You can also switch the automatic locking func- tem will be triggered. Switch off the alarm
tion on and off using the on-board computer (Y page 75).
(Y page 239).
If you lock the vehicle as described above, the
fuel filler flap is not locked. The anti-theft alarm
system is not armed.
Power closing
Power closing pulls the doors and tailgate into
their locks automatically even if they are not Cargo compartment
completely closed.
X To power close a door: push the door into
Important safety notes
the lock up to the first detent position. G WARNING
Power closing will pull the door fully closed.
X To power close the tailgate: lightly press Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
the tailgate downwards. gases such as carbon monoxide. If the tailgate
Power closing will pull the tailgate fully is open when the engine is running, particu-
closed. larly if the vehicle is moving, exhaust fumes
could enter the passenger compartment.
There is a risk of poisoning.
Turn off the engine before opening the tail-
gate. Never drive with the tailgate open.
Cargo compartment 85

G WARNING automatically. The automatic obstacle recogni-


tion with reversing feature is only an aid. It is not
If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or a substitute for your attentiveness when open-
not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip ing and closing the tailgate.
over or be flung around and thereby hit vehicle
occupants. There is a risk of injury, particu- G WARNING
larly in the event of sudden braking or a sud- The reversing feature does not respond:
den change in direction. Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fingers
Always store objects so that they cannot be Rover the last Ó in (8 mm) of the closing
flung around. Secure objects, luggage or movement
loads against slipping or tipping before the The reversing feature cannot prevent some-

Opening and closing


journey. one from becoming trapped in these situa-
tions in particular. There is a risk of injury.
! The tailgate swings upwards and to the rear
when opened. Therefore, make sure that Make sure that no body parts are in close
there is sufficient clearance above and behind proximity during the closing procedure.
the tailgate. If somebody becomes trapped:
The opening dimensions of the tailgate can be Rpress the F button on the SmartKey, or
found in the "Vehicle data" section
(Y page 390). Rpull or press the remote operating switch
You should preferably place luggage or loads in on the driver's door or
the cargo compartment. Observe the loading Rpress the closing or locking button on the
guidelines (Y page 295). tailgate or
Do not leave the SmartKey in the cargo com- Rpull the handle on the tailgate
partment. You could otherwise lock yourself
out.
Vehicles without the EASY-PACK tailgate:
the tailgate can be: Opening and closing manually from
Ropened and closed manually from outside outside
Runlocked from inside with the emergency
Opening
release
For vehicles with the EASY-PACK tailgate:
you can:
Rclose the tailgate manually from outside
Ropen the tailgate automatically from outside
Ropen and close the tailgate automatically
from inside
Runlock the tailgate from inside with the emer-
gency release
Rlimit the opening angle of the tailgate

Tailgate reversing feature X Press the % button on the SmartKey.


X Pull handle :.
On vehicles with the tailgate remote closing fea-
X Raise the tailgate.
ture, the tailgate is equipped with automatic
obstacle recognition with a reversing feature. If Vehicles with the EASY-PACK tailgate: if you
a solid object blocks or restricts the tailgate pull handle : and then release it, the tailgate
when automatically opening or closing, this pro- opens automatically.
cedure is stopped. If the tailgate is stopped dur-
ing the closing procedure, it will open again
Z
86 Cargo compartment

Closing is open when the engine is running, particu-


larly if the vehicle is moving, exhaust fumes
could enter the passenger compartment.
There is a risk of poisoning.
Turn off the engine before opening the tail-
gate. Never drive with the tailgate open.

! The tailgate swings upwards and to the rear


when opened. Therefore, make sure that
there is sufficient clearance above and behind
the tailgate.
Opening and closing

Two warning tones sound while the tailgate is


opening or closing.
X Pull the tailgate down using recess :.
The opening dimensions of the tailgate can be
X Allow the tailgate to drop into the lock. found in the "Vehicle data" section
X Lock the vehicle if necessary with the & (Y page 390).
button on the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO.
i Notes on the automatic reversing feature for
i If a KEYLESS-GO key is detected in the cargo the tailgate (Y page 85).
compartment, the tailgate will not lock.
Opening the tailgate automatically
Opening/closing automatically from You can open the tailgate automatically with the
the outside SmartKey or the handle in the tailgate.
X Press and hold the F button on the Smart-
Important safety notes Key until the tailgate opens.
or
G WARNING X When the tailgate is unlocked, pull the tailgate
Parts of the body could become trapped dur- handle and let it go again immediately.
ing automatic closing of the tailgate. More- or
over, people, e.g. children, may be standing in X With the tailgate stopped in an intermediate
the closing area or may enter the closing area position, pull the tailgate upwards.
during the closing process. There is a risk of You can release the tailgate as soon as the
injury. tailgate starts to open.
Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the
closing area during the closing process. Closing the tailgate automatically
Use one of the following options to stop the
closing process:
Rpress the F button on the SmartKey.
Rpull or press the remote operating switch
on the driver's door.
Rpress the closing or locking button on the
tailgate.
Rpull the handle on the tailgate

G WARNING
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. If the tailgate
Cargo compartment 87

X To close: press closing button : in the tail- G WARNING


gate.
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
or
gases such as carbon monoxide. If the tailgate
X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS-GO
is open when the engine is running, particu-
starting function: press and hold the F
button on the SmartKey until the tailgate larly if the vehicle is moving, exhaust fumes
closes. could enter the passenger compartment.
You can release the button as soon as the There is a risk of poisoning.
tailgate starts to close. Turn off the engine before opening the tail-
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS-GO gate. Never drive with the tailgate open.
starting function: you can close and lock the
tailgate simultaneously. ! The tailgate swings upwards and to the rear

Opening and closing


X Press locking button ; in the tailgate. when opened. Therefore, make sure that
If a KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS-GO starting there is sufficient clearance above and behind
function key is detected outside the vehicle, the tailgate.
the tailgate closes and locks. All the doors Two warning tones sound while the tailgate is
must be shut and the SmartKey located in the opening or closing.
vicinity of the tailgate. The opening dimensions of the tailgate can be
i The tailgate cannot be opened and closed found in the "Vehicle data" section
with the SmartKey if there is a SmartKey in the (Y page 390).
ignition.
i Notes on the automatic reversing feature for
If the tailgate touches an object while closing, the tailgate (Y page 85).
the closing procedure is interrupted and the
tailgate reopens.
If a KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS-GO starting
Opening and closing
function key is detected in the cargo com-
partment, the tailgate will not lock.

Opening/closing automatically from


inside
Important safety notes
G WARNING
Parts of the body could become trapped dur-
ing automatic closing of the tailgate. In addi-
tion, people may be standing in the closing X To open: pull remote operating switch : for
area or may enter the closing area, e.g. chil- the tailgate until the tailgate opens.
dren, during the closing procedure. There is a X To close: turn the SmartKey to position 1 or

risk of injury. 2 in the ignition lock.


X Press remote operating switch for tailgate :
Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the until the tailgate is completely closed.
closing area during the closing process.
Release the remote operating switch imme- You can open and close the tailgate from the
driver's seat when the vehicle is stationary and
diately if somebody becomes trapped. To re- unlocked.
open the tailgate pull on the remote operating
switch.

Z
88 Side windows

Limiting the opening angle of the tail- Opening


gate
General notes
! Make sure there is sufficient clearance to
open the tailgate fully when setting the open-
ing angle. The tailgate could otherwise be
damaged. Ideally, set the opening angle out-
side.

Activating
Opening and closing

You can limit the opening angle of the tailgate.


This is possible in the top half of its opening X Take mechanical key ; out of the SmartKey
range, up to approximately 4 in (10 cm) before (Y page 79).
the stop. X Insert mechanical key ; or a suitable tool,
X To open the tailgate: pull the handle on the e.g. a thin screwdriver, into opening : in the
tailgate. paneling and push it in.
X To stop the opening procedure at the The tailgate is released.
desired position: press the closing button in X Open the tailgate.
the tailgate or pull the handle on the outside X Insert mechanical key ; into the SmartKey
of the tailgate again. (Y page 79).
X To save the position: press and hold the
closing button in the tailgate until two short
tones sound.
The opening angle limiter is activated. The
Side windows
tailgate will now stop in the stored position Important safety notes
when opening.
G WARNING
Deactivating While opening the side windows, body parts
X Press and hold the closing button in the tail- could become trapped between the side win-
gate until you hear a short tone. dow and the door frame as the side window
moves. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that nobody touches the side win-
Tailgate emergency release dow during the opening procedure. If some-
body becomes trapped, release the switch or
General notes pull the switch to close the side window again.
! The tailgate swings upwards and to the rear
when opened. Therefore, make sure that G WARNING
there is sufficient clearance above and behind While closing the side windows, body parts in
the tailgate. the closing area could become trapped. There
The opening dimensions of the tailgate can be is a risk of injury.
found in the "Vehicle data" section
When closing make sure that no parts of the
(Y page 390).
body are in the closing area. If somebody
If the tailgate can no longer be unlocked:
becomes trapped, release the switch or press
Rusing the SmartKey, or
the switch to open the side window again.
Rusing the remote operating switch in the door
control panel:
Use the emergency release.
Side windows 89

G WARNING
If children operate the side windows they
could become trapped, particularly if they are
left unsupervised. There is a risk of injury.
Activate the override feature for the rear side
windows. When leaving the vehicle, always
take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehi-
cle. Never leave children unsupervised in the
vehicle.

Opening and closing


: Front left
Side window reversing feature ; Front right
= Rear right
The side windows are equipped with an auto-
matic reversing feature. If a solid object blocks ? Rear left
or restricts a side window during the closing X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
process, the side window opens again automat- ignition lock.
ically. However, the automatic reversing feature X To open manually: press and hold the cor-
is only an aid and does not relieve you of the responding switch.
responsibility of paying attention when closing a X To open fully: press the switch beyond the
side window.
pressure point and release it.
G WARNING Automatic operation is started.
X To close manually: pull the corresponding
The reversing feature does not react:
switch and hold it.
Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin- X To close fully: pull the switch beyond the
gers pressure point and release it.
Rover the last 1/6 in(4 mm) of the closing Automatic operation is started.
movement X To interrupt automatic operation: press/
Rduring resetting pull the corresponding switch again.
Rwhen closing the side window again man- If you press the switch beyond the pressure
point and release, automatic operation is star-
ually immediately after automatic reversing
ted in the corresponding direction. You can stop
This means that the reversing feature cannot automatic operation by pressing/pulling the
prevent someone being trapped in these sit- switch again.
uations. There is a risk of injury. You can continue to operate the side windows
Make sure that no body parts are in close after you switch off the engine or remove the
SmartKey. This function is available for up to five
proximity during the closing procedure. If
minutes or until the driver's or front-passenger
someone becomes trapped, press the switch door is opened.
to open the side window again. The side windows cannot be operated from the
rear when the override feature for the side win-
dows is activated (Y page 65).
Opening and closing the side win-
dows
Convenience opening
The switches for all side windows are located on
the driver's door. There is also a switch on each General notes
door for the corresponding side window.
The switches on the driver's door take prece- Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS-GO
dence. start function: you can ventilate the vehicle
before you start driving.

Z
90 Side windows

To do this, the SmartKey is used to carry out the When you lock the vehicle, you can simultane-
following functions simultaneously: ously:
Runlock the vehicle Rclose the side windows
Ropen the side windows Rclose the sliding sunroof or the panorama roof
Ropen the sliding sunroof or the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel
with power tilt/sliding panel and the roller On vehicles with a panorama roof with power
sunblinds tilt/sliding panel, you can then close the roller
Rswitch on the seat ventilation for the driver's sunblinds.
seat Proceed as follows if someone is trapped:
The convenience opening feature can only be RRelease the & button to interrupt the clos-
operated using the SmartKey. The SmartKey ing procedure.
Opening and closing

must be close to the vehicle. For vehicles with- RPress and hold the % button to open.
out KEYLESS-GO, the SmartKey must be near
the driver's door handle. Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO:
The "convenience opening" feature is also avail- RRelease the sensor surfaces on the exterior
able when the vehicle is unlocked. door handle to interrupt the closing proce-
dure.
Convenience opening RTo open, pull the same door handle immedi-
ately and hold it firmly. The door windows and
X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: point the tip the sliding sunroof will open for as long as the
of the SmartKey at the door handle on the door handle is held but the door is not
driver's door. opened.
X Press and hold the % button until the side Notes on the automatic reversing feature for:
windows and the sliding sunroof or panorama Rthe side window (Y page 89)
roof with power tilt/sliding panel are in the
Rthe sliding sunroof (Y page 93)
desired position.
If the roller sunblinds of the panorama roof Rthe panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
with power tilt/sliding panel are closed, the panel (Y page 93)
roller sunblinds are opened first.
X Press and hold the % button again until the Using the SmartKey
panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is
in the desired position. The SmartKey must be close to the vehicle. For
vehicles without KEYLESS-GO, the SmartKey
X To interrupt convenience opening: release
must be near the driver's door handle.
the % button.
X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: point the tip
of the SmartKey at the door handle on the
driver's door.
Convenience closing feature X Press and hold the & button until the side
windows and the sliding sunroof or the pano-
Important safety notes rama roof with power tilt/sliding panel are
fully closed.
G WARNING
X Make sure that all the side windows and the
When the convenience closing feature is oper- sliding sunroof or panorama roof with power
ating, parts of the body could become trapped tilt/sliding panel are closed.
in the closing area of the side window and the
On vehicles with a panorama roof with power
sliding sunroof. There is a risk of injury. tilt/sliding panel:
Observe the complete closing procedure X Press and hold the & button again until the
when the convenience closing feature is oper- roller sunblinds of the panorama roof with
ating. Make sure that no body parts are in power tilt/sliding panel close.
close proximity during the closing procedure. X To interrupt convenience closing: release
the & button.
Side windows 91

Using KEYLESS-GO until the roller sunblinds of the panorama roof


with power tilt/sliding panel close.
X To interrupt convenience closing: release
recessed sensor surface : on the door han-
dle.

Resetting the side windows


If a side window can no longer be closed fully,
you must reset it.
X Close all the doors.

Opening and closing


X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
XTouch recessed sensor surface : on the ignition lock.
door handle until the side windows and the X Pull the corresponding switch on the door
sliding sunroof or the panorama roof with control panel until the side window is com-
power tilt/sliding panel are fully closed. pletely closed (Y page 89).
i Make sure you only touch recessed sensor X Hold the switch for an additional second.
surface :. If the side window opens again slightly:
X Make sure that all the side windows and the X Immediately pull the corresponding switch on
sliding sunroof or panorama roof with power the door control panel until the side window is
tilt/sliding panel are closed. completely closed (Y page 89).
X Vehicles with a panorama roof with X Hold the switch for an additional second.
power tilt/sliding panel: touch recessed X If the respective side window remains closed
sensor surface : on the door handle again after the button is released, then it has been
set correctly. If this is not the case, repeat the
steps above.

Problems with the side windows


G WARNING
If you close a side window again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the side window
closes with increased or maximum force. The reversing feature is then not active. Parts of the
body could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk of injury or
even fatal injury.
Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. To stop the closing process, release
the switch or push the switch again to reopen the side window.

Z
92 Sliding sunroof

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions


A side window cannot be X Remove the objects.
closed because it is X Close the side window.
blocked by objects, e.g.
leaves in the window
guide.
A side window cannot be If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens again
closed and you cannot slightly:
see the cause. X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding switch
again until the side window has closed.
Opening and closing

The side window is closed with increased force.


If a side window is obstructed again during closing and reopens again
slightly:
X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding switch
again until the side window has closed.
The side window is closed without the automatic reversing feature.

The side windows cannot The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.
be opened or closed with X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 80) and replace it if necessary
convenience opening. (Y page 80).

If a side window will still not open or close due to a malfunction, consult a qualified specialist
workshop.

Sliding sunroof G WARNING


If children operate the sliding sunroof they
Important safety notes
could become trapped, particularly if they are
Your vehicle may be equipped with a sliding left unsupervised. There is a risk of injury.
sunroof or a panorama roof with power tilt/slid-
ing panel. In the following section, the term When leaving the vehicle, always take the
"sliding sunroof" refers to both sliding sunroof SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
variants. leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
G WARNING ! Only open the sliding sunroof if it is free of
While opening and closing the sliding sunroof, snow and ice. Otherwise, malfunctions may
body parts in close proximity could become occur.
trapped. There is a risk of injury. Do not allow anything to protrude from the
sliding sunroof. Otherwise, the seals could be
Make sure that no body parts are in close damaged.
proximity during the opening and closing pro-
cedures. ! The weather can change abruptly. It could
start to rain or snow. Make sure that the slid-
If somebody becomes trapped: ing sunroof is closed when you leave the vehi-
Rrelease the switch immediately, or cle. The vehicle electronics can be damaged if
water enters the vehicle interior.
Rduring automatic operation, push the
switch briefly in any direction Resonance noises can occur in addition to the
usual airflow noises when the sliding sunroof is
The opening or closing procedure will be stop- open. They are caused by minor pressure fluc-
ped. tuations in the vehicle interior. Change the posi-
Sliding sunroof 93

tion of the sliding sunroof or open a side win- Operating the sliding sunroof
dow. The noise will be reduced or eliminated.
Opening and closing

Sliding sunroof reversing feature


Your vehicle may be equipped with a sliding
sunroof or a panorama roof with power tilt/slid-
ing panel. In the following section, the term
"sliding sunroof" refers to both sliding sunroof
variants.
The sliding sunroof is equipped with an auto-

Opening and closing


matic reversing feature. If a solid object blocks
or restricts the sliding sunroof during the closing
process, the sliding sunroof opens again auto-
matically. However, the automatic reversing
feature is only an aid and does not relieve you of : To raise
the responsibility of paying attention when clos- ; To open
ing the sliding sunroof. = To close/lower
G WARNING X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
The reversing feature does not react: ignition lock.
X Press or pull the 2 switch in the corre-
Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin- sponding direction.
gers
If you press the 2 switch beyond the pres-
Rover the last 1/6 in (4 mm) of the closing sure point, an automatic opening/closing proc-
movement ess is started in the corresponding direction.
Rduring resetting You can stop automatic operation by pressing/
pulling the switch again.
Rwhen closing the sliding sunroof again man-
When opening and raising the roof, automatic
ually immediately after automatic reversing operation is only available if the sliding sunroof
This means that the reversing feature cannot is in the closed position.
prevent someone being trapped in these sit- The sun protection cover automatically opens
uations. There is a risk of injury. along with the sliding sunroof. You can open or
close the sun protection cover manually when
Make sure that no body parts are in close
the sliding sunroof is raised or closed.
proximity during the closing procedure.
You can continue to operate the sliding sunroof
If somebody becomes trapped: after switching off the engine or removing the
Rrelease the switch immediately, or SmartKey from the ignition lock. This function is
available for up to five minutes or until the driv-
Rpress the switch in any direction during the er's or front-passenger door is opened.
automatic closing process
The closing process is stopped. Resetting
! If the sliding sunroof still cannot be opened
or closed fully after resetting, contact a quali-
fied specialist workshop.
Reset the sliding sunroof if it does not move
smoothly.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock.
X Raise the sliding sunroof fully at the rear
(Y page 93).

Z
94 Sliding sunroof

X Keep the 2 switch pressed for another Operating the roller sunblinds for the
second. panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
X Make sure that the sliding sunroof can be fully
panel
opened and closed again (Y page 93).
X If this is not the case, repeat the steps above. Important safety notes
G WARNING
Operating the panorama roof with Parts of the body could become trapped
power tilt/sliding panel between the roller sunblind and frame or slid-
ing sunroof during automatic opening or clos-
Opening and closing ing. There is a risk of injury.
Opening and closing

When opening or closing, make sure that no


body parts are in the sweep of the roller sun-
blind.
If somebody becomes trapped:
Rrelease the switch immediately, or
Rduring automatic operation, push the
switch briefly in any direction
The opening or closing procedure will be stop-
ped.

: To raise The roller sunblinds shield the vehicle interior


; To open from sunlight. The roller sunblinds can only be
= To close/lower opened and closed together when the pano-
rama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is closed.
The panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel
can only be opened when the roller sunblind is
open.
Roller sunblind reversing feature
X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the The roller sunblinds are equipped with an auto-
ignition lock. matic reversing feature. If a solid object blocks
X Press or pull the 2 switch in the corre- or restricts a roller sunblind during the closing
sponding direction. process, the roller sunblind opens again auto-
matically. However, the automatic reversing
If you press/pull the 2 switch beyond the feature is only an aid and is not a substitute of
pressure point, automatic operation is started in your attentiveness when closing the roller sun-
the corresponding direction. You can stop auto- blind.
matic operation by pressing/pulling the switch
again. G WARNING
The automatic raising feature is available only The reversing feature does not react in par-
when the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding ticular to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small
panel is closed. fingers. This means that the reversing feature
cannot prevent someone being trapped in
these situations. There is a risk of injury.
When closing the roller sunblind, make sure
that no body parts are in the sweep area.
Sliding sunroof 95

If somebody becomes trapped: You can stop automatic operation by pressing/


pulling the switch again.
Rrelease the switch immediately, or
Rpress the switch in any direction during the Resetting the panorama roof with
automatic closing process power tilt/sliding panel and the roller
The closing process is stopped. sunblinds
! If the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
Opening and closing the roller sun- panel and the roller sunblinds cannot be fully
blinds opened or closed after resetting, contact a
qualified specialist workshop.
Reset the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding

Opening and closing


panel and the roller sunblinds if the panorama
roof with power tilt/sliding panel or the roller
sunblinds do not move smoothly.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock.
X Pull the 2 switch repeatedly to the point of
resistance in the direction of arrow = until
the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
panel is fully closed.
X Keep the 2 switch pulled for an additional
: Opens second.
; Opens X Pull the 2 switch repeatedly to the point of
= Closes resistance in the direction of arrow = until
the roller sunblinds are fully closed.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock. X Keep the 2 switch pulled for an additional

X Press or pull the 2 switch in the corre-


second.
sponding direction. X Make sure that the panorama roof with power
tilt/sliding panel and the roller sunblinds can
If you press the 2 switch beyond the pres- be fully opened again.
sure point, an automatic opening/closing proc- X If this is not the case, repeat the steps above.
ess is started in the corresponding direction.

Problems with the sliding sunroof


Your vehicle may be equipped with a sliding sunroof or a panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
panel. In the following section, the term "sliding sunroof" refers to both sliding sunroof variants.
G WARNING
If you close the sliding sunroof again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the sliding
sunroof closes with increased or maximum force. The reversing feature is then not active. Parts
of the body could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk of
injury or even fatal injury.
Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area.
If somebody becomes trapped:
Rrelease the switch immediately, or
Rpress the switch in any direction during the automatic closing process
The closing process is stopped.

Z
96 Sliding sunroof

! If the sliding sunroof still cannot be opened or closed as a result of a malfunction, contact a
qualified specialist workshop.
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The sliding sunroof can- If the sliding sunroof is obstructed during closing and reopens again
not be closed and you slightly:
cannot see the cause. X Immediately after the sliding sunroof blocks, pull the 2 switch in
the overhead control panel down to the point of resistance and hold
it until the sliding sunroof is closed.
The sliding sunroof is closed with increased force.
If the sliding sunroof is obstructed again during closing and then
Opening and closing

reopens slightly:
X Immediately after the sliding sunroof blocks, pull the 2 switch in
the overhead control panel down to the point of resistance and hold
it until the sliding sunroof is closed.
The sliding sunroof is closed without the automatic reversing fea-
ture.
Seats 97

Correct driver's seat position Ryou should have a good overview of traffic
conditions
Rthe seat belt is pulled snugly against the body
G WARNING and is routed across the center of your shoul-
You could lose control of your vehicle if you do der and across your hips in the pelvic area
the following while driving: Further related subjects:
Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint, RElectrical seat adjustment (Y page 98)
steering wheel or mirrors RAdjusting the steering wheel mechanically
Rfasten the seat belt (Y page 103) or electrically (Y page 104)
RFastening the seat belt correctly (Y page 48).
There is a risk of an accident.
RAdjusting the rear-view mirror and exterior
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer- mirrors (Y page 105).
ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt RVehicles with memory function: storing the
before starting the engine. seat, steering wheel, exterior mirror and

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors


Head-up display settings with the memory
function (Y page 108)

Seats
Important safety notes
G WARNING
Children could become trapped if they adjust
the seats, particularly when unattended.
There is a risk of injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

The seats can still be adjusted when there is no


SmartKey in the ignition lock.
Observe the following when adjusting steering
wheel :, seat belt ; and driver's seat =: G WARNING
Ryou are as far away from the driver's air bag as When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle
possible occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the
Ryou are sitting in a normal upright position seat guide rail. There is a risk of injury.
Ryour thighs are slightly supported by the seat Make sure when adjusting a seat that no one
cushion has any body parts in the sweep of the seat.
Ryour legs are not entirely stretched and you
can depress the pedals properly Observe the safety notes on "Air bags"
Rthe back of your head is supported at eye level (Y page 49) and "Children in the Vehicle"
by the center of the head restraint (Y page 59).
Ryou can hold the steering wheel with your
arms slightly bent
Ryou can move your legs freely
Ryou can see all the displays in the instrument
cluster clearly

Z
98 Seats

G WARNING Adjust the seat properly before beginning


You could lose control of your vehicle if you do your journey. Always ensure that the backrest
the following while driving: is in an almost vertical position and that the
shoulder section of your seat belt is routed
Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
across the center of your shoulder.
steering wheel or mirrors
Rfasten the seat belt ! To avoid damage to the seats and the seat
There is a risk of an accident. heating, observe the following information:
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer- Rkeep liquids from spilling on the seats. If
ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt liquid is spilled on the seats, dry them as
soon as possible.
before starting the engine.
Rif the seat covers are damp or wet, do not
switch on the seat heating. The seat heat-
G WARNING ing should also not be used to dry the seats.
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you or Rclean the seat covers as recommended;
other vehicle occupants could be trapped and see "Interior care".
thereby injured. Children in particular could Rdo not transport heavy loads on the seats.
accidentally press the electrical seat adjust- Do not place sharp objects on the seat
ment buttons and become trapped. There is a cushions, e.g. knives, nails or tools. The
risk of injury. seats should only be occupied by passen-
gers, if possible.
While moving the seats, make sure that your Rwhen the seat heating is in operation, do
hands or other body parts do not get under the not cover the seats with insulating materi-
lever assembly of the seat adjustment sys- als, e.g. blankets, coats, bags, seat covers,
tem. child seats or booster seats.
! Make sure that there are no objects in the
G WARNING footwell under or behind the seats when mov-
If the head restraints are not installed or not ing the seats back. There is a risk that the
adjusted correctly, they cannot provide pro- seats and/or the objects could be damaged.
tection as intended. There is an increased risk i Further related subjects:
of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the
RCargo compartment enlargement (folding
event of an accident or when braking. down the rear bench seat) (Y page 298)
Always drive with the head restraints instal-
led. Before driving off, make sure for every
vehicle occupant that the center of the head Adjusting the seats electrically
restraint supports the back of the head at
about eye level.

G WARNING
The seat belt does not offer the intended level
of protection if you have not moved the back-
rest to an almost vertical position. When brak-
ing or in the event of an accident, you could
slide underneath the seat belt and sustain
abdomen or neck injuries, for example. This
poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal
injury. : Head restraint height
; Seat cushion angle
= Seat height
Seats 99

? Seat fore-and-aft adjustment Adjusting the head restraints manually


A Backrest angle
Adjusting the head restraint height
i Vehicles with memory function: if PRE-
SAFE® has been triggered, the front-
passenger seat will be moved to a better posi-
tion if it was previously in an unfavorable posi-
tion.
i Vehicles with memory function: when the
seat is moved forwards or backwards, the
headrest is moved up or down automatically.

Adjusting the head restraints

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors


Important safety notes X To raise: pull the head restraint up to the
desired position.
G WARNING
X To lower: press release catch : in the direc-
You could lose control of your vehicle if you do tion of the arrow and push the head restraint
the following while driving: down to the desired position.
Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
Adjusting the fore/aft position of the
steering wheel or mirrors
head restraint
Rfasten the seat belt
There is a risk of an accident.
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-
ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt
before starting the engine.

G WARNING
If the head restraints are not installed or not
adjusted correctly, they cannot provide pro-
tection as intended. There is an increased risk
of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the
event of an accident or when braking. With this function you can adjust the distance
Always drive with the head restraints instal- between the head restraint and the back of the
seat occupant's head.
led. Before driving off, make sure for every
X To move forwards: pull the head restraint
vehicle occupant that the center of the head
forwards in the direction of the arrow until it
restraint supports the back of the head at engages.
about eye level.
There are several notches.
Do not rotate the head restraints of the front and X To move backwards: press and hold release
rear seats. Otherwise, you cannot adjust the button : and push the head restraint back-
height and angle of the head restraints to the wards.
correct position. X When the head restraint is in the desired posi-
Using the fore-and-aft adjustment, adjust the tion, release the button and make sure that
head restraint so that it is as close as possible to the head restraint is engaged in position.
your head. i Adjust the head restraint so that the back of
Observe the important safety notes regarding your head is as close to the head restraint as
the seats (Y page 97). possible.

Z
100 Seats

Adjusting the head restraints electri- X Once the head restraint is fully lowered, press
cally release catch :.
X To raise: pull the head restraint up to the
X To adjust the head restraint height: slide desired position.
the switch for the head restraint adjustment X To lower: press release catch : and push
(Y page 98) up or down in the direction of the
arrow. the head restraint down until it is in the
desired position.

Adjusting the luxury head restraints Removing and installing the rear seat
head restraints
X To remove: pull the head restraint up to the
stop.
X Press release catch : and pull the head
restraint out of the guides.
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

X To re-install: insert the head restraint so that


the notches on the bar are on the left when
viewed in the direction of travel.
X Push the head restraint down until you hear it
engage in position.

X To adjust the side bolsters of the head


restraint: push or pull right and/or left-hand
Adjusting the angle of the rear seat
side bolster : into the desired position. backrests
X To adjust the fore/aft position of the head
restraint: push or pull the head restraint in
the direction of arrow ;.
i Adjust the head restraint so that the back of
your head is as close to the head restraint as
possible.

Rear seat head restraints


Adjusting the rear seat head restraint
height
You can adjust the angle of the backrests in the
second row of seats. There are several possible
detent positions.
X Pull the left or right release lever ; upwards
in the direction of the arrow until relevant
backrest : is fully released.
X Pull backrest : forwards in the direction of
the arrow and allow it to engage.
X To ensure that the backrest has engaged, lean
firmly against backrest :.
Seats 101

Adjusting the multicontour seat = Lowers the backrest contour


? Hardens the backrest contour
The multicontour seat can be adjusted via the
multimedia system (see the Digital Operator's You can adjust the contour of the front seat
Manual). backrests individually to provide optimum sup-
port for your back.

Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors


: Raises the backrest contour
; Softens the backrest contour

Seat heating and seat ventilation


Switching the seat heating on/off
G WARNING
Repeatedly switching on the seat heating can cause the seat cushion and backrest pads to
become very hot. The health of persons with limited temperature sensitivity or a limited ability to
react to high temperatures may be affected or they may even suffer burn-like injuries. There is a
risk of injury.
Therefore, do not switch the seat heating on repeatedly.

Driver's and front-passenger seat

Z
102 Seats

Rear seats
The three red indicator lamps in the button indicate the heating level you have selected.
The system automatically switches down from level 3 to level 2 after approximately eight minutes.
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

The system automatically switches down from level 2 to level 1 after approximately ten minutes.
The system automatically switches off approximately 35 minutes after it is set to level 1.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 135).
X To switch on: press button : repeatedly until the desired heating level is set.
X To switch off: press button : repeatedly until all the indicator lamps go out.
i If the battery voltage is too low, the seat heating may switch off.

Activating/deactivating seat ventilation

The three blue indicator lamps in the buttons indicate the blower setting you have selected.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 135).
X To switch on: press button : repeatedly until the desired blower setting is set.
X To switch off: press button : repeatedly until all the indicator lamps go out.

i If the battery voltage is too low, the seat ventilation may switch off.
i You can open the side windows and the sliding sunroof using the "Convenience opening" feature
(Y page 89). The seat ventilation of the driver's seat automatically switches to the highest level.
Steering wheel 103

Problems with the seat heating or seat ventilation


Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The seat heating or seat The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical consum-
ventilation has switched ers are switched on.
off prematurely or can- X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as the
not be switched on. rear window defroster or interior lighting.
Once the battery is sufficiently charged, the seat heating or seat
ventilation will switch back on automatically.

Steering wheel control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an


accident.
Important safety notes

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors


Before starting off, make sure the steering
G WARNING wheel is locked. Never unlock the steering
You could lose control of your vehicle if you do wheel while the vehicle is in motion.
the following while driving:
Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
steering wheel or mirrors
Rfasten the seat belt
There is a risk of an accident.
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-
ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt
before starting the engine.

G WARNING
Children could injure themselves if they : Release lever
adjust the steering wheel. There is a risk of ; Adjusts the steering wheel height
injury. = Adjusts the steering wheel position (fore-
When leaving the vehicle, always take the and-aft adjustment)
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never X Push release lever : down completely.
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. The steering column is unlocked.
X Adjust the steering wheel to the desired posi-
The electrically adjustable steering wheel can tion.
still be adjusted when there is no SmartKey in X Push release lever : up completely.
the ignition lock. The steering column is locked.
X Check if the steering column is locked. When
doing so, try to push the steering wheel up or
Adjusting the steering wheel man- down or try to move it in the fore-and-aft
ually direction.

G WARNING
If the steering wheel is unlocked while the
vehicle is in motion, it could change position
unexpectedly. This could cause you to lose

Z
104 Steering wheel

Adjusting the steering wheel electri- Steering wheel heating


cally
Switching on/off
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

: Adjusts the steering wheel height


; Adjusts the steering wheel position (fore- X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
and-aft adjustment) tion lock (Y page 135).
The steering wheel can also be adjusted when X To switch on/off: turn the lever in the direc-
the SmartKey is removed from the ignition lock. tion of arrow : or ;.
Indicator lamp = lights up or goes out.
i Further related subjects:
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: when you switch off
REASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature (Y page 104) the ignition and open the driver's door, the
RStoring settings (Y page 108) steering wheel heating is deactivated.
Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: when you
remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock, the
steering wheel heating is deactivated.

Problems with the steering wheel heating


Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The steering wheel heat- The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical consum-
ing has switched off pre- ers are switched on.
maturely or cannot be X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as the
switched on. rear window defroster or interior lighting.

EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature Move the steering wheel adjustment lever if


there is a risk of entrapment by the steering
Important safety notes wheel. The adjustment process is stopped.
G WARNING Press one of the memory function position but-
When the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature adjusts tons. This function is only available on vehicles
the steering wheel, you and other vehicle with memory function.
occupants – particularly children – could
G WARNING
become trapped. There is a risk of injury.
If children activate the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT fea-
While the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is mak-
ture, they can become trapped, particularly
ing adjustments, make sure that no one has
when unattended. There is a risk of injury.
any body parts in the sweep of the steering
wheel.
Mirrors 105

When leaving the vehicle, always take the Crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never If the crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is trig-
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. gered in an accident, the steering column will
move upwards when the driver's door is opened.
G WARNING This occurs irrespective of the position of the
SmartKey in the ignition lock. This makes it eas-
If you drive off while the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT ier to exit the vehicle and rescue the occupants.
feature is making adjustments, you could lose
The crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is only
control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an operational if the EASY-EXIT/ENTRY feature is
accident. activated in the on-board computer
Always wait until the adjustment process is (Y page 239).
complete before driving off.

The EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature makes getting in Mirrors

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors


and out of your vehicle easier.
You can activate and deactivate the EASY- Rear-view mirror
ENTRY/EXIT feature in the on-board computer
(Y page 239).

Position of the steering wheel when the


EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is active
The steering wheel swings up when you:
Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
Ropen the driver's door and KEYLESS-GO is in
position 1.
Ropen the driver's door and the SmartKey is in
position u or 1 in the ignition lock.
X Anti-glare mode: flick anti-glare lever : for-
i The steering wheel only moves up if it has wards or back.
not already reached the upper stop.

Position of the steering wheel for driv-


Exterior mirrors
ing
The steering wheel is moved to the last selected Adjusting the exterior mirrors
position when:
G WARNING
Rthe driver's door is closed
You could lose control of your vehicle if you do
Ryou insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock
the following while driving:
or
Ryou press the Start/Stop button once on vehi- Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
cles with KEYLESS-GO steering wheel or mirrors
When you close the driver's door with the igni- Rfasten the seat belt
tion switched on, the steering wheel is also There is a risk of an accident.
automatically moved to the previously set posi-
tion. Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-
The last position of the steering column is stored ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt
when you: before starting the engine.
Rswitch the ignition off
Rsave the setting with the memory function
(Y page 108).
Z
106 Mirrors

G WARNING Folding the exterior mirrors in or out


The exterior mirror on the front-passenger electrically
side reduces the size of the image. Visible
objects are actually closer than they appear.
This means that you could misjudge the dis-
tance from road users traveling behind, e.g.
when changing lane. There is a risk of an acci-
dent.
For this reason, always make sure of the
actual distance from the road users traveling
behind by glancing over your shoulder.
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the


ignition lock (Y page 135).
X Briefly press :.
Both exterior mirrors fold in or out.
i Make sure that the exterior mirrors are
always folded out fully while driving. They
could otherwise vibrate.
i If you are driving faster than 30 mph
(47 km/h), you can no longer fold in the exte-
rior mirrors.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock (Y page 135). Resetting the exterior mirrors
X Exterior mirror on the driver's side: press but-
ton :. If the battery has been disconnected or com-
pletely discharged, the exterior mirrors must be
Exterior mirror on the front-passenger side: reset. Otherwise, the exterior mirrors will not
press button ;. fold in when you select the "Fold in mirrors when
The indicator lamp in the corresponding but- locking" function in the on-board computer
ton lights up in red. (Y page 240).
The indicator lamp goes out again after some X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the igni-
time. You can adjust the selected exterior tion lock (Y page 135).
mirror using button = as long as the indicator
lamp is lit. X Briefly press :.

X Press button = up, down, or to the right or


left until you have adjusted the exterior mirror Folding the exterior mirrors in or out
to the correct position. You should have a automatically
good overview of traffic conditions.
If the "Fold in mirrors when locking" function is
The convex exterior mirrors provide a larger field activated in the on-board computer
of vision. (Y page 240):
The exterior mirrors are heated automatically if Rthe exterior mirrors fold in automatically as
the rear window defroster is switched on and the soon as you lock the vehicle from the outside.
outside temperature is low.
Rthe exterior mirrors fold out again automati-
cally as soon as you unlock the vehicle and
then open the driver's or front-passenger
door.
Mirrors 107

Exterior mirror pushed out of position The rear-view mirror and the exterior mirror on
the driver's side automatically go into anti-glare
If an exterior mirror has been pushed out of mode if the following conditions are met simul-
position, proceed as follows: taneously:
X Vehicles without electrically folding exte- Rthe ignition is switched on and
rior mirrors: move the exterior mirror into
Rincident light from headlamps strikes the sen-
the correct position manually.
sor in the rear-view mirror
X Vehicles with electrically folding exterior
The mirrors do not go into anti-glare mode if
mirrors: press and hold mirror-folding but-
reverse gear is engaged or if the interior lighting
ton : until you hear a click and the mirror is switched on.
engages in position audibly.
The mirror housing is engaged again and you
can adjust the exterior mirrors as usual
(Y page 105). Parking position for the exterior mir-
ror on the front-passenger side

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors


Setting and storing the parking position
Automatic anti-glare mirrors
You can position the front-passenger side exte-
G WARNING rior mirror in such a way that you can see the
Electrolyte may escape if the glass in an auto- rear wheel on that side as soon as you engage
matic anti-glare mirror breaks. The electrolyte reverse gear. You can store this position.
is harmful and causes irritation. It must not
come into contact with your skin, eyes, res- Using reverse gear
piratory organs or clothing or be swallowed.
There is a risk of injury.
If you come into contact with the electrolyte,
observe the following:
RRinse off the electrolyte from your skin
immediately with water.
RImmediately rinse the electrolyte out of
your eyes thoroughly with clean water.
RIf the electrolyte is swallowed, immediately
rinse your mouth out thoroughly. Do not
induce vomiting. : Button for the driver's side exterior mirror
RIf electrolyte comes into contact with your ; Button for the front-passenger side exterior
mirror
skin or hair or is swallowed, seek medical
= Adjustment button
attention immediately.
? Memory button M
RImmediately change out of clothing which
has come into contact with electrolyte.
X Bring the vehicle to a standstill.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical
tion lock (Y page 135).
attention immediately. X Press button ;.

Z
108 Memory function

X Engage reverse gear. Memory function


The exterior mirror on the front-passenger
side moves to the default setting parking posi- Storing settings
tion.
X Use button = to adjust the exterior mirror to G WARNING
a position that allows you to see the rear If you use the memory function on the driver's
wheel and the curb. side while driving, you could lose control of
The parking position is stored.
the vehicle as a result of the adjustments
i If you shift the transmission to another posi- being made. There is a risk of an accident.
tion, the exterior mirror on the front-
passenger side returns to the driving position. Only use the memory function on the driver's
side when the vehicle is stationary.
Using the memory button
G WARNING
You can store the parking position of the exte-
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

rior mirror on the front-passenger side using When the memory function adjusts the seat or
memory button M ?. The reverse gear must not steering wheel, you and other vehicle occu-
be engaged during the process. pants – particularly children – could become
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- trapped. There is a risk of injury.
tion lock (Y page 135). While the memory function is making adjust-
X Press button ;. ments, make sure that no one has any body
X Use button = to adjust the exterior mirror to parts in the sweep of the seat or steering
a position that allows you to see the rear wheel. If somebody becomes trapped, imme-
wheel and the curb. diately release the memory function position
X Press memory button M ? and one of the button. The adjustment process is stopped.
arrows on button = within three seconds.
The parking position is stored if the exterior G WARNING
mirror does not move.
X If the mirror moves out of position, repeat the Children could become trapped if they acti-
steps. vate the memory function, particularly when
unattended. There is a risk of injury.
Calling up a stored parking position set- When leaving the vehicle, always take the
ting SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock (Y page 135). The memory function can be used at any time,
X Adjust the exterior mirror on the front- e.g. even when the SmartKey isn't in the ignition
passenger side using button ;. lock.
X Engage reverse gear. With the memory function, you can store up to
The exterior mirror on the front-passenger three different settings, e.g. for three different
side moves to the stored parking position. people.
The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side The following settings are stored as a single
moves back to its original position: memory preset:
Ras soon as you exceed a speed of 9 mph Rposition of the seat, backrest and head
(15 km/h) restraint
Rif you press button : for the exterior mirror Rdriver's side: steering wheel position
on the driver's side Rdriver's side: position of the exterior mirrors
on the driver's and front-passenger sides
Memory function 109

X Adjust the seat (Y page 98).


X On the driver's side, adjust the steering wheel
(Y page 104) and the exterior mirrors

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors


(Y page 105).
X Press memory button M and then press mem-
ory position button 1, 2 or 3 within three sec-
onds.
The settings are stored in the selected preset
position. A tone sounds when the settings
have been completed.
The memory function can still be used if the
SmartKey has been removed.

Calling up a stored setting


X Press and hold the relevant storage position
button 1, 2 or 3 until the seat, steering wheel
and exterior mirrors are in the stored position.
The setting procedure is interrupted as soon as
you release the storage position buttons.

Z
110 Exterior lighting

Exterior lighting Automatic headlamp mode


c is the favored light switch position. The
General notes light setting is automatically selected according
For reasons of safety, Mercedes-Benz recom- to the brightness of the ambient light (excep-
mends that you drive with the lights switched on tion: poor visibility due to weather conditions
even during the daytime. In some countries, such as fog, snow or spray):
operation of the headlamps varies due to legal RSmartKey in position 1 in the ignition lock:
requirements and self-imposed obligations. the parking lamps are switched on/off auto-
matically depending on the brightness of the
ambient light.
Setting the exterior lighting RWith the engine running (USA only): if you
have switched on the Daytime Running
Setting options Lights function in the on-board computer,
the daytime running lamps or the parking
Exterior lighting can be set using: lamps and low-beam headlamps are switched
Rthe light switch on or off automatically depending on the
Rthe combination switch (Y page 111) brightness of the ambient light.
Lights and windshield wipers

Rthe on-board computer (Y page 238) X To switch on automatic headlamp mode:


turn the light switch to c.
Light switch G WARNING
Operation When the light switch is set to Ã, the low-
beam headlamps may not be switched on
automatically if there is fog, snow or other
causes of poor visibility due to the weather
conditions such as spray. There is a risk of an
accident.
In such situations, turn the light switch to
L.

The automatic headlamp mode is only an aid.


The driver is responsible for the vehicle's light-
ing at all times.
Canada only:
1 W Left-hand standing lamps The daytime running lamps improve the visibility
2 X Right-hand standing lamps of your vehicle during the day. The daytime run-
3 T Parking lamps, license plate and ning lamps function is required by law in Can-
instrument cluster lighting ada. It cannot therefore be deactivated.
4 c Automatic headlamp mode, controlled When the engine is running and the vehicle is
by the light sensor stationary: if you move the selector lever from a
5 L Low-beam/high-beam headlamps driving position to P, the daytime running
B R Rear fog lamp lamps/low-beam headlamps go out after three
minutes.
If you hear a warning tone when you leave the
vehicle, the lights may still be switched on. When the engine is running, the vehicle is sta-
tionary and in bright ambient light: if you turn the
X Turn the light switch to c. light switch to the T position, the daytime
The exterior lighting (except the parking/stand- running lamps and parking lamps switch on.
ing lamps) switches off automatically if you: If the engine is running and you turn the light
Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock switch to L, the manual settings take prec-
edence over the daytime running lamps.
Ropen the driver's door with the SmartKey in
position u in the ignition lock USA only:
Exterior lighting 111

The daytime running lamps improve the visibility X To switch on: turn the light switch to T.
of your vehicle during the day. To do this, the The green T indicator lamp in the instru-
daytime running lamps function must be ment cluster lights up.
switched on using the on-board computer
(Y page 238). Standing lamps
If the engine is running and you turn the light Switching on the standing lamps ensures the
switch to T or L, the manual settings corresponding side of the vehicle is illuminated.
take precedence over the daytime running X To switch on the standing lamps: the
lamps.
SmartKey should not be in the ignition lock or
Low-beam headlamps in key position u in the ignition lock.
X Turn the light switch to W (left-hand side of
Even if the light sensor does not detect that it is
dark, the parking lamps and low-beam head- the vehicle) or X (right-hand side of the
lamps switch on when the ignition is switched on vehicle).
and the light switch is set to the L position. Vehicles towing a trailer: both the right-hand
This is a particularly useful function in the event and left-hand standing lamps (tail lamps) are
of rain and fog. always illuminated on the trailer.
X To switch on the low-beam headlamps:

Lights and windshield wipers


turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock or start the engine. Combination switch
X Turn the light switch to L.
The green L indicator lamp in the instru-
ment cluster lights up.

Rear fog lamp


The rear fog lamp improves visibility of your
vehicle for the traffic behind in the event of thick
fog. Please take note of the country-specific
regulations for the use of rear fog lamps.
X To switch on the rear fog lamp: turn the
SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock or
start the engine.
X Turn the light switch to L or c. : High-beam headlamps
X Press the R button. ; Turn signal, right
The yellow R indicator lamp in the instru- = High-beam flasher
ment cluster lights up. ? Turn signal, left
X To switch off the rear fog lamp: press the
X To indicate briefly: press the combination
R button. switch briefly to the pressure point in the
The yellow R indicator lamp in the instru- direction of arrow ; or ?.
ment cluster goes out. The corresponding turn signal flashes three
times.
Parking lamps
X To indicate: press the combination switch
! If the battery charge is very low, the parking beyond the pressure point in the direction of
lamps or standing lamps are automatically arrow ; or ?.
switched off to enable the next engine start. X To switch on the high-beam headlamps:
Always park your vehicle safely and in a well lit
turn the light switch to L or Ã.
area, in accordance with the relevant legal
stipulations. Avoid using the T parking X Press the combination switch beyond the
lamps over a period of several hours. If pos- pressure point in the direction of arrow :.
sible, switch on the right-hand X or left- In the à position, the high-beam head-
hand W standing lamps. lamps are only switched on when it is dark and
the engine is running.

Z
112 Exterior lighting

The blue K indicator lamp in the instru- Intelligent Light System


ment cluster lights up when the high-beam
headlamps are switched on. General notes
X To switch off the high-beam headlamps:
move the combination switch back to its nor- The Intelligent Light System is a system that
mal position. adjusts the headlamps automatically to suit the
The blue K indicator lamp in the instru- prevailing driving and weather conditions. It
ment cluster goes out. offers advanced functions for improved illumi-
nation of the road surface, e.g. depending on the
Vehicles with Adaptive Highbeam Assist: if vehicle speed or weather conditions. The sys-
Adaptive Highbeam Assist is activated, it auto- tem includes the active light function, cornering
matically controls activation and deactivation of light function, highway mode and extended
the high-beam headlamps (Y page 113). range fog lamps. The system is only active when
it is dark.
You can activate or deactivate the "Intelligent
Hazard warning lamps Light System" using the on-board computer
(Y page 238).
Lights and windshield wipers

Active light function


The active light function is a system that moves
the headlamps according to the steering move-
ments of the front wheels. In this way, relevant
areas remain illuminated while driving. This
allows you to recognize pedestrians, cyclists
and animals sooner.
Active: when the lights are switched on.
Vehicles with Lane Keeping Assist: the active
light function evaluates the course of the lane in
X To switch on the hazard warning lamps: which you are driving and adjusts the light in
press button :. advance.
All turn signals flash. If you now switch on a
turn signal using the combination switch, only
the turn signal lamp on the corresponding Cornering light function
side of the vehicle will flash. The cornering light function improves the illu-
X To switch off the hazard warning lamps: mination of the road over a wide angle in the
press button :. direction you are turning, enabling better visi-
The hazard warning lamps automatically switch bility in tight bends, for example. It can only be
on if: activated when the low-beam headlamps are
switched on.
Ran air bag is deployed or
Active:
Rthe vehicle decelerates rapidly from a speed
Rif you are driving at speeds below 25 mph
of above 45 mph (70 km/h) and comes to a
standstill (40 km/h) and switch on the turn signal or
turn the steering wheel
The hazard warning lamps switch off automati-
Rif you are driving at speeds between 25 mph
cally if the vehicle reaches a speed of above
6 mph (10 km/h) again after a full brake appli- (40 km/h) and 45 mph (70 km/h) and turn
cation. the steering wheel
The cornering lamp may remain lit for a short
i The hazard warning lamps still operate if the time, but is automatically switched off after no
ignition is switched off. more than three minutes.
Cornering light function with traffic circle
function:
Exterior lighting 113

The cornering light function is activated on both Adaptive Highbeam Assist


sides before entering a traffic circle through an
evaluation of the current GPS position of the General notes
vehicle. It remains active until after the vehicle
has left the traffic circle. In this way, pedestrians You can use this function to set the headlamps
crossing the road, for example, are illuminated to change between low beam and high beam
by your vehicle in good time. automatically. The system recognizes vehicles
with their lights on, either approaching from the
Highway mode opposite direction or traveling in front of your
vehicle, and consequently switches the head-
Highway mode increases the range of the beam. lamps from high beam to low beam.
Active: if you are driving at a speed above The system automatically adapts the low-beam
110 km/h and do not make any large steering headlamp range depending on the distance to
movements for at least 1,000 m or if you are the other vehicle. Once the system no longer
driving at a speed above 130 km/h. detects any other vehicles, it reactivates the
Not active: if you are driving at speeds below high-beam headlamps.
80 km/h following activation. The system's optical sensor is located behind
the windshield near the overhead control panel.

Lights and windshield wipers


Extended range fog lamps
Important safety notes
The extended range fog lamps reduce the glare
experienced by the driver and improve the illu- G WARNING
mination of the edge of the road. Adaptive Highbeam Assist does not recognize
Active: if you are driving at speeds below road users:
40 mph (70 km/h) and you switch on the rear
fog lamp. Rwho have no lights, e.g. pedestrians
Not active: if, following activation, you are driv- Rwho have poor lighting, e.g. cyclists
ing at speeds above 60 mph (100 km/h) or if you Rwhose lighting is blocked, e.g. by a barrier
switch off the rear fog lamp
On very rare occasions, Adaptive Highbeam
Off-road lights Assist may fail to recognize other road users
that have lights, or may recognize them too
The off-road lights facilitate the early recogni- late. In this, or in similar situations, the auto-
tion of objects/obstacles when driving off-road matic high-beam headlamps will not be deac-
thanks to a symmetrical, wider and brighter dis-
tivated or will be activated regardless. There is
tribution of light from the low-beam headlamps.
a risk of an accident.
Active: when driving at speeds no faster than
30 mph (50 km/h) and the off-road program Always carefully observe the traffic conditions
selector wheel is in position 1 or 2. and switch off the high-beam headlamps in
Not active: when driving at speeds above good time.
30 mph (50 km/h).
When the off-road lights are switched on, the Adaptive Highbeam Assist cannot take into
cornering light function is permanently activa- account road, weather or traffic conditions.
ted, the active light function is deactivated and Adaptive Highbeam Assist is only an aid. You are
the headlamp range control is set to static responsible for adjusting the vehicle's lighting
mode. to the prevailing light, visibility and traffic con-
ditions.
In particular, the detection of obstacles can be
impaired if:
Rpoor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or
snow
Rdirt on the sensors or the sensors are
obscured

Z
114 Interior lighting

Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist Interior lighting


on/off
Overview of interior lighting
X To switch on: turn the light switch to Ã.
X Press the combination switch beyond the
pressure point in the direction of arrow :.
The _ indicator lamp in the multifunction
display lights up when it is dark and the light
sensor activates the low-beam headlamps.
If you are driving at speeds above approx-
imately 16 mph (25 km/h):
The headlamp range is set automatically
depending on the distance between the vehi-
cle and other road users.
If you are driving at speeds above approx-
imately 19 mph (30 km/h) and no other road Overhead control panel
users have been detected:
: p Switches the left-hand front reading
The high-beam headlamps are switched on
Lights and windshield wipers

lamp on/off
automatically. The K indicator lamp in the
; c Switches the front interior lighting on
instrument cluster also lights up.
= v Switches the rear interior lighting on/
If you are driving at speeds below approx-
off
imately 16 mph (25 km/h) or other road users
have been detected or the roads are ade- ? | Switches the front interior lighting/
quately lit: automatic interior lighting control off
The high-beam headlamps are switched off A p Switches the right-hand front reading
automatically. The K indicator lamp in the lamp on/off
instrument cluster goes out. The _ indi- B Switches the automatic interior lighting con-
cator lamp in the multifunction display trol on
remains lit.
X To switch off: move the combination switch
back to its normal position or move the light Interior lighting control
switch to another position.
The _ indicator lamp in the multifunction General notes
display goes out. The interior light functions are automatically
switched off after some time to prevent the
vehicle's battery from discharging, unless the
Headlamps fogged up on the inside SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock.
The color and brightness of the ambient lighting
Certain climatic and physical conditions may are set using the multimedia system (see Digital
cause moisture to form in the headlamp. This Operator's Manual).
moisture does not affect the functionality of the
headlamp.
Automatic interior lighting control
X To switch on: set the switch to center posi-
tion B.
X To switch off: set the switch to the |
position.
Replacing bulbs (vehicles with halogen headlamps) 115

The interior lighting automatically switches on if Allow these components to cool down before
you: changing a bulb.
Runlock the vehicle
Ropen a door Do not use a bulb if it has been dropped or if its
Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock glass tube has been scratched.
The interior lighting is switched on for a set time The bulb may explode if:
when the SmartKey is removed from the ignition Ryou touch it
lock. This delayed switch-off can be adjusted via Rit is hot
the multimedia system (see Digital Operator's Ryou drop it
Manual).
Ryou scratch it
Use bulbs only in closed lamps that have been
Crash-responsive emergency lighting designed for this purpose. Only install spare
bulbs of the same type and the specified volt-
The interior lighting is activated automatically if age.
the vehicle is involved in an accident. Marks on the glass tube reduce the service life
X To switch off the crash-responsive emer- of the bulbs. Do not touch the glass tube with

Lights and windshield wipers


gency lighting: press the hazard warning your bare hands. If necessary, clean the glass
lamp button. tube when cold with alcohol or spirit and rub it
off with a lint-free cloth.
or
Protect bulbs from moisture during operation.
X Lock and then unlock the vehicle using the
Do not allow bulbs to come into contact with
SmartKey. liquids.
Replace only the bulbs listed (Y page 115).
Have the bulbs that you cannot replace yourself
Replacing bulbs (vehicles with LED replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.
headlamps) If you require assistance replacing bulbs, con-
sult a qualified specialist workshop.
The front and rear light clusters of your vehicle If the new bulb still does not light up, consult a
are equipped with light-emitting diodes. Do not qualified specialist workshop.
replace the vehicle's bulbs yourself. Contact a Headlamps and lights are an important aspect of
qualified specialist workshop which has the nec- vehicle safety. You must therefore make sure
essary specialist knowledge and tools to carry that these function correctly at all times. Have
out the work required. the headlamp setting checked regularly.
Lamps are an important aspect of vehicle safety.
You must therefore make sure that these func-
tion correctly at all times. Have the headlamp Overview of bulb replacement - bulb
setting checked regularly.
types
You can replace the following bulbs. The bulb
Replacing bulbs (vehicles with halo- type can be found in the legend.
gen headlamps)
Important safety notes
G WARNING
Bulbs, lamps and connectors can get very hot
when operating. If you change a bulb, you
could burn yourself on these components.
There is a risk of injury.

Z
116 Replacing bulbs (vehicles with halogen headlamps)

Low-beam headlamps

Halogen headlamps
: Low-beam headlamp: H7 55 W
; High-beam headlamp: H7 55 W X Remove the cover in the front wheel housing
= Turn signal: W 5 W BV (Y page 116).
X Turn housing cover : counter-clockwise and
remove it.
Lights and windshield wipers

X Turn bulb holder ; counter-clockwise and


Removing and installing the cover in
pull out.
the front wheel housing
X Pull the bulb out of bulb holder ;.
X Insert new bulb into bulb holder ;.
X Insert bulb holder ; and turn it clockwise.
X Press on housing cover : and turn it to the
right.
X Replace the cover in the front wheel housing
(Y page 116).

High-beam headlamps

You must remove the cover from the front wheel


housing before you can change the front bulbs.
X To remove: switch off the lights.
X Turn the front wheel inwards.
X Remove securing pin ; using a suitable tool.
X Slide cover : up and remove it.
X To install: insert cover : again and slide it
down until it engages.
X Insert securing pin ;.

X Switch off the lights.


X Open the hood.
X Turn housing cover : counter-clockwise and
remove it.
X Pull lever = upwards (headlamps on the left
in the direction of travel) or push it down-
wards (headlamps on the right in the direction
of travel) and remove bulb holder ;.
Windshield wipers 117

X Remove the bulb from bulb holder ;. washer fluid when operating the windshield
X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder ;. wipers.
X Simultaneously push down on bulb holder ; ! If the windshield wipers leave smears on the
and push lever = downwards (headlamps on windshield after the vehicle has been washed
the left in the direction of travel) or pull in an automatic car wash, wax or other resi-
upwards (headlamps on the right in the direc- dues may be the reason for this. Clean the
tion of travel). windshield using washer fluid after washing
X Press on housing cover : and turn it clock- the vehicle in an automatic car wash.
wise.
! Intermittent wiping with rain sensor: due to
optical influences and the windshield becom-
ing dirty in dry weather conditions, the wind-
Turn signals shield wipers may be activated inadvertently.
This could then damage the windshield wiper
blades or scratch the windshield.
For this reason, you should always switch off
the windshield wipers in dry weather.

Lights and windshield wipers


X Switch off the lights.
X Open the hood.
X Turn housing cover : counter-clockwise and
remove it.
Combination switch
X Turn bulb holder ; counter-clockwise and
1 $ Windshield wiper off
pull out.
2 Ä Intermittent wipe, low (rain sensor set
X Pull the bulb out of bulb holder ;.
to low sensitivity)
X Insert new bulb into bulb holder ;. 3 Å Intermittent wipe, high (rain sensor
X Insert bulb holder ; and turn it clockwise. set to high sensitivity)
X Press on housing cover : and turn it to the 4 ° Continuous wipe, slow
right. 5 ¯ Continuous wipe, fast
B í Single wipe
C î To wipe with washer fluid
Windshield wipers X Switch on the ignition.
Switching the windshield wipers X Turn the combination switch to the corre-
on/off sponding position.
In the Ä or Å position, the appropriate
! Do not operate the windshield wipers when wiping frequency is set automatically according
the windshield is dry, as this could damage to the intensity of the rain. In the Å position,
the wiper blades. Moreover, dust that has col- the rain sensor is more sensitive than in
lected on the windshield can scratch the glass the Ä position, causing the windshield wiper
if wiping takes place when the windshield is to wipe more frequently.
dry. Vehicles with MAGIC VISION CONTROL: the
If it is necessary to switch on the windshield washer fluid is fed through the wiper blades and
wipers in dry weather conditions, always use when wiping with washer fluid î the washer
fluid is emitted directly from the blades.
Z
118 Windshield wipers

If the wiper blades are worn, the windshield will ! Never open the hood/tailgate if a wiper arm
no longer be wiped properly. This could prevent has been folded away from the windshield/
you from observing the traffic conditions. rear window.
Never fold a windshield wiper arm without a
wiper blade back onto the windshield/rear
Switching the rear window wiper on/ window.
off Hold the windshield wiper arm firmly when
you change the wiper blade. If you release the
wiper arm without a wiper blade and it falls
onto the windshield/rear window, the wind-
shield/rear window may be damaged by the
force of the impact.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have
the wiper blades changed at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop.

Changing the windshield wiper blades


Lights and windshield wipers

Moving the wiper arms to a vertical posi-


Combination switch tion
: è Rear window wiper switch On vehicles without KEYLESS-GO:
2 b Wipes with washer fluid X Turn the SmartKey to position u in the igni-
3 I Switches on intermittent wiping tion lock (Y page 135).
4 0 Switches off intermittent wiping X Set the windshield wiper to position ° on
5 b Wipes with washer fluid the combination switch.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the igni-
X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2
tion lock (Y page 135).
(Y page 135).
X As soon as the wiper arms are vertical to the
X Turn switch : on the combination switch to
hood, turn the SmartKey to position u in the
the corresponding position.
ignition lock (Y page 135).
When the rear window wiper is switched on,
the icon appears in the instrument cluster. X Remove the SmartKey.
X Fold the wiper arms away from the windshield
until you feel them snap into place.
Replacing the wiper blades On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO:
X Switch off the engine.
Important safety notes
X Remove your foot from the brake pedal.
G WARNING X Set the windshield wiper to the ° position.

If the windshield wipers begin to move while X Press the Start/Stop button repeatedly until
the windshield wiper starts.
you are changing the wiper blades, you could
X When the wiper arms are vertical to the hood,
be trapped by the wiper arm. There is a risk of
press the Start/Stop button repeatedly until
injury. the windshield wiper stops.
Always switch off the windshield wipers and X Fold the wiper arms away from the windshield
ignition before changing the wiper blades. until you feel them snap into place.

! To avoid damaging the wiper blades, make Removing the wiper blades
sure that you touch only the wiper arm of the X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
wiper. X Fold the wiper arm away from the windshield.
Windshield wipers 119

X As soon as the wiper arms are vertical to the


hood, turn the SmartKey to position u in the
ignition lock (Y page 135).
X Remove the SmartKey.
X Fold the wiper arms away from the windshield
until you feel them snap into place.
On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO:
X Switch off the engine.
X Remove your foot from the brake pedal.
X Set the windshield wiper to the ° position.
X Press the Start/Stop button repeatedly until
X Firmly press release knob : and pull wiper the windshield wiper starts.
blade ; upwards from the wiper arm in the
X When the wiper arms are vertical to the hood,
direction of the arrow.
press the Start/Stop button repeatedly until
Installing the wiper blades the windshield wiper stops.
X Fold the wiper arms away from the windshield

Lights and windshield wipers


until you feel them snap into place.

Removing a wiper blade

X Position new wiper blade : in the retainer on


the wiper arm and slide it into place in the
direction of the arrow.
The wiper blade audibly engages.
X Make sure that the wiper blade is seated cor-
X To bring the wiper blade into position to
rectly. be removed: hold the wiper arm firmly with
one hand. With the other hand, turn the wiper
X Fold the wiper arm back onto the windshield.
blade in the direction of arrow : beyond the
point of resistance.
Replacing the wiper blades (MAGIC The wiper blade engages in the removal posi-
VISION CONTROL) tion with an audible click.
X To remove a wiper blade: firmly press
Moving the wiper arms to a vertical posi- release knob ; and pull the wiper blade
tion upwards =.
On vehicles without KEYLESS-GO:
X Turn the SmartKey to position u in the igni-
tion lock (Y page 135).
X Set the windshield wiper to position ° on
the combination switch.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the igni-
tion lock (Y page 135).

Z
120 Windshield wipers

Installing the wiper blades X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
X Fold wiper arm : away from the rear window
until it engages.
X Position wiper blade ; at a right angle to
wiper arm :.
X Hold wiper arm : and press wiper blade ;
in the direction of the arrow until it releases.
X Remove wiper blade ;.

Installing a wiper blade


X Place new wiper blade ; onto wiper arm :.
X Hold wiper arm : and press wiper blade ;
in the opposite direction to the arrow until it
X Push the new wiper blade in the direction of engages.
arrow : onto the wiper arm until lug ; X Make sure that wiper blade ; is seated cor-
engages. rectly.
X Push the wiper blade out of the removal posi-
X Position wiper blade ; parallel to wiper
Lights and windshield wipers

tion in the direction of arrow = beyond the arm :.


point of resistance.
X Fold wiper arm : back onto the rear window.
The wiper blade disengages with an audible
click and is freely movable again.
X Make sure that the wiper blade is seated cor-
rectly.
X Fold the wiper arm back onto the windshield.

Replacing the rear window wiper blade


Removing a wiper blade
Windshield wipers 121

Problems with the windshield wipers


Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The windshield wipers Leaves or snow, for example, may be obstructing the windshield wiper
are jammed. movement. The wiper motor has been deactivated.
X For safety reasons, you should remove the SmartKey from the igni-
tion lock.
or
X Switch off the engine using the Start/Stop button and open the
driver's door.
X Remove the cause of the obstruction.
X Switch the windshield wipers back on.

The windshield wipers The windshield wiper drive is malfunctioning.


fail completely. X Select another wiper speed on the combination switch.
X Have the windshield wipers checked at a qualified specialist work-

Lights and windshield wipers


shop.

Z
122 Overview of climate control systems

Overview of climate control systems If you start the engine using your smartphone,
the last selected climate control setting is reac-
General notes tivated (Y page 137).
Observe the settings recommended on the fol- i The integrated filter filters out most parti-
lowing pages. The windows could otherwise fog cles of dust and soot and completely filters
up. out pollen. It also reduces gaseous pollutants
To prevent the windows from fogging up: and odors. A clogged filter reduces the
amount of air supplied to the vehicle interior.
Climate control

Rswitch off climate control only briefly Depending on the operating conditions and
Rswitch on air-recirculation mode only briefly environmental influences, the interval for
Rswitch on the cooling with air dehumidifica- replacing the filter may be shorter than speci-
tion function fied.
Rswitch on the defrost windshield function i Vehicles with ionization of the interior
briefly, if required air and air filter: in addition to ionization, the
Climate control regulates the temperature and vehicle has an air filter with anti-allergenic
the humidity in the vehicle interior and filters properties that contribute to improved air fil-
undesirable substances out of the air. tration.
The "Cooling with air dehumidification" function
is only available when the engine is running.
i It is possible that under certain circumstan-
ces the residual heat function may be activa-
Optimum climate control is only achieved with
ted automatically an hour after the SmartKey
the side windows and roof closed.
has been removed in order to dry the auto-
The residual heat function can only be activated matic climate control. The vehicle is then ven-
or deactivated with the ignition switched off tilated for 30 minutes.
(Y page 131).
i Plug-in hybrid vehicles: observe the notes
i Ventilate the vehicle for a brief period during on climate control in the separate Operator's
warm weather, e.g. using the convenience Manual.
opening feature (Y page 89). This will speed
up the cooling process and the desired inte-
rior temperature will be reached more
quickly.
Overview of climate control systems 123

Control panel for dual-zone automatic climate control

Climate control
USA only
Front control panel
: Sets the temperature, left (Y page 128)
; Defrosts the windshield (Y page 129)
= Switches the maximum cooling MAX COOL on or off (Y page 130)
? Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 127)
A Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 130)
B Sets the temperature, right (Y page 128)
C Switches air-recirculation mode on/off (Y page 131)
D Sets the air distribution (Y page 129)
E Increases the airflow (Y page 129)
F Reduces the airflow (Y page 129)
G Activates/deactivates climate control (Y page 127)
H Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 128)
Rear control panel
I Sets rear-compartment climate control to automatic (Y page 128)
J Directs the air distribution through the rear air vents (Y page 129)
K Switches the seat heating on the right-hand side on/off (Y page 101)
L Directs the air distribution through the footwell vents (Y page 129)
M Switches the rear climate control on/off (Y page 127)
N Switches the seat heating on the left-hand side on/off (Y page 101)
124
Climate control Overview of climate control systems

Canada only
Front control panel
: Sets the temperature, left (Y page 128)
; Defrosts the windshield (Y page 129)
= Switches the ZONE function on/off (Y page 129)
? Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 127)
Switches the residual heat on or off (Y page 131)
A Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 130)
B Sets the temperature, right (Y page 128)
C Switches air-recirculation mode on/off (Y page 131)
D Sets the air distribution (Y page 129)
E Increases the airflow (Y page 129)
F Reduces the airflow (Y page 129)
G Activates/deactivates climate control (Y page 127)
H Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 128)
Rear control panel
I Sets rear-compartment climate control to automatic (Y page 128)
J Directs the air distribution through the rear air vents (Y page 129)
K Switches the seat heating on the right-hand side on/off (Y page 101)
L Directs the air distribution through the footwell vents (Y page 129)
M Switches the rear climate control on/off (Y page 127)
N Switches the seat heating on the left-hand side on/off (Y page 101)
Overview of climate control systems 125

Control panel for 3-zone automatic climate control

Climate control
USA only
Front control panel
: Sets the temperature, left (Y page 128)
; Defrosts the windshield (Y page 129)
= Switches the maximum cooling MAX COOL on or off (Y page 130)
? Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 127)
A Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 130)
B Sets the temperature, right (Y page 128)
C Switches the ZONE function on/off (Y page 129)
D Activates/deactivates climate control (Y page 127)
E Sets the air distribution (Y page 129)
F Increases the airflow (Y page 129)
G Reduces the airflow (Y page 129)
H Display
I Adjusts the climate mode settings (Y page 128)
J Switches air-recirculation mode on/off (Y page 131)
K Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 128)

Rear control panel


L Increases the airflow (Y page 129)
M Sets the temperature (Y page 128)
N Sets rear-compartment climate control to automatic (Y page 128)
O Directs the airflow through the rear air vents (Y page 129)
P Switches the seat heating on the right-hand side on/off (Y page 101)
Q Directs the airflow through the footwell vents (Y page 129)
R Switches the rear climate control on/off (Y page 127)
S Reduces the airflow (Y page 129)
T Switches the seat heating on the left-hand side on/off (Y page 101)
126
Climate control Overview of climate control systems

Canada only
Front control panel
: Sets the temperature, left (Y page 128)
; Defrosts the windshield (Y page 129)
= Switches the residual heat on or off (Y page 131)
? Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 127)
A Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 130)
B Sets the temperature, right (Y page 128)
C Switches the ZONE function on/off (Y page 129)
D Activates/deactivates climate control (Y page 127)
E Sets the air distribution (Y page 129)
F Increases the airflow (Y page 129)
G Reduces the airflow (Y page 129)
H Display
I Adjusts the climate mode settings (Y page 128)
J Switches air-recirculation mode on/off (Y page 131)
K Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 128)

Rear control panel


L Increases the airflow (Y page 129)
M Sets the temperature (Y page 128)
N Sets rear-compartment climate control to automatic (Y page 128)
O Directs the airflow through the rear air vents (Y page 129)
P Switches the seat heating on the right-hand side on/off (Y page 101)
Q Directs the airflow through the footwell vents (Y page 129)
R Switches the rear climate control on/off (Y page 127)
S Reduces the airflow (Y page 129)
T Switches the seat heating on the left-hand side on/off (Y page 101)
Operating the climate control systems 127

Optimum use of automatic climate Operating the climate control sys-


control tems
The following contains notes and recommenda- Activating/deactivating climate con-
tions on optimum use of the dual-zone auto- trol
matic climate control or 3-zone automatic cli-
mate control. General notes
RYou can switch on climate control by using the
à and ¿ or à and Á buttons. When the climate control is switched off, the air

Climate control
The indicator lamps in the à and supply and air circulation are also switched off.
¿ buttons or the à and Á buttons The windows could fog up. Therefore, switch off
light up. climate control only briefly
RVehicles with 3-zone automatic climate Activate climate control primarily using the
control: in automatic mode, you can also use à button (Y page 128).
the ñ button to set a climate mode In the rear compartment, you can also switch
(FOCUS/MEDIUM/DIFFUSE). The MEDIUM climate control on and off using the à and
level is recommended. ^ buttons.
RSet the temperature to 72 ‡ (22 †).
ROnly use the "Windshield defrosting" function Activating/deactivating
briefly until the windshield is clear again.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g. if
tion lock (Y page 135).
there are unpleasant outside odors or when in
X To activate: press the à button.
a tunnel. The windows could otherwise fog up,
since no fresh air is drawn into the vehicle in The indicator lamp in the à button lights
air-recirculation mode. up. Airflow and air distribution are set to auto-
matic mode.
RVehicles with 3-zone automatic climate
X To deactivate: press the ^ button.
control: use the ZONE function to adopt the
temperature settings on the driver's side for The indicator lamp in the ^ button lights
the front-passenger side and the rear com- up.
partment as well. The indicator lamp above
the á button goes out.
RVehicles with 3-zone automatic climate Switching cooling with air dehumidi-
control: use the "residual heat" function if fication on/off
you want to heat or ventilate the vehicle inte-
rior when the ignition is switched off. The Activating/deactivating
residual heat function can only be activated or
deactivated with the ignition switched off. X To activate: press the ¿ or Á button.
RIf you change the settings of the climate con-
The indicator lamp in the ¿ or Á button
trol system, the climate status display lights up.
appears for approximately three seconds at X To deactivate: press the ¿ or Á but-
the bottom of the screen in the multimedia ton.
system display. You will see the current set- The indicator lamp in the ¿ or Á button
tings of the various climate control functions. goes out. The "Cooling with air dehumidifica-
During automatic engine switch-off, the climate tion" function has a delayed switch-off fea-
control system only operates at a reduced capa- ture.
city. If you require the full climate control output,
you can switch off the ECO start/stop function
by pressing the ECO button (Y page 140).
128 Operating the climate control systems

Problems with the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function


Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The indicator lamp in the Cooling with air dehumidification has been deactivated due to a mal-
¿ or Á button function.
flashes three times or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
remains off. The "Cool-
ing with air dehumidifi-
Climate control

cation" function cannot


be switched on.

Setting climate control to automatic X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock (Y page 135).
General notes X Press the à button.
X Press the ñ button repeatedly until the
In automatic mode, the set temperature is main-
tained automatically at a constant level. The desired climate mode appears in the display.
system automatically regulates the temperature
of the dispensed air, the airflow and the air dis-
tribution. Setting the temperature
The "Cooling with air dehumidification" function
is activated automatically in automatic mode. Dual-zone automatic climate control
In the rear compartment, you can also switch Different temperatures can be set for the driv-
climate control for the rear seats to automatic er's and front-passenger sides.
mode using the à button.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock (Y page 135).
Automatic control
X To increase or decrease: turn control : or
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- B counter-clockwise or clockwise
tion lock (Y page 135). (Y page 123).
X Set the desired temperature. Only change the temperature setting in small
X To activate: press the à button. increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †).
The indicator lamp in the à button lights
up. Automatic air distribution and airflow are 3-zone automatic climate control
activated.
X To switch to manual mode: press the _ You can select different temperature settings
button. for the driver's and front-passenger sides as well
as for the rear compartment.
3-zone automatic climate control: when auto-
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
matic mode is activated, you can select a cli-
mate mode (Y page 128). tion lock (Y page 135).
X To increase or decrease temperature in
the front compartment: turn control : or
Adjusting the climate mode settings B counter-clockwise or clockwise
(Y page 125).
You can select the following climate mode set- Only change the temperature setting in small
tings in automatic mode: increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †).
FOCUS high airflow, slightly cooler setting X To increase or reduce the temperature in
MEDIUM medium airflow, standard setting the rear compartment using the front con-
trol panel: press the á button.
DIFFUSE low airflow, slightly warmer and draft-
free setting The indicator lamp in the á button goes
out.
Operating the climate control systems 129

The temperature setting for the driver's side Setting


is adopted for the rear compartment and the
front-passenger side. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
X Turn thumbwheel : to the left or right
tion lock (Y page 135).
(Y page 125). X Press the _ button repeatedly until the

Only change the temperature setting in small desired symbol appears in the display.
increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †).
X To increase or decrease the rear compart-

Climate control
ment temperature using the rear control Setting the airflow
panel: turn control M counter-clockwise or
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
clockwise on the rear control panel
tion lock (Y page 135).
(Y page 125).
X To increase: press the K button.
Only change the temperature setting in small
increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †). X To reduce: press the I button.

i You can use 3-zone automatic climate con-


trol to set the airflow in the rear compartment
Setting the air distribution separately.
Air distribution settings
Front control panel Switching the ZONE function on/off
P Directs the airflow through the center X To activate: press the á button.
vents The indicator lamp above the á button
O Directs air through the footwell air vents lights up.
S Directs the airflow through the center Dual-zone automatic climate control: the tem-
and footwell vents perature setting for the driver's side is not
¯ Directs air through the defroster vents adopted for the front-passenger side.
b Directs the airflow through the defroster 3-zone automatic climate control: the tem-
and center vents (Canada only) perature setting for the driver's side is not
adopted for the front-passenger side and the
a Directs air through the defroster and
rear compartment.
footwell vents
X To deactivate: press the á button.
_ Directs the airflow through the defroster,
center and footwell air vents (Canada The indicator lamp above the á button
only) goes out.
Dual-zone automatic climate control: the tem-
Rear control panel perature setting for the driver's side is adop-
M Directs the airflow through the rear cen- ted for the front-passenger side.
ter and B-pillar air vents 3-zone automatic climate control: the tem-
O Directs air through the footwell air vents perature setting for the driver's side is adop-
ted for the front-passenger side and the rear
i Using the rear control panel, you can also compartment.
activate both air distribution positions simul-
taneously. In order to do this, press both air
distribution buttons. The air is then routed
through all rear air vents. Defrosting the windshield
i Regardless of the air distribution setting, General notes
airflow is always directed through the side air
vents. The side air vents can only be closed You can use this function to defrost the wind-
when the controls on the side air vents are shield or to clear a fogged up windshield or front
turned downwards. side windows on the inside.
Switch off the "Windshield defrosting" function
as soon as the windshield is clear again.
130 Operating the climate control systems

Activating/deactivating Defrosting the windows


X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- Windows fogged up on the inside
tion lock (Y page 135).
X To activate: press the ¬ button. X Activate the ¿ or Á cooling with air
The indicator lamp in the ¬ button lights dehumidification function.
up. X Activate automatic mode Ã.
The climate control system switches to the X If the windows continue to fog up, activate the
following settings:
Climate control

"windshield defrosting" function


Rhigh airflow (Y page 129).
Rhigh temperature i You should only select this setting until the
Rair distribution to the windshield and front
windshield is clear again.
side windows
Rair-recirculation mode off Windows fogged up on the outside
X To deactivate: press the ¬ button. XActivate the windshield wipers.
The indicator lamp in the ¬ button goes XPress the _ button repeatedly until the
out. The previously selected settings are P or O symbol appears in the display.
restored. Air-recirculation mode remains i You should only select this setting until the
deactivated. windshield is clear again.
i If you clean the windows regularly, they do
not fog up so quickly.
MAX COOL maximum cooling
The MAX COOL function is only available in vehi-
cles for the USA. Rear window defroster
MAX COOL is only operational when the engine
is running. General notes
X To activate: press the Ù button. The rear window defroster has a high current
The indicator lamp in the Ù button lights draw. You should therefore switch it off as soon
up. as the rear window is clear. Otherwise, the rear
X To deactivate: press the Ù button. window defroster switches off automatically
The indicator lamp in the Ù button goes after several minutes.
out. The previously selected settings are If the battery voltage is too low, the rear window
restored. defroster may switch off.
When you activate MAX COOL, climate control
switches to the following functions: Activating/deactivating
Rmaximum cooling X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
Rmaximum airflow tion lock (Y page 135).
Rair-recirculation mode on X Press the ¤ button.
The indicator lamp in the ¤ button lights
up or goes out.
Operating the climate control systems 131

Problems with the rear window defroster


Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The rear window The battery has not been sufficiently charged.
defroster has deactiva- X Switch off any consumers that are not required, e.g. reading lamps,
ted prematurely or can- interior lighting or the seat heating.
not be activated. When the battery is sufficiently charged, the rear window defroster
can be activated again.

Climate control
Switching air-recirculation mode (5 †) if the "Cooling with air dehumidifi-
on/off cation" function is activated

General notes
Switching the residual heat on or off
You can deactivate the flow of fresh air if
unpleasant odors are entering the vehicle from General notes
outside. The air already inside the vehicle will
then be recirculated. The residual heat function is only available on
If you switch on air-recirculation mode, the win- vehicles for Canada.
dows can fog up more quickly, in particular at It is possible to make use of the residual heat of
low temperatures. Only use air-recirculation the engine to continue heating the stationary
mode briefly to prevent the windows from fog- vehicle for up to 30 minutes after the engine has
ging up. been switched off. The heating time depends on
the set interior temperature.
Activating/deactivating
Activating/deactivating
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock (Y page 135). XTo activate: press the Ì or Á button.
X To activate: press the d button. The indicator lamp in the Ì or Á button
The indicator lamp in the d button lights lights up.
up. i The blower will run at a low speed regardless
i In the event of high pollution levels (3-zone of the airflow setting.
automatic climate control only) or at high out- i If you activate the residual heat function at
side temperatures, air-recirculation mode is high temperatures, only the ventilation will be
automatically activated. When air-recircula- activated. The blower runs at medium speed.
tion mode is activated automatically, the indi-
cator lamp in the d button is not lit. X To deactivate: press the Ì or Á but-
Outside air is added after about 30 minutes. ton.
The indicator lamp in the Ì or Á button
X To deactivate: press the d button. goes out.
The indicator lamp in the d button goes
out. Residual heat is deactivated automatically:
Rafter approximately 30 minutes
i Air-recirculation mode deactivates auto-
matically: Rwhen the ignition is switched on

Rafter approximately five minutes at outside Rif the battery voltage drops
temperatures below approximately 41 ‡
(5 †)
Rafter approximately five minutes if cooling Ionization
with air dehumidification is deactivated Ionization is used to purify the air in the vehicle
Rafter approximately 30 minutes at outside interior and attain an improved interior climate.
temperatures above approximately 41 ‡
132 Setting the air vents

The ionization of the interior air is odorless and Setting the center air vents
cannot be perceived directly in the vehicle inte-
rior.
You can switch ionization on and off via the mul-
timedia system (see the Digital Operator's Man-
ual).
Ionization can only be operated when the auto-
matic climate control is switched on. The side air
Climate control

vent on the driver's side must be open.

Setting the air vents


Important safety notes
: Center air vent, left
G WARNING ; Center air vent, right
Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air = Center vent thumbwheel, right
vents. This could result in burns or frostbite in ? Center vent thumbwheel, left
the immediate vicinity of the air vents. There X To open or close: turn thumbwheels =
is a risk of injury. and ? to the left or right.
Make sure that all vehicle occupants always
maintain a sufficient distance to the air out-
lets. If necessary, redirect the airflow to Setting the side air vents
another area of the vehicle interior.

In order to ensure the direct flow of fresh air


through the air vents into the vehicle interior,
please observe the following notes:
Rkeep the air inlet grille on the hood and in the
engine compartment on the front-passenger
side free of blockages, such as ice, snow or
leaves.
Rnever cover the air vents or air intake grilles in
the vehicle interior.
i For virtually draft-free ventilation, adjust the Example
sliders of the air vents to the center position. : Side window defroster vent
; Side air vent, left
= Thumbwheel for side air vent
X To open or close: turn thumbwheel = up or
down.

Setting the glove box air vent


! Close the air vent when heating the vehicle.
At high outside temperatures, open the air
vent and activate the "cooling with air dehu-
midification" function. Otherwise, tempera-
ture-sensitive items stored in the glove box
could be damaged.
Setting the air vents 133

Setting the B-pillar air vent

Climate control
: Air vent control
; Air vent
: B-pillar air vent
When the climate control system is activated, ; Thumbwheel for B-pillar air vent
the glove box can be ventilated, for instance to
cool its contents. The level of airflow depends on X To open or close: turn thumbwheel ; to the
the airflow and air distribution settings. left or right.
X To open or close: turn thumbwheel : to the
right or left.

Setting the rear-compartment air


vents
Setting the center vents in the rear com-
partment

Example: center vents with rear control panel


: Rear-compartment air vent thumbwheel
; Rear-compartment air vent, right
= Rear control panel
? Rear-compartment air vent, left
X To open or close: turn thumbwheel : up or
down.

Z
134 Driving

Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle Driving


Important safety notes Important safety notes
The sensor system of some driving and driving G WARNING
safety systems adjusts automatically while a
certain distance is being driven after the vehicle Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the
has been delivered or after repairs. Full system pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.
effectiveness is not reached until the end of this The operating and road safety of the vehicle is
Driving and parking

teach-in procedure. jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.


New and replaced brake pads and discs only Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are
reach their optimum braking effect after several stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter
hundred kilometers of driving. Compensate for
this by applying greater force to the brake pedal. the driver's footwell. Install the floormats
securely and as specified in order to ensure
sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use
The first 1000 miles (1500 km) loose floormats and do not place floormats on
top of one another.
The more you look after the engine when it is
new, the more satisfied you will be with its per-
formance in the future. G WARNING
RYou should therefore drive at varying vehicle
Unsuitable footwear can hinder correct usage
and engine speeds for the first 1000 miles of the pedals, e.g.:
(1500 km). Rshoes with thick soles
RAvoid heavy loads, e.g. driving at full throttle,
Rshoes with high heels
during this period.
Rslippers
RChange gear in good time, before the tach-
ometer needle is Ô of the way to the red area There is a risk of an accident.
of the tachometer. Wear suitable footwear to ensure correct
RDo not manually shift to a lower gear to brake usage of the pedals.
the vehicle.
RTry to avoid depressing the accelerator pedal
G WARNING
beyond the point of resistance (kickdown).
If you switch off the ignition while driving,
Additional breaking-in notes for Mercedes-AMG
vehicles: safety-relevant functions are only available
with limitations, or not at all. This could affect,
RDo not drive faster than 85 mph (140 km/h)
for the first 1,000 miles (1,500 km). for example, the power steering and the brake
ROnly allow the engine to reach a maximum
boosting effect. You will require considerably
engine speed of 4,500 rpm briefly. more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk
RChange gear in good time. of an accident.
RIdeally, for the first 1,000 miles (1,500 km), Do not switch off the ignition while driving.
drive in the Comfort drive program.
After 1000 miles (1500 km), you can increase G WARNING
the engine speed gradually and accelerate the If the parking brake has not been fully
vehicle to full speed. released when driving, the parking brake can:
You should also observe these notes on break-
ing in if the engine or parts of the drive train on Roverheat and cause a fire
your vehicle have been replaced. Rlose its hold function.
Always observe the maximum permissible There is a risk of fire and an accident. Release
speed. the parking brake fully before driving off.
Driving 135

! Do not warm up the engine while stationary. locked. To unlock, remove the SmartKey and
Pull away immediately. Avoid high engine reinsert it into the ignition lock.
speeds and full throttle until the engine has The steering is locked when you remove the
reached its operating temperature. SmartKey from the ignition lock.
In vehicles with automatic transmission, X Remove the SmartKey when the engine is
engage positions P and R only when the vehi- switched off.
cle is stationary. The starter battery could otherwise be dis-
Where possible, avoid spinning the drive charged.
wheels when pulling away on slippery roads.

Driving and parking


If you cannot turn the SmartKey in the ignition
You could otherwise damage the drive train. lock, the starter battery may not be charged
! Mercedes-AMG vehicles: at low engine oil sufficiently.
temperatures below 68 ‡ (+20 †), the max- X Check the starter battery and charge it if nec-
imum engine speed is restricted in order to essary (Y page 342).
protect the engine. To protect the engine and or
maintain smooth engine operation, avoid driv- X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 342).
ing at full throttle when the engine is cold.
Plug-in hybrid: be sure to read the separate i The SmartKey can be turned in the ignition
Operator's Manual. Otherwise, you may not rec- lock even if it is not the correct SmartKey for
ognize dangers. the vehicle. The ignition is not switched on.
The engine cannot be started.

Key positions KEYLESS-GO


SmartKey General notes
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO are equipped with a
SmartKey featuring an integrated KEYLESS-GO
function and a detachable Start/Stop button.
A check which periodically establishes a radio
connection between the vehicle and the Smart-
Key determines whether a valid SmartKey is in
the vehicle. This occurs, for example, when
starting the engine.
When you insert the Start/Stop button into the
ignition lock, the system needs approximately
two seconds recognition time. You can then use
the Start/Stop button.
g To remove the SmartKey Pressing the Start/Stop button several times in
1 Power supply for some consumers, such as succession corresponds to the different Smart-
the windshield wipers Key positions in the ignition lock. This is only the
2 Ignition (power supply for all consumers) case if you are not depressing the brake pedal.
and drive position If you depress the brake pedal and press the
3 To start the engine Start/Stop button, the engine starts immedi-
ately.
As soon as the ignition is switched on, all the To start the vehicle without actively using the
indicator lamps in the instrument cluster light SmartKey:
up. Further information on situations where an
indicator lamp either fails to go out after starting Rthe Start/Stop button must be inserted in the
the engine or lights up while driving ignition lock
(Y page 276). Rthe SmartKey must be in the vehicle
If the SmartKey is in position u in the ignition Rthe vehicle must not be locked with the
lock for a longer period, it can no longer be SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO (Y page 78).
turned in the ignition lock. The steering is then

Z
136 Driving

Do not keep the SmartKey: X To switch on the power supply: press


Rwith electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phone Start/Stop button : once.
or another SmartKey The power supply is switched on. You can now
activate the windshield wipers, for example.
Rwith metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal foil
The power supply is switched off again if:
Rinside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case
Rthe driver's door is opened and
This can impair the functionality of the KEY-
LESS-GO key. Ryou press Start/Stop : button twice when in
Do not keep the KEYLESS-GO key in the tem- this position
Driving and parking

perature-controlled cup holder (Y page 305). X To switch on the ignition: press Start/Stop
Otherwise, the KEYLESS-GO key will not be rec- button : twice.
ognized. The ignition is switched on.
If you lock the vehicle with the SmartKey remote If you press Start/Stop button : once when
control or with KEYLESS-GO, after a short time: in this position, the ignition is deactivated
Ryou will not be able to switch on the ignition again.
with the Start/Stop button
Removing the Start/Stop button
Ryou will not be able to start the engine with the
Start/Stop button until the vehicle is You can remove the Start/Stop button from the
unlocked again ignition lock and start the vehicle as normal
using the SmartKey.
If you lock the vehicle centrally using the button
on the front door (Y page 83), you can continue It is possible to switch between KEYLESS-GO
to start the engine with the Start/Stop button. mode and key operation only when the trans-
mission is in position j.
The engine can be switched off while the vehicle
is in motion by pressing and holding the Start/ X Remove Start/Stop button : from ignition
Stop button for three seconds. This function lock ;.
operates independently of the ECO start/stop You do not have to remove the Start/Stop but-
automatic engine switch-off function. ton from the ignition lock when you leave the
vehicle. You should, however, always take the
Key positions with KEYLESS-GO SmartKey with you when leaving the vehicle. As
long as the SmartKey is in the vehicle:
Rthe vehicle can be started using the Start/
Stop button
Rthe electrically powered equipment can be
operated

Starting the engine


Important safety notes
G WARNING
: Start/Stop button
; Ignition lock If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,
they could:
As soon as the ignition is switched on, all the
indicator lamps in the instrument cluster light Ropen the doors, thus endangering other
up. Further information on situations where an people or road users.
indicator lamp either fails to go out after starting Rget out and disrupt traffic.
the engine or lights up while driving
(Y page 276). Roperate the vehicle's equipment.
If Start/Stop button : has not yet been
pressed, this corresponds to the SmartKey
being removed from the ignition.
Driving 137

Additionally, children could set the vehicle in i You can start the engine in transmission
motion if, for example, they: position j and i.
Rrelease the parking brake. Starting procedure with the SmartKey
Rshifting the automatic transmission out of
park position P X To start a diesel engine: turn the SmartKey
to position 2 in the ignition lock
RStart the engine. (Y page 135).
There is a risk of an accident and injury. The % preglow indicator lamp in the instru-

Driving and parking


ment cluster lights up.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
X Turn the SmartKey to position 3 in the igni-
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
tion lock (Y page 135) and release it as soon
leave children or animals unattended in the as the engine is running.
vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of
reach of children. i Vehicles with a diesel engine: you can
start the engine without preglow if the engine
G WARNING is warm.
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
Using KEYLESS-GO to start the engine
gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling
these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There The Start/Stop button can be used to start the
is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave vehicle without inserting the SmartKey into the
the engine running in enclosed spaces with- ignition lock. The Start/Stop button must be
inserted in the ignition lock and the SmartKey
out sufficient ventilation.
must be in the vehicle. This mode for starting the
engine operates independently of the ECO
G WARNING start/stop automatic engine start function.
Flammable materials introduced through X Depress the brake pedal and keep it
environmental influence or by animals can depressed.
ignite if in contact with the exhaust system or X Press the Start/Stop button once
parts of the engine that heat up. There is a risk (Y page 135).
of fire. Vehicles with a gasoline engine: the engine
starts.
Carry out regular checks to make sure that
Vehicles with a diesel engine: preglow is
there are no flammable foreign materials in
activated and the engine starts.
the engine compartment or in the exhaust
system.
Starting procedure via smartphone
General notes Observe the important safety notes on starting
the engine (Y page 136).
Vehicles with a gasoline engine: the catalytic You can also start your engine via your smart-
converter is preheated for up to 30 seconds phone from outside the vehicle. In this case, the
after a cold start. The sound of the engine may previously selected climate control setting is
change during this time. activated. In this way you can cool or heat the
interior of the vehicle before starting the jour-
Automatic transmission ney.
Only start the engine via your smartphone if it is
X Shift the transmission to position j safe to start and run the engine where your vehi-
(Y page 144). cle is parked.
The transmission position indicator on the
multifunction display shows j Observe the legal stipulations in the area where
(Y page 145). your vehicle is parked. Engine start via smart-
phone may be limited to certain countries or
regions.

Z
138 Driving

You can execute a maximum of two consecutive the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There is
starting attempts via your smartphone. If you a risk of an accident.
insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock, you
can carry out two more starting attempts. When engaging transmission position D or R,
Once you have started the engine, you can always firmly depress the brake pedal and do
switch the engine off via your smartphone at any not simultaneously accelerate.
time.
You can only start the engine via your smart- Depress the accelerator carefully when pulling
phone if: away.
Driving and parking

Rthe SmartKey is in the ignition lock The vehicle locks centrally once you have pulled
away. The locking knobs in the doors drop down.
Rpark position j is selected
You can open the doors from the inside at any
Rthe accelerator pedal is not depressed
time.
Rthe anti-theft alarm system is not activated
You can also deactivate the automatic locking
Rthe panic alarm is not activated feature (Y page 239).
Rthe hazard warning lamps are switched off It is only possible to shift the transmission from
Rthe hood is closed position P to the desired position if you depress
Rthe doors are closed and locked the brake pedal. Only then is the parking lock
Rthe windows and sliding sunroof are closed
released. If you do not depress the brake pedal,
the DIRECT SELECT lever can still be moved but
Also make sure that: the parking lock remains engaged.
Rthe fuel tank is sufficiently filled
i Upshifts take place at higher engine speeds
Rthe starter battery is sufficiently charged
after a cold start. This helps the catalytic con-
G WARNING verter to reach its operating temperature
more quickly.
Limbs could be crushed or trapped if the
engine is started unintentionally during ser- Information on the automatic release of the
electric parking brake (Y page 158).
vice or maintenance work. There is a risk of
injury.
Pulling away with a trailer
Always secure the engine against uninten-
tional starting before carrying out mainte-
nance or repair work.

Make sure that the engine cannot be started via


your smartphone before carrying out mainte-
nance or repairs. You can prevent an engine
start via your smartphone, for example, if you:
Rswitch on the hazard warning lamps
Rdo not lock the doors
Ropen the hood

To ensure that you do not roll backwards when


Pulling away pulling away on an uphill slope, engage the elec-
tric parking brake.
General notes X Press and hold handle :.
The electric parking brake continues to brake
G WARNING and prevent the vehicle from rolling back-
If the engine speed is above the idling speed wards.
and you engage transmission position D or R,
Driving 139

The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada function thereby helps you to reduce the fuel
only) indicator lamp in the instrument cluster consumption and emissions of your vehicle.
remains on.
X Depress the accelerator pedal. Important safety notes
X As soon as the vehicle/trailer combination is
held by the driving force of the engine, release G WARNING
lever :. If the engine is switched off automatically and
the electric parking brake is released. you exit the vehicle, the engine is restarted
The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada

Driving and parking


automatically. The vehicle may begin moving.
only) indicator lamp in the instrument cluster
There is a risk of accident and injury.
goes out.
If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off
the ignition and secure the vehicle against
Hill start assist
rolling away.
Hill start assist helps you when pulling away for-
wards or in reverse on an uphill gradient. It holds
the vehicle for a short time after you have General notes
removed your foot from the brake pedal. This
gives you enough time to move your foot from
the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal and to
depress it before the vehicle begins to roll.
G WARNING
After a short time, hill start assist will no lon-
ger brake your vehicle and it could roll away.
There is a risk of an accident and injury. : ECO start/stop display
Therefore, quickly move your foot from the The ECO start/stop function is activated when-
brake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Never ever you start the engine using the SmartKey or
the Start/Stop button.
leave the vehicle when it is held by hill start
assist. If the engine has been switched off automati-
cally by the ECO start/stop function, the è
ECO symbol is shown in the multifunction dis-
Hill start assist is not active if:
play.
Ryou are pulling away on a level road or on a Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the ECO start/stop
downhill gradient. function is only available in drive programs
Rthe transmission is in position N. Comfort and Slippery.
Rthe electric parking brake is applied.
RESP® is malfunctioning. Automatic engine switch-off
If the vehicle is braked to a standstill in D or N,
the ECO start/stop function switches off the
ECO start/stop function engine automatically.
Introduction The ECO start/stop function is operational
when:
Plug-in hybrid: observe the notes on the ECO Rthe indicator lamp in the ECO button is lit
start/stop function in the separate Operator's green
Manual.
Rthe Sport Plus drive program is not selected
The ECO start/stop function switches the (Mercedes-AMG GLE 43 4MATIC)
engine off automatically if the vehicle is stopped
Rthe Sport Plus or Sport drive program is not
under certain conditions.
selected (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
The engine starts automatically when the driver
Rno Off-road program has been selected
wants to pull away again. The ECO start/stop

Z
140 Driving

Rthe outside temperature and the atmospheric Ryou switch to the Offroad or Offroad Plus
air pressure is within the range that is suitable drive program (vehicles with Off-Road Engi-
for the system neering package)
Rthe engine is at normal operating temperature Ryou unfasten your seat belt or open the driv-
Rthe set temperature for the vehicle interior er's door
has been reached Rthe vehicle starts to roll
Rthe battery is sufficiently charged Rthe brake system requires this
Rthe system detects that the windshield is not Rthe temperature in the vehicle interior devi-
Driving and parking

fogged up when the air-conditioning system is ates from the set range
switched on Rthe system detects moisture on the wind-
Rthe hood is closed shield when the air-conditioning system is
Rthe driver's door is closed and the driver's switched on
seat belt is fastened Rthe battery's condition of charge is too low
All of the vehicle's systems remain active when Shifting the transmission to position P does not
the engine is stopped automatically. start the engine.
The HOLD function can also be activated if the
engine has been switched off automatically. It is Deactivating or activating the ECO
then not necessary to continue applying the start/stop function
brakes during the automatic stop phase. When
you depress the accelerator pedal, the engine All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehi-
starts automatically and the braking effect of
the HOLD function is deactivated. cles)
All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehi-
cles): automatic engine switch-off can take
place a maximum of four times in a row (initial
stop, then three subsequent stops).
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the number of con-
secutive automatic engine switch-offs is unlimi-
ted.

Automatic engine start


The engine starts automatically if:
Ryou switch off the ECO start/stop function by
pressing the ECO button X To deactivate: press ECO button :.
Rin transmission position D or N the brake Indicator lamp ; goes out.
pedal is released and the HOLD function is not X To activate: press ECO button :.
active Indicator lamp ; lights up.
Ryou depress the accelerator pedal If indicator lamp ; is off, the ECO start/stop
Ryou engage reverse gear R function has been deactivated manually or as
Ryou move the transmission out of position P
the result of a malfunction.
Ryou switch to the Sport Plus drive program
(Mercedes-AMG GLE 43 4MATIC)
Ryou switch to the Sport Plus or Sport drive
program (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
Ryou activate manual gearshifting (Mercedes-
AMG vehicles)
Ryou switch to the Offroad drive program
(vehicles without Off-Road Engineering pack-
age)
Driving 141

Mercedes-AMG vehicles X Activate manual gearshifting (Y page 147).


or
X Switch to the Sport Plus or Sport drive pro-
gram (Y page 142).
Indicator lamp ; goes out.
X To activate: press ECO button :.
Indicator lamp ; lights up. When the
Sport Plus or Sport drive program is activa-

Driving and parking


ted, the automatic transmission switches to
the Comfort drive program.
If indicator lamp ; is off, the ECO start/stop
function has been deactivated manually or as
the result of a malfunction.
X To deactivate: in the Comfort drive pro-
gram, press ECO button :.
or

Problems with the engine


Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The engine does not RThere is a malfunction in the engine electronics.
start. The starter motor RThere is a malfunction in the fuel supply.
can be heard. Before attempting to start the engine again:
X Turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock back to position u.
or
X Press the Start/Stop button repeatedly until all indicator lamps in
the instrument cluster go out.
X Try to start the engine again (Y page 136). Avoid excessively long
and frequent attempts to start the engine as these will drain the
battery.
If the engine does not start after several attempts:
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The engine does not The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weak or
start. You cannot hear discharged.
the starter motor. X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 342).
If the engine does not start despite attempts to jump-start it:
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The starter motor was exposed to a thermal load that was too high.
X Allow the starter motor to cool down for approximately two minutes.
X Try to start the engine again.
If the engine still does not start:
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Z
142 DYNAMIC SELECT controller

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions


Vehicles with a gasoline There is a malfunction in the engine electronics or in a mechanical
engine: component of the engine management system.
The engine is not running X Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly.
smoothly and is misfir- Otherwise, non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic converter
ing. and damage it.
X Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialist work-
shop.
Driving and parking

The coolant temperature The coolant level is too low. The coolant is too hot and the engine is no
gage shows a value longer being cooled sufficiently.
above 248 ‡ (120 †). X Stop as soon as possible and allow the engine and the coolant to
cool down.
X Check the coolant level (Y page 324). Observe the warning notes
as you do so and add coolant if necessary.

DYNAMIC SELECT controller

Plug-in hybrid: observe the notes on the


DYNAMIC SELECT controller in the separate
Operator's Manual.
Use the DYNAMIC SELECT controller to change
the drive program. Depending on the drive pro-
gram selected the following vehicle character-
istics will change:
Rthe drive (engine and transmission manage-
ment)
Rthe transmission X All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehi-
Rthe suspension cles): turn DYNAMIC SELECT controller : as
Rthe steering many times as necessary until the desired
Rthe availability of the ECO start/stop function drive program is selected.
The selected drive program appears in the
Each time you start the engine with the Smart- multifunction display. After five seconds the
Key or the Start/Stop button, the Comfort drive display goes out.
program is activated. For further information
about starting the engine, see (Y page 136). In addition, the current drive program settings
are displayed in the multimedia system dis-
The Comfort drive program is recommended in play.
city traffic and stop/start traffic situations.
Drive programs available (all vehicles
except Mercedes-AMG vehicles):
Individual Individual settings
Sport Sporty driving characteris-
tics
Comfort Comfortable and economi-
cal driving characteristics
Automatic transmission 143

Slippery Optimal driving characteris- Sport Sporty driving characteris-


tics on slippery or snow- tics
covered roads
Sport Plus Particularly sporty driving
Off-road Optimal driving characteris- characteristics
tics for easily negotiable off-
road terrain Slippery Optimal driving characteris-
tics on slippery or snow-
Off-road Plus Optimal driving characteris- covered roads

Driving and parking


(vehicles with tics for rough terrain
Off-Road Engi-
Additional information for drive programs
neering pack-
(Y page 146).
age)

Further information on: Automatic transmission


Rthe Individual, Sport, Comfort and Slippery
drive programs (Y page 146) Important safety notes
Rthe Off-road drive program (vehicles without
G WARNING
Off-Road Engineering package)
(Y page 214) The automatic transmission switches to neu-
Rthe Off-road and Off-road Plus drive pro- tral position N when you switch off the engine.
grams (vehicles with Off-Road Engineering The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an
package) (Y page 215) accident.
After switching off the engine, always switch
to parking position P. Prevent the parked vehi-
cle from rolling away by applying the parking
brake.

Plug-in hybrid: be sure to read the separate


Operator's Manual. Otherwise, you may not rec-
ognize dangers.

DIRECT SELECT lever


X Mercedes-AMG vehicles: turn DYNAMIC Overview of transmission positions
SELECT controller : as many times as nec-
essary until the desired drive program is
selected.
The selected drive program appears in the
multifunction display. After five seconds the
display goes out.
In addition, the current drive program settings
are displayed in the multimedia system dis-
play.
Drive programs available (Mercedes-AMG
vehicles):
Individual Individual settings
j Park position with parking lock
Comfort Comfortable and economi- k Reverse gear
cal driving characteristics

Z
144 Automatic transmission

i Neutral Shifting to neutral N


h Drive
G WARNING
The DIRECT SELECT lever is on the right of the
steering column. If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,
The DIRECT SELECT lever always returns to its they could:
original position. The current transmission posi- Ropen the doors, thus endangering other
tion j, k, i or h is shown on the trans- people or road users.
mission position display on the multifunction
Rget out and disrupt traffic.
Driving and parking

display (Y page 145).


Roperate the vehicle's equipment.
Engaging park position P Additionally, children could set the vehicle in
motion if, for example, they:
! If the engine speed is too high or the vehicle
is coasting, do not shift the automatic trans- Rrelease the parking brake.
mission directly from h to k, from k to h Rshifting the automatic transmission out of
or directly to j. Otherwise, the automatic
transmission may be damaged. park position P
RStart the engine.
X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever switch in the
direction of arrow j. There is a risk of an accident and injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
Engaging park position P automatically SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children or animals unattended in the
Park position j is automatically engaged if: vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of
RYou switch off the engine using the SmartKey reach of children.
and remove the SmartKey
RYou switch off the engine using the SmartKey X If the transmission is in position h or k:
or using the Start/Stop button and open the push the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down to
driver's door or front-passenger door the first point of resistance.
RYou open the driver's door when the vehicle is X If the transmission is in position j: depress
stationary or when driving at a very low speed the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT
and the transmission is in position h or k lever up or down to the first point of resist-
ance.
Under certain conditions, the automatic trans-
mission shifts automatically to transmission If you switch the engine off with the transmis-
position j if the HOLD function or Distance sion in position k or h, the automatic trans-
Pilot DISTRONIC is activated. Observe the infor- mission shifts to i automatically.
mation on the HOLD function (Y page 182) and With the SmartKey: if you then open the driv-
on Distance Pilot DISTRONIC (Y page 174). er's door or the front-passenger door or remove
the SmartKey from the ignition lock, the auto-
Engaging reverse gear R matic transmission shifts to j automatically.
With the Start/Stop button: if you then open
! Only move the automatic transmission to the driver's door or the front-passenger door,
k when the vehicle is stationary. the automatic transmission shifts automatically
X If the transmission is in position h or i: to j.
push the DIRECT SELECT lever up past the If you want the automatic transmission to
first point of resistance. remain in neutral i, e.g. when having the vehi-
X If the transmission is in position j: depress cle cleaned in an automatic, tow-through car
the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT wash:
lever up past the first point of resistance.
Automatic transmission 145

With the SmartKey: The arrows in the transmission position display


X Switch on the ignition. show how and into which transmission positions
you can shift using the DIRECT SELECT lever.
X Depress the brake pedal and keep it
depressed. If the transmission position display on the mul-
tifunction display is not working, you should pull
X Shift to neutral i.
away carefully to check whether the desired
X Release the brake pedal. transmission position is engaged. Ideally, you
X Release the electric parking brake. should select transmission position h.
X Switch off the ignition and leave the SmartKey

Driving and parking


in the ignition lock.
With the Start/Stop button: Transmission positions
X Remove the Start/Stop button from the igni- B Park position
tion lock. Only shift the transmission into posi-
X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. tion P when the vehicle is stationary
X Switch on the ignition. (Y page 156). The parking lock
X Depress the brake pedal and keep it should not be used as a brake when
depressed. parking. Always apply the electronic
X Shift to neutral i. parking brake in addition to the park-
ing lock in order to secure the vehi-
X Release the brake pedal.
cle.
X Release the electric parking brake.
If the vehicle electronics are malfunc-
X Switch off the ignition and leave the SmartKey tioning, the transmission may be
in the ignition lock. locked in position P. Have the vehicle
electronics checked immediately at a
Engaging drive position D qualified specialist workshop.
Park position P is automatically
X If the transmission is in position k or i: engaged if:
push the DIRECT SELECT lever down past the
first point of resistance. Ryou switch off the engine using the

X If the transmission is in position j: depress


SmartKey and remove the Smart-
Key
the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT
lever down past the first point of resistance. Ryou switch off the engine using the
SmartKey or using the Start/Stop
button and open the driver's door
or front-passenger door
Transmission position and drive pro- Rthe driver's door is opened when
gram display the vehicle is stationary or driving
The current transmission position and drive pro- at very low speed and the trans-
gram appear in the multifunction display. mission is in position D or R
C Reverse gear
Only shift the transmission into posi-
tion R when the vehicle is stationary.

: Transmission position
; Gear
= Drive program

Z
146 Automatic transmission

A Neutral Kickdown
Do not shift the transmission to N Use kickdown for maximum acceleration.
while driving. Otherwise, the auto- X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the
matic transmission could be dam- pressure point.
aged. The automatic transmission shifts to a lower
No power is transmitted from the gear depending on the engine speed.
engine to the drive wheels. X Ease off the accelerator pedal once the
Releasing the brakes will allow you to desired speed is reached.
Driving and parking

move the vehicle freely, e.g. to push The automatic transmission shifts back up.
it or tow it.
If ESP® is deactivated or faulty: shift
the transmission to position N if the
Rocking the vehicle free
vehicle is in danger of skidding, e.g. Shifting back and forth between transmission
on icy roads. positions h and k can help to free up the
If you switch the engine off with the vehicle if it gets stuck in mud or snow. The vehi-
transmission in position R or D, the cle's engine management system limits the
automatic transmission shifts to N speed to a maximum of 5 mph (9 km/h) when
automatically. shifting back and forth. To shift repeatedly
between transmission positions h and k,
! Coasting in neutral i may move the DIRECT SELECT lever up and down
cause damage to the drive train. past the point of resistance.
7 Drive
The automatic transmission changes Towing a trailer
gear automatically. All forward gears X Drive in the middle of the engine speed range
are available. on uphill gradients.
X Depending on the uphill or downhill gradient,
use the left-hand steering wheel paddle
Driving tips shifter (Y page 147) to select a lower gear,
even if cruise control or Distance Pilot
Changing gear DISTRONIC are activated.
The automatic transmission shifts through the
individual gears automatically when it is in trans-
mission position h. This automatic gear shift- Drive programs
ing behavior is determined by:
Slippery drive program
Rthe selected drive program
Rthe position of the accelerator pedal The Slippery drive program has the following
Rthe road speed characteristics:
Rreduced engine and transmission settings for
Accelerator pedal position optimum propulsion on slippery or snow-cov-
ered roads.
Your style of driving influences how the auto- Roptimized ESP® stability control on slippery or
matic transmission shifts gear: snow-covered roads.
Rlittle throttle: early upshifts Rthe vehicle has improved driving stability on
Rmore throttle: late upshifts slippery or snow-covered roads, for example.
Automatic transmission 147

Comfort drive program Individual drive program


The Comfort drive program has the following In the Individual drive program, the following
characteristics: properties of the drive program can be selected:
Rcomfort-oriented engine and transmission Rthe drive (engine and transmission manage-
settings. ment)
Roptimal fuel consumption resulting from the Rthe transmission
automatic transmission shifting up sooner. Rthe suspension
Rthe vehicle pulling away more gently in

Driving and parking


Rall vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles):
forward and reverse gears, unless the accel- the steering
erator pedal is depressed fully. Rall vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles):
Rthe automatic transmission shifting up availability of the ECO start/stop function
sooner. This results in the vehicle being driven To select the gears in the Individual drive pro-
at lower engine speeds and the wheels being gram permanently using the steering wheel pad-
less likely to spin. dle shifters, select the permanent manual gear-
shift program.
Sport drive program Information about configuring the Individual
The Sport drive program has the following char- drive program with the multimedia system can
acteristics: be found in the Digital Operator's Manual.
Rsporty engine and transmission settings.
Rthe automatic transmission shifting up later.
Manual gear shifting
the fuel consumption possibly being higher as
a result of the later automatic transmission General notes
shift points.
Rthe suspension exhibits sporty damping (vehi- You can change gear yourself using the steering
cles with AIRMATIC). wheel paddle shifters. The transmission must be
in position h to do this.
Drive program Sport Plus (Mercedes- Depending on which steering wheel paddle
AMG vehicles) shifter is pulled, the automatic transmission
immediately shifts into the next gear down or
The Sport Plus drive program has the following up, if permitted.
characteristics: To use manual shifting, you have two options:
Rthe vehicle exhibits particularly sporty driving Rtemporary setting
characteristics. Rpermanent setting
Rthe vehicle pulling away in first gear. If you activate manual gearshifting, the current
Rthe automatic transmission shifting up later. gear appears in the multifunction display
the fuel consumption possibly being higher as instead of transmission position h.
a result of the later automatic transmission If manual gearshifting is deactivated, the gears
shift points. will be selected automatically.
Rthe suspension exhibits particularly firm
springing and damping settings (vehicles with
AIRMATIC).
Rthe ECO start/stop function is deactivated, it
can, however, be activated again using the
ECO button (Y page 140).

Z
148 Automatic transmission

Temporary setting X To deactivate: press button :.


or
X Use the DYNAMIC SELECT controller to
change the drive program.

Permanent setting (Mercedes-AMG


vehicles)
Driving and parking

X To activate: shift the DIRECT SELECT lever to


position h.
X Pull steering wheel paddle shifter : or ;.
The temporary setting is active for a certain
amount of time. Under certain conditions, the
minimum amount of time is extended, e.g. in the
case of lateral acceleration, during overrun X To activate: shift the DIRECT SELECT lever to
mode or when driving on steep terrain. position h.
X To deactivate: pull steering wheel paddle X Press button :.
shifter ; and hold it in place. Indicator lamp ; lights up.
or
X To deactivate: press button :.
X Use the DIRECT SELECT lever to switch the
transmission position. or
or X Use the DYNAMIC SELECT controller to
switch to the Individual drive program.
X Use the DYNAMIC SELECT controller to
Indicator lamp ; goes out.
change the drive program.

Permanent setting (all vehicles except Shifting gears


Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ! Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the automatic
transmission does not shift up automatically
even when the engine limiting speed for the
current gear is reached. When the engine lim-
iting speed is reached, the fuel supply is cut to
prevent the engine from overrevving. Always
make sure that the engine speed does not
reach the red area of the tachometer. There is
otherwise a risk of engine damage.

X To activate: shift the DIRECT SELECT lever to


position h.
X Press button :.
Automatic transmission 149

display of the instrument cluster, shift to rec-


ommended gear ;.

Upshifting (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)


! In manual mode, the automatic transmis-
sion does not shift up automatically even
when the engine limiting speed for the current
gear is reached. When the engine limiting

Driving and parking


speed is reached, the fuel supply is cut to
prevent the engine from overrevving. Always
make sure that the engine speed does not
X To shift up: pull steering wheel paddle reach the red area of the tachometer. There is
shifter ;. otherwise a risk of engine damage.
The automatic transmission shifts up to the
next gear.
All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehi-
cles): if the maximum engine speed in the
gear currently engaged is reached and you
continue to accelerate, the automatic trans-
mission automatically shifts up to prevent
engine damage.
: Gear indicator
X To shift down: pull steering wheel paddle
shifter :. ; Upshift indicator
The automatic transmission shifts down to Before the engine speed reaches the red area,
the next gear. an upshift indicator will be shown in the multi-
Automatic down shifting occurs when coast- function display.
ing. X When the UP message appears in the multi-
If the engine were to exceed the maximum function display, pull on the right-hand steer-
engine speed when shifting down, the auto- ing wheel paddle shifter.
matic transmission protects against engine
damage by not shifting down. Kickdown
Shift recommendation Mercedes-AMG vehicles: kickdown is only
possible in the temporary setting.
X For maximum acceleration, depress the
accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point.
The automatic transmission shifts to a lower
gear depending on the engine speed.
X Shift back up once the desired speed is
reached.
During kickdown, you cannot shift gears using
The gearshift recommendations assist you in the steering wheel paddle shifters.
adopting an economical driving style. The rec- If you apply full throttle, the automatic trans-
ommended gear is shown in the multifunction mission shifts up to the next gear when the
display. maximum engine speed is reached. This pre-
X When the corresponding gearshift recom- vents the engine from overrevving.
mendation : appears in the multifunction

Z
150 Refueling

Problems with the transmission


Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The transmission has The transmission is losing oil.
problems shifting gear. X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop
immediately.
7G-TRONIC: The transmission is in emergency mode.
Driving and parking

The acceleration ability It is only possible to shift into second gear and reverse gear.
is deteriorating. X Stop the vehicle.
The transmission no lon- X Shift the transmission to position P.
ger changes gear.
X Switch off the engine.
X Wait at least ten seconds before restarting the engine.
X Shift the transmission to position D or R.
If D is selected, the transmission shifts into second gear; if R is
selected, the transmission shifts into reverse gear.
X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop
immediately.
9G-TRONIC: The transmission is in emergency mode.
The acceleration ability It is only partly possible to engage the gears or the transmission is in
is deteriorating. position N.
The transmission no lon- X Stop the vehicle.
ger changes gear. X Shift the transmission to position P.
X Switch off the engine.
X Wait at least ten seconds before restarting the engine.
X Shift the transmission to position D or R.
X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop
immediately.

Transfer case ! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towed


with either the front or the rear axle raised, as
This section is only valid for vehicles with 4- doing so will damage the transmission.
wheel drive (4MATIC). Power is always trans-
mitted to both axles.
! Performance tests may only be carried out Refueling
on a 2-axle dynamometer. The brake system
or transfer case could otherwise be damaged. Important safety notes
Contact a qualified specialist workshop for a
performance test. G WARNING
Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel
! Because ESP® is an automatic system, the
engine and ignition must be switched off incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explo-
(SmartKey in position 0 or 1 or Start/Stop sion.
button in position 0 or 1) when the electric You must avoid fire, open flames, creating
parking brake is being tested on a brake dyna- sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine
mometer (maximum 10 seconds). and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before
Braking triggered automatically by ESP® may refueling.
seriously damage the brake system.
Refueling 151

G WARNING engine. The repair costs are high. Notify a


qualified specialist workshop and have the
Fuel is poisonous and hazardous to health. fuel tank and fuel lines drained completely.
There is a risk of injury.
! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a
You must make sure that fuel does not come gasoline engine. Do not switch on the ignition
into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing if you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel.
and that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuel Otherwise, the fuel will enter the fuel system.
vapors. Keep fuel away from children. Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could
result in damage to the fuel system and the

Driving and parking


If you or others come into contact with fuel,
engine. Notify a qualified specialist workshop
observe the following: and have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained
RWash away fuel from skin immediately completely.
using soap and water. ! Overfilling the fuel tank could damage the
RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes, fuel system.
immediately rinse them thoroughly with ! Take care not to spill any fuel on painted
clean water. Seek medical assistance with- surfaces. You could otherwise damage the
out delay. paintwork.
RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical assis-
! Use a filter when adding fuel from a fuel can.
tance without delay. Do not induce vomit- The fuel lines and/or the fuel injection system
ing. could otherwise be blocked by particles from
RImmediately change out of clothing which the fuel can.
has come into contact with fuel. Do not get into the vehicle again during the refu-
eling process. Otherwise, electrostatic charge
G WARNING could build up again.
If you overfill the fuel tank, fuel could spray out
Electrostatic buildup can create sparks and
when the fuel pump nozzle is removed.
ignite fuel vapors. There is a risk of fire and
explosion. i Flexible Fuel vehicles can be recognized by
the Ethanol up to E85 sticker on the inside of
Always touch the vehicle body before opening
the fuel filler flap.
the fuel filler flap or touching the fuel pump
nozzle. Any existing electrostatic buildup is For further information on fuel and fuel quality
(Y page 384).
thereby discharged.

G WARNING Refueling
Vehicles with a diesel engine:
If you mix diesel fuel with gasoline, the flash General information
point is lower than that of pure diesel fuel. Pay attention to the important safety notes
When the engine is running, exhaust system (Y page 150).
components could overheat without being If you unlock/lock the vehicle from the outside,
noticed. There is a risk of fire. the fuel filler flap also unlocks/locks.
Never refuel with gasoline. Never mix gasoline The position of the fuel filler cap is displayed in
with diesel fuel. the instrument cluster 8. The arrow next to
the filling pump indicates the side of the vehicle.
! Do not use gasoline to refuel vehicles with a
diesel engine. Do not switch on the ignition if
you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel.
Otherwise, the fuel will enter the fuel system.
Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could
result in damage to the fuel system and the

Z
152 Refueling

Preparing to refuel X Completely insert the filler neck of the fuel


pump nozzle into the tank, hook in place and
X Switch off the engine. refuel.
X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. X Only fill the tank until the pump nozzle
or, on vehicles with KEYLESS‑GO: switches off.
X Open the driver's door. Do not add any more fuel after the pump stops
The vehicle electronics now have status g. filling for the first time. Otherwise, fuel may
This is the same as the SmartKey having been leak out.
removed.
Driving and parking

Vehicles with a diesel engine: the filler neck is


The driver’s door can be closed again. designed for refueling at diesel filling pumps.

Opening the fuel filler flap Closing the fuel filler flap
X Replace the cap on the filler neck and turn
clockwise until it engages audibly.
X Close the fuel filler flap.
Close the fuel filler flap before locking the vehi-
cle.
If you drive at speeds above 1 mph (2 km/h)
with the fuel filler flap open, the Fuel Filler
Flap Open message is shown in the multifunc-
tion display.
If you are driving with the fuel filler cap open, the
8 reserve fuel warning lamp flashes. A mes-
: Opens the fuel filler flap sage appears in the multifunction display
; Insert the fuel filler cap (Y page 258).
= Instruction label for fuel type to be refueled In addition, the ; Check Engine warning
lamp may light up (Y page 283).
? Tire pressure table
X Press the fuel filler flap in the direction of i For further information on warning and indi-
arrow :. cator lamps in the instrument cluster, see
The fuel filler flap swings up. (Y page 283).
X Turn the fuel filler cap counterclockwise and
remove it.
X Insert the fuel filler cap into the holder
bracket on the inside of the filler flap in the
direction of arrow ;.
Refueling 153

Problems with fuel and the fuel tank


Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Fuel is leaking from the G WARNING
vehicle.
The fuel line or the fuel tank is faulty.
Risk of explosion or fire.
X Apply the electric parking brake.

Driving and parking


X Switch off the engine.
X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
or, in vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-function or KEYLESS‑GO
X Open the driver's door.
The vehicle electronics are now in key position u. This is the same
as the SmartKey having been removed.
X Do not restart the engine under any circumstances.
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The engine does not The fuel tank of a vehicle with a diesel engine has been run completely
start. dry.
X Refuel the vehicle with at least 5.3 US qt (5 liters) of diesel.
X Turn the ignition on for approximately ten seconds (Y page 135).
X Start the engine continuously for up to ten seconds until it runs
smoothly.
If the engine does not start:
X Turn the ignition on again for approximately ten seconds
(Y page 135).
X Start the engine again continuously for up to ten seconds until it
runs smoothly.
If the engine does not start after three attempts:
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The fuel filler flap cannot The fuel filler flap is not unlocked.
be opened. X Unlock the vehicle (Y page 77).

The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.


X Unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (Y page 79).

The fuel filler flap is unlocked, but the opening mechanism is jammed.
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

DEF (BlueTEC vehicles only) When the supply of DEF is almost used up, the
Check Additive See Operator's Manual
General notes message is shown in the multifunction display.
If you drive the vehicle faster than 10 mph
To function properly, BlueTEC exhaust gas after- (16 km/h), the Check Additive See Opera‐
treatment must be operated with the reducing tor's Manual message goes out after approx-
agent DEF. Adding DEF is one of the tasks per- imately one minute.
formed during maintenance.

Z
154 Refueling

When the DEF supply drops to a minimum, the If you or other persons come into contact with
Remaining Starts: 16 message is shown in DEF, observe the following:
the multifunction display. RRinse DEF from your skin immediately with
If the Remaining Starts: 16 message soap and water.
appears in the multifunction display, you can RIf DEF comes into contact with your eyes,
start the engine another 16 times. If DEF is not immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean
refilled, you will subsequently be unable to water. Seek medical assistance without
start the engine. delay.
X Add at least 2 gal (7.5 l) of DEF.
Driving and parking

RIf DEF has been swallowed, rinse your mouth


X Switch on the ignition for at least 60 seconds. out immediately. Drink plenty of water. Seek
X Start the engine. medical assistance without delay.
RChange out of clothing contaminated with
i Have the DEF tank refilled at a qualified spe- DEF immediately.
cialist workshop.
! Only use DEF in accordance with
Use the special DEF refill bottle when adding ISO 22241. Do not mix any additives with
DEF between maintenance intervals. You can DEF, and do not dilute DEF with water. This
obtain further information from an authorized may destroy the BlueTEC exhaust gas after-
Mercedes-Benz Center or, if necessary, contact treatment system.
Roadside Assistance (Y page 29).
If the outside temperature is below 12 ‡ ! The vehicle must be parked on level ground
(Ò11 †), it may be difficult to top up. If DEF is to fill the DEF tank. The DEF tank can only be
frozen and there is an active warning indicator, it filled as intended with the vehicle parked on a
may not be possible to add DEF. Park the vehicle level surface. This avoids false level readings.
in a warmer place, e.g. in a garage, until DEF has Filling the tank is not permitted if the vehicle
become fluid again. It will then be possible to is not parked on a level surface. There is a
add DEF again. Alternatively, have the DEF tank danger of overfilling, which could result in
refilled at a qualified specialist workshop. damage to components of the BlueTEC
Further information about BlueTEC exhaust gas exhaust gas aftertreatment.
aftertreatment and DEF is available at any ! Immediately rinse off surfaces which come
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. into contact with DEF or remove DEF with a
damp cloth and cold water. If DEF has already
Important safety notes crystallized, clean using a sponge and cold
water. DEF residue crystallizes after a short
DEF is a water-soluble fluid for the exhaust gas period and contaminates the affected surfa-
aftertreatment of diesel engines. It is: ces. Furthermore, electrical components in
Rnot poisonous the vicinity may be damaged by DEF.
Rcolorless and odorless ! DEF is not a fuel additive and must not be
Rnot flammable added to the fuel tank. If DEF is added to the
When you open the DEF container, small fuel tank, this can lead to engine damage.
amounts of ammonia vapor may be released. For further information on DEF, see
Ammonia vapors have a pungent odor and are (Y page 386).
particularly irritating to the skin, to mucous
membranes and to the eyes. You may experi-
ence a burning sensation in your eyes, nose and
throat. Coughing and watering of the eyes are
possible.
Do not inhale ammonia vapors. Fill the DEF tank
only in well-ventilated areas.
DEF must not come into contact with your skin,
eyes or clothing and must not be swallowed.
Keep DEF away from children.
Refueling 155

Opening/closing the DEF filler cap

Driving and parking


X Unscrew the cap from the opening on top of
DEF refill canister ;.
The fuel filler flap is unlocked or locked auto- X Place disposable hose : on the opening of
matically when you open or close the vehicle DEF refill canister ; and screw it on clock-
with the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO. wise until hand-tight.
X To open: switch the ignition off. Disposable hose : remains closed until you
X Press the fuel filler flap in the direction of fasten disposable hose : to the DEF filler
arrow :. neck of the vehicle.
The fuel filler flap swings up.
X Turn blue DEF fuel filler cap ; counter-clock-
wise and remove it.
DEF filler cap ; is secured with a plastic
strip.
X To close: place DEF filler cap ; on the filler
neck and turn it clockwise.
X To close the fuel filler flap, press it in the
direction of arrow :.
X Drive faster than 10 mph (16 km/h).
The Check Additive See Operator's
Manual message goes out after approx-
imately one minute. X Place disposable hose : on the filler neck on
i If the Check Additive See Operator's the vehicle and screw it on clockwise until
Manual message continues to be shown in hand-tight. When you feel resistance, dispos-
the multifunction display, you must add more able hose : is sufficiently secured.
DEF. X Lift up and tip DEF refill canister ;.
Filling stops when the DEF tank is completely
DEF refill canisters filled. Do not fill the DEF tank any further. DEF
refill canister ; can be removed when it has
! Do not screw the disposable hose on too been only partially emptied.
tight. The disposable hose could otherwise be X Turn disposable hose : on the filler neck of
damaged and DEF may leak out. the vehicle counter-clockwise and remove it.
X Turn disposable hose : on the opening of
DEF refill canister ; counter-clockwise and
remove it.
X Reseal DEF refill canister ; with the cap.
DEF refill canisters are available at many gas
stations or at a qualified specialist workshop.
DEF refill canisters are often sold with a filler
hose. A filler hose that does not exactly fill the
vehicle's DEF tank offers no protection against

Z
156 Parking

overfilling. DEF may leak if overfilled. Mercedes- Parking


Benz offers a special disposable hose with over-
fill protection. You can obtain this from any Important safety notes
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. DEF is avail-
able in a variety of containers and receptacles. G WARNING
Only use the disposable hose with the Flammable material such as leaves, grass or
Mercedes-Benz DEF refill canisters.
twigs may ignite if they come into contact with
hot parts of the exhaust system or exhaust
DEF refill bottle
Driving and parking

gas flow. There is a risk of fire.


! Only screw on the DEF refill bottle hand- Park the vehicle so that no flammable mate-
tight. Otherwise, the thread of the DEF refill rials come into contact with parts of the vehi-
bottle could be damaged and DEF could leak
cle which are hot. Take particular care not to
out.
park on dry grassland or harvested grain
fields.

G WARNING
If you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-
cle, they could set it in motion by, for example:
Rrelease the parking brake.
Rshift the automatic transmission out of the
parking position P.
Rstart the engine.
In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-
X Unscrew the protective cap from DEF refill
bottle :. ment and become trapped. There is a risk of
X Place DEF refill bottle : on the filler neck as an accident and injury.
shown and screw it on clockwise until hand- When leaving the vehicle, always take the
tight. SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
X Press DEF refill bottle : towards the filler leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
neck.
The DEF tank is filled. This may take up to one ! Always secure the vehicle correctly against
minute. rolling away. Otherwise, the vehicle or its driv-
i When DEF refill bottle : is no longer etrain could be damaged.
pressed, filling stops and the bottle may be To ensure that the vehicle is secured against
taken off again after being only partially emp- rolling away unintentionally:
tied.
Rthe electric parking brake must be applied
X Release DEF refill bottle :.
Rthe transmission must be in position j and
X Turn DEF refill bottle : counter-clockwise the SmartKey must be removed from the igni-
and remove it. tion lock
X Screw the protective cap onto DEF refill bot- Rthe front wheels must be turned towards the
tle : again. curb on steep uphill or downhill gradients
DEF refill bottles are available at many gas sta- Rthe empty vehicle must be secured at the
tions or at a qualified specialist workshop. Refill front axle with a wheel chock or similar, for
bottles without a threaded cap do not provide example, on uphill or downhill gradients
overfill protection. DEF may leak if overfilled. Ra laden vehicle must also be secured at the
Mercedes Benz offers special refill bottles with a rear axle with a wheel chock or similar, for
threaded seal. These are available at any author- example, on uphill or downhill gradients
ized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Parking 157

Switching off the engine Electric parking brake


G WARNING General notes
The automatic transmission switches to neu-
G WARNING
tral position N when you switch off the engine.
The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an If you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-
accident. cle, they could set it in motion by, for example:
After switching off the engine, always switch Rrelease the parking brake.

Driving and parking


to parking position P. Prevent the parked vehi- Rshift the automatic transmission out of the
cle from rolling away by applying the parking parking position P.
brake. Rstart the engine.

X Apply the electric parking brake. In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-
ment and become trapped. There is a risk of
X Shift the transmission to position j.
an accident and injury.
X With the SmartKey: turn the SmartKey to
position u in the ignition lock and remove it. When leaving the vehicle, always take the
The immobilizer is activated. SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
X With KEYLESS-GO: leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
Press the Start/Stop button (Y page 135)
The engine stops and all the indicator lamps in The function of the electric parking brake is
the instrument cluster go out. dependent on the on-board voltage. If the on-
board voltage is low or there is a malfunction in
If you switch the engine off with the transmis- the system, it may not be possible to apply the
sion in position k or h, the automatic trans- released parking brake.
mission shifts to i automatically.
X If this is the case, only park the vehicle on
If you then open the driver's or front-passenger
level ground and secure it to prevent it rolling
door, the automatic transmission shifts to j
away.
automatically.
X Shift the automatic transmission to position
If you want the automatic transmission to j.
remain in neutral i, e.g. when having the vehi-
cle cleaned in an automatic, tow-through car It may not be possible to release an applied
wash: parking brake if the on-board voltage is low or
there is a malfunction in the system. Contact a
X Vehicles with a SmartKey: switch on the
qualified specialist workshop.
ignition.
X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: remove the i The electric parking brake performs a func-
Start/Stop button from the ignition lock. tion test at regular intervals while the engine
X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
is switched off. The sounds that can be heard
while this is occurring are normal.
X Switch on the ignition.
X All vehicles: depress the brake pedal and
keep it depressed.
X Engage neutral i.
X Release the brake pedal.
X Release the electric parking brake.
X Switch off the ignition and leave the SmartKey
in the ignition lock.
i The engine can be switched off in an emer-
gency while the vehicle is in motion by press-
ing and holding the Start/Stop button for
three seconds.

Z
158 Parking

Applying or releasing manually The electric parking brake is also engaged auto-
matically if:
RDistance Pilot DISTRONIC brings the vehicle
to a standstill or
Rthe HOLD function is keeping the vehicle sta-
tionary
RParking Pilot is keeping the vehicle stationary
In addition, at least one of the following condi-
Driving and parking

tions must be fulfilled:


Rthe engine is switched off
Rthe driver is not wearing a seat belt and the
driver's door is opened
Rthere is a system malfunction
X To engage: push handle :.
Rthe power supply is insufficient
When the electric parking brake is engaged,
the F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) Rthe vehicle is stationary for a lengthy period
red indicator lamp lights up in the instrument The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only)
cluster. indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights
i The electric parking brake can also be up.
applied when the SmartKey is removed. The electric parking brake is not automatically
X To release: pull handle :. engaged if the engine is switched off by the ECO
The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada start/stop function.
only) indicator lamp in the instrument cluster
goes out. Releasing automatically
i The electric parking brake can only be The electric parking brake is released automat-
released: ically when all of the following conditions are
Rwhen the SmartKey is in position 1 in the fulfilled:
ignition lock (Y page 135) or RThe engine is running.
Rif the ignition was switched on using the RThe seat belt tongue is engaged in the belt
Start/Stop button buckle.
To ensure that you do not roll backwards when RThe transmission is in position h or k and
pulling away on an uphill slope, engage the elec- you depress the accelerator pedal or, on a
tric parking brake (Y page 138). level surface, shift from transmission position
j to h or k.
Applying automatically RIf the transmission is in position k, the trunk

The electric parking brake is automatically lid must be closed.


applied when the transmission is in position j If the seat belt tongue is not engaged in the seat
and belt buckle, the following conditions must be
fulfilled:
Rthe engine is switched off or
RThe driver's door is closed.
Rthe driver is not wearing a seat belt and the
driver's door is opened RYou are shifting from transmission position

To prevent the electric parking brake from being j or have previously driven at speeds
automatically applied, pull handle :. greater than 2 mph (3 km/h).
RIf the transmission is in position k, the trunk
lid must be closed.
When the electric parking brake is released,
the ! indicator lamp goes out in the instru-
ment cluster.
Driving tips 159

Emergency braking Driving tips


General notes
Important safety notes
G WARNING
If you switch off the ignition while driving,
safety-relevant functions are only available

Driving and parking


with limitations, or not at all. This could affect,
for example, the power steering and the brake
boosting effect. You will require considerably
more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk
The vehicle can also be braked during an emer- of an accident.
gency by using the electric parking brake. Do not switch off the ignition while driving.
X While driving, push handle : of the electric
parking brake. G WARNING
The vehicle is braked for as long as the handle
of the electric parking brake is pressed. The If you operate mobile communication equip-
longer the electric parking brake handle is ment when driving, you may be distracted
depressed, the greater the braking force. from the traffic situation. You could also lose
During braking: control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an
Ra
accident.
warning tone sounds
Rthe Release Park. Brake message appears Only operate this equipment when the vehicle
Rthe red F (USA only) or ! (Canada is stationary.
only) indicator lamp in the instrument cluster
flashes Observe the legal requirements for the country
in which you are driving. Some jurisdictions pro-
When the vehicle has been braked to a stand- hibit the driver from using a mobile phone while
still, the electric parking brake is engaged. driving a vehicle.
If you make a call while driving, always use
hands-free mode. Only operate the telephone
Parking the vehicle for a long period when the traffic situation permits. If you are
If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than unsure, pull over to a safe location and stop
four weeks, the battery may be damaged by before operating the telephone.
exhaustive discharging. Bear in mind that at a speed of only 30 mph
If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than six (approximately 50 km/h), the vehicle covers a
weeks, the vehicle may suffer damage as a distance of 44 ft (approximately 14 m) per sec-
result of lack of use. ond.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop and seek
Drive sensibly – save fuel
advice.
Observe the following tips to save fuel:
i You can obtain information about trickle
chargers from a qualified specialist work- X The tires should always be inflated to the rec-
shop. ommended tire pressure.
X Remove unnecessary loads.
Plug-in hybrid vehicles: observe the notes on
X Remove roof carriers when they are not nee-
the high-voltage battery in the separate Opera-
tor's Manual. ded.
X Warm up the engine at low engine speeds.

Z
160 Driving tips

X Avoid frequent acceleration or braking. You can obtain current information concerning
X Have all service and maintenance work car- the servicing of your vehicle at any time from a
ried out at the specified intervals. qualified specialist workshop. This could be an
overview of the maintenance work or any addi-
Fuel consumption also increases when driving in tional maintenance work, for example.
cold weather, in stop-start traffic and in hilly ter-
rain.
ECO display
Drinking and driving
Driving and parking

The ECO display shows you how economical


G WARNING your driving style is. The ECO display assists you
Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs and in achieving the most economical driving style
driving are very dangerous combinations. for the selected settings and prevailing condi-
tions. Your driving style can significantly influ-
Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs can ence the vehicle's consumption.
affect your reflexes, perceptions and judg-
ment.
The possibility of a serious or even fatal acci-
dent is greatly increased when you drink or
take drugs and drive.
Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow
anyone to drive who has been drinking or tak-
ing drugs. : Acceleration
; Coasting
Emission control = Constant
? Additional range achieved
G WARNING Range ? is shown under Bonus fr. Start and
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust represents the additional range achieved since
gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling the beginning of the journey as a result of an
these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There adapted driving style.
is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave If the fuel level has dropped into the reserve
range, the Reserve Fuel message is shown in
the engine running in enclosed spaces with-
the multifunction display instead of range ?.
out sufficient ventilation. The 8 warning lamp in the instrument cluster
also lights up (Y page 283).
Certain engine systems are designed to keep
the level of poisonous components in exhaust
fumes within legal limits.
These systems only work at peak efficiency if
they are serviced exactly in accordance with the
manufacturer's specifications. Always have
work on the engine carried out at a qualified
specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recom-
mends that you use an authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center for this purpose. In particular, work
relevant to safety or on safety-related systems
must be carried out at a qualified specialist
workshop.
The engine settings must not be changed under
any circumstances. Furthermore, all specific
service work must be carried out at regular
intervals and in accordance with the Mercedes-
Benz service requirements.
Driving tips 161

The ECO display consists of three sections, with In addition to driving style, the actual consump-
an inner and outer area. The sections corre- tion is affected by other factors, such as:
spond to the following three categories: Rload

: Acceleration (evaluation of all accel- Rtire pressure


eration processes): Rcold start

Rthe outer area fills up and the inner Rchoice of route


area lights up green: moderate Relectrical consumers switched on
acceleration, especially at higher These factors are not included in the ECO dis-

Driving and parking


speeds play.
Rthe outer area empties and the An economical driving style specially requires
inner area is gray: sporty acceler- driving at moderate engine speeds.
ation Achieving a higher value in the categories
; Coasting (evaluation of all decelera- "Acceleration" and "Constant":
tion processes): Robserve the gearshift recommendations.
Rthe outer area fills up and the inner Rdrive the vehicle in the Comfort drive pro-
area lights up green: anticipatory gram.
driving, keeping your distance and On long journeys at a constant speed, e.g. on the
early release of the accelerator. highway, only the outer area for "constant" will
The vehicle can coast without use change.
of the brakes. The ECO display summarizes the driving style
Rthe outer area empties and the from the start of the journey to its completion.
inner area is gray: frequent heavy Therefore, there are more marked changes in
braking the outer areas at the start of a journey. On lon-
ger journeys, there are fewer changes. For more
= Constant (continuous evaluation marked changes, perform a manual rest
over the entire journey): (Y page 232).
Rthe outer area fills up and the inner For further information on the ECO display, see
area lights up green: constant (Y page 232).
speed and avoidance of unneces-
sary acceleration and deceleration
Rthe outer area empties and the Braking
inner area is gray: fluctuations in
speed Important safety notes

The three inner areas display the current driving G WARNING


style and light up green as a result of a particu- If you shift down on a slippery road surface in
larly economical driving style. Depending on the an attempt to increase the engine's braking
driving situation, up to two areas may light up effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.
simultaneously.
There is an increased danger of skidding and
At the beginning of the journey, the three outer
accidents.
areas are empty and fill up as a result of eco-
nomical driving. A higher level indicates a more Do not shift down for additional engine brak-
economical driving style. If the three outer areas ing on a slippery road surface.
are completely filled at the same time, the driver
has adopted the most economical driving style
for the selected settings and prevailing condi- Downhill gradients
tions. The ECO display border lights up. ! On long and steep gradients, you must
The ECO display does not indicate the actual fuel reduce the load on the brakes by shifting to a
consumption. The additionally achieved range lower gear in good time. This allows you to
displayed under Bonus fr. Start does not take advantage of the engine's braking effect.
indicate a fixed consumption reduction.

Z
162 Driving tips

This helps you to avoid overheating the time. This may also occur after the vehicle has
brakes and wearing them out excessively. been washed or driven through deep water.
When you take advantage of engine braking, a You then have to depress the brake pedal more
drive wheel may not turn for some time, e.g. firmly. Maintain a greater distance from the
on a slippery road surface. This could cause vehicle in front.
damage to the drive train. This type of damage After driving on a wet road or having the vehicle
is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz war- washed, brake firmly while paying attention to
ranty. the traffic conditions. This will warm up the
Do not depress the brake pedal continuously brake discs, thereby drying them more quickly
Driving and parking

while the vehicle is in motion, e.g. causing the and protecting them against corrosion.
brakes to rub by constantly applying light pres-
sure to the pedal. This results in excessive and Limited braking performance on salt-
premature wear to the brake pads. treated roads
Use the left-hand steering wheel paddle shifter
to shift into a lower gear in good time on long If you drive on salted roads, a layer of salt resi-
and steep downhill gradients. This is especially due may form on the brake discs and brake
important if the vehicle is laden. pads. This can result in a significantly longer
This also applies if you have activated cruise braking distance.
control, the speed limiter or Distance Pilot RBrake occasionally to remove any possible
DISTRONIC. salt residue. Make sure that you do not
This will use the braking effect of the engine, so endanger other road users when doing so.
that less braking will be required to maintain the RCarefully depress the brake pedal and the
speed. This relieves the load on the brake sys- beginning and end of a journey.
tem and prevents the brakes from overheating RMaintain a greater distance to the vehicle
and wearing too quickly. ahead.

Heavy and light loads Servicing the brakes


G WARNING ! The brake fluid level may be too low, if:
If you rest your foot on the brake pedal while Rif the red brake warning lamp lights up in
driving, the braking system can overheat. This the instrument cluster and
increases the stopping distance and can even Ryou hear a warning tone while the engine is

cause the braking system to fail. There is a running


risk of an accident. Observe additional warning messages in the
multifunction display.
Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Never The brake fluid level may be too low due to
depress the brake pedal and the accelerator brake pad wear or leaking brake lines.
pedal at the same time. Have the brake system checked immediately.
Consult a qualified specialist workshop to
! Depressing the brake pedal constantly arrange this.
results in excessive and premature wear to
the brake pads. ! A function or performance test should only
be carried out on a 2-axle dynamometer. If
If the brakes have been subjected to a heavy you wish to operate the vehicle on such a
load, do not stop the vehicle immediately. Drive dynamometer, please consult a qualified spe-
on for a short while. This allows the airflow to cialist workshop in advance. You could oth-
cool the brakes more quickly. erwise damage the drive train or the brake
system.
Wet roads
! Because ESP® is an automatic system, the
If you have driven for a long time in heavy rain engine and ignition must be switched off
without braking, there may be a delayed reac- (SmartKey in position 0 or 1 or Start/Stop
tion from the brakes when braking for the first button in position 0 or 1) when the electric
Driving tips 163

parking brake is being tested on a brake dyna- You can obtain further information about this
mometer (maximum 10 seconds). from your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Braking triggered automatically by ESP® may New and replaced brake pads and discs only
seriously damage the brake system. reach their optimum braking effect after several
hundred kilometers of driving. Compensate for
All checks and maintenance work on the brake
this by applying greater force to the brake pedal.
system must be carried out at a qualified spe-
Keep this in mind, and adapt your driving and
cialist workshop.
braking accordingly during this break-in period.
Have brake pads installed and brake fluid
Excessive heavy braking results in correspond-

Driving and parking


replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.
ingly high brake wear. Observe the # brake
If the brake system has only been subject to wear warning lamp in the instrument cluster and
moderate loads, you should test the functional- note any brake status messages in the multi-
ity of your brakes at regular intervals. To do so, function display. Especially for high perform-
depress the brake pedal firmly when driving at a ance driving, it is important to maintain and have
high speed. This improves the grip of the brake the brake system checked regularly.
pads.
You can find a description of Brake Assist (BAS)
on (Y page 67) or of BAS PLUS on (Y page 72). Driving on wet roads
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only have
brake pads/linings installed on your vehicle Hydroplaning
which have been approved for Mercedes-Benz
vehicles or which correspond to an equivalent If water has accumulated to a certain depth on
quality standard. Brake pads/linings which have the road surface, there is a danger of hydro-
not been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles planing occurring, even if:
or which are not of an equivalent quality could Ryou drive at low speeds.
affect your vehicle's operating safety. Rthe tires have adequate tread depth.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use For this reason, in the event of heavy rain or in
brake fluid that has been specially approved for conditions in which hydroplaning may occur,
your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or which corre- you must drive in the following manner:
sponds to an equivalent quality standard. Brake
fluid which has not been approved for Rlower your speed.
Mercedes-Benz vehicles or which is not of an Ravoid ruts.
equivalent quality could affect your vehicle's Ravoid sudden steering movements.
operating safety. Rbrake carefully.

High-performance brake system Driving on flooded roads


(Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
! Do not drive through flooded areas. Check
The high-performance brake system is designed the depth of any water before driving through
for heavy loads. This may lead to noise when it. Drive slowly through standing water. Oth-
braking. This will depend on: erwise, water may enter the vehicle interior or
RSpeed the engine compartment. This can damage
RBraking force the electronic components in the engine or
REnvironmental conditions, such as tempera- the automatic transmission. Water can also
ture and humidity be drawn in by the engine's air suction nozzles
and this can cause engine damage.
The wear of individual components of the brake
system, such as the brake pads/linings or brake i Vehicles with the AIRMATIC package:
discs, depends on the individual driving style select the raised vehicle level before driving
and operating conditions. through a body of water.
For this reason, it is impossible to state a mile-
age that will be valid under all circumstances. An
aggressive driving style will lead to high wear.

Z
164 Driving tips

Off-road fording such as carbon monoxide (CO) may enter the


! Under no circumstances should you accel- vehicle. This is the case, e.g. if the vehicle
erate before entering the water. The bow becomes trapped in snow. There is a risk of
wave could cause water to enter and damage fatal injury.
the engine and other assemblies. If you leave the engine or the auxiliary heating
! Do not open any of the vehicle's doors while running, make sure the exhaust pipe and area
fording. Otherwise, water could get into the around the vehicle are clear of snow. To
vehicle interior and damage the vehicle's ensure an adequate supply of fresh air, open a
Driving and parking

electronics and interior equipment. window on the side of the vehicle that is not
REstablish how deep the water is and the char- facing into the wind.
acteristics of the body of water before ford-
ing. ! When scraping ice off the rear window, take
RSelect the highest possible vehicle level. care not to damage the rear-window seal or
RShift to a lower gear using the left-hand steer- trim.
ing wheel paddle shifter. Have your vehicle winter-proofed at a qualified
RAvoid high engine speeds. specialist workshop at the onset of winter.
REnter and exit the water at a flat place and at Drive particularly carefully on slippery road sur-
a steady walking pace. faces. Avoid sudden acceleration, steering and
RDrive slowly and at an even speed through the braking maneuvers. Do not use cruise control or
water. Distance Pilot DISTRONIC.
REnsure that a bow wave does not form as you If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot be
drive. stopped when moving at low speed:
RDo not stop and do not switch off the engine. X Shift the transmission to position i.
Water offers a high degree of resistance, and X Try to bring the vehicle under control using
the ground is slippery and in some cases corrective steering.
unstable. Therefore, it is difficult and danger-
ous to pull away in the water. When driving in snow with or without snow
chains, select driving program Slippery
RClean any mud from the tire tread after ford-
(Y page 142).
ing.
RApply the brakes to dry them after fording. i Vehicles with a diesel engine: do not
Always observe the fording depth values cover the radiator, e.g. with a protective
(Y page 392). cover. The measuring function of the on-
board diagnosis system may otherwise pro-
vide inaccurate values. Some of these values
are required by law and must therefore always
Winter driving be accurate.
G WARNING The outside temperature indicator is not
If you shift down on a slippery road surface in designed to serve as an ice-warning device and
is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.
an attempt to increase the engine's braking Changes in the outside temperature are dis-
effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip. played after a short delay.
There is an increased danger of skidding and Indicated temperatures just above the freezing
accidents. point do not guarantee that the road surface is
Do not shift down for additional engine brak- free of ice. The road may still be icy, especially in
ing on a slippery road surface. wooded areas or on bridges. You should pay
special attention to road conditions when tem-
peratures are around the freezing point.
G DANGER For more information on driving with snow
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or adequate chains, see (Y page 353).
ventilation is not possible, poisonous gases
Driving tips 165

For more information on driving with summer Components damaged in this way can unex-
tires, see (Y page 353). pectedly fail or, in the case of an accident, no
Observe the notes in the "Changing a wheel" longer withstand the loads they are designed
section (Y page 371). to.
If the underbody paneling is damaged, com-
bustible materials such as leaves, grass or
Off-road driving twigs can gather between the underbody and
the underbody paneling. If these materials
Important safety notes come in contact with hot parts of the exhaust

Driving and parking


system, they can catch fire.
G WARNING In such situations, have the vehicle checked
If you drive on a steep incline at an angle or and repaired immediately at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop. If on continuing your jour-
turn when driving on an incline, the vehicle ney you notice that driving safety is impaired,
could slip sideways, tip and rollover. There is a pull over and stop the vehicle immediately,
risk of an accident. paying attention to road and traffic condi-
Always drive on a steep incline in the line of tions. In such cases, consult a qualified spe-
fall (straight up or down) and do not turn the cialist workshop.
vehicle. When driving off-road, substances such as sand,
mud and water or water mixed with oil may get
G WARNING into the brakes. This could result in a reduced
braking effect or in total brake failure and also in
Flammable material such as leaves, grass or increased wear and tear. The braking charac-
twigs may ignite if they come into contact with teristics change depending on the material
hot parts of the exhaust system. There is a risk entering the brakes. Clean the brakes after driv-
of fire. ing off-road. If you detect a reduced braking
effect or grinding noises, have the brake system
When driving off road or on unpaved roads, checked in a qualified specialist workshop as
check the vehicle's underside regularly. In soon as possible. Adapt your driving style to the
particular, remove parts of plants or other different braking characteristics.
flammable materials which have become Driving off-road increases the likelihood of dam-
trapped. In the case of damage, contact a age to the vehicle, which, in turn, can lead to
qualified specialist workshop. failure of the mechanical assembly or systems.
Adapt your driving style to suit the terrain con-
ditions. Drive carefully. Have damage to the
G WARNING vehicle rectified immediately at a qualified spe-
If the vehicle level is high, the vehicle center of cialist workshop.
gravity is raised. This could cause the vehicle Do not switch to transmission position N when
to tip over more easily on uphill or downhill driving off-road. If you try to brake the vehicle
gradients. There is a risk of an accident. using the service brake, you could lose control
of the vehicle. If the gradient is too steep for your
Select the lowest possible vehicle level.
vehicle, drive back down in reverse gear.
! There is a risk of damage to the vehicle if:
General notes
Rthe vehicle becomes stuck, e.g. on a high
curb or an unpaved road H Environmental note
Ryou drive too fast over an obstacle, e.g. a
Protection of the environment is of primary
curb, a speed bump or a pothole in the road
importance. Treat nature with respect.
Ra heavy object strikes the underbody or
Observe all prohibiting signs.
parts of the chassis
In situations like this, the body, the under- Read this section carefully before driving your
body, chassis parts, wheels or tires could be vehicle off-road. Practice by driving over more
damaged without the damage being visible. gentle off-road terrain first.

Z
166 Driving tips

Familiarize yourself with the characteristics of RLook out for obstacles, such as rocks, holes,
your vehicle and the gear shift operation before tree stumps and furrows.
driving through difficult terrain. RTake care when turning on an uphill or down-
The following driving systems are specially hill slope or when driving across a slope. The
adapted to off-road driving: vehicle could otherwise tip over.
Rthe Off-road drive program (vehicles without RAlways keep the doors, the tailgate, the side
Off-Road Engineering package) windows and the sliding sunroof closed while
(Y page 214) the vehicle is in motion.
RDo not shift the automatic transmission to
Driving and parking

ROff-road and Off-road Plus drive programs


(vehicles with Off-Road Engineering package) position i.
(Y page 215) RObserve the notes on off-road fording
RLOW RANGE off-road gear (vehicles with the (Y page 164).
Off-Road Engineering package) i Information about retrofitting special all-ter-
(Y page 216) rain tires is available from any qualified spe-
RDifferential lock (vehicles with the Off-Road cialist workshop.
Engineering package) (Y page 216)
ROff-road ABS (Y page 67)
i Do not use the HOLD function when driving
off-road, on steep uphill or downhill gradients
ROff-road 4ETS (Y page 70)
or on slippery or loose surfaces. The HOLD
ROff-road ESP® (Y page 72) function cannot hold the vehicle on such sur-
RAIRMATIC package (vehicle level) faces.
(Y page 183)
RDSR (Downhill Speed Regulation) Checklist before driving off-road
(Y page 213)
Observe the following notes:
! If the engine oil warning lamp lights up while
the vehicle is in motion, stop the vehicle in a
RStop the vehicle before starting to drive along safe place as soon as possible. Check the
an off-road route. If necessary, select the off- engine oil level. The engine oil warning lamp
road program (Y page 215) or shift to the warning must not be ignored. Continuing the
LOW RANGE off-road gear (Y page 216). journey while the symbol is displayed could
RSelect a vehicle level that is suitable for the lead to engine damage.
terrain. To avoid damaging the vehicle, make X Engine oil level: check the engine oil level
sure there is always sufficient ground clear- and add oil if necessary.
ance.
When driving on steep gradients, the engine
RCheck that items of cargo and loads are
oil level must be sufficiently high to ensure a
stowed safely and are well secured correct oil supply in the vehicle.
(Y page 299).
X DEF tank (BlueTEC vehicles): check the
RAlways keep the engine running and in gear
level and add if necessary (Y page 153).
when driving on a downhill gradient. Activate
X Tire-changing tool kit: check that the jack is
DSR (Y page 213).
working and make sure you have the lug
RAlways keep the engine running and in gear
wrench, a robust tow cable and a folding
when driving down an incline. spade in the vehicle.
RAdapt your speed to the terrain. The rougher,
X Wheels and tires: check the tread depth and
steeper or more ruts on the terrain, the slower
pressure of the tires.
your speed should be.
X Check for damage and remove any foreign
RDo not jump with the vehicle as this will inter-
objects, e.g. small stones, from the wheels/
rupt the vehicle's propulsion.
tires.
RDrive with extreme care on unfamiliar off-road
X Replace any missing valve caps.
routes where visibility is poor. For safety rea-
sons, get out of the vehicle first and survey X Replace dented or damaged wheels.
the off-road route. X Rims: dented or bent rims can result in a loss
of tire pressure and damage the tire bead.
Driving tips 167

Before driving off-road, check the wheels and Driving on sand


replace them if necessary.
Observe the following rules when driving on
sand:
Checklist after driving off-road
RSelect the Offroad drive program (vehicles
! If you detect damage to the vehicle after with Off-Road Engineering package)
driving off-road, have the vehicle checked (Y page 215).
immediately at a qualified specialist work- RSelect the Offroad drive program (vehicles
shop. without Off-Road Engineering package)

Driving and parking


Driving over rough terrain places greater (Y page 214).
demands on your vehicle than driving on normal RSelect a higher vehicle level.
roads. After driving off-road, check the vehicle. RAvoid high engine speeds.
This allows you to detect damage promptly and RUse the left-hand steering wheel paddle
reduce the risk of an accident to yourself and shifter to shift to a lower gear appropriate to
other road users. the terrain.
X If the Offroad or Offroad Plus drive program RDrive quickly to overcome the rolling resist-
is selected: select the Individual, Sport, ance. Otherwise the vehicle's wheels could
Comfort or Slippery drive program become stuck in loose ground.
(Y page 142). RDrive in the tracks of other vehicles if possi-
X Deactivate the LOW RANGE off-road gear ble. Make sure that:
(Y page 216). - the tire ruts are not too deep.
X Deactivate DSR (Y page 213). - the sand is sufficiently firm.
X Lower the vehicle level again to a level suita- - the ground clearance of the vehicle is suf-
ble to the road conditions, e.g. to the normal ficient.
level.
X Clean the headlamps and rear lights and
Tire ruts and gravel roads
check for damage.
X Clean the front and rear license plates. ! Check that the ruts are not too deep and
X Clean the wheels and tires with a water jet that your vehicle has sufficient clearance.
and remove any foreign objects. Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged or
X Clean the wheels, wheel housings and the bottom out and get stuck.
vehicle underside with a water jet; check for Observe the following rules when driving along
any foreign objects and damage. ruts in off-road terrain or on roads with loose
X Check whether twigs or other parts of plants gravel:
have become trapped. These increase the risk RSelect the Offroad drive program (vehicles
of fire and can damage fuel pipes, brake with Off-Road Engineering package)
hoses or the rubber bellows of the axle joints (Y page 215).
and propeller shafts. RSelect the Offroad drive program (vehicles
X After the trip, examine without fail the entire
without Off-Road Engineering package)
undercarriage, wheels, tires, brakes, body- (Y page 214).
work structure, steering, chassis and exhaust
RSelect a higher vehicle level.
system for damage.
RAvoid high engine speeds.
X After driving for extended periods across
sand, mud, gravel, water or in similarly dirty RShift to a lower gear using the left-hand steer-
conditions, have the brake discs, wheels, ing wheel paddle shifter.
brake pads/linings and axle joints checked RDrive slowly.
and cleaned. RWhere ruts are too deep, drive with the
X If you detect strong vibrations after off-road wheels of one side on the center grassy area,
travel, check for foreign objects in the wheels if possible.
and drive train and remove them if necessary.
Foreign objects can disturb the balance and
cause vibrations.
Z
168 Driving tips

Driving over obstacles could slip sideways, tip and rollover. There is a
! Obstacles could damage the floor of the risk of an accident.
vehicle or components of the chassis. Ask Always drive on a steep incline in the line of
passengers for guidance when driving over fall (straight up or down) and do not turn the
large obstacles. The passenger should always vehicle.
keep a safe distance from the vehicle when
doing so in order to avoid injury as a result of RObserve the rules on off-road driving.
unexpected vehicle movements. After driving RDo not drive at an angle on slopes, inclines or
Driving and parking

off-road or over obstacles, check the vehicle


gradients, but instead follow the direct line of
for possible damage, especially to the under-
fall.
body and the components of the chassis.
RWhen driving down an incline, make use of the
engine's braking effect. Observe the engine
speed; do not overrev the engine.
RSelect the Offroad drive program (vehicles
with Off-Road Engineering package)
(Y page 215).
RSelect the Offroad drive program (vehicles
without Off-Road Engineering package)
(Y page 214).
RBefore driving on extreme uphill and downhill
gradients, select the LOW RANGE offroad
gear (vehicles with Off-Road Engineering
package) (Y page 216).
Observe the following rules when driving over
RDrive slowly.
tree stumps, large stones and other obstacles:
RAvoid high engine speeds. Drive at appropri-
RSelect the Offroad drive program (vehicles
ate engine speeds (maximum 3,000 rpm).
with Off-Road Engineering package)
RUse the left-hand steering wheel paddle
(Y page 215).
shifter to shift into a lower gear in good time
RSelect the Offroad drive program (vehicles
on long and steep downhill gradients.
without Off-Road Engineering package) RCheck the brakes after prolonged off-road
(Y page 214).
driving.
RSelect LOW RANGE offroad gear (vehicles
with Off-Road Engineering package) Hill start assist will aid you when pulling away on
(Y page 216) a hill. For further information about hill start
assist, see (Y page 139).
RRaise the vehicle level.
Do not switch to transmission position N when
RAvoid high engine speeds.
driving off-road. If you try to brake the vehicle
RShift to a lower gear using the left-hand steer- using the service brake, you could lose control
ing wheel paddle shifter. of the vehicle. If the gradient is too steep for your
RDrive very slowly. vehicle, drive back down in reverse gear.
RDrive straight over the center of obstacles. Always observe the approach/departure angle
values (Y page 393).

Traveling uphill Maximum gradient-climbing capability


Approach/departure angle Always observe the maximum gradient climbing
ability values (Y page 393).
G WARNING
If you drive on a steep incline at an angle or
turn when driving on an incline, the vehicle
Driving systems 169

Hilltops Further information on driving safety systems


(Y page 66).
When driving up an uphill gradient, slightly
reduce pressure on the accelerator immediately
before reaching the brow of the hill. Make use of
the vehicle's own impetus to travel over the Cruise control
brow.
General notes
This style of driving prevents:
Rthe vehicle from lifting off the ground on the Cruise control maintains a constant road speed

Driving and parking


brow of a hill for you. It brakes automatically in order to avoid
exceeding the set speed. You must select a
Rthe vehicle from traveling too quickly down
lower gear in good time on long and steep down-
the other side hill gradients, especially if the vehicle is laden or
towing a trailer. By doing so, you will make use of
Driving downhill the braking effect of the engine. This relieves the
load on the brake system and prevents the
RDrive slowly. brakes from overheating and wearing too
RDo not drive at an angle down steep inclines. quickly.
Steer into the line of fall and drive with the Use cruise control only if road and traffic con-
front wheels aligned straight. Otherwise, the ditions make it appropriate to maintain a steady
vehicle could slip sideways, tip and rollover. speed for a prolonged period. You can store any
RShift to a lower gear using the left-hand pad- road speed above 20 mph (30 km/h).
dle shifter before tackling steep downhill gra-
dients. i Cruise control should not be activated when
RActivate DSR. If this is not sufficient, brake
driving off-road.
gently. When doing so, make sure that the
vehicle is facing in the direction of the line of Important safety notes
fall.
If you fail to adapt your driving style, cruise con-
RCheck that the brakes are working normally
trol can neither reduce the risk of an accident
after a long downhill stretch. nor override the laws of physics. Cruise control
i The special off-road ABS setting enables a cannot take into account the road, traffic and
precise, brief and repeated locking of the weather conditions. Cruise control is only an
front wheels. This causes them to dig into aid. You are responsible for the distance to the
loose earth. Be aware that the front wheels vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in
easily skid across the ground surface if com- good time and for staying in your lane.
pletely braked and therefore lose their ability Do not use cruise control:
to steer. Rin road and traffic conditions which do not
allow you to maintain a constant speed, e.g. in
heavy traffic or on winding roads
Driving systems Ron slippery road surfaces. Braking or accel-
erating could cause the drive wheels to lose
Intelligent Drive traction and the vehicle could then skid
Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive stands for inno- Rwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog,
vative driver assistance and safety systems heavy rain or snow
which enhance comfort and support the driver in If there is a change of drivers, advise the new
critical situations. With these intelligent co-ordi- driver of the speed stored.
nated systems Mercedes-Benz has set a mile-
stone on the path towards autonomous driving.
Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive embraces all
elements of active and passive safety in one well
thought out system – for the safety of the vehi-
cle occupants and that of other road users.

Z
170 Driving systems

Cruise control lever stored speed on downhill gradients by auto-


matically applying the brakes.
Storing or calling up a speed
G WARNING
If you call up the stored speed and it differs
from the current speed, the vehicle acceler-
ates or decelerates. If you do not know the
Driving and parking

stored speed, the vehicle could accelerate or


brake unexpectedly. There is a risk of an acci-
dent.
Pay attention to the road and traffic condi-
: Activates or increases speed tions before calling up the stored speed. If you
; Activates or reduces speed do not know the stored speed, store the
= Deactivates cruise control desired speed again.
? Activates at the current speed/last stored
speed X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards
you =.
When you activate cruise control, the stored
X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.
speed is shown in the multifunction display for
five seconds. Cruise control is operational and when first
activated stores the current speed or regu-
lates the speed of the vehicle to the stored
Activation conditions speed.
To activate cruise control, all of the following
activation conditions must be fulfilled: Setting a speed
Rthe electric parking brake must be released.
Keep in mind that it may take a brief moment
Ryou are driving faster than 20 mph (30 km/h). until the vehicle has accelerated or braked to
RESP® must be active, but not intervening. the speed set.
Rthe transmission must be in position D. X Press the cruise control lever up : for a
RDSR must be deactivated. higher speed or down ; for a lower speed.
Rthe Offroad Plus drive program must be deac- X To adjust the set speed in 1 mph incre-
tivated (vehicles with the Off-Road Engineer- ments (1 km/h increments): briefly press
ing package). the cruise control lever up : or down ; to
the pressure point.
Every time the cruise control lever is pressed
Storing, maintaining and calling up a up : or down ; the last speed stored is
speed increased or reduced.
X To adjust the set speed in 5 mph incre-
Storing and maintaining a speed ments (10 km/h increments): briefly press
X Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed. the cruise control lever up : or down ;
X Briefly press the cruise control lever up : or beyond the pressure point.
down ?. Every time the cruise control lever is pressed
X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. up : or down ; the last speed stored is
Cruise control is activated. The vehicle auto- increased or reduced.
matically maintains the stored speed.
i Cruise control is not deactivated if you
i Cruise control may be unable to maintain depress the accelerator pedal. For example, if
the stored speed on uphill gradients. The you accelerate briefly to overtake, cruise con-
stored speed is resumed when the gradient trol adjusts the vehicle's speed to the last
evens out. Cruise control maintains the speed stored after you have finished overtak-
ing.
Driving systems 171

Deactivating cruise control front or take evasive action provided it is safe to


do so.
There are several ways to deactivate cruise con- For Distance Pilot DISTRONIC to assist you
trol: when driving, the radar sensor system must be
X Briefly press the cruise control lever for- operational.
wards :. Distance Pilot DISTRONIC operates in the range
or between 0 mph (0 km/h) and 120 mph
X Brake. (200 km/h).
Do not use Distance Pilot DISTRONIC while driv-

Driving and parking


Cruise control is automatically deactivated if:
ing on roads with steep gradients.
Ryou engage the electric parking brake
Since Distance Pilot DISTRONIC transmits radar
Ryou are driving at less than 20 mph (30 km/h) waves, it can resemble the radar detectors of
RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP® the responsible authorities. You can refer to the
Ryou activate DSR relevant chapter in the Operator's Manual if
questions are asked about this.
Ryou activate the Offroad Plus program (vehi-
cles with the Off-Road Engineering package) i USA only:
Ryou shift the transmission to position N while This device has been approved by the FCC as
driving a "Vehicular Radar System". The radar sensor
If cruise control is deactivated, you will hear a is intended for use in an automotive radar
warning tone. You will see the Cruise Con‐ system only. Removing, tampering with, or
trol Off message in the multifunction display altering the device will void any warranties,
for approximately five seconds. and is not permitted by the FCC. Do not tam-
per with, alter, or use in any non-approved
i When you switch off the engine, the last way.
speed stored is cleared. Any unauthorized modification to this device
could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC
i Canada only: This device complies with
General notes RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC regulates the speed 1. This device may not cause harmful inter-
and automatically helps you maintain the dis- ference, and
tance to the vehicle detected in front. Vehicles
2. This device must accept any interference
are detected with the aid of the radar sensor
received, including interference that may
system. Distance Pilot DISTRONIC brakes auto-
cause undesired operation of the device.
matically so that the set speed is not exceeded.
Do not tamper with, alter or use in any non-
You must select a lower gear in good time on
approved way.
long and steep downhill gradients, especially if
the vehicle is laden or towing a trailer. By doing Any unauthorized modification to this device
so, you will make use of the braking effect of the could void the user's authority to operate the
engine. This relieves the load on the brake sys- equipment.
tem and prevents the brakes from overheating
and wearing too quickly. Important safety notes
If Distance Pilot DISTRONIC detects that there is
a risk of a collision, you will be warned visually G WARNING
and acoustically. Without your intervention, Dis- Distance Pilot DISTRONIC does not react to:
tance Pilot DISTRONIC cannot prevent a colli-
sion. An intermittent warning tone will then Rpeople or animals
sound and the distance warning lamp will light Rstationary objects on the road, e.g. stopped
up in the instrument cluster. Brake immediately or parked vehicles
in order to increase the distance to the vehicle in
Roncoming vehicles and crossing traffic

Z
172 Driving systems

As a result, Distance Pilot DISTRONIC may for braking in good time and for staying in your
neither give warnings nor intervene in such lane.
situations. There is a risk of an accident. Do not use Distance Pilot DISTRONIC:
Rin road and traffic conditions which do not
Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-
allow you to maintain a constant speed, e.g. in
uation and be ready to brake.
heavy traffic or on winding roads
Ron slippery road surfaces. Braking or accel-
G WARNING erating could cause the drive wheels to lose
Driving and parking

Distance Pilot DISTRONIC cannot always traction and the vehicle could then skid
clearly identify other road users and complex Rin poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or
traffic situations. snow
In such cases, Distance Pilot DISTRONIC may: Distance Pilot DISTRONIC may not detect nar-
row vehicles driving in front, e.g. motorcycles, or
Rgive an unnecessary warning and then vehicles driving on a different line.
brake the vehicle In particular, the detection of obstacles can be
Rneither give a warning nor intervene impaired if:
Raccelerate or brake unexpectedly Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else

There is a risk of an accident. covering the sensors


Rthere is snow or heavy rain
Continue to drive carefully and be ready to
Rthere is interference by other radar sources
brake, especially if Distance Pilot DISTRONIC
Rthere are strong radar reflections, for exam-
warns you.
ple, in parking garages
If Distance Pilot DISTRONIC no longer detects a
G WARNING vehicle in front, it may unexpectedly accelerate
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC brakes your vehicle to the speed stored.
with up to 50% of the maximum possible This speed may:
deceleration. If this deceleration is not suffi- Rbe too high if you are driving in a turning lane
cient, Distance Pilot DISTRONIC alerts you or an exit lane
with a visual and acoustic warning. There is a Rbe so high when driving in the right-hand lane
risk of an accident. that you overtake vehicles in the left-hand
Apply the brakes yourself in these situations lane
and try to take evasive action. Rbe so high when driving in the left-hand lane
that you overtake vehicles in the right-hand
! When Distance Pilot DISTRONIC or the lane
HOLD function is activated, the vehicle If there is a change of drivers, advise the new
brakes automatically in certain situations. driver of the speed stored.
To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate
DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function in
the following or similar situations:
Rwhen towing the vehicle
Rin the car wash

The Distance Pilot DISTRONIC


Rcan neither reduce the risk of accident nor
override the laws of physics if you fail to adapt
your driving style.
Rcannot take into account road, weather or
traffic conditions.
Ris only an aid. You are responsible for the dis-
tance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed,
Driving systems 173

Cruise control lever i If you do not fully release the accelerator


pedal, the Distance Pilot Passive mes-
sage appears in the multifunction display. The
set distance to a slower-moving vehicle in
front will then not be maintained. You will be
driving at the speed you determine by the
position of the accelerator pedal.
You can also activate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC
when stationary. The lowest speed that can be

Driving and parking


set is 20 mph (30 km/h).
X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards
you =, up : or down ? .
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is activated.
: Activates or increases speed
; Activates or reduces speed Activating at the current speed/last
= Deactivates Distance Pilot DISTRONIC stored speed
? Activates at the current speed/last stored G WARNING
speed If you call up the stored speed and it differs
A Sets a specified minimum distance from the current speed, the vehicle acceler-
ates or decelerates. If you do not know the
Activating Distance Pilot DISTRONIC stored speed, the vehicle could accelerate or
brake unexpectedly. There is a risk of an acci-
Activation conditions
dent.
To activate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC, the fol-
lowing conditions must be fulfilled: Pay attention to the road and traffic condi-
tions before calling up the stored speed. If you
Rthe engine must be started. It may take up to
two minutes of driving before Distance Pilot do not know the stored speed, store the
DISTRONIC is ready for use. desired speed again.
Rthe electric parking brake must be released.
X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards
RESP® must be active, but not intervening.
you =.
Rthe transmission must be in position D. X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.
Rthe driver's door must be closed when you The first time Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is
shift from P to D or your seat belt must be activated, it stores the current speed or reg-
fastened. ulates the speed of the vehicle to the stored
Rthe front-passenger door and rear doors must speed.
be closed.
Rthe Offroad Plus drive program must be deac- Driving with Distance Pilot DISTRONIC
tivated (vehicles with the Off-Road Engineer-
ing package). Pulling away and driving
RDSR must be deactivated. X If you want to pull away with Distance
Rthe vehicle must not skid. Pilot DISTRONIC: remove your foot from the
brake pedal.
Activating X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards
X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you ?.
you =, up : or down ?. or
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is activated.
X Accelerate briefly.
X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.
Your vehicle pulls away and adapts its speed
Your vehicle adapts its speed to that of the to that of the vehicle in front. If no vehicle is
vehicle in front, but only up to the desired detected in front, your vehicle accelerates to
stored speed. the set speed.

Z
174 Driving systems

The vehicle can also pull away when it is facing Stopping


an unidentified obstacle or is driving on a differ-
ent line from another vehicle. The vehicle then G WARNING
brakes automatically. If you leave the vehicle when it is only being
If there is no vehicle in front, Distance Pilot braked by Distance Pilot DISTRONIC, it could
DISTRONIC operates in the same way as cruise roll away if:
control.
Rthere is a malfunction in the system or in
If Distance Pilot DISTRONIC detects a slower-
moving vehicle in front, it brakes your vehicle. In the voltage supply.
Driving and parking

this way, the distance you have selected is main- RDistance Pilot DISTRONIC is switched off
tained. using the cruise control lever, e.g. by a vehi-
If Distance Pilot DISTRONIC detects a faster- cle occupant or from outside the vehicle
moving vehicle in front, it increases the driving Rthe electrical system in the engine com-
speed. However, the vehicle is only accelerated
up to the speed you have stored. partment, the battery or the fuses are tam-
pered with.
Selecting the drive program Rthe battery is disconnected
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC supports a sporty Rthe vehicle is accelerated, e.g. by a vehicle
driving style if you have selected the Sport or
Sport Plus drive program (Y page 146). Accel- occupant.
eration behind the vehicle in front or to the set There is a risk of an accident.
speed is then noticeably more dynamic. If you Before leaving the vehicle, always deactivate
have selected the Comfort drive program, the Distance Pilot DISTRONIC and secure the
vehicle accelerates more gently. This setting is
vehicle against rolling away.
recommended in stop-and-start traffic.
Changing lanes If Distance Pilot DISTRONIC detects that the
vehicle in front is stopping, it brakes your vehicle
If you change to the overtaking lane, Distance to a stop.
Pilot DISTRONIC supports you if:
Once your vehicle is stationary, it remains sta-
Ryou are driving faster than 45 mph (70 km/h) tionary and you do not need to depress the
Ryou switch on the appropriate turn signal brake.
RDistance Pilot DISTRONIC does not currently After a time, the electric parking brake secures
detect a danger of collision the vehicle and relieves the service brake.
If these conditions are fulfilled, your vehicle is Depending on the specified minimum distance,
accelerated. Acceleration will be interrupted if your vehicle will come to a standstill at a suffi-
changing lanes takes too long or if the distance cient distance behind the vehicle in front. The
between your vehicle and the vehicle in front specified minimum distance is set using the
becomes too small. control on the cruise control lever.
i When you change lanes, Distance Pilot The transmission is shifted automatically to
DISTRONIC monitors the right lane (in left- position P if, with Distance Pilot DISTRONIC
side traffic) or the left lane (in right-side traf- activated and the vehicle stationary:
fic). Rthe driver's door is open and the driver's seat
belt is unfastened.
Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is auto-
matically switched off by the ECO start/stop
function.
The electric parking brake secures the vehicle
automatically if, with Distance Pilot DISTRONIC
activated and the vehicle stationary:
Ra system malfunction occurs.
Rthe power supply is not sufficient.
Driving systems 175

On steep uphill or downhill inclines or if there is X To increase: turn control ; in direction =.


a malfunction, the transmission may also be Distance Pilot DISTRONIC then maintains a
automatically shifted into position P. greater distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front.
Setting a speed X To decrease: turn control ; in direction :.
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC then maintains a
Keep in mind that it may take a brief moment shorter distance between your vehicle and
until the vehicle has accelerated or braked to the vehicle in front.
the speed set.

Driving and parking


X Press the cruise control lever up : for a i Make sure that you maintain a sufficiently
higher speed or down A for a lower speed safe distance from the vehicle in front. Adjust
X To adjust the set speed in 1 mph incre-
the distance to the vehicle in front if neces-
ments (1 km/h increments): briefly press sary.
the cruise control lever up : or down ; to
the pressure point. Deactivating Distance Pilot DISTRONIC
Every time the cruise control lever is pressed
up : or down ; the last speed stored is
increased or reduced.
X To adjust the set speed in 5 mph incre-
ments (10 km/h increments): briefly press
the cruise control lever up : or down ;
beyond the pressure point.
Every time the cruise control lever is pressed
up : or down ;, the last speed stored is
increased or reduced.
i If you accelerate to overtake, Distance Pilot
DISTRONIC adjusts the vehicle's speed to the
last speed stored after you have finished over- There are several ways to deactivate Distance
taking. Pilot DISTRONIC:
X Briefly press the cruise control lever for-
Setting a specified minimum distance wards :.
or
X Brake, unless the vehicle is stationary
When you deactivate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC,
the Distance Pilot Off message appears in
the multifunction display for approximately five
seconds.
i The last speed stored remains stored until
you switch off the engine.
i Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is not deactivated
if you depress the accelerator pedal. If you
accelerate to overtake, Distance Pilot
You can set the specified minimum distance for DISTRONIC adjusts the vehicle's speed to the
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC by varying the time last speed stored after you have finished over-
span between one and two seconds. With this taking.
function you can set the minimum distance that
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC maintains to the vehi-
cle in front, dependent on vehicle speed. You
can see this distance in the multifunction dis-
play (Y page 176).

Z
176 Driving systems

Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is automatically deac- Display in the assistance graphic when
tivated if: Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is deactivated
Ryou engage the electric parking brake or if the
vehicle is automatically secured with the elec-
tric parking brake
RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP®
Rthe transmission is in the P, R or N position
Ryou pull the cruise control lever towards you
Driving and parking

in order to pull away and the front-passenger


door or one of the rear doors is open
Ryou activate Parking Pilot
Rthe vehicle is skidding
A warning tone sounds. The Distance Pilot
Off message will appear in the multifunction : Vehicle in front, if detected
display for approximately five seconds. ; Distance indicator, current distance to the
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is automatically deac- vehicle in front
tivated if: = Specified minimum distance to the vehicle
Ryou activate DSR in front; adjustable
Ryou activate the OFFROAD Program+ (vehi- ? Own vehicle
cles with the Off-Road Engineering package) X Select the Assistance Graphic function
The à DSR symbol appears in the multifunc- using the on-board computer (Y page 236).
tion display.
Display in the assistance graphic when
Displays in the instrument cluster Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is activated

Displays in the speedometer

: Vehicle in front, if detected


; Specified minimum distance to the vehicle
Example: Distance Pilot DISTRONIC displays in the in front; adjustable
speedometer = Own vehicle
When Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is activated, ? Distance Pilot DISTRONIC activated
one or two segments ; in the stored speed X Select the Assistance Graphic function
range light up. using the on-board computer (Y page 236).
If Distance Pilot DISTRONIC detects a vehicle in
You will see the stored speed for approximately
front, segments ; between speed of the vehi-
five seconds when you activate Distance Pilot
cle in front = and stored speed : light up.
DISTRONIC.
i For design reasons, the speed displayed in
the speedometer may differ slightly from the
speed stored for Distance Pilot DISTRONIC.
Driving systems 177

Tips for driving with Distance Pilot Distance Pilot DISTRONIC with Steering
DISTRONIC Pilot
General notes General notes
Pay particular attention in the following traffic
situations:
RCornering, entering and exiting a bend: the
ability of Distance Pilot DISTRONIC to detect

Driving and parking


vehicles during cornering is limited. Your vehi-
cle may brake unexpectedly or late.
RDriving on a different line: Distance Pilot
DISTRONIC may not detect vehicles which are
not driving in the middle of their lane. The dis-
tance to the vehicle in front will be too short.
ROther vehicles changing lanes: Distance Pilot
DISTRONIC has not detected the vehicle cut-
ting in yet. The distance to this vehicle will be Distance Pilot DISTRONIC with Steering Pilot
too short. aids you in keeping the vehicle in the center of
RNarrow vehicles: Distance Pilot DISTRONIC the driving lane by means of moderate steering
has not yet detected the vehicle in front on interventions in a speed range from 0 - 125 mph
the edge of the road because of its narrow (0 - 200 km/h).
width. The distance to the vehicle in front will It monitors the area in front of your vehicle by
be too short. means of camera system : at the top of the
RObstacles and stationary vehicles: Distance windshield.
Pilot DISTRONIC does not brake for obstacles In a speed range from 0 - 37 mph (0 - 60 km/h),
or stationary vehicles. If, for example, the the extended automatic Re-start in traffic jams
detected vehicle turns a corner and an obsta- focuses on the vehicle in front, taking into
cle or stationary vehicle is then revealed, Dis- account lane markings, e.g. when following vehi-
tance Pilot DISTRONIC will not brake for cles in a traffic jam.
them. At speeds of more than 37 mph (60 km/h),
RCrossing traffic: Distance Pilot DISTRONIC Steering Pilot focuses on clear lane markings
may mistakenly detect vehicles that are (left and right), only focusing on the vehicle in
crossing your lane. Activating Distance Pilot front if clear lane markings are not present.
DISTRONIC at, for example, a traffic light with If these conditions are not present, Steering
crossing traffic, could cause your vehicle to Pilot cannot provide assistance.
pull away at the wrong time. Distance Pilot DISTRONIC must be active in
In such situations, brake if necessary. Distance order for the function to be available.
Pilot DISTRONIC will then be deactivated.
Important safety notes
If you fail to adapt your driving style, Distance
Pilot DISTRONIC and Steering Pilot can neither
reduce the risk of an accident nor override the
laws of physics. It cannot take into account
road, weather or traffic conditions. Distance
Pilot DISTRONIC with Steering Pilot is only an
aid. You are responsible for the distance to the
vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in
good time and for staying in your lane.
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC with Steering Pilot
does not detect road and traffic conditions and
does not detect all road users. If you are follow-
ing a vehicle which is driving towards the edge of
the road, your vehicle could come into contact
Z
178 Driving systems

with the curb or other road boundaries. Be par- Steering Pilot cannot provide assistance:
ticularly aware of other road users, e.g. cyclists, Ron very sharp corners
that are directly next to your vehicle.
Rwhen towing a trailer
Obstacles such as traffic pylons on the lane or
Rwhen a loss of tire pressure or a defective tire
projecting out into the lane are not detected.
has been detected and displayed
An inappropriate steering intervention, e.g. after
intentionally driving over a lane marking, can be Observe the important safety notes on Distance
corrected at any time if you steer slightly in the Pilot DISTRONIC (Y page 171).
opposite direction. The steering interventions are carried out with a
Driving and parking

Distance Pilot DISTRONIC with Steering Pilot limited steering moment. The system requires
cannot continuously keep your vehicle in lane. In the driver to keep his hands on the steering
some cases, the steering intervention is not suf- wheel and to steer himself.
ficient to bring the vehicle back to the lane. In If you do not steer yourself or if you take your
such cases, you must steer the vehicle yourself hands off the steering wheel for a prolonged
to ensure that it does not leave the lane. period of time, the system will first alert you with
The support provided by the system can be a visual warning. A steering wheel symbol
impaired if: appears in the multifunction display. If you have
still not started to steer and have not taken hold
Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient of the steering wheel after five seconds at the
illumination of the road, or due to snow, rain, latest, a warning tone also sounds to remind you
fog or heavy spray to take control of the vehicle. Steering Pilot is
Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, the then switched to passive. Distance Pilot
sun or reflections (e.g. when the road surface DISTRONIC remains active.
is wet)
Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged or
Activating Steering Pilot
covered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicin- X Activate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC with
ity of the camera Steering Pilot using the on-board computer
Rthere are no or several unclear lane markings (Y page 236).
for one lane, e.g. roadworks The Steering Pilot On message appears
Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or cov-
on the multifunction display. Steering Pilot is
activated.
ered up, e.g. by dirt or snow
Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too short Information in the multifunction display
and thus the lane markings cannot be detec-
ted
Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes
branch off, cross one another or merge
Rthe road is narrow and winding
Rthere are strong shadows cast on the road
The system is switched to passive and no longer
assists you by performing steering interventions
if: If Steering Pilot is activated but not ready for a
Ryou actively change lane steering intervention, steering wheel symbol :
appears in gray. If the system provides you with
Ryou switch on the turn signal
support by means of steering interventions,
Rtake your hands off the steering wheel or do symbol : is shown in green.
not steer for a prolonged period of time
Deactivating Steering Pilot
i After you have finished changing lanes,
Steering Pilot is automatically active once X Deactivate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC with
more. Steering Pilot using the on-board computer
(Y page 236).
The Steering Pilot Off message appears
on the multifunction display. Steering pilot is
deactivated.
Driving systems 179

When Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is deactivated Always select as low a vehicle level as possi-
or not available, Steering Pilot is deactivated ble and adjust your driving style.
automatically.
G WARNING
Level control (vehicles with the Off- When you drive with the chassis lowered or
road Engineering package) raised, the vehicle's braking and driving char-
acteristics can be significantly impaired. You
Important safety notes could also exceed the permissible vehicle

Driving and parking


Level control adapts the vehicle level automati- height if the chassis is raised. There is a risk of
cally to the current operating and driving situa- an accident.
tion. This results in reduced fuel consumption Adjust the vehicle level before pulling away.
and improved handling.
Make changes to the vehicle level while the G WARNING
vehicle is in motion. This enables the vehicle to
adjust to the new level as quickly as possible. Due to the high center of gravity, the vehicle
The vehicle level may change visibly if you park may start to skid and roll over in the event of
the vehicle and the outside temperature an abrupt steering maneuver and/or when
changes. If the temperature drops, the vehicle the vehicle's speed is not adapted to the road
level is lower; with an increase in temperature, conditions. There is a risk of an accident.
the vehicle level rises. Always adapt your speed and driving style to
If you unlock the vehicle or open a door, the the vehicle's driving characteristics and to the
vehicle begins to compensate for load discrep-
ancies while still parked. However, for signifi- prevailing road and weather conditions.
cant level changes, such as after the vehicle has
been stationary for a long period, the engine ! When driving on extremely rough terrain,
must be on. For safety reasons, the vehicle is select a high vehicle level in good time. Make
only lowered when the doors are closed. Low- sure there is always sufficient ground clear-
ering is interrupted if a door is opened, and it ance. You will otherwise damage the vehicle.
continues once the door has been closed. RUtility vehicles have a significantly higher roll-
Further information about "Driving off-road" over rate than other types of vehicles.
(Y page 165). Failure to operate this vehicle safely may
result in an accident, rollover of the vehicle,
G WARNING and severe or fatal injury.
When the vehicle is being lowered, people RIn a rollover crash, an unbelted person is sig-
could become trapped if their limbs are nificantly more likely to die than a person
between the vehicle body and the wheels or wearing a seat belt.
underneath the vehicle. There is a risk of You and all vehicle occupants should always
injury. wear your seat belts.
Make sure no one is underneath the vehicle or
in the immediate vicinity of the wheel arches Basic settings
when the vehicle is being lowered. The extent to which the vehicle is raised or low-
ered depends on the basic setting selected.
G WARNING Select:
When you drive with the vehicle raised, the Rthe Comfort or Sport drive program for driv-
driving characteristics could be impaired by ing on normal roads
the vehicle's raised center of gravity. The vehi- Rthe Offroad drive program for driving on eas-
cle could rollover more easily, for example on ily negotiable off-road terrain
a bend. There is a risk of an accident. Rthe Offroad Plus drive program for off-road
driving

Z
180 Driving systems

Roffroad level 1 for driving on easily negotiable If you press the % or a button on the
off-road terrain multifunction steering wheel, the message will
Roffroad level 2 for driving on normal off-road disappear. Once normal level has been reached,
terrain all indicator lamps = go out.
Roffroad level 3 for freeing the vehicle in par- The vehicle automatically selects normal level if
ticularly rough terrain at low speeds only you:
The individual vehicle levels differ from the nor- Rdrive at speeds above 70 mph (112 km/h) or
mal level as follows: Rdrive at speeds between 65 mph (105 km/h)
Driving and parking

R–0.6 in (–15 mm) in the Sport drive program and 70 mph (112 km/h) for approximately
R+/–0 in (+/–0 mm) in the Comfort drive pro-
20 seconds
gram The vehicle is lowered to low level if you are
R+ 1.2 in (+ 30 mm) in the Offroad drive pro-
traveling at higher speeds.
gram
R+ 2.4 in (+ 60 mm) in the Offroad Plus drive
Normal level
program
R+ 1.2 in (+ 30 mm) in offroad level 1
R+ 2.4 in (+ 60 mm) in offroad level 2
R+ 3.5 in (+ 90 mm) in offroad level 3

Setting the vehicle level


! Make sure that there is enough ground
clearance when the vehicle is being lowered.
It could otherwise hit the ground, damaging
the underbody.

Setting the vehicle to normal level:


X Start the engine.
X Press selector wheel :.
Selector wheel : extends.
X To lower the vehicle: turn selector wheel :
counter-clockwise ?.
The vehicle is lowered.
If one or more indicator lamps = are on:
X Turn selector wheel : counter-clockwise ?
until all indicator lamps = that are lit start to
Set the vehicle level using the selector wheel. flash.
The vehicle is lowered to normal level. As
X Start the engine. soon as the next lowest level is reached, the
X Press selector wheel :. indicator lamp stops flashing and goes out.
Selector wheel : extends.
X To raise the vehicle: turn selector wheel :
clockwise ;.
Offroad levels
The vehicle is raised.
General notes
X To lower the vehicle: turn selector wheel :
counter-clockwise ?. Only select an offroad level when this is appro-
The vehicle is lowered. priate for road conditions. Otherwise, fuel con-
sumption increases and handling may be affec-
During the adjustment, the Lowering or Vehi‐ ted.
cle Rising message appears in the multifunc-
tion display.
Driving systems 181

You can select from the following: If you press the % or a button on the
ROffroad level 1 at speeds up to 60 mph multifunction steering wheel, the message will
(96 km/h) disappear.
ROffroad level 2 at speeds up to 40 mph i Up to offroad level 2, you can hide the mes-
(64 km/h) sages using the % or a button on the
ROffroad level 3 at speeds up to 12 mph multifunction steering wheel.
(20 km/h) While the adjustment from offroad level 2 to off-
If you select an offroad level when driving at too road level 3 is taking place, you will see a mes-

Driving and parking


high a speed, the Drive More Slowly message sage such as the following in the multifunction
appears in the multifunction display. display: Vehicle rising Max. speed
Offroad level 3 is only suitable for driving on 12 mph (20 km/h).
km/h)
extremely difficult off-road terrain under partic- The Max. speed 12 mph (20 km/h) message
ularly rough conditions. draws your attention to the maximum speed
RAdjust your driving style to the altered han- permitted for offroad level 3.
dling characteristics. If you drive above 12 mph (20 km/h) at offroad
RDo not drive at speeds above 12 mph level 3, you will see the following message
(20 km/h). shown in red in the multifunction display: Low‐
ering Max. speed 12 mph (20 km/h). km/h)
i You cannot clear these messages.
You also hear a warning. The vehicle is lowered
and offroad level 3 is canceled.
If you continue to increase your speed, the red
message continues to be shown in the multi-
function display. The newly set level is not dis-
played until the vehicle has been set to a level
suitable for the current speed.
Lowering the vehicle
If you drive faster than 12 mph (20 km/h) while
Indicator lamps = for the desired offroad level the vehicle level is being lowered, you will see
flash: the following message shown in white in the
Rthe lower indicator lamp flashes, offroad multifunction display: Lowering Max. speed
level 1 is selected 20 km/h
km/h.
Rthe lower and center indicator lamps flash, The vehicle is lowered to offroad level 2.
offroad level 2 is selected You will see a message in the multifunction dis-
Rall three indicator lamps flash, offroad level 3 Lowering.
play, for example: Lowering
is selected Offroad level 2 is canceled and the vehicle is
The vehicle adjusts to the offroad level selected. lowered to offroad level 1 if you:
As soon as an offroad level is reached, the cor- Rdrive at speeds above 50 mph (80 km/h) or
responding indicator lamp stops flashing and Rdrive at speeds between 40 mph (64 km/h)
lights up constantly. and 50 mph (80 km/h) for longer than
Raising the vehicle 20 seconds
Offroad level 1 is canceled. Depending on the
Set the vehicle level using the selector wheel.
vehicle's speed and the selected drive program,
X To raise the vehicle: turn selector wheel : the vehicle is automatically lowered to normal
clockwise ;. level or low level if you:
The vehicle is raised to offroad level 1 by 1.2 in Rdrive at speeds above 70 mph (112 km/h) or
(30 mm) compared to the normal level.
Rdrive at speeds between 65 mph (105 km/h)
During the adjustment, the Vehicle rising and 70 mph (112 km/h) for longer than
message, for example, appears in the multifunc- 20 seconds
tion display.
Z
182 Driving systems

HOLD function Activation conditions


General notes You can activate the HOLD function if:
Rthe vehicle is stationary
The HOLD function can assist the driver in the Rthe engine is running or if it has been auto-
following situations:
matically switched off by the ECO start/stop
Rwhen pulling away, especially on steep slopes function
Rwhen maneuvering on steep slopes Rthe driver's door is closed or your seat belt is
Rwhen waiting in traffic fastened
Driving and parking

The vehicle is kept stationary without the driver Rthe electric parking brake is released
having to depress the brake pedal. Rthe transmission is in position h, k or i
The braking effect is canceled and the HOLD RDistance Pilot DISTRONIC is deactivated
function deactivated when you depress the
accelerator pedal to pull away. Activating the HOLD function
i Do not use the HOLD function when driving
off-road, on steep uphill or downhill gradients
or on slippery or loose surfaces. The HOLD
function cannot hold the vehicle on such sur-
faces.

Important safety notes


G WARNING X Make sure that the activation conditions are
If the vehicle is only braked using the HOLD met.
function, the vehicle may roll away in the fol- X Depress the brake pedal.
lowing situations when you leave the vehicle: X Quickly depress the brake pedal further

Rif there
until : appears in the multifunction display.
is a malfunction in the system or in
The HOLD function is activated. You can
the voltage supply release the brake pedal.
Rif the HOLD function is deactivated by
depressing the accelerator pedal or brake i If depressing the brake pedal the first time
does not activate the HOLD function, wait
pedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant
briefly and then try again.
Rif the electrical system in the engine com-
partment, the battery or the fuses are tam- Deactivating the HOLD function
pered with or the battery is disconnected
The HOLD function is deactivated automatically
There is a risk of an accident. if:
Always deactivate the HOLD function and Ryou depress the accelerator and the trans-
secure the vehicle against rolling away before mission is in position h or k
you leave it. Ryou shift the transmission to position j
Ryou depress the brake pedal again with a cer-
! When Distance Pilot DISTRONIC or the tain amount of pressure until : disappears
HOLD function is activated, the vehicle
from the multifunction display
brakes automatically in certain situations.
Ryou secure the vehicle using the electric park-
To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate
ing brake
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC and the HOLD
function in the following or similar situations: Ryou activate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC

Rwhen towing the vehicle i After a time, the electric parking brake
Rin the car wash secures the vehicle and relieves the service
brake.
Deactivate the HOLD function (Y page 182).
Driving systems 183

When the HOLD function is activated, the trans- Important safety notes
mission is automatically shifted to position j
if: G WARNING
Rthe driver's door is open and the driver's seat When the vehicle is being lowered, people
belt is unfastened could become trapped if their limbs are
Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is auto- between the vehicle body and the wheels or
matically switched off by the ECO start/stop underneath the vehicle. There is a risk of
function injury.

Driving and parking


The electric parking brake secures the vehicle
automatically if the HOLD function is activated Make sure no one is underneath the vehicle or
when the vehicle is stationary and: in the immediate vicinity of the wheel arches
when the vehicle is being lowered.
Ra system malfunction occurs
Rthe power supply is insufficient If you unlock the vehicle or open a door, the
On steep uphill or downhill gradients or if there vehicle begins to compensate for load discrep-
is a malfunction, the transmission may also be ancies while still parked. However, for signifi-
automatically shifted to position j. cant level changes, such as after the vehicle has
been stationary for a long period, the engine
must be on. For safety reasons, the vehicle is
AIRMATIC package only lowered when the doors are closed. Low-
ering is interrupted if a door is opened, and it
General notes continues once the door has been closed.

AIRMATIC is an air suspension system with var- ADS and ADS PLUS (Adaptive Damping
iable damping for improved driving comfort.
Level control ensures the best possible suspen- System)
sion and constant ground clearance, even with a
laden vehicle. When you drive fast, the vehicle is General notes
lowered automatically to improve driving safety The Adaptive Damping System automatically
and to reduce fuel consumption. There is also controls the calibration of the dampers. The
the option to manually adjust the vehicle level. damping characteristics adapt to the current
AIRMATIC consists of: operating and driving situation.
Rlevel settings
The damping is tuned individually to each wheel
and depends on:
Rlevel control and
Ryour driving style, e.g. sporty
RADS or ADS PLUS (Adaptive Damping Sys-
tem) Rthe road surface conditions
All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehi- Rthe drive program selected
cles): your vehicle may also be equipped with Rthe vehicle level setting
the ACTIVE CURVE SYSTEM (Y page 184).
Selecting Comfort mode
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: your vehicle is equip-
ped with the ACTIVE CURVE SYSTEM
(Y page 184).
Observe the notes on driving with a trailer
(Y page 220).
The vehicle level can be set using the DYNAMIC
SELECT controller (Y page 142) or the level but-
ton (Y page 185). The setting always corre-
sponds to the last selected function.

Z
184 Driving systems

In the Comfort drive program, the driving char- X Select the Sport drive program using
acteristics of your vehicle are more comforta- DYNAMIC SELECT controller :.
ble. Therefore, select this mode if you favor a All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehi-
more comfortable driving style. Also select the cles): the vehicle is lowered by 0.6 in (15 mm)
Comfort drive program when driving fast on compared to the normal level.
straight roads, e.g. on straight stretches of high- Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the vehicle
way. remains at the normal level.
X Select the Comfort drive program using
DYNAMIC SELECT controller :. Selecting Sport Plus tuning (Mercedes-
Driving and parking

The vehicle is adjusted to normal level AMG vehicles)


All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehi-
cles): in the Comfort drive program, the vehicle
is lowered by 0.6 in (15 mm) if you:
Rdrive at speeds above 70 mph (112 km/h) or
Rdrive at speeds between 60 mph (96 km/h)
and 70 mph (112 km/h) for longer than
20 seconds
The vehicle is raised again if you:
Rdrive at speeds below 25 mph (40 km/h) or
Rdrive at speeds between 25 mph (40 km/h)
and 40 mph (64 km/h) for longer than 20 sec-
onds The very firm setting of the suspension setting in
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: in the Comfort drive the Sport Plus drive program ensures the best
program, the vehicle is: possible contact with the road. Select this drive
Rlowered by 0.4 in (10 mm) if you drive at program when employing a sporty driving style,
speeds above 112 mph (180 km/h) e.g. on winding country roads or primarily when
driving on race circuits.
Rraised again if you drive at speeds below
87 mph (140 km/h) DSR is not available in the Sport Plus drive pro-
gram. For further information on DSR, see
Selecting Sport mode (Y page 213).
X Select the Sport Plus drive program using
DYNAMIC SELECT controller :.
The vehicle is lowered by 0.4 in (10 mm) com-
pared to the normal level.

ACTIVE CURVE SYSTEM


The ACTIVE CURVE SYSTEM uses active stabil-
izers to optimize both driving comfort and vehi-
cle dynamics. Depending on the drive program
selected (Y page 146), the ACTIVE CURVE SYS-
TEM also changes the setting.
The firmer setting of the suspension tuning in If you have selected the Comfort drive program:
the Sport drive program ensures even better Rrolling movement is reduced in the event of
contact with the road. Select this drive program changing surface undulations
when employing a sporty driving style, e.g. on Rthe roll angle when cornering is reduced
winding country roads. Rthe driving is dynamic
DSR is not available in the Sport drive program. If you have selected the Sport drive program:
For further information on DSR, see
(Y page 213). Rthe roll angle is reduced significantly
Rthe driving is even more dynamic
Driving systems 185

Mercedes-AMG vehicles: if you have selected Always adapt your speed and driving style to
the Sport Plus drive program: the vehicle's driving characteristics and to the
Rthe roll angle is reduced even more signifi- prevailing road and weather conditions.
cantly
Rthe driving is designed for maximum dyna- ! When driving on extremely rough terrain,
mism select a high vehicle level in good time. Make
sure there is always sufficient ground clear-
Vehicle level ance. You will otherwise damage the vehicle.

Driving and parking


RUtility vehicles have a significantly higher roll-
Important safety notes over rate than other types of vehicles.
G WARNING Failure to operate this vehicle safely may
result in an accident, rollover of the vehicle,
When the vehicle is being lowered, people and severe or fatal injury.
could become trapped if their limbs are RIn a rollover crash, an unbelted person is sig-
between the vehicle body and the wheels or nificantly more likely to die than a person
underneath the vehicle. There is a risk of wearing a seat belt.
injury. You and all vehicle occupants should always
Make sure no one is underneath the vehicle or wear your seat belts.
in the immediate vicinity of the wheel arches General notes
when the vehicle is being lowered.
Only select raised level if this is appropriate for
the road conditions. Otherwise, fuel consump-
G WARNING tion may increase and handling may be affected.
When you drive with the vehicle raised, the Make changes to the vehicle level while the
driving characteristics could be impaired by vehicle is in motion. This enables the vehicle to
the vehicle's raised center of gravity. The vehi- adjust to the new level as quickly as possible.
cle could rollover more easily, for example on The vehicle level may change visibly if you park
a bend. There is a risk of an accident. the vehicle and the outside temperature
changes. If the temperature drops, the vehicle
Always select as low a vehicle level as possi- level is lower; with an increase in temperature,
ble and adjust your driving style. the vehicle level rises.
If you unlock the vehicle or open a door, the
G WARNING vehicle begins to compensate for load discrep-
When you drive with the chassis lowered or ancies while still parked. However, for signifi-
cant level changes, such as after the vehicle has
raised, the vehicle's braking and driving char- been stationary for a long period, the engine
acteristics can be significantly impaired. You must be on. For safety reasons, the vehicle is
could also exceed the permissible vehicle only lowered when the doors are closed. Low-
height if the chassis is raised. There is a risk of ering is interrupted if a door is opened, and it
an accident. continues once the door has been closed.
Adjust the vehicle level before pulling away. Vehicles with no trailer coupled: below a
speed of 40 mph (64 km/h) you can choose
between the normal and raised vehicle level.
G WARNING Select the normal vehicle level for normal road
Due to the high center of gravity, the vehicle surfaces and the raised vehicle level for driving
may start to skid and roll over in the event of with snow chains or on particularly poor road
an abrupt steering maneuver and/or when surfaces. Your selection remains stored even if
the vehicle's speed is not adapted to the road you remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
If you try to select raised level at a speed above
conditions. There is a risk of an accident. 40 mph (64 km/h), the Drive More Slowly
message appears in the multifunction display.

Z
186 Driving systems

Vehicles with a trailer coupled: below a speed RMercedes-AMG vehicles: You drive for
of 19 mph (30 km/h), you can choose between approximately 20 seconds between 40 mph
the normal and raised vehicle level. (64 km/h) and 43 mph (70 km/h).
RYou drive with a trailer at speeds greater than
Setting the raised vehicle level 19 mph (30 km/h).
The raised vehicle level remains saved when you
are not driving within these speed ranges.
Setting the normal vehicle level
Driving and parking

! Make sure that there is enough ground


clearance when the vehicle is being lowered.
It could otherwise hit the ground, damaging
the underbody.
X Start the engine.

If indicator lamp ; is lit:


X Press button :.
X Start the engine. Indicator lamp ; flashes while the vehicle is
If indicator lamp ; is not lit: being lowered, and goes out as soon as the
desired vehicle level is reached.
X Press button :. Vehicles with no trailer coupled: the vehi-
Indicator lamp ; flashes while the vehicle is cle is adjusted to the height of the selected
being raised, and lights up continuously as drive program (Y page 142).
soon as the vehicle reaches the desired level.
Vehicles with a trailer coupled: the vehicle
All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehi-
is adjusted to normal level regardless of the
cles): the vehicle is raised by 2.4 in (60 mm) drive program selected (Y page 142). The
compared to the normal level. vehicle remains at the normal level, even if the
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the vehicle is drive program is changed.
raised by 2 in (50 mm) compared to the nor- During the adjustment, the Lowering mes-
mal level. sage appears in the multifunction display.
The Vehicle Rising message appears in the If you press the % or a button on the
multifunction display. multifunction steering wheel, the message will
The message remains until the raised level is disappear.
reached.
If you press the % or a button on the
multifunction steering wheel, the message will AMG adaptive sport suspension sys-
disappear. tem
The raised vehicle level setting is canceled in the
following cases: General notes
RAll vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehi-
cles): you are driving faster than 50 mph
i The AMG adaptive sport suspension system
is available for Mercedes-AMG vehicles and
(80 km/h). for the Mercedes-AMG GLE 43 4MATIC.
RMercedes-AMG vehicles: you are driving
faster than 43 mph (70 km/h). The electronically controlled damping system
works continuously. This improves driving
RAll vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehi-
safety and ride comfort.
cles): You drive for approximately 20 seconds
between 40 mph (64 km/h) and 50 mph
(80 km/h).
Driving systems 187

The damping is tuned individually to each wheel In "Sport +" mode, the vehicle is lowered by
and depends on: 10 mm compared to the normal level.
Ryour driving style, e.g. sporty
Rthe road surface condition, e.g. bumps Comfort mode
Ryour individual selection of Sport, Sport+ or In Comfort mode, the driving characteristics of
Comfort your vehicle are more comfortable. Select this
The suspension setting can be adjusted using mode if you favor a more comfortable driving
button : in the center console or the DYNAMIC style, but also when driving fast on straight

Driving and parking


SELECT controller (Y page 142). roads, e.g. highways.
Each time you start the engine with the ignition X Press button : repeatedly until indicator
SmartKey or the Start/Stop button, Comfort lamps ; and = go out.
mode is activated. For further information about You have selected Comfort mode.
starting the engine, see (Y page 136). The AMG Suspension System COMFORT mes-
sage appears in the multifunction display.
Sport mode

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC


Important safety notes
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is an electronic
parking aid with ultrasound. It monitors the area
around your vehicle using six sensors in the
front bumper and six sensors in the rear
bumper. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC visually
and audibly indicates the distance between your
vehicle and an object.
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is
The firmer setting of the suspension tuning in not a replacement for your attention to your
Sport mode ensures even better contact with immediate surroundings. You are always
the road. Select this mode when employing a responsible for safe maneuvering, parking and
sporty driving style, e.g. on winding country exiting a parking space. When maneuvering,
roads. parking or pulling out of a parking space, make
X Press button : repeatedly until indicator sure that there are no persons, animals or
lamp = lights up. objects in the area in which you are maneuver-
You have selected Sport mode. ing.
The AMG Suspension System SPORT mes- ! When parking, pay particular attention to
sage appears in the multifunction display. objects above or below the sensors, such as
flower pots or trailer drawbars. PARKTRONIC
Sport + mode does not detect such objects when they are in
the immediate vicinity of the vehicle. You
The very firm setting of the suspension setting in could damage the vehicle or the objects.
Sport + mode ensures the best possible contact The sensors may not detect snow and other
with the road. Select this mode only when driv- objects that absorb ultrasonic waves.
ing on race circuits. Ultrasonic sources such as an automatic car
If indicator lamps ; and = are off: wash, the compressed-air brakes on a truck
X Press button : repeatedly until indicator or a pneumatic drill could cause PARKTRONIC
lamp ; lights up. to malfunction.
You have selected Sport + mode. PARKTRONIC may not function correctly on
The AMG Suspension System SPORT + mes- uneven terrain.
sage appears in the multifunction display.

Z
188 Driving systems

! Fold in the ball coupling if the trailer tow Range


hitch is not required. PARKTRONIC measures
the minimum detection range to an obstacle
from the bumper, not the ball coupling.
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated for
the rear area when you establish an electrical
connection between your vehicle and a trailer.
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is activated auto-
matically when you:
Driving and parking

Rswitch on the ignition


Rshift the transmission to position D, R or N
Rrelease the electric parking brake
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated at
speeds above 11 mph (18 km/h). It is reactiva-
ted at lower speeds.

Range of the sensors


General notes
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC does not take into
account obstacles located:
Rbelow the detection range, such as persons,
animals or objects
Rabove the detection range, such as overhang-
: Approx. 24 in (approx. 60 cm) (corners)
ing loads, truck overhangs or loading ramps
; Approx. 32 in (approx. 80 cm) (corners)
= Approx. 48 in (approx. 120 cm) (center)
? Approx. 40 in (approx. 100 cm) (center)
Minimum distance
Center Approx. 8 in (approx. 20 cm)
Corners Approx. 6 in (approx. 15 cm)

If there is an obstacle within this range, the rel-


evant warning displays light up and a warning
tone sounds. If the distance falls below the min-
: Sensors in the front bumper, left-hand side
imum, the distance may no longer be shown.
(example)
The sensors must be free from dirt, ice or slush.
They can otherwise not function correctly. Clean
the sensors regularly, taking care not to scratch
or damage them (Y page 330).
Driving systems 189

Warning displays One or more segments light up as the vehicle


approaches an obstacle, depending on the vehi-
cle's distance from the obstacle.
From the:
Rsixth segment onwards, you will hear an inter-
mittent warning tone for approximately two
seconds.
Rseventh segment onwards, you will hear a

Driving and parking


warning tone for approximately two seconds.
This indicates that you have now reached the
minimum distance.

Deactivating or activating Parking


: Segments on the left-hand side of the vehi- Assist PARKTRONIC
cle
; Segments on the right-hand side of the vehi-
cle
= Segments showing operational readiness
The warning displays show the distance
between the sensors and the obstacle. The
warning display for the front area is located on
the dashboard above the center air vents. The
warning display for the rear area is located on
the headliner in the rear compartment.
The warning display for each side of the vehicle
is divided into five yellow and two red segments.
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is operational if yel- : Indicator lamp
low segments showing operational readiness = ; Deactivates or activates Parking Assist
light up. PARKTRONIC
The selected transmission position and the
direction in which the vehicle is rolling deter- If indicator lamp : lights up, Parking Assist
mine which warning display is active when the PARKTRONIC is deactivated. Parking Pilot is
engine is running. then also deactivated.

Transmission posi- Warning display i Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is automati-


tion cally activated when you turn the SmartKey to
position 2 in the ignition lock.
D Front area activated
R, N or the vehicle is Rear and front areas
rolling backwards activated
P No areas activated

Z
190 Driving systems

Problems with Parking Assist PARKTRONIC


Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Only the red segments in Parking Assist PARKTRONIC has malfunctioned and has been deacti-
the Parking Assist vated.
PARKTRONIC warning X If problems persist, have Parking Assist PARKTRONIC checked at a
displays are lit. You also qualified specialist workshop.
hear a warning tone for
Driving and parking

approximately two sec-


onds.
Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC is deacti-
vated after approx-
imately five seconds,
and the indicator lamp in
the Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC button
lights up.
Only the red segments in The Parking Assist PARKTRONIC sensors are dirty or there is inter-
the Parking Assist ference.
PARKTRONIC warning X Clean the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC sensors (Y page 330).
displays are lit. Parking
X Switch the ignition back on.
Assist PARKTRONIC is
deactivated after The problem may be caused by an external source of radio or ultra-
approximately five sec- sound waves.
onds.
X Check to see if Parking Assist PARKTRONIC works at a different
location.

Parking Pilot G WARNING


While parking or pulling out of a parking
General notes
space, the vehicle swings out and can drive
Parking Pilot is an electronic parking aid with onto areas of the oncoming lane. This could
ultrasound. It measures the road on both sides result in a collision with another road user.
of the vehicle. A parking symbol indicates a suit- There is a risk of an accident.
able parking space. Active steering intervention
and brake application can assist you during Pay attention to other road users. Stop the
parking. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is also vehicle if necessary or cancel the Parking Pilot
available (Y page 187). parking procedure.

Important safety notes ! If they cannot be avoided, drive over obsta-


cles such as curbs slowly and at an obtuse
Parking Pilot is only an aid. It is not a replace- angle. Otherwise, you may damage the
ment for your attention to your immediate sur- wheels or tires.
roundings. You are always responsible for safe
maneuvering, parking and exiting a parking Parking Pilot may show parking spaces which
space. Make sure that no persons, animals or are not suitable for parking, e.g.:
objects are in the path of your vehicle. Rwhere parking or stopping is prohibited
When Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactiva- Rin front of driveways or entrances and exits
ted, Parking Pilot is also unavailable. Ron unsuitable surfaces
Driving systems 191

Parking tips: Further information about the detection range


ROn narrow roads, drive as close to the parking (Y page 188).
space as possible. Parking Pilot does not assist you parking in
RParking spaces that are littered or overgrown spaces at a right angle to the direction of travel
might be identified or measured incorrectly. if:
RParking spaces that are partially occupied by Rtwo parking spaces are located directly next
trailer drawbars might not be identified as to one another
such or be measured incorrectly. Rthe parking space is directly next to a low

Driving and parking


RSnowfall or heavy rain may lead to a parking obstacle such as a low curb
space being measured inaccurately. Ryou park forwards
RPay attention to the warning messages of Parking Pilot does not assist you parking in
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC during the park- spaces parallel with or at a right angle to the
ing procedure (Y page 187). direction of travel if:
RYou can intervene to correct the steering pro- Rthe parking space is on a curb
cedure at any time. Parking Pilot will then be Rthe system reads the parking space as being
canceled. blocked, for example by foliage or grass pav-
RWhen transporting a load that protrudes from ing blocks
your vehicle, you must not use Parking Pilot. Rthe area is too small for the vehicle to maneu-
RNever use Parking Pilot when snow chains are ver into
mounted. Rthe parking space is bordered by an obstacle,
RMake sure that the tire pressures are always e.g. a tree, a post or a trailer
correct. This has a direct influence on the
parking characteristics of the vehicle.
Use Parking Pilot for parking spaces that are:
Rparallel or at right angles to the direction of
travel
Ron straight roads, not bends
Ron the same level as the road, e.g. not on the
pavement : Detected parking space on the left
; Parking symbol
Detecting parking spaces = Detected parking space on the right
Objects located above the detection range of Parking Pilot is activated automatically when
Parking Pilot will not be detected when the park- driving forward. The system is operational up to
ing space is measured. These are not taken into a speed of approximately 22 mph (35 km/h).
account when the parking/exiting procedure is While in operation, the system independently
calculated, e.g. overhanging loads, tail sections locates and measures parking spaces on both
or loading ramps of trucks. Parking Pilot may sides of the vehicle.
therefore guide you into the parking space too Parking Pilot will only detect parking spaces
early. which are:
G WARNING Rparallel or at right angles to the direction of
If there are objects above the detection range: travel
Rthat are parallel to the direction of travel and
RParking Pilot may steer in too early at least 59 in (1.5 m) wide
Rthe vehicle may not stop in front of these Rthat are parallel to the direction of travel and
objects at least 39.5 in (1.0 m) longer than your vehi-
You may cause a collision as a result. There is cle
a risk of an accident. Rthat are at right angles to the direction of
travel and at least 39.5 in (1.0 m) wider than
If objects are located above the detection your vehicle
range, stop and deactivate Parking Pilot.

Z
192 Driving systems

i Note that Parking Pilot PARKTRONIC cannot X Stop the vehicle when the parking space sym-
measure the depth of parking spaces if they bol shows the desired parking space in the
are at right angles to the direction of travel. instrument cluster.
You will need to judge whether your vehicle X Shift the transmission to position R.
will fit into the parking space. The Start Parking Pilot? Yes: OK No:
When driving at speeds below 19 mph % message appears in the multifunction
(30 km/h), you will see parking symbol ; as a display.
status indicator in the instrument cluster. When X To cancel the procedure: press the %
a parking space has been detected, an arrow button on the multifunction steering wheel or
Driving and parking

towards the right or the left also appears. Park- pull away.
ing Pilot only displays parking spaces on the or
front-passenger side as standard. Parking X To park using Parking Pilot: press the a
spaces on the driver's side are displayed as
button on the multifunction steering wheel.
soon as the turn signal on the driver's side is
The Parking Pilot Active Accelerate
activated. When parking on the driver's side,
and Brake Observe Surroundings mes-
this must remain activated until you confirm the
sage appears in the multifunction display.
use of Parking Pilot by pressing the a button
on the multifunction steering wheel. The system X Let go of the multifunction steering wheel.
automatically determines whether the parking X Back up the vehicle, being ready to brake at all
space is parallel or at right angles to the direc- times. When backing up, drive at a speed
tion of travel. below approximately 6 mph (10 km/h). Oth-
A parking space is displayed while you are driv- erwise, Parking Pilot is canceled immediately.
ing past it, and until you are approximately 50 ft Parking Pilot brakes the vehicle to a standstill
(15 m) away from it. when the vehicle approaches the rear border
of the parking space.
Parking Maneuvering may be required in tight parking
spaces.
G WARNING The Parking Pilot Active Select D
If you leave the vehicle when it is only being Observe Surroundings message appears in
the multifunction display.
braked by Active Parking Assist it could roll
X Shift the transmission to position D while the
away if:
vehicle is stationary.
Rthere is a malfunction in the system or in Parking Pilot immediately steers in the other
the voltage supply. direction.
Rthe electrical system in the engine com- The Parking Pilot Active Accelerate
partment, the battery or the fuses have and Brake Observe Surroundings mes-
sage appears in the multifunction display.
been tampered with.
Rthe battery is disconnected.
i You will achieve the best results by waiting
for the steering procedure to complete before
Rthe accelerator pedal has been depressed, pulling away.
e.g. by a vehicle occupant. X Drive forwards and be ready to brake at all
There is a risk of an accident. times.
Before leaving the vehicle, always secure it Parking Pilot brakes the vehicle to a standstill.
against rolling away. The Parking Pilot Active Select R
Observe Surroundings message appears in
i If Parking Assist PARKTRONIC detects the multifunction display.
obstacles, Parking Pilot brakes automatically As soon as the parking procedure is complete,
whilst the vehicle is being parked. You are the Parking Pilot Finished message
responsible for braking in good time. appears and a warning tone sounds. The vehicle
is now parked. The vehicle is kept stationary
without the driver having to depress the brake
Driving systems 193

pedal. The braking effect is canceled when you X Shift the transmission to position D or R.
depress the accelerator pedal. The Start Parking Pilot? Yes: OK No:
Parking Pilot no longer supports you with steer- % message appears in the multifunction
ing interventions and brake applications. When display.
Parking Pilot is finished, you must steer and X To cancel the procedure: press the %
brake again yourself. Parking Assist button on the multifunction steering wheel or
PARKTRONIC is still available. pull away.
Parking tips: or
X To exit a parking space using Parking

Driving and parking


RThe way your vehicle is positioned in the park-
ing space after parking is dependent on vari- Pilot: press the a button on the multi-
ous factors. These include the position and function steering wheel.
shape of the vehicles parked in front and The Parking Pilot Active Accelerate
behind it and the conditions of the location. It and Brake Observe Surroundings mes-
may be the case that Parking Pilot guides you sage appears in the multifunction display.
too far into a parking space, or not far enough X Let go of the multifunction steering wheel.
into it. In some cases, it may also lead you X Pull away, being ready to brake at all times. Do
across or onto the curb. Cancel the parking not exceed a maximum speed of approx-
procedure with Parking Pilot if necessary. imately 6 mph (10 km/h) when exiting a park-
RYou can also select preselect transmission ing space. Otherwise, Parking Pilot is can-
position D. The vehicle redirects and does not celed immediately.
drive as far into the parking space. Should the X Shift the transmission to position D or R as
transmission change take place too early, the required or according to the message while
parking procedure will be canceled. A sensi- the vehicle is stationary.
ble parking position can no longer be ach- Parking Pilot immediately steers in the other
ieved from this position. direction. The Parking Pilot Active
Accelerate and Brake Observe Sur‐
Exiting a parking space roundings message appears in the multi-
function display.
In order for Parking Pilot to assist you:
i You will achieve the best results by waiting
Rthe border of the parking space must be high for the steering procedure to complete before
enough at the front and the rear. A curb is too pulling away.
small, for example.
If you back up after activation, the steering
Rthe border of the parking space must not be wheel is moved to the straight-ahead posi-
too wide. Your vehicle can be maneuvered tion.
into a position at a maximum of 45° to the
starting position in the parking space. X Drive forwards and back up as prompted by

Ra maneuvering distance of at least 3.3 ft


the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC warning dis-
plays, several times if necessary.
(1.0 m) must be available.
Parking Pilot can assist you with exiting a park- Once you have exited the parking space com-
ing space only if you have parked the vehicle pletely, the steering wheel is moved to the
parallel to the direction of travel using the Park- straight-ahead position. You hear a tone and the
ing Pilot. Parking Pilot Finished message appears in
the multifunction display. You will then have to
i If Parking Assist PARKTRONIC detects steer and merge into traffic on your own. Park-
obstacles, Parking Pilot brakes automatically ing Assist PARKTRONIC is still available. You can
whilst the vehicle is exiting the parking space. take over the steering before the vehicle has
You are responsible for braking in good time. exited the parking space completely. This is
X Start the engine. useful, for example when you recognize that it is
already possible to pull out of the parking space.
X Release the electric parking brake.
X Switch on the turn signal in the direction you
will drive out of the parking space.

Z
194 Driving systems

Canceling Parking Pilot vehicle with guide lines in the multimedia sys-
tem.
X Stop the movement of the multifunction The area behind the vehicle is displayed as a
steering wheel or steer yourself. mirror image, as in the rear view mirror.
Parking Pilot is canceled immediately. The
Parking Pilot Canceled message appears i The text shown in the multimedia system
in the multifunction display. display depends on the language setting. The
or following are examples of rear view camera
X Press the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC button displays in the multimedia system.
Driving and parking

(Y page 189).
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is switched off Important safety notes
and Parking Pilot is immediately canceled.
The Parking Pilot Canceled message The rear view camera is only an aid. It is not a
appears in the multifunction display. replacement for your attention to your immedi-
ate surroundings. You are always responsible
Parking Pilot is canceled automatically when: for safe maneuvering and parking. Make sure
Rthe electric parking brake is engaged that there are no persons, animals or objects in
Rtransmission position P is selected the maneuvering area while maneuvering and
parking in parking spaces.
Rparking using Parking Pilot is no longer pos-
sible Under the following circumstances, the rear
view camera will not function, or will function in
Ryou are driving faster than 6 mph (10 km/h)
a limited manner:
Ra wheel spins, ESP® intervenes or fails. The
Rif the trunk lid is open
÷ warning lamp lights up in the instrument
Rif there is heavy rain, snow or fog
cluster
Rat night or in very dark places
A warning tone sounds. The parking symbol dis-
appears and the multifunction display shows the Rif the camera is exposed to very bright light
Parking Pilot Canceled message. Rif the area is lit by fluorescent bulbs or LED
When Parking Pilot is canceled, you must steer lighting (the display may flicker)
and brake again yourself. Rif there is a sudden change in temperature,
If a system malfunction occurs, the vehicle is e.g. when driving into a heated garage in win-
braked to a standstill. To drive on, depress the ter
accelerator again. Rif the camera lens is dirty or obstructed.
Observe the notes on cleaning
(Y page 330)
Rear view camera Rif the rear of your vehicle is damaged. In this
event, have the camera position and setting
General notes checked at a qualified specialist workshop
The field of vision and other functions of the rear
view camera may be restricted due to additional
accessories on the rear of the vehicle (e.g.
license plate holder, bicycle rack).
For technical reasons, leaving the standard
height can result in inaccuracies in the guide
lines on vehicles with a height-adjustable chas-
sis.
i The rear view camera is protected from rain-
drops and dust by means of a flap. When the
rear view camera is activated, this flap opens.

Rear view camera : is an optical parking and


maneuvering aid. It shows the area behind your
Driving systems 195

The flap closes again when: Rthe rear section of an HGV


Ryou have finished the maneuvering process Ra slanted post
Ryou switch off the engine Use the guidelines only for orientation.
Ryou open the cargo compartment Approach objects no further than the bottom-
most guideline.
Observe the notes on cleaning (Y page 330).
For technical reasons, the flap may remain
open briefly after the rear view camera has
been deactivated.

Driving and parking


Activating/deactivating the rear view
camera
X To activate: make sure that the SmartKey is
in position 2 in the ignition lock.
X Make sure that the Activation by R gear
function is selected in the multimedia system
(see the Digital Operator's Manual).
: Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-
X Engage reverse gear. imately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the rear of the
The rear view camera flap opens. The multi- vehicle
media system shows the area behind the vehi- ; White guide line without turning the steering
cle with guide lines. wheel, vehicle width including the exterior
The image from the rear view camera is avail- mirrors (static)
able throughout the maneuvering process. = Yellow guide line for the vehicle width
X To switch the function mode for vehicles including the exterior mirrors, for current
with trailer tow hitch: using the controller, steering wheel angle (dynamic)
select symbol : for the "Reverse parking" ? Yellow lane marking the course the tires will
function or symbol ; for "Coupling up a take at the current steering wheel angle
trailer". (dynamic)
The symbol of the selected function is high-
lighted.
To deactivate: the rear view camera deacti-
vates if you shift the transmission to j or after
driving forwards a short distance.

Displays in the multimedia system


The rear view camera may show a distorted view
of obstacles, show them incorrectly or not at all.
The rear view camera does not show objects in
the following positions:
Rvery close to the rear bumper A Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-
Runder the rear bumper imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of the vehi-
cle
Rin the area immediately above the tailgate
handle B Vehicle center axle (marker assistance)
C Bumper
! Objects not at ground level may appear to D Red guide line at a distance of approximately
be further away than they actually are, e.g.: 12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle
Rthe bumper of a parked vehicle The guide lines are shown when the transmis-
Rthe drawbar of a trailer sion is in position k.
Rthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitch The distance specifications only apply to
objects that are at ground level.
Z
196 Driving systems

= Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-


imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of the vehi-
cle
? Red guide line at a distance of approximately
12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle
X Make sure that the rear view camera is
switched on (Y page 195).
The lane and the guide lines are shown.
Driving and parking

X With the help of white guide line :, check


whether the vehicle will fit into the parking
space.
: Front warning display X Using white guide line : as a guide, carefully
; Additional measurement operational readi- back up until you reach the end position.
ness indicator for Parking Assist Red guide line ? is then at the end of the
PARKTRONIC parking space. The vehicle is almost parallel
in the parking space.
= Rear warning display
Vehicles with Parking Assist PARKTRONIC: Reverse perpendicular parking with steer-
when Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is opera- ing input
tional (Y page 188), additional measurement
operational readiness indicator ; appears in
the multimedia system. If the Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC warning displays are active or
light up, warning displays : and = are also
active or light up correspondingly in the multi-
media system.

"Reverse parking" function


Backing up straight into a parking space
without steering input
: Parking space marking
; Yellow guide line for the vehicle width
including the exterior mirrors, for current
steering wheel angle (dynamic)
X Drive past the parking space and bring the
vehicle to a standstill.
X Make sure that the rear view camera is
switched on (Y page 195).
The lane and the guide lines are shown.
X While the vehicle is at a standstill, turn the
steering wheel in the direction of the parking
: White guide line without steering input – space until yellow guide line ; reaches park-
vehicle width including the exterior mirrors ing space marking :.
(static) X Maintain the steering input and reverse care-
; Yellow guide line for the vehicle width fully.
including the exterior mirrors, for current
steering wheel angle (dynamic)
Driving systems 197

X Back up carefully until you have reached the


final position.
Red guide line : is then at end of parking
space =. The vehicle is almost parallel in the
parking space.

"Coupling up a trailer" function

Driving and parking


: Yellow guide line for the vehicle width
including the exterior mirrors, for current
steering wheel angle (dynamic)
X Stop the vehicle when it is almost exactly in
front of the parking space.
The white lane should be as close to parallel
with the parking space marking as possible.
: Vehicle center point on the yellow guide line
at a distance of approximately 1.0 m from
the rear of the vehicle
; Trailer drawbar
This function is only available on vehicles with a
trailer tow hitch.
X Before coupling up a trailer, set the height of
trailer drawbar ; so that it is slightly higher
than the ball coupling.
X Position the vehicle centrally in front of trailer
drawbar ;.
: White guide line for current steering input
; Parking space marking
X Turn the steering wheel to the center position
while the vehicle is stationary.

: Red guide line at a distance of approximately


0.30 m from the ball coupling
; Trailer drawbar marker assistant
= Trailer drawbar
: Red guide line at a distance of approximately ? Symbol for the "Coupling up a trailer" func-
12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle tion
; White guide line without steering input A Ball coupling
= End of parking space

Z
198 Driving systems

i For technical reasons, the ball coupling of 360° camera


the trailer tow hitch in the multimedia system
display is either only partially visible or not at General notes
all.
The 360° camera is a system consisting of four
X Select symbol ? using the controller.
cameras.
The "Coupling up a trailer" function is selec-
ted. The distance specifications now only The system processes images from the follow-
apply to objects that are at the same level as ing cameras:
the ball coupling. RRear view camera
Driving and parking

X Back up carefully, making sure that trailer RFront camera


drawbar locating aid ; points approximately RTwo cameras in the exterior rear view mirrors
in the direction of trailer drawbar =. The cameras cover the immediate surroundings
X Back up carefully until trailer drawbar = rea- of the vehicle. The 360° camera assists you, for
ches the red guide line. instance when parking or at exits with reduced
The distance between the trailer drawbar and visibility.
the red guide line is now approximately You can show pictures from the 360° camera in
0.30 m. full-screen mode or in seven different split-
X Couple up the trailer (Y page 220). screen views on the multimedia system display.
A split-screen view also includes a top view of
180° view the vehicle. This view is calculated from the data
supplied by the installed cameras (virtual cam-
era).
The six split-screen views are:
RTop view and picture from the rear view cam-
era (130° viewing angle)
RTop view and image from the front camera
(130° viewing angle without displaying the
maximum steering wheel angle)
RTop view and enlarged rear view
RTop view and enlarged front view
RTop view and trailer view (vehicles with trailer
tow hitch)
: Symbol for the 180° view function RTop view and rear-view images from the exte-
; Your vehicle rior mirror cameras (rear wheel view)
= Warning displays for Parking Assist RTop view and forward-view images from the
PARKTRONIC exterior mirror cameras (front wheel view)
You can also use the rear view camera to select When the function is active and you shift the
a 180° view. transmission from h or k to i, the dynamic
guide lines are hidden.
When Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is opera-
tional (Y page 188), a symbol for your own vehi- When you shift between transmission positions
cle appears in the multimedia system. If the h and k, you see the previously selected front
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC warning displays or rear view.
are active, warning displays = light up in the Distances measured by Parking Assist
multimedia system in yellow or red accordingly. PARKTRONIC will also be optically displayed:
Rin split screen view as red or yellow brackets
around the vehicle icon in the top view, or
Rat the bottom right as red or yellow brackets
around the vehicle symbol in full-screen mode
The line thickness and color of the brackets
show how far the vehicle is away from an object:
Driving systems 199

Ryellow brackets with thin lines: Parking Assist Rthe camera lenses are dirty or covered
PARKTRONIC is active Rthe vehicle components in which the cameras
Ryellow brackets with normal lines: an object is are installed are damaged In this event, have
present in close range of the vehicle the camera position and setting checked at a
Rred line: an object is present in the immediate qualified specialist workshop
close range of the vehicle Do not use the 360° camera under such cir-
cumstances. You can otherwise injure others or
i The camera in the rear area is protected cause damage to objects or the vehicle.
from raindrops and dust by means of a flap.
Guide lines are always shown at road level. In

Driving and parking


When the camera is activated, this flap opens.
trailer mode, the guide lines are shown at the
The flap closes again in the following situa- level of the trailer coupling.
tions:
The field of vision and other functions of the
Ryou have finished the maneuvering process camera system may be restricted due to addi-
Ryou switch the engine off tional accessories on the rear of the vehicle (e.g.
Ryou open the cargo compartment license plate holder, bicycle rack).
Observe the notes on cleaning (Y page 330). On vehicles with height-adjustable chassis,
depending on technical conditions, leaving the
For technical reasons, the flap may remain
standard height can result in:
open briefly after the camera has been deac-
tivated. Rinaccuracies in the guide lines
Rinaccuracies in the display of generated
Important safety notes images (top view)
The 360°camera is only an aid and may show a Activation conditions
distorted view of obstacles, show them incor-
rectly or not at all. The 360°camera is not a The 360° camera image can be displayed in the
substitute for attentive driving. following situations:
You are always responsible for safe maneuver- Ryour vehicle is equipped with a 360° camera
ing and parking. Make sure that there are no
Rthe SmartKey is in key position 2 in the igni-
persons, animals or objects in the maneuvering
area while maneuvering and parking in parking tion lock
spaces. Rthe multimedia system is switched on

You are always responsible for safety and must


continue to pay attention to your immediate Switching on the 360° camera
surroundings when parking and maneuvering.
This applies to the areas behind, in front of and X Press the Ø button in the center console
beside the vehicle. You could otherwise endan- for longer than two seconds.
ger yourself and others. Depending on whether transmission position
h or k is selected, the following appears:
The 360° camera will not function or will func-
Ra split screen with top view and the image
tion in a limited manner in the following situa-
tions: from the front camera or
Ra split screen with top view and the image
Rthe doors are open
from the rear view camera
Rthe exterior mirrors are folded in
or
Rthe tailgate is open
X Press the Ø button in the center console.
Rin heavy rain, snow or fog The vehicle menu is displayed.
Rat night or in very dark places X Select 360° Camera and press 7 to confirm.
Rthe cameras are exposed to very bright light Depending on whether transmission position
Rthe area is lit by fluorescent bulbs or LED h or k is selected, the following appears:
lighting (the display may flicker) Ra split screen with top view and the image
Rthere is a sudden change in temperature, from the front camera or
such as when driving into a heated garage in Ra split screen with top view and the image
winter from the rear view camera

Z
200 Driving systems

Activating the 360° camera using ! Objects not at ground level may appear to
reverse gear be further away than they actually are, e.g.:
Rthe bumper of a parked vehicle
The 360° camera images can be automatically
displayed by engaging reverse gear. Rthe drawbar of a trailer

X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2 Rthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitch
in the ignition lock. Rthe rear section of an HGV
X Make sure that the Activation by R gear Ra slanted post
function is selected on the multimedia system Use the guidelines only for orientation.
Driving and parking

(see the Digital Operator's Manual). Approach objects no further than the bottom-
X To show the 360° camera image: engage most guideline.
reverse gear.
The multimedia system shows the area Top view with picture from the rear view
behind the vehicle in split-screen mode. You camera
see the top view of the vehicle and the image
from the rear view camera.

Selecting the split-screens or 180° view


Selecting split-screen view
X To switch to the line with the vehicle icons:
slide 5 the controller.
X To select one of the vehicle icons: turn 3
the controller.
X To switch to 180° View:
View turn 3 the con-
troller to select 180° View and press 7 to : Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-
confirm. imately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the rear of the
vehicle
i The 180° View option is only available in the ; Symbol for the split screen setting with top
following views: view and rear view camera image
RTop view with picture from the rear view
= Guide lines for the maximum steering input
camera
? Yellow lane marking the course the tires will
RTop view with picture from the front camera
take at the current steering wheel angle
(dynamic)
Displays in the multimedia system A Yellow guide line for the vehicle width
including the exterior mirrors, for current
Important safety notes steering wheel angle (dynamic)
The camera system may show a distorted view
of obstacles, show them incorrectly or not at all.
Obstacles are not shown by the system in the
following locations:
Runder the front and rear bumpers
Rvery close to the front and rear bumpers
Rin the area immediately above the tailgate
handle
Rvery close to the exterior mirrors
Rin the transitional areas between the various
cameras in the virtual top view
Driving systems 201

A Red guide line at a distance of approximately


12 in (0.30 m) from the front of the vehicle
B Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-
imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the front of the
vehicle
Top view and enlarged rear view

Driving and parking


B Vehicle center axle (marker assistance)
C Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-
imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of the vehi-
cle
D Bumper
E Red guide line at a distance of approximately
12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle
The guide lines are shown when the transmis- : Symbol for the split screen setting with top
sion is in position k. view and rear view camera image enlarged
The distance specifications only apply to ; Red guide line at a distance of approximately
objects that are at ground level. 12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle
This view assists you in estimating the distance
Top view with picture from the front cam- to the vehicle behind you.
era
i This setting can also be selected as an
enlarged front view.
Top view with image from the camera in
the exterior mirrors

: Symbol for the split screen setting with top


view and front camera image
; Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-
imately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the front of the
vehicle
: Symbol for setting the top view with image
= Yellow guide line for the vehicle width from the forward camera in the exterior mir-
including the exterior mirrors, for current rors
steering wheel angle (dynamic)
; Yellow guide line for the vehicle width
? Yellow lane marking the course the tires will including the exterior mirrors (right side of
take at the current steering wheel angle vehicle)
(dynamic)
= Yellow guide line for the vehicle width
including the exterior mirrors (left side of
vehicle)

Z
202 Driving systems

i You can also select the camera setting in the Exiting 360° camera display mode
exterior mirrors for the rear-facing view.
The 360° camera display is stopped:
Top view with trailer view Rwhen you select transmission position j, or
Rwhen you are driving at moderate speeds
The previous display appears in the multimedia
system. You can also switch the display by
selecting the & symbol in the display and
pressing the controller to confirm.
Driving and parking

ATTENTION ASSIST
General notes
ATTENTION ASSIST helps you during long,
: Symbol for the trailer view setting monotonous journeys, such as on highways. It is
; Trailer drawbar marker assistant active in the 37 mph (60 km/h) to 125 mph
(200 km/h) range. If ATTENTION ASSIST
= Ball coupling
detects typical indicators of fatigue or increas-
? Red guide line at a distance of approximately ing lapses in concentration on the part of the
0.30 m from the ball coupling driver, it suggests taking a break.
The lines are shown at the level of the trailer
coupling. Important safety notes
i For technical reasons, the ball coupling of ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid to the driver. It
the trailer tow hitch is only partially visible in might not always recognize fatigue or increasing
the multimedia system display. inattentiveness in time or fail to recognize them
at all. The system is not a substitute for a well-
180° view rested and attentive driver.
The functionality of ATTENTION ASSIST is
restricted and warnings may be delayed or not
occur at all:
Rif the length of the journey is less than approx-
imately 30 minutes
Rif the road condition is poor, e.g. if the surface
is uneven or if there are potholes
Rif there is a strong side wind
Rif you have adopted a sporty driving style with
high cornering speeds or high rates of accel-
eration
Rif you are predominantly driving slower than
: Symbol for the full screen setting with rear 37 mph (60 km/h) or faster than 125 mph
view camera image (200 km/h)
; Your vehicle Rif you are driving with the Steering Pilot of
= Warning displays for Parking Assist Distance Pilot DISTRONIC activated
PARKTRONIC Rif the time has been set incorrectly
i 180° view can also be selected as front Rin active driving situations, such as when you
view. change lanes or change your speed
Select this view when you are driving out of an
exit and the view of crossing traffic is restricted,
for example.
Driving systems 203

The attention level evaluation is deleted and is adapted accordingly and the driver is warned
restarts when the journey is continued, if: earlier.
Ryou switch off the engine When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the
Ryou take off your seat belt and open the driv- À symbol and OFF appear in the multifunc-
er's door, e.g. for a change of drivers or to tion display in the assistance display when the
take a break engine is running.
When ATTENTION ASSIST has been deactivated,
it is automatically reactivated after the engine
Displaying the attention level has been stopped. The sensitivity selected cor-

Driving and parking


responds to the last selection activated (stand-
ard/sensitive).

Warning in the multifunction display


If fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration
are detected, a warning appears in the multi-
function display: Attention Assist: Take a
Break!
In addition to the message shown in the multi-
function display, you will then hear a warning
tone.
You can have current status information dis- X If necessary, take a break.
played in the assistance menu (Y page 236) of X Confirm the message by pressing the a
the on-board computer. button on the steering wheel.
X Select the Assistance display for ATTENTION On long journeys, take regular breaks in good
ASSIST using the on-board computer time to allow yourself to rest. If you do not take
(Y page 236). a break, you will be warned again after
The following information is displayed: 15 minutes at the earliest. This will only happen
if ATTENTION ASSIST still detects typical indi-
Rthe length of the journey since the last break. cators of fatigue or increasing lapses in concen-
Rthe attention level determined by ATTENTION tration.
ASSIST, displayed in a bar display in five levels Vehicles with COMAND: if a warning is issued
from high to low. in the multifunction display, a service station
RIf ATTENTION ASSIST is unable to calculate search is performed in COMAND. You can select
the attention level and cannot output a warn- a service station and navigation to this service
ing, the System suspended message station will then begin. This function can be acti-
appears. The bar display then changes the vated and deactivated in COMAND.
display, e.g. if you are driving at a speed below
37 mph (60 km/h) or above 125 mph
(200 km/h). Traffic Sign Assist
Activating ATTENTION ASSIST General notes
X Activate ATTENTION ASSIST using the on- Traffic Sign Assist displays the maximum speed
board computer (Y page 237). permitted to the driver in the instrument cluster.
The system determines the attention level of The data stored in the navigation system and
the driver depending on the setting selected: general traffic regulations are used to determine
Standard selected: the sensitivity with which the current speed limit.
the system determines the attention level is set As Traffic Sign Assist is a map-based system,
to normal. traffic signs put up temporarily (e.g. near road-
works) are not detected.
Sensitive selected: the sensitivity is set higher.
The attention level detected by Attention Assist

Z
204 Driving systems

If a traffic sign that is relevant to your vehicle is Speed limit with unknown restriction
passed, the display of the speed limits is upda-
ted.
Traffic signs with a restriction indicated by an
additional sign (e.g. in wet conditions) are also
shown.
The traffic signs are only displayed with the
restrictions if:
Driving and parking

RThe regulation must be observed with the


restriction, or
RTraffic Sign Assist is unable to determine
whether the restriction applies
If Traffic Sign Assist is unable to determine a
maximum permitted speed from any of the avail- : Maximum permitted speed
able sources, no speed limit is displayed in the ; Maximum permitted speed for vehicles for
instrument cluster either. which the restriction in the additional sign is
relevant
= Additional sign for unknown restriction
A maximum permitted speed of 80 mph
(80 km/h) and a speed limit of 60 mph
(60 km/h) with an unknown restriction apply.

Lane Tracking package


Traffic Sign Assist is not available in all coun-
tries. In this case, symbol : is shown in the General notes
assistance graphic display (Y page 236).
The Lane Tracking package consists of Blind
Spot Assist (Y page 204) and Lane Keeping
Important safety notes Assist (Y page 206).
Traffic Sign Assist is only an aid and is not always
able to correctly display speed limits. Traffic Blind Spot Assist
signs always have priority over the Traffic Sign
Assist display. General notes
The system may be either functionally impaired Blind Spot Assist monitors the areas on either
or temporarily unavailable if the information in side of the vehicle that are not visible to the
the digital street map of the navigation system is driver with two lateral, rear-facing radar sen-
incorrect or out of date. sors. A warning display in the exterior mirrors
draws your attention to vehicles detected in the
Instrument cluster display monitored area. If you then switch on the cor-
responding turn signal to change lane, you will
Displaying the assistance graphic also receive an optical and audible warning.
X Call up the assistance graphics display func- Blind Spot Assist supports you from a speed of
tion using the on-board computer approximately 20 mph (30 km/h).
(Y page 236).
X Select the Traffic Sign Assist display.
Detected traffic signs are displayed in the
instrument cluster.
Driving systems 205

Important safety notes Rthere are narrow vehicles, e.g. motorcycles or


bicycles
G WARNING Rthe road has very wide lanes
Blind Spot Assist does not react to: Rthe road has narrow lanes
Rvehicles overtaken too closely on the side, Ryou are not driving in the middle of the lane
placing them in the blind spot area Rthere are barriers or similar lane borders
Rvehicles which approach with a large speed Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not
differential and overtake your vehicle indicated.

Driving and parking


As a result, Blind Spot Assist may not give
warnings in such situations. There is a risk of
an accident.
Always observe the traffic conditions care-
fully, and maintain a safe lateral distance.

Blind Spot Assist is only an aid. It may fail to


detect some vehicles and is no substitute for
attentive driving. Always ensure that there is
sufficient distance to the side for other road
users and obstacles.
i USA only:
This device has been approved by the FCC as
a "Vehicular Radar System". The radar sensor
is intended for use in an automotive radar
system only. Removing, tampering with, or
altering the device will void any warranties,
and is not permitted by the FCC. Do not tam- At a distance of around 1.6 ft (0.5 m) ; from the
per with, alter, or use in any non-approved vehicle, Blind Spot Assist monitors the area up
way. to 10 ft (3 m) next to = and behind : your
vehicle, as shown in the picture.
Any unauthorized modification to this device
could void the user’s authority to operate the If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in the
equipment. lane beyond the lane next to your vehicle may be
indicated, especially if the vehicles are not driv-
Radar sensors ing in the middle of their lane. This may be the
The radar sensors for Blind Spot Assist are inte- case if there are vehicles driving at the inner
grated into the rear bumper. Make sure that the edge of their lanes.
bumpers are free from dirt, ice or slush. The Due to the nature of the system:
sensors must not be covered, for example by Rwarnings may be issued in error when driving
cycle racks or overhanging loads. Following a close to crash barriers or similar solid lane
severe impact or in the event of damage to the borders.
bumpers, have the function of the radar sensors Rthe warning is canceled when driving for an
checked at a qualified specialist workshop. extended period next to long vehicles, such as
Blind Spot Assist may no longer work properly. trucks.
Monitoring area Warning lamp
In particular, the detection of obstacles can be Blind Spot Assist is not active at speeds below
impaired if: approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). Vehicles in
Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else the monitoring range are then not indicated.
covering the sensors
Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy
rain, snow or spray

Z
206 Driving systems

Towing a trailer
When you attach a trailer, make sure you have
correctly established the electrical connection.
This can be accomplished by checking the trailer
lighting. In this event, Blind Spot Assist is deac-
tivated. The warning lamp lights up yellow in the
exterior mirrors and the Blind Spot Assist
Not Available When Towing a Trailer
See Operator's Manual message appears in
Driving and parking

the multifunction display.


i You can deactivate the warning lamps in the
: Warning lamp exterior mirrors.
To do so, switch off Blind Spot Assist when:
If Blind Spot Assist is activated, warning lamp :
in the exterior mirrors lights up yellow at speeds Rthe SmartKey is in position 2 in the igni-
of up to 20 mph (30 km/h). At speeds above tion lock
20 mph (30 km/h), the warning lamp goes out Rthe engine is not running
and Blind Spot Assist is operational.
If a vehicle is detected within the blind spot Lane Keeping Assist
monitoring range at speeds above 20 mph
(30 km/h), warning lamp : on the correspond- General notes
ing side lights up red. This warning is always
emitted when a vehicle enters the blind spot
monitoring range from behind or from the side.
When you overtake a vehicle, the warning only
occurs if the difference in speed is less than
7 mph (12 km/h).
If you select the reverse gear, Blind Spot Assist
is not operational.
The brightness of the warning lamps is auto-
matically adapted to the brightness of the sur-
roundings.
Collision warning
If a vehicle is detected in the monitoring range of : Lane Keeping Assist camera
Blind Spot Assist and you switch on the corre- Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in front of
sponding turn signal, a double warning tone your vehicle with camera :, which is mounted
sounds. Red warning lamp : flashes. If the turn at the top of the windshield. Lane Keeping Assist
signal remains on, detected vehicles are indica- detects lane markings on the road and can warn
ted by the flashing of red warning lamp :. you before you leave your lane unintentionally.
There are no further warning tones. This function is available in the range between
40 mph and 120 mph (60 km/h and 200 km/h).
Switching on Blind Spot Assist
A warning may be given if a front wheel passes
X Make sure that Blind Spot Assist is activated over a lane marking. It will warn you by means of
in the on-board computer (Y page 237). intermittent vibration in the steering wheel for
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- up to 1.5 seconds.
tion lock.
Warning lamps : in the exterior mirrors light Important safety notes
up red for approximately 1.5 seconds and
then turn yellow.
G WARNING
Lane Keeping Assist cannot always clearly
detect lane markings.
Driving systems 207

In such cases, Lane Keeping Assist can: Switching on Lane Keeping Assist
Rgive
X Switch on Active Lane Keeping Assist using
an unnecessary warning
the on-board computer; to do so, select
Rnot give a warning Standard or Adaptive (Y page 237).
There is a risk of an accident. If you drive at speeds above 40 mph
(60 km/h) and lane markings are detected,
Always pay particular attention to the traffic the lines in the assistance graphic are shown
situation and keep within the lane, especially in green (Y page 236). Lane Keeping Assist is
if Lane Keeping Assist alerts you. ready for use.

Driving and parking


G WARNING Standard
The Lane Keeping Assist warning does not If Standard is selected, no warning vibration
return the vehicle to the original lane. There is occurs if:
Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this event,
a risk of an accident.
the warnings are suppressed for a certain
You should always steer, brake or accelerate period of time
yourself, in particular if warned by Lane Keep- Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as
ing Assist. ABS, BAS or ESP®
If you fail to adapt your driving style, Lane Keep- Adaptive
ing Assist can neither reduce the risk of an acci- When Adaptive is selected, no warning vibra-
dent nor override the laws of physics. Lane tion occurs if:
Keeping Assist cannot take into account the
Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this event,
road, traffic and weather conditions. Lane Keep-
ing Assist is merely an aid. You are responsible the warnings are suppressed for a certain
for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehi- period of time
cle speed, for braking in good time and for stay- Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ABS,
ing in your lane. BAS or ESP®
The Lane Keeping Assist does not keep the vehi- Ryou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown
cle in the lane. Ryou brake hard
The system may be impaired or may not function Ryou steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid an
if: obstacle or change lanes quickly
Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend
illumination of the road, or due to snow, rain, To ensure that you are warned only when nec-
fog or heavy spray essary and in good time if you cross the lane
Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, the markings, the system detects certain conditions
sun or reflection from other vehicles (e.g. if and warns you accordingly.
the road surface is wet) The warning vibration occurs earlier if:
Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged or Ryou approach the outer lane marking on a
covered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicin- bend
ity of the camera Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a freeway
Rthere are no or several unclear lane markings
Rthe system detects solid lane markings
for one lane, e.g. roadworks
Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or cov-
The warning vibration occurs later if:
ered up, e.g. by dirt or snow Rthe road has narrow lanes
Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too short Ryou cut the corner on a bend
and thus the lane markings cannot be detec-
ted
Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes
branch off, cross one another or merge
Rthe road is narrow and winding
Rthere are strong shadows cast on the road

Z
208 Driving systems

Driving Assistance Plus package ranties, and is not permitted by the FCC. Do
not tamper with, alter, or use in any non-
General notes approved way.
Any unauthorized modification to this device
The Driving Assistance Plus package consists of could void the user's authority to operate the
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC (Y page 171), Active equipment.
Blind Spot Assist (Y page 208) and Active Lane
Keeping Assist (Y page 210). i Canada only: This device complies with
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
Driving and parking

Active Blind Spot Assist subject to the following two conditions:


1. This device may not cause interference,
General notes and
Active Blind Spot Assist monitors the areas on 2. This device must accept any interference
either side of the vehicle that are not directly received, including interference that may
visible to the driver with two lateral, rear-facing cause undesired operation of the device.
radar sensors. A warning lamp lights up in the Removal, tampering, or altering of the device
exterior mirrors and draws your attention to will void any warranties, and is not permitted.
vehicles detected in the monitored area. If you Do not tamper with, alter, or use in any non-
then switch on the corresponding turn signal to approved way.
change lanes, you will also receive a visual and Any unauthorized modification to this device
audible collision warning. If a risk of lateral col- could void the user's authority to operate the
lision is detected, corrective braking may help equipment.
you avoid a collision. Before a course-correcting
brake application, Active Blind Spot Assist eval- Radar sensors
uates the space in the direction of travel and at The Active Blind Spot Assist radar sensors are
the sides of the vehicle. For this, Active Blind integrated into the front and rear bumpers and
Spot Assist uses the forward-facing radar sen- behind a cover in the radiator trim. Make sure
sors. that the bumpers and the cover in the radiator
Active Blind Spot Assist supports you from a grill are free of dirt, ice or slush. The sensors
speed of approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). must not be covered, for example by cycle racks
or overhanging loads. Following an accident or
Important safety notes in the event of damage to the bumpers, have the
Active Blind Spot Assist is only an aid and is not function of the radar sensors checked at a quali-
a substitute for attentive driving. fied specialist workshop. Active Blind Spot
Assist may otherwise no longer work properly.
G WARNING
Active Blind Spot Assist does not react to: Monitoring area
Rvehicles overtaken too closely on the side, G WARNING
placing them in the blind spot area Active Blind Spot Assist does not detect all
Rvehicles which approach with a large speed traffic situations and road users. There is a
differential and overtake your vehicle risk of an accident.
As a result, Active Blind Spot Assist may nei- Always make sure that there is sufficient dis-
ther give warnings nor intervene in such sit- tance on the side for other traffic or obstacles.
uations. There is a risk of an accident.
Always observe the traffic conditions care-
fully, and maintain a safe lateral distance.

i USA only: This device has been approved by


the FCC as a "Vehicular Radar System". The
radar sensor is intended for use in an auto-
motive radar system only. Removal, tamper-
ing, or altering of the device will void any war-
Driving systems 209

Warning lamp

Driving and parking


: Warning lamp
Active Blind Spot Assist is not operational at
speeds below approximately 20 mph (30 km/h).
Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not
At a distance of approximately 1.6 ft (0.5 m) ; indicated.
from the vehicle, Active Blind Spot Assist mon- If Active Blind Spot Assist is activated, warning
itors the area up to 10 ft (3 m) next to = and lamp : in the exterior mirrors lights up yellow
behind : your vehicle, as shown in the picture. at speeds of up to 20 mph (30 km/h). At speeds
In particular, the detection of obstacles can be above 20 mph (30 km/h), the warning lamp
impaired if: goes out and Active Blind Spot Assist is opera-
tional.
Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else
covering the sensors If a vehicle is detected within the monitoring
range at speeds above approximately 20 mph
Rpoor visibility, e.g. due to rain, snow or spray
(30 km/h), warning lamp : on the correspond-
Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not ing side lights up red. This warning lamp always
reliably indicated. lights up when a vehicle enters the blind spot
Active Blind Spot Assist may not detect narrow monitoring range from behind or from the side.
vehicles, such as motorcycles or bicycles, or When you overtake a vehicle, the warning only
may only detect them too late. occurs if the difference in speed is less than
If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in the 7 mph (12 km/h).
lane beyond the lane next to your vehicle may be If you select the reverse gear, Active Blind Spot
indicated, especially if the vehicles are not driv- Assist is not operational.
ing in the middle of their lane. This may be the The brightness of the warning lamps is auto-
case if there are vehicles at the inner edge of matically adapted to the brightness of the sur-
your lane. roundings.
On very wide lanes, vehicles in the adjacent lane
may not be shown if they are too far away. Visual and acoustic collision warning
Due to the nature of the system: If you switch on the turn signals to change lanes
and a vehicle is detected in the side monitoring
Rwarnings may be issued in error when driving
range, you receive a visual and acoustic collision
close to crash barriers or similar solid lane warning. You then hear a double warning tone
borders. and red warning lamp : flashes. If the turn sig-
Rwarnings may be interrupted when driving nal remains on, detected vehicles are indicated
alongside particularly long vehicles, e.g. by the flashing of red warning lamp :. There are
trucks, for a prolonged time. no further warning tones.

Z
210 Driving systems

Course-correcting brake application Rthe LOW RANGE offroad gear is activated


If Active Blind Spot Assist detects a risk of a lat- (vehicles with the Offroad Engineering pack-
eral collision in the monitoring range, a course- age).
correcting brake application is carried out. This Ra loss of tire pressure or a defective tire is
is meant to assist you in avoiding a collision. detected.
G WARNING Switching on Active Blind Spot Assist
A course-correcting brake application cannot X Make sure that Active Blind Spot Assist
always prevent a collision. There is a risk of an (Y page 237) is activated in the on-board
Driving and parking

accident. computer.
Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself, X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
especially if Active Blind Spot Assist warns tion lock.
Warning lamps : in the exterior mirrors light
you or makes a course-correcting brake appli-
up red for approximately 1.5 seconds and
cation. Always maintain a safe distance at the then turn yellow.
sides.
Towing a trailer
If a course-correcting brake application occurs,
When you attach a trailer, make sure you have
red warning lamp : flashes in the exterior mir-
correctly established the electrical connection.
ror and a double warning tone sounds. In addi-
This can be accomplished by checking the trailer
tion, a display underlining the danger of a side
lighting. Active Blind Spot Assist is then deacti-
collision appears in the multifunction display.
vated. The indicator lamp lights up yellow in the
In very rare cases, the system may make an exterior mirrors and the Active Blind Spot
inappropriate brake application. A course-cor- Asst. Not Available When Towing a
recting brake application may be interrupted at Trailer See Operator's Manual message
any time by countersteering slightly or acceler- appears in the multifunction display.
ating.
The course-correcting brake application is avail- Active Lane Keeping Assist
able in the speed range between 20 mph
(30 km/h) and 120 mph (200 km/h). General notes
Either no braking application, or a course-cor-
recting brake application adapted to the driving
situation occurs if:
Rthere are vehicles or obstacles, e.g. crash
barriers, located on both sides of your vehicle.
Ra vehicle approaches you too closely at the
side.
Ryou have adopted a sporty driving style with
high cornering speeds.
Ryou clearly brake or accelerate.
Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP®
or PRE-SAFE® Brake.
RESP® is switched off. Active Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in
front of your vehicle by means of multifunction
Rthe offroad program is activated (vehicles
camera : at the top of the windshield. Various
without the Offroad Engineering package). different areas to the front, rear and side of your
Rthe Offroad or Offroad Plus drive program is vehicle are also monitored with the aid of the
activated (vehicles with the Off-Road Engi- radar sensor system. Active Lane Keeping
neering package). Assist detects lane markings on the road and
can warn you before you leave your lane unin-
tentionally. If you do not react to the warning, a
Driving systems 211

lane-correcting application of the brakes can Rthere are no or several unclear lane markings
bring the vehicle back into the original lane. for one lane, e.g. roadworks
This function is available in a speed range Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or cov-
between 40 mph and 120 mph (60 km/h and ered up, e.g. by dirt or snow
200 km/h). Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too short
For Active Lane Keeping Assist to assist you and thus the lane markings cannot be detec-
when driving, the radar sensor system must be ted
operational. Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes
branch off, cross one another or merge

Driving and parking


Important safety notes
Rthe road is narrow and winding
If you fail to adapt your driving style, Active Lane Rthere are highly variable shade conditions on
Keeping Assist can neither reduce the risk of
the roadway
accident nor override the laws of physics. Active
Lane Keeping Assist cannot take into account Rno vehicle is detected in the adjacent lane and
road, weather or traffic conditions. Active Lane there are broken lane markings
Keeping Assist is only an aid. You are responsi-
ble for the distance to the vehicle in front, for
Warning vibration in the steering wheel
vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for A warning may be given if a front wheel passes
staying in your lane. over a lane marking. It will warn you by means of
Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot continuously intermittent vibration in the steering wheel for
keep your vehicle in its lane. up to 1.5 seconds.
In order that you are warned only when neces-
G WARNING sary and in good time if you cross the lane mark-
Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot always ing, the system detects certain conditions and
clearly detect lane markings. warns you accordingly.
The warning vibration occurs earlier if:
In such cases, Active Lane Keeping Assist
can: Ryou approach the outer lane marking on a
bend
Rgive an unnecessary warning and then Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a freeway
make a course-correcting brake application Rthe system detects solid lane markings
to the vehicle The warning vibration occurs later if:
Rnot give a warning or intervene
Rthe road has narrow lanes
There is a risk of an accident. Ryou cut the corner on a bend
Always pay particular attention to the traffic
situation and keep within the lane, especially Lane-correcting brake application
if Active Lane Keeping Assist alerts you. Ter- G WARNING
minate the intervention in a non-critical driv- A lane-correcting brake application cannot
ing situation. always bring the vehicle back into the original
lane. There is a risk of an accident.
The system may be impaired or may not function
if: Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself,
Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient
especially if Active Lane Keeping Assist warns
illumination of the road, or due to snow, rain, you or makes a lane-correcting brake appli-
fog or heavy spray cation.
Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, the
sun or reflection from other vehicles (e.g. if G WARNING
the road surface is wet) Active Lane Keeping Assist does not detect
Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged or traffic conditions or road users. In very rare
covered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicin- cases, the system may make an inappropriate
ity of the camera
brake application, e.g. after intentionally driv-

Z
212 Driving systems

ing over a solid lane marking. There is a risk of Ryou have adopted a sporty driving style with
an accident. high cornering speeds or high rates of accel-
eration
An inappropriate brake application may be RESP® is switched off
interrupted at any time if you steer slightly in
Rthe transmission is not in position h
the opposite direction. Always make sure that
Ron vehicles with a trailer tow hitch, the elec-
there is sufficient distance on the side for trical connection to the trailer has been cor-
other traffic or obstacles. rectly established
Driving and parking

Rthe Off-road program is activated (vehicles


without the Off-Road Engineering package)
Rthe Off-road or Off-road Plus drive program is
activated (vehicles with the Off-Road Engi-
neering package)
Rthe LOW RANGE off-road gear is activated
(vehicles with the Off-Road Engineering pack-
age)
Ran obstacle has been detected in the lane in
which you are driving
Rwhen a loss of tire pressure or a defective tire
has been detected and displayed
If you leave your lane, under certain circumstan- There is a possibility that the Active Lane Keep-
ces the vehicle will brake briefly on one side. ing Assist could misjudge the given traffic sit-
This is meant to assist you in bringing the vehicle uation. An inappropriate brake application may
back to the original lane. be interrupted at any time if you:
If a lane-correcting brake application occurs, Rsteer slightly in the opposite direction
display : appears in the multifunction display. Rswitch on the turn signal
A lane-correcting brake application can be made Rclearly brake or accelerate
after driving over a solid or broken lane marking.
Before this, a warning must be given by means of A lane-correcting brake application is interrup-
intermittent vibration in the steering wheel. In ted automatically if:
addition, a lane with lane markings on both sides Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP®,
must have been detected. PRE-SAFE® Brake or Active Blind Spot Assist
In the case of a broken lane marking being Rlane markings are no longer detected
detected, a lane-correcting brake application
can only be made if a vehicle has been detected Switching on Active Lane Keeping Assist
in the adjacent lane. The following vehicles can X Switch on Active Lane Keeping Assist using
have an influence on brake application: oncom- the on-board computer; to do so, select
ing traffic, vehicles that are overtaking and vehi- Standard or Adaptive (Y page 237).
cles that are driving parallel to your vehicle. If you drive at speeds above 40 mph
i A further lane-correcting brake application (60 km/h) and lane markings are detected,
can only occur after your vehicle has returned the lines in the assistance graphic are shown
to the original lane. in green (Y page 236). Active Lane Keeping
Assist is ready for use.
No lane-correcting brake application occurs if: If Standard is selected, no warning vibration
Ryou clearly and actively steer, brake or accel- occurs if:
erate. Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this event,
Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend the warnings are suppressed for a certain
Ryou have switched on the turn signal period of time
Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP®, Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as
PRE-SAFE® Brake or Active Blind Spot Assist ABS, BAS or ESP®
Driving systems 213

When Adaptive is selected, no warning vibra- workshop. You could otherwise damage the
tion occurs if: drive train or the brake system.
Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this event,
i In wintry driving conditions, the maximum
the warnings are suppressed for a certain effect of 4MATIC can only be achieved if you
period of time use winter tires (M+S tires), with snow chains
Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. if necessary.
ABS, BAS or ESP®
Further information about "Driving off-road"
Ryou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown
(Y page 165).

Driving and parking


Ryou brake hard
Ryou steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid an DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation)
obstacle or change lanes quickly
Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend General notes
DSR is an aid to assist you when driving down-
Towing a trailer hill. It keeps the speed of travel at the speed
When you attach a trailer, make sure you have selected on the on-board computer. The steeper
correctly established the electrical connection. the downhill gradient, the greater the DSR brak-
This can be accomplished by checking the trailer ing effect on the vehicle. When driving on flat
lighting. Lane-correcting brake application does stretches of road or on an uphill gradient, the
not take place when towing a trailer. Active Lane DSR braking effect is minimal or nonexistent.
Keeping Assist is not activated and the lines in DSR controls the vehicle’s speed when it is acti-
the assistance graphic are gray. vated and the transmission is in position D, R or
N. You can drive at a higher or a lower speed
than that set on the on-board computer at any
Off-road driving systems time by accelerating or braking.
4MATIC (permanent four-wheel drive) Important safety notes
4MATIC ensures that all four wheels are perma- G WARNING
nently driven. Together with ESP® and 4ETS, it If the speed driven and the set speed deviate
improves the traction of your vehicle whenever and you activate DSR on a slippery road sur-
a drive wheel spins due to insufficient grip. face, the wheels may lose traction. There is an
If you fail to adapt your driving style, 4MATIC can increased danger of skidding and accidents.
neither reduce the risk of accident nor override
the laws of physics. 4MATIC cannot take Before switching DSR on, please take into
account of road, weather and traffic conditions. consideration the road surface and the differ-
4MATIC is only an aid. You are responsible for ence between driving speed and the set
the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed.
speed, for braking in good time and for staying in
your lane. If you fail to adapt your driving style, DSR can
! Never tow the vehicle with one axle raised. neither reduce the risk of accident nor override
This may damage the transfer case. Damage the laws of physics. DSR cannot take account of
of this sort is not covered by the Mercedes- road, weather and traffic conditions. DSR is only
Benz Limited Warranty. All wheels must an aid. You are responsible for the distance to
remain either on the ground or be fully raised. the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for brak-
Observe the instructions for towing the vehi- ing in good time and for staying in your lane.
cle with all wheels in full contact with the You are always responsible for keeping control
ground. of the vehicle and for assessing whether the
downhill gradient can be managed. DSR may not
! A function or performance test should only always be able to keep to the set speed, depend-
be carried out on a two-axle dynamometer. ing on road surface and tire conditions. Select a
Before you operate the vehicle on such a set speed suitable for the prevailing conditions
dynamometer, please consult a qualified and when necessary, apply the brakes manually.

Z
214 Driving systems

Activating DSR Changing the set speed


Driving and parking

X Press button :. X To increase or reduce the set speed in


Indicator lamp ; lights up. 1 mph increments (Canada: 1 km/h
The à DSR symbol appears in the multi- increments): briefly press the cruise control
function display. lever up : for a higher set speed or down ;
for a lower set speed.
You can only activate DSR when driving at The set speed appears in the multifunction
speeds below 25 mph (40 km/h). display with the à DSR symbol.
If the current vehicle speed is too high, the Ã
DSR symbol appears in the multifunction display When DSR is activated, you can change the set
with the Max. speed 25 mph message (Can- speed to a value between 1 mph and 11 mph
ada: 40 km/h).
km/h (Canada: between 2 km/h and 18 km/h).
If you have activated DSR and you change the i The DSR set speed is always changed in
drive program, DSR is deactivated. If you switch 1 mph increments (Canada: 1 km/h incre-
between the offroad and offroad plus drive pro- ments). This is regardless of whether you
grams, DSR remains activated. press the cruise control lever to or beyond the
pressure point.
Deactivating DSR
X Press button :. Offroad program (vehicles without the
Indicator lamp ; goes out. Offroad Engineering package)
The à DSR symbol appears in the multi-
function display with the Off message. General notes
On vehicles with the Offroad Engineering pack- Select the Offroad program for easily negotia-
age, if you select a different drive program, DSR ble off-road terrain, e.g. dirt tracks, gravel or
is also deactivated. If you switch between the sandy surfaces. The engine's torque is restric-
Offroad programs, DSR remains activated. ted to a limited degree and the drive wheels can
DSR switches off automatically if you drive spin. The spinning wheels produce a cutting
faster than 28 mph (Canada: 45 km/h). The effect for better traction. ABS, ESP® and 4ETS
à DSR symbol appears in the multifunction programs especially adapted to off-road driving
display with the Off message. The status indi- are activated. A gentle accelerator pedal curve
cator in the multifunction display goes out. You is also selected, i.e. the accelerator pedal must
also hear a warning. On vehicles with the Off- be depressed much further in order to acceler-
road Engineering package, if you select a differ- ate.
ent onroad/offroad program, DSR is also deac- You can select the Offroad drive program at
tivated. speeds below 60 mph (96 km/h). The Drive
program "Offroad" Max. Speed 60 mph
message appears in the multifunction display. If
you drive at speeds of more than 60 mph
(96 km/h) and select the Offroad drive pro-
gram, the Drive More Slowly message
Driving systems 215

appears in the multifunction display. The last Offroad programs (vehicles with Off-
active drive program is selected again. road Engineering package)
Do not use the Offroad program on roads that
are snow-covered or icy or if you have installed General notes
your vehicle with snow chains. The Offroad and Offroad Plus drive programs
Selecting the Offroad program assist you when driving off-road. The engine's
performance characteristics and the gearshift-
ing characteristics of the automatic transmis-
sion are adapted for this purpose. ABS, ESP®

Driving and parking


and 4ETS programs especially adapted to off-
road driving are activated. An accelerator pedal
curve suitable for the terrain is selected, i.e. the
accelerator pedal must be depressed further to
accelerate.
Do not use the Offroad or Offroad Plus drive
programs on roads that are snow-covered or icy,
or if you have installed your vehicle with snow
chains.

Selecting the Offroad program Offroad drive program


X To select drive program: turn DYNAMIC
SELECT controller : until indicator lamp ;
lights up.
The Drive Program "Offroad1" Max.
Speed 60 mph message appears in the mul-
tifunction display.
The vehicle is raised by +2.4 in (60 mm).
The vehicle is lowered to normal level again if
you:
Rdrive at speeds above 50 mph (80 km/h) (all
vehicles except Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
Rdrive at speeds above 43 mph (70 km/h) : DYNAMIC SELECT controller
(Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ; Offroad program indicator lamp
Rdrive between 40 mph (64 km/h) and 50 mph Select the Offroad program for easily negotia-
(80 km/h) for approximately 20 seconds (all ble off-road terrain, e.g. dirt tracks, gravel or
vehicles except Mercedes-AMG vehicles). sandy surfaces. The engine's torque is restric-
Rdrive at speeds between 40 mph (64 km/h) ted to a limited degree and the drive wheels can
and 43 mph (70 km/h) for approximately spin. The spinning wheels produce a cutting
20 seconds (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) effect for better traction. ABS, ESP® and 4ETS
The vehicle changes from the Offroad drive pro- programs especially adapted to off-road driving
gram to the Comfort drive program if you drive are activated. A gentle accelerator pedal curve
faster than 70 mph (112 km/h). is also selected, i.e. the accelerator pedal must
The Drive More Slowly message appears in be depressed much further in order to acceler-
the multifunction display. ate.
Further information about "Driving off-road" You can select the Offroad drive program at
(Y page 165). speeds below 60 mph (96 km/h). The Drive
Program "Offroad" Max. Speed 60 mph
message appears in the multifunction display. If
you drive at speeds above 60 mph (96 km/h)
and select the Offroad drive program, the
Drive More Slowly message appears in the

Z
216 Driving systems

multifunction display. The last active drive pro- RThe Offroad Plus program is selected and
gram is selected again. the vehicle is raised by +1.2 in (30 mm)
compared with the Offroad drive program.
Selecting the Offroad program RDSR is switched on.
X To select a drive program: turn DYNAMIC RThe differential lock is closed.
SELECT controller : until indicator lamp ;
lights up. You can select the Offroad Plus drive program at
The Drive program "Offroad" Max. speeds below 25 mph (40 km/h).
speed 60 mph message appears in the mul- The Offroad Plus drive program automatically
Driving and parking

tifunction display. switches to the Offroad drive program if you


The vehicle is raised by +1.2 in (30 mm). drive faster than 30 mph (45 km/h). The Drive
more slowly message appears in the multi-
The vehicle changes from the Offroad drive pro- function display.
gram to the Comfort drive program if you drive
Further information about "Driving off-road"
faster than 70 mph (112 km/h).
(Y page 165).
The Drive more slowly message appears in
the multifunction display.
LOW RANGE off-road gear (vehicles
Offroad Plus drive program with the Off-Road Engineering package)
Important safety notes
G WARNING
If you select the LOW RANGE off-road gear on
a slippery road surface, the wheels could lose
traction:
Rif you remove your foot from the accelera-
tor pedal when driving
Rif off road ABS intervenes when braking
If the wheels lose traction. the vehicle can no
: DYNAMIC SELECT controller longer be steered. There is an increased dan-
; Offroad Plus drive program indicator lamp ger of skidding and accidents.
Select the Offroad Plus drive program for rough Never select the LOW RANGE off-road gear
terrain, e.g. for steep and/or uneven terrain or when driving on slippery road surfaces.
for driving on rocky terrain.
Your vehicle has an automatically activated dif- G WARNING
ferential lock for the transfer case. It controls
the balance between the front and rear axles. If you do not wait for the transfer case gear
The differential lock improves the vehicle's trac- change process to complete, the transfer
tion. 4ETS (Y page 70) controls the balance case could remain in the neutral position. The
between both wheels on an axle. power transmission to the driven wheels is
then interrupted. There is a danger of the
Selecting the Offroad Plus drive program vehicle rolling away unintentionally. There is a
X To select drive program: turn DYNAMIC risk of an accident.
SELECT controller : until indicator lamp ;
lights up. Wait until the transfer case shift process is
The Drive program "Offroad Plus" completed.
Max. speed 25 mph message appears in the
multifunction display. Do not turn off the engine while changing gear
and do not shift the automatic transmission to
another position.
Driving systems 217

General notes From HIGH RANGE to LOW RANGE


! Only change from LOW RANGE to HIGH
RANGE if:
Rthe engine is running.
Rthe transmission is in position N
Ryou are driving at a speed below 40 km/h
X Press LOW RANGE button :.

Driving and parking


Indicator lamp ; flashes.
When the gear change is complete, indicator
lamp ; lights up. LOW RANGE indicator
appears in the multifunction display and in the
status indicator.
: LOW RANGE offroad gear button While indicator lamp ; is flashing, you can
; LOW RANGE offroad gear indicator lamp cancel the gear change by pressing LOW
RANGE button : again.
HIGH RANGE Position for all normal on-
road driving conditions i You cannot activate LOW RANGE if the
SPORT drive program is activated. The LOW
LOW RANGE Offroad position for driving
RANGE Not in Drive Program "Sport"
off-road and fording
message then appears in the multifunction
The transmission ratio display.
between the engine and
wheels is only approx- From LOW RANGE to HIGH RANGE
imately one third of that in
the HIGH RANGE road posi-
! Only change from LOW RANGE to HIGH
RANGE if:
tion. Drive torque is thus
proportionately higher. Rthe engine is running.
Do not use LOW RANGE: Rthe transmission is in position N

Ron slippery road surfaces, Ryou are driving at a speed below 50 km/h
e.g. in the case of slush
Ron snow or ice-covered
roads
Rif you have mounted snow
chains to your vehicle

The LOW RANGE offroad gear assists you in


driving off-road and when fording. When LOW
RANGE is engaged, the engine’s performance
characteristics and the gearshifting character-
istics of the automatic transmission are adapted
for this purpose.
Further information about "Driving off-road" X Press LOW RANGE button :.
(Y page 165). You will find information about Indicator lamp ; flashes.
driving safety systems in conjunction with When the gear change is complete, indicator
LOW RANGE in the "Safety" section (Y page 66). lamp ; goes out. In the multifunction dis-
play, the LOW RANGE Off message appears
and the status indicator goes out.
While indicator lamp ; is flashing, you can
cancel the gear change by pressing LOW
RANGE button : again.

Z
218 Driving systems

Messages in the multifunction display


If a gear change process has not been successful, the following messages may be displayed in the
multifunction display:
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
LOW RANGE Max. You have been driving faster than 24 mph (40 km/h). Additionally, the
Speed 24 mph indicator lamp on the button in the center console is flashing.
X Slow down to change gear.
Driving and parking

LOW RANGE Shift to The transmission is in position D and you are driving at below
Position N Briefly 40 km/h.
X Shift the transmission to N to complete the gear change process.

LOW RANGE Shifting The gear change process was not carried out.
Canceled Please X Ensure that all gear change conditions are fulfilled and carry out the
Reactivate gear change process again.

LOW RANGE Stop A warning tone also sounds. The gear change process has not been
Apply Parking Brake completed. LOW RANGE is in the neutral position. There is no con-
nection between the engine and the drive wheels.
! Do not drive any further. You could otherwise damage the vehi-
cle's drive train.
X Stop the vehicle. Take into account the road and traffic conditions
when doing this.
X Depress the electric parking brake (Y page 157).
X Carry out the gear change process again.
If the gear change process has been carried out, the LOW RANGE
Stop Apply Parking Brake message disappears.

Driving dynamics display in the


COMAND display (vehicles with the Off-
Road Engineering package)
General notes
The driving dynamics display allows you to see
the selected drive program and additional infor-
mation about the vehicle's operating status in
the COMAND display.

: Drive program selected


; Status of the differential lock for the transfer
case
= Accelerator pedal position shown in %
? Brake pedal position shown in %
A Condition of the LOW RANGE offroad gear
B Angle of inclination
C Steering angle
D Uphill or downhill gradient in percentage
Towing a trailer 219

E Level control corresponding spring cotter, the trailer may


F Compass with angle scale come loose. There is a risk of an accident.
Activating the driving dynamics display Always install and secure the ball coupling as
described. Before every journey, ensure that
the ball coupling is secured with the bolt and
the corresponding spring cotter.

G WARNING

Driving and parking


When the vehicle/trailer combination begins
to lurch, you could lose control of it. The vehi-
cle/trailer combination could even rollover.
There is a risk of an accident.
On no account should you attempt to
straighten up the vehicle/trailer combination
X Switch on COMAND (see the Digital Opera- by increasing the speed. Reduce vehicle
tor's Manual). speed and do not countersteer. Apply the
X Press button :. brake as necessary.
The driving dynamics display appears in the
COMAND display. Please observe the manufacturer's operating
instructions for the trailer coupling if a detach-
able trailer coupling is used.
Towing a trailer Couple and uncouple the trailer carefully. If you
do not couple the trailer to the towing vehicle
Important safety notes correctly, the trailer could become detached.
Make sure that the following values are not
G WARNING exceeded:
Installing an unsuitable ball coupling may Rthe permissible trailer drawbar noseweight
result in overloading of the trailer tow hitch Rthe permissible trailer load
and the rear axle. This applies especially if the Rthe permissible rear axle load of the towing
ball coupling in question is longer or angled vehicle
differently. This could seriously impair the Rthe maximum permissible gross vehicle
driving characteristics and the trailer can weight of both the towing vehicle and the
come loose. There is a risk of an accident. trailer
You should only ever install a ball coupling The applicable permissible values, which must
not be exceeded, can be found:
that has the permissible dimensions and that
is designed to meet your trailer-towing Rin the vehicle documents

requirements. Do not modify the ball coupling Ron the identification plates for the trailer tow
or the trailer tow hitch. hitch and the trailer
Ron the vehicle identification plate
You will find the values approved by the manu- If the values differ, the lowest value applies.
facturer on the vehicle identification plates and When towing a trailer, your vehicle's handling
those for the towing vehicle under "Technical characteristics will be different in comparison
data" (Y page 394). with when driving without a trailer.
G WARNING The vehicle/trailer combination:
If the ball coupling is not installed correctly or Ris heavier
not secured with the bolt provided and the Ris restricted in its acceleration and gradient-
climbing capability
Rhas an increased braking distance

Z
220 Towing a trailer

Ris affected more by strong crosswinds On vehicles without level control, the height of
Rdemands more sensitive steering the ball coupling will alter according to the load
Rhas a larger turning circle placed on the vehicle. If necessary, use a trailer
with a height-adjustable drawbar.
This could impair the handling characteristics.
You will find installing dimensions and loads
When towing a trailer, always adjust your speed under "Technical data" (Y page 394).
to the current road and weather conditions. Do
not exceed the maximum permissible speed for
your vehicle/trailer combination. Driving tips
Driving and parking

Also observe the notes on pulling away with a


trailer (Y page 138).
Notes on towing a trailer The maximum permissible speed for vehicle/
trailer combinations depends on the type of
General notes trailer. Before beginning the journey, check the
trailer's documents to see what the maximum
! If you have a trailer tow hitch retrofitted, permissible speed is for your trailer. Observe the
changes to the cooling system and drive train
may be necessary, depending on the vehicle legally permissible maximum speed in the rele-
type. vant country.
If you have a trailer tow hitch retrofitted, For certain Mercedes-Benz vehicles, the maxi-
observe the anchorage points on the chassis mum permissible rear axle load is increased
frame. when towing a trailer. See "Technical data" to
find out whether this applies to your vehicle
RDo not exceed the legally prescribed maxi- (Y page 394). If you utilize any of the added
mum speed for vehicle/trailer combinations maximum rear axle load when towing a trailer,
in the relevant country. the vehicle/trailer combination may not exceed
This lowers the risk of an accident. a maximum speed of 60 mph (100 km/h) for
ROnly install an approved trailer coupling on reasons concerning the operating permit. This
your vehicle. also applies in countries in which the maximum
permissible speed for car/trailer combinations
More information on availability and installa-
is greater than 60 mph (100 km/h).
tion can be obtained at any qualified special-
ist workshop. When towing a trailer, your vehicle's handling
RThe bumpers of your vehicle are not suitable
characteristics will be different in comparison
with when driving without a trailer.
for installing detachable trailer couplings.
RDo not install hired trailer couplings or other
Use the left-hand steering wheel paddle shifter
to shift into a lower gear in good time on long
detachable trailer couplings on the bumpers
and steep downhill gradients.
of your vehicle.
RIf you no longer need the ball coupling,
This also applies if you have activated cruise
control or Distance Pilot DISTRONIC.
remove it from the ball coupling recess. This
will reduce the risk of damage to the ball cou- This will use the braking effect of the engine, so
pling. that less braking will be required to maintain the
speed. This relieves the load on the brake sys-
When towing a trailer, set the tire pressure on
tem and prevents the brakes from overheating
the rear axle of the towing vehicle for the max-
and wearing too quickly. If you need additional
imum load. You will find the values in the tire
braking, depress the brake pedal repeatedly
pressure table in the fuel filler flap of the vehicle rather than continuously.
(Y page 369).
Please note that when towing a trailer, the fol-
lowing driving systems have limited availability Driving tips
or are not available at all: If the trailer swings from side to side:
RParking Assist PARKTRONIC (Y page 187) X Do not accelerate.
RBlind Spot Assist (Y page 204) X Do not counter-steer.
RActive Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 210) X Brake if necessary.
Towing a trailer 221

RMaintain a greater distance from the vehicle


in front than when driving without a trailer.
RAvoid braking abruptly. If possible, brake gen-
tly at first to allow the trailer to run on. Then,
increase the braking force rapidly.
RThe values given for gradient-climbing capa-
bilities from a standstill refer to sea level.
When driving in mountainous areas, note that
the power output of the engine and, conse-

Driving and parking


quently, the vehicle's gradient-climbing capa-
bility, decreases with increasing altitude.

X Pull protective cap : in the direction of the


Installing the ball coupling arrow, out of the ball coupling recess.
X Stow protective cap : so that it cannot be
G WARNING thrown around.
If the ball coupling is not correctly installed Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 295)
and secured, it can come loose during the and the safety notes regarding stowage
journey and endanger other road users. There spaces (Y page 295).
is a risk of an accident and injury.
Always install and secure the ball coupling as
described. Before every journey, ensure that
the ball coupling is secured with the bolt and
the corresponding spring cotter.

G WARNING
If the ball coupling is not installed correctly or
not secured with the bolt provided and the
corresponding spring cotter, the trailer may
come loose. There is a risk of an accident.
Always install and secure the ball coupling as
described. Before every journey, ensure that
the ball coupling is secured with the bolt and
the corresponding spring cotter.

G WARNING
If the ball coupling is not installed and secured
correctly the trailer may come loose. There is
a risk of an accident.
Install and secure the ball coupling as descri-
bed in the ball coupling installation instruc- X Insert the ball coupling horizontally into ball
tions. Make sure that the ball coupling is coupling recess ; in the direction of the
installed and secured correctly before every arrow until the holes in ball coupling = are in
line with the holes in ball coupling recess ?.
journey.

Z
222 Towing a trailer

Coupling up a trailer
! Do not connect the trailer's brake system (if
featured) to the hydraulic brake system of the
towing vehicle, as the latter is equipped with
an anti-lock brake system. Doing so will result
in a loss of function of the brake systems of
both the vehicle and the trailer.
X Shift the transmission to position P.
Driving and parking

X Apply the vehicle's electric parking brake.


X Start the engine.
X Vehicles with AIRMATIC package: select
X Slide bolt A into the hole in the ball coupling
recess and the ball coupling to the stop. normal level and the Comfort drive program.
X Switch off the engine.
X Close the doors and tailgate.
X Couple up the trailer.
X Establish the electrical connection between
the vehicle and the trailer.
X Check that the trailer lighting system is work-
ing.
X Push the combination switch upwards/down-
wards and check whether the corresponding
turn signal on the trailer flashes.
A trailer that is connected is recognized only
when the electrical connection is established
X Secure the bolt using spring cotter B. correctly and when the lighting system is work-
ing properly. The function of other systems also
depends on this, for example:
RESP®
RParking Assist PARKTRONIC
RParking Pilot
RActive Blind Spot Assist
RActive Lane Keeping Assist

i Vehicles with the AIRMATIC package: if you


couple up a trailer, the vehicle always remains
at normal level. When coupling up a trailer,
please observe the following:
X Check the ball coupling, bolt and spring cotter RIf the normal level has not been set man-
for correct installation. ually, the vehicle is automatically lowered
If the ball coupling cannot be correctly mounted, to normal level. This is the case if a speed of
remove the ball coupling. Under these circum- 5 mph (8 km/h) is reached.
stances, the ball coupling must not be used for RThe Sport drive program is not available.
trailer towing. These restrictions apply to all accessories
Have the entire trailer tow hitch checked at a powered through a connection to the trailer
qualified specialist workshop. power socket of your vehicle, e.g. a bicycle
carrier.
Observe the maximum permissible trailer
dimensions (width and length).
Towing a trailer 223

Most U.S. states and all Canadian provinces using the brake controller and check whether
require by law: the brakes function correctly.
RSafety chains between the towing vehicle and RSecure any objects on the trailer to prevent
the trailer. The chains should be cross-wound the cargo from slipping when the vehicle is in
under the trailer drawbar. They must be fas- motion.
tened to the vehicle's trailer coupling, not to RWhen you couple up a trailer, check at regular
the bumper or the axle. intervals that the load is firmly secured. If the
Leave enough play in the chains to make tight trailer is equipped with trailer lights and
cornering possible. brakes, check the trailer to ensure that these

Driving and parking


RA separate brake system for certain types of are working.
trailer. RBear in mind that the handling will be less
RSafety switch for braked trailers. Check the stable when towing a trailer than when driving
specific legal requirements applicable to your without one. Avoid sudden steering move-
state. ments.
RThe vehicle/trailer combination is heavier,
If the trailer becomes detached from the tow-
ing vehicle, the safety feature triggers the accelerates more slowly, has a decreased
trailer brakes. gradient climbing capability and a longer
braking distance.
It is more susceptible to side winds and
requires more careful steering.
Towing a trailer
RIf possible, do not brake suddenly, but instead
There are numerous legal requirements con- depress the brake pedal moderately at first so
cerning the towing of a trailer, e.g. speed restric- that the trailer can activate its brakes. Then
tions. Make sure that your car/trailer combina- increase the pressure on the brake pedal.
tion complies with the local regulations: RIf the automatic transmission repeatedly
Rin your place of residence shifts between gears on uphill or downhill gra-
Rin the location to which you are driving dients, shift to a lower gear using the left-hand
steering wheel paddle shifter.
The police and local authorities can provide reli-
able information. A lower gear and lower speed reduce the risk
of engine failure.
Observe the following when towing a trailer:
RWhen driving downhill, shift to a lower gear to
RTo gain driving experience and to become utilize the engine's braking effect.
accustomed to the new handling characteris- Avoid continuous brake application as this
tics, you should practice the following in a may overheat the vehicle brakes and, if instal-
traffic-free location: led, the trailer brakes.
- cornering
RIf the coolant temperature increases dramat-
- stopping ically while the air-conditioning system is
- backing up switched on, switch off the air-conditioning
RBefore driving, check: system.
- trailer tow hitch Coolant heat can also be dissipated by open-
- safety switch for braked trailers
ing the windows and switching the ventilation
blower and the interior temperature to the
- safety chains
highest level.
- electrical connections RWhen overtaking, pay particular attention to
- lights the extended length of your vehicle/trailer
- wheels combination.
RAdjust the exterior mirrors to provide an Due to the length of the vehicle/trailer com-
unobstructed view of the rear section of the bination, you require additional road space in
trailer. relation to the vehicle you are overtaking
RIf the trailer has electronically controlled before you can change back to the original
brakes, pull away carefully. Brake manually lane.

Z
224 Towing a trailer

Decoupling a trailer Permissible noseweight


You will find installing dimensions and loads
G WARNING under "Technical data" (Y page 394).
If you uncouple a trailer with the overrun
brake engaged, you could trap your hand Loading a trailer
between the vehicle and the trailer drawbar. RWhen loading the trailer, make sure that nei-
There is a risk of injury. ther the permissible gross weight of the trailer
Do not uncouple a trailer if the overrun brake nor the gross vehicle weight are exceeded.
Driving and parking

is engaged. The permissible gross vehicle weight is indi-


cated on the identification plate located on
G WARNING the B-pillar on the driver's side of the vehicle.
You can find the maximum permissible values
Vehicles with level control: on the type plates of your vehicle and the
The vehicle is lowered as soon as you discon- trailer. When calculating how much weight
nect the trailer cable. This could result in your the vehicle and trailer may carry, pay atten-
limbs or those of other people that are tion to the respective lowest values.
between the vehicle body and tires or under- RThe trailer drawbar load on the ball coupling

neath the vehicle being trapped. There is a must be added to the rear axle load to avoid
exceeding the permissible gross axle weight.
risk of injury. The permissible gross vehicle weight is indi-
Make sure that nobody is in the immediate cated on the identification plate located on
vicinity of the wheel housings or under the the B-pillar on the driver's side of the vehicle.
vehicle when you disconnect the trailer cable. i Mercedes-Benz recommends a trailer load
where the trailer drawbar noseweight
! Do not disconnect a trailer with an engaged accounts for 8 % to 15 % of the trailer's per-
overrun brake. Otherwise, your vehicle could missible gross weight.
be damaged by the rebounding of the overrun
brake. i The weight of additional accessories, pas-
sengers, and cargo reduces the permissible
X Shift the transmission to position P.
trailer load and drawbar load for your vehicle.
X Apply the vehicle's electric parking brake.
X Start the engine. Checking the vehicle and trailer weight
X Close the doors and tailgate.
RTo check that the weights of the towing vehi-
X Apply the trailer's parking brake.
cle and the trailer comply with the maximum
X Detach the trailer cable and decouple the permissible values, have the vehicle/trailer
trailer. combination (including the driver, passen-
X Switch off the engine. gers, and cargo with a fully laden trailer)
weighed on a calibrated weighbridge.
RCheck the gross axle weight rating of the front
and rear axles, the gross weight of the trailer
Permissible trailer loads and drawbar and the trailer drawbar noseweight.
loads
Weight specifications
Removing the ball coupling
Maximum allowable gross mass X Remove the spring cotter.
The gross vehicle weight of the trailer is calcu- X Remove the bolt from the ball coupling
lated by adding the weight of the trailer to the recess.
weight of the load and equipment on the trailer. X Remove the ball coupling from the ball cou-
You will find installing dimensions and loads pling recess.
under "Technical data" (Y page 394).
Bicycle rack 225

X Clean the ball coupling if it is dirty. Depending on the bicycle rack's design, you can
X Stow the ball coupling so that it cannot be transport up to four bicycles on it:
thrown around. RWhen attached by clamping onto ball cou-
Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 295) pling :, the maximum payload is 75 kg. You
and the safety notes regarding stowage spaces can transport up to three bicycles.
(Y page 295). RWhen attached to ball coupling : and also
Information on cleaning and care of the trailer guide pin ;, the maximum payload is 100 kg.
tow hitch (Y page 331). You can transport up to three bicycles.

Driving and parking


The payload is calculated from the weight of the
bicycle rack and the load of the bicycle rack.
Trailer power supply To transport bicycles with a gross weight
between 75 kg and 100 kg, use only bicycle
! Accessories with a maximum power con- racks with additional anchorage on guide pin ;.
sumption of 180 W can be connected to the
permanent power supply.
You must not charge a trailer battery using the Important safety notes
power supply.
The trailer socket of your vehicle is equipped at G WARNING
the factory with a permanent power supply. The bicycle rack can detach from the vehicle if
The permanent power supply is supplied via you
trailer socket pin 4.
Rexceed the permissible payload of the
The trailer's permanent power supply is
switched off in the event of low vehicle supply trailer tow hitch
voltage and after six hours at the latest. Ruse the bicycle rack incorrectly
A qualified specialist workshop can provide Rattach the bicycle rack to the ball coupling
more information about installing the trailer beneath the ball head
electrics.
There is a risk of an accident.
For your safety and that of other road users,
Bicycle rack observe the following:
RAlways observe the permissible payload of
General notes
the trailer tow hitch.
RUse the bicycle rack only to transport bicy-
cles.
RAlways attach the bicycle rack correctly by
clamping onto the ball head and, if possible,
to the guide pin on the ball coupling as well.
RTo transport four bicycles, always use bicy-
cle racks with additional support on the ball
coupling's guide pin.
RUse only bicycle racks approved by
Mercedes-Benz.
Trailer tow hitch (example with additional RAlways comply with the bicycle rack's oper-
guide pin)
ating manual.

! Using unsuitable bicycle racks or using


them incorrectly can cause damage to and
fractures in the trailer tow hitch.

Z
226 Bicycle rack

Use only bicycle racks approved by This could impair the handling characteristics.
Mercedes-Benz. Adapt your driving style accordingly. Maintain a
Bicycle racks cause your vehicle's driving char- safe distance and drive carefully.
acteristics to change. The vehicle: When using bicycle racks, set the tire pressure
on the rear axle of the vehicle for the maximum
Ris heavier
load. Further information on tire pressure can be
Ris restricted in its acceleration and gradient- found on the tire pressure table (Y page 354).
climbing capability
Rhas an increased braking distance
Driving and parking

Loading instructions
The greater the distance between the load's center of gravity and the ball head, the higher the load
exerted on the trailer tow hitch.
Therefore, observe the following notes:
RAttach heavy bicycles as close as possible to the vehicle.
RAlways distribute the load on the bicycle rack as symmetrically as possible to the vehicle longi-
tudinal axis.
Before loading the bicycle rack, Mercedes-Benz advises you to remove all add-on parts from the
bicycles, e.g. bicycle baskets, child seats or batteries. This will allow you to improve the aerody-
namic resistance and the bicycle rack's center of gravity.
Always secure bicycles against slipping and check that they are firmly seated at regular intervals.
Do not use tarpaulins or other covers. This could impair the driving characteristics and rear visibility.
The aerodynamic resistance would also rise, and so would the load exerted on the trailer tow hitch
as a result.

Load distribution on the bicycle rack


: Distance in height between the center of gravity and the ball coupling
; Distance to the rear between the center of gravity and the ball coupling
= The center of gravity is located on the central axis of the vehicle
Bicycle rack 227

When loading the bicycle rack, comply with the following notes:
Number of bicycles Gross weight of bicy- Max. distance : Max. distance ;
cle rack and load
3 up to 75 kg 420 mm 300 mm
42 up to 100 kg2 420 mm 400 mm

Driving and parking

2 When transporting four bicycles or a gross weight between 75 kg and 100 kg, use only bicycle racks with
additional support on the guide pin of the trailer tow hitch.
Z
228 Displays and operation

Important safety notes X Turn the brightness control knob clockwise or


counter-clockwise.
If you turn the light switch to Ã, T or
G WARNING L, the brightness is dependent upon the
brightness of the ambient light.
On-board computer and displays

If you operate information systems and com-


munication equipment integrated in the vehi-
i The light sensor in the instrument cluster
cle when driving, you may be distracted from automatically controls the brightness of the
the traffic situation. You could also lose con- multifunction display.
trol of the vehicle. There is a risk of an acci- In daylight, the displays in the instrument
dent. cluster are not illuminated.
Only operate this equipment when the traffic
situation permits. If you are not sure that this
is possible, park the vehicle paying attention Speedometer with segments
to traffic conditions and operate the equip- The segments in the speedometer indicate
ment when the vehicle is stationary. which speed range is available.
RCruise control activated (Y page 169):
You must observe the legal requirements for the
country in which you are currently driving when The segments light up from the stored speed
operating the on-board computer. to the maximum speed.
RDistance Pilot DISTRONIC is activated
G WARNING (Y page 171):
If the instrument cluster has failed or mal- One or two segments in the set speed range
functioned, you may not recognize function light up.
restrictions in systems relevant to safety. The RDistance Pilot DISTRONIC detects a vehicle in
operating safety of your vehicle may be front moving more slowly than the stored
impaired. There is a risk of an accident. speed:
The segments between the speed of the vehi-
Pull over as soon as it is safe to do so and cle in front and the stored speed light up.
consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The on-board computer only shows messages or


warnings from certain systems in the multifunc- Tachometer
tion display. You should therefore make sure ! Do not drive in the overrevving range, as this
your vehicle is operating safely at all times. could damage the engine.
For an overview, see the instrument panel illus-
tration (Y page 37). The red band in the tachometer indicates the
engine's overrevving range.
Plug-in hybrid: be sure to read the separate
Operator's Manual. Otherwise, you may not rec- The fuel supply is interrupted to protect the
ognize dangers. engine when the red band is reached.

Displays and operation Outside temperature display


You should pay special attention to road condi-
Instrument cluster lighting tions when temperatures are around freezing
The lighting in the instrument cluster, in the dis- point.
plays and the controls in the vehicle interior can Bear in mind that the outside temperature dis-
be adjusted using the brightness control knob. play indicates the temperature measured and
The brightness control knob is located on the does not record the road temperature.
bottom left of the instrument cluster The outside temperature display is in the multi-
(Y page 37). function display (Y page 230).
Displays and operation 229

There is a short delay before a change in outside Operating the on-board computer
temperature appears in the multifunction dis-
play. Overview

On-board computer and displays


Coolant temperature gauge
G WARNING
Opening the hood when the engine is over-
heated or when there is a fire in the engine
compartment could expose you to hot gases
or other service products. There is a risk of
injury.
Let an overheated engine cool down before
opening the hood. If there is a fire in the
engine compartment, keep the hood closed
and contact the fire department.

! A display message is shown if the coolant


temperature is too high.
If the coolant temperature is over 248 ‡ : Multifunction display
(120 †), do not continue driving. The engine ; Right control panel
will otherwise be damaged. = Left control panel
All vehicles except PLUG-IN HYBRID: the X To activate the on-board computer: turn
coolant temperature display is on the instru- the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition
ment cluster on the right-hand side (Y page 37). lock.
Under normal operating conditions and with the You can control the multifunction display and
specified coolant level, the coolant temperature the settings in the on-board computer using the
may rise to 248 ‡ (120 †). buttons on the multifunction steering wheel.
Vehicles with the COMAND multimedia system:
you can find further information on the Voice
Control System in the separate operating
instructions.
Vehicles with the Audio 20 multimedia system:
you can find further information on voice-oper-
ated control for navigation in the manufactur-
er's operating instructions.

Z
230 Displays and operation

Left control panel Right control panel

= RCalls up the menu and menu bar ~ RRejectsor ends a call


; RExits
the telephone book/redial
On-board computer and displays

memory
9 Press briefly:
: RScrolls in lists 6 RMakes or accepts a call
RSwitches to the redial memory
RSelects a submenu or function
RIn the Audio menu: selects the W RAdjusts the volume
previous or next station, when the X
preset list or station list is active,
or the previous or next audio track 8 RMute
or video scene ? RSwitches on voice-operated con-
RIn the Tel (Telephone) menu: trol for navigation or the Voice
switches to the phone book and Control System
selects a name or telephone num-
ber
9 Press and hold: Multifunction display
: RIn the Audio menu: selects a pre-
set list or a station list in the
desired frequency range or an
audio track or video scene using
rapid scrolling
RIn the Tel (Telephone) menu:
starts rapid scrolling if the phone
book is open
a RConfirms the selection or display
message
RIn the Tel (Telephone) menu:
switches to the phone book and
starts dialing the selected number
% Press briefly:
RBack
RSwitches off voice-operated con-
trol for navigation or the Voice : Permanent display: outside temperature or
Control System speed (Y page 238)
RHides display messages or calls up ; Time
the last Trip menu function used = Text field
RExits the telephone book/redial ? Menu bar
memory A Drive program (Y page 145)
% Press and hold: B Transmission position (Y page 145)
RCalls up the standard display in the X To display menu bar ?: press the =
Trip menu or ; button on the steering wheel.
If you do not press any other button, menu
bar ? fades out after a few seconds.
Text field = shows the selected menu or sub-
menu as well as display messages.
Menus and submenus 231

i Set the time using the multimedia system; Trip menu


see the Digital Operator's Manual.
Possible displays in the multifunction dis- Standard display
play:

On-board computer and displays


RZ Gearshift recommendation, when shifting
manually (Y page 147)
Rj Parking Pilot (Y page 190)
RCRUISE Cruise control (Y page 169)
R_ Adaptive Highbeam Assist
(Y page 114)
Rè ECO start/stop function (Y page 139) X Press and hold the % button on the steer-
Rë HOLD function (Y page 182) ing wheel until the Trip menu with trip odom-
Ra Distance Pilot DISTRONIC Steering Pilot eter : and odometer ; appears.
(Y page 236)
RDSR Downhill Speed Regulation Trip computer "From Start" or "From
(Y page 213) Reset"

Menus and submenus


Menu overview
Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to call up the menu bar and select a menu.
Operating the on-board computer (Y page 229).
: Distance
Depending on the equipment installed in the
vehicle, you can call up the following menus: ; Driving time
= Average speed
RTrip menu (Y page 231)
? Average fuel consumption
RNavi menu (navigation instructions)
(Y page 232) X Press the = or ; button on the steering
RAudio menu (Y page 234) wheel to select the Trip menu.
X Press the 9 or : button to select
RTel menu (telephone) (Y page 235)
From start or From reset.
reset
RDriveAssist menu (assistance)
(Y page 236) The values in the From Start submenu are cal-
RServ. menu (Y page 237)
culated from the start of a journey, while the
values in the From Reset submenu are calcu-
RSett. menu (settings) (Y page 238)
lated from the last time the submenu was reset
RON&OFFROAD menu (Y page 240) (Y page 232).
RAMG menu (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) The From Start trip computer is automatically
(Y page 240) reset if:
Rthe ignition has been switched off for more
than four hours.
R999 hours have been exceeded.
R9,999 miles have been exceeded.
The From reset trip computer is automatically
reset if the value exceeds 9,999 hours or
99,999 miles.

Z
232 Menus and submenus

ECO display X Press a to confirm your selection.


X Press : to select Yes and press a to
The ECO display is not available for Mercedes- confirm.
AMG vehicles.
You can reset the values of the following func-
On-board computer and displays

X Press the = or ; button on the steering


wheel to select the Trip menu. tions:
X Press the 9 or : button to select ECO RTrip odometer
DISPLAY.
DISPLAY R"From Start" trip computer

If the ignition remains switched off for longer R"From Reset" trip computer
than four hours, the ECO display will be auto- RECO display
matically reset. If you reset the values in the ECO display, the
For more information on the ECO display, see values in the "From Start" trip computer are also
(Y page 160). reset. If you reset the values in the "From Start"
trip computer, the values in the ECO display are
Displaying the range and current fuel also reset.
consumption
Navigation system menu
Displaying navigation instructions
In the Navi menu, the multifunction display
shows navigation instructions.
You can find further information on navigation in
the Digital Operator's Manual in the multimedia
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the menu displays system.
only the approximate range :. X Switch on the multimedia system (see the
X Press the = or ; button on the steering Digital Operator's Manual)
wheel to select the Trip menu. X Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the Navi menu.
Digital speedometer
Route guidance not active
X Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the Trip menu.
X Press the 9 or : button to select the
digital speedometer.
A gear shift recommendation Z can also
appear.
Observe the information on gearshift recom-
mendation Z when shifting manually
(Y page 147). : Direction of travel
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: a gearshift recom- ; Current road
mendation is shown in the status bar of the
multifunction display and not in the digital
speedometer display.

Resetting values
X Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the Trip menu.
X Press the 9 or : button to select the
function that you wish to reset.
Menus and submenus 233

Route guidance active = Lanes not recommended


? Recommended lane and new lane during a
No change of direction announced change of direction
A Change-of-direction symbol

On-board computer and displays


On multilane roads, lane recommendations can
be displayed for the next change of direction if
the digital map supports this data. During the
change of direction, new lanes may be added.
Lane not recommended =: you will not be able
to complete the next change of direction if you
: Distance to destination stay in this lane.
; Distance to the next change of direction Recommended lane and new lane during a
change of direction ?: in this lane you will be
= Current road
able to complete the next two changes of direc-
? "Follow the road's course" symbol tion without changing lane.
Change of direction announced without a
lane recommendation Other status indicators of the naviga-
tion system

: Road into which the change of direction


leads The navigation system displays additional infor-
; Distance to change of direction and visual mation and the vehicle status.
distance display Possible displays:
= Change-of-direction symbol
RNew Route... or Calculating Route...
When a change of direction is to be made, you A new route is calculated.
will see symbol = for the change of direction
RRoad Not Mapped
and distance graphic ;. The distance indicator
shortens towards the top of the display as you The vehicle position is inside the area of the
approach the point of the announced change of digital map but the road is not recognized, e.g.
direction. The change of direction starts once newly built streets, car parks or private land.
the distance display reaches zero. RNo Route
No route could be calculated to the selected
Change of direction announced with a destination.
lane recommendation RO
You have reached the destination or an inter-
mediate destination.

: Road into which the change of direction


leads
; Distance to change of direction and visual
distance display
Z
234 Menus and submenus

Audio menu Audio data from various audio devices or media


can be played, depending on the equipment
Selecting a radio station installed in the vehicle.
X Switch on the multimedia system and select
On-board computer and displays

CD or MP3 mode (see the Digital Operator's


Manual).
X Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the Audio menu.
X To select the next/previous track: briefly
press the 9 or : button.
X To select a track from the track list (rapid
: Active station list scrolling): press and hold the 9 or :
; Station frequency with memory position button until desired track : has been
The multifunction display shows station ; with reached.
station frequency or station name. The preset If you press and hold 9 or :, the rapid
position is only displayed along with station ; if scrolling speed is increased. Not all audio
this has been stored. You can store TV chan- drives or data carriers support this function.
nels ; in the multimedia system.
If track information is stored on the audio device
X Switch on the multimedia system and select or medium, the multifunction display will show
radio (see the Digital Operator's Manual). the number and title of the track. The current
X Press the = or ; button on the steering track does not appear in audio AUX mode
wheel to select the Audio menu. (Auxiliary audio mode: external audio source
connected).
X To select a preset list or station list: press
and briefly hold the 9 or : button until
the preset list or station list in the desired Video DVD operation
frequency range is shown in the multifunction
display.
X To select a station: briefly press 9
or :.
i SIRIUS XM satellite radio functions like a
normal radio.
For more information on radio operation, see
"Satellite radio" in the Digital Operator's Man- X Switch on the multimedia system and select
ual. video DVD (see the Digital Operator's Man-
ual).
Operating an audio player or audio X Press the = or ; button on the steering
media wheel to select the Audio menu.
X To select the next or previous scene:
briefly press the 9 or : button.
X To select a scene from the scene list
(rapid scrolling): press and hold the 9
or : button until desired scene : has
been reached.
Menus and submenus 235

Telephone menu Rejecting or ending a call


Introduction You can end or reject a call even if you are not in
the Tel menu.

On-board computer and displays


G WARNING X Press the ~ button on the steering wheel

If you operate information systems and com- to reject or end a call.


munication equipment integrated in the vehi-
cle when driving, you may be distracted from Selecting an entry from the phone book
the traffic situation. You could also lose con- X Press the = or ; button on the steering
trol of the vehicle. There is a risk of an acci- wheel to select the Tel menu.
dent. X Press the 9, : or a button to
Only operate this equipment when the traffic switch to the phone book.
situation permits. If you are not sure that this X Authorize access to the phone book on the
is possible, park the vehicle paying attention phone.
to traffic conditions and operate the equip- X Press the 9 or : button to select the
ment when the vehicle is stationary. desired name.
or
When telephoning, you must observe the legal X To start rapid scrolling: press and hold the
requirements for the country in which you are 9 or : button for longer than one sec-
currently driving. ond.
X Switch on the mobile phone (see the manu- Rapid scrolling stops when you release the
facturer’s operating instructions). button or reach the end of the list.
X Switch on the multimedia system (see the X If only one telephone number is stored for
Digital Operator's Manual) a name: press the 6 or a button to
X Establish a Bluetooth® connection to the mul- start dialing.
timedia system (see the Digital Operator's or
Manual). X If there is more than one number for a
X Press the = or ; button on the steering particular name: press the 6 or a
wheel to select the Tel menu. button to display the numbers.
X Press the 9 or : button to select the
You will see one of the following display mes-
sages in the multifunction display: number you want to dial.
X Press the 6 or a button to start dialing.
RPhone READY or the name of the network
provider: the mobile phone has found a net- or
work and is ready to receive. X To exit the telephone book: press the ~
RPhone No Service:
Service there is no network or % button.
available or the mobile phone is searching for
a network. Redialing

Accepting a call The on-board computer saves the last names or


numbers dialed in the redial memory.
If someone calls you when you are in the Tel X Press the = or ; button on the steering
menu, a display message appears in the multi- wheel to select the Tel menu.
function display. X Press the 6 button to switch to the redial
You can accept a call at any time regardless of memory.
the menu selected. X Press the 9 or : button to select the
X Press the 6 button on the steering wheel desired name or number.
to accept an incoming call.

Z
236 Menus and submenus

X Press the 6 or a button to start dialing. RTraffic


Sign Assist (Y page 203)
or RDistance Pilot DISTRONIC (Y page 171)
X To exit the redial memory: press the ~ RActive Brake Assist (Y page 67)
or % button. RActive Brake Assist with cross-traffic func-
On-board computer and displays

tion (Y page 73)


RATTENTION ASSIST (Y page 202)
Assistance menu RLane Keeping Assist (Y page 206) or Active
Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 210)
Introduction RDSR (Y page 213)
Depending on the equipment installed in the ROff-road program (vehicles with Off-Road
vehicle, you have the following options in the Engineering package) (Y page 215)
DriveAssist menu: RRear window wiper (Y page 118)
RDisplaying the assistance graphic X Press : to display the ATTENTION ASSIST
(Y page 236) assessment.
RActivating/deactivating the Traffic Sign
Assist display (Y page 236) Traffic Sign Assist
RActivating or deactivating Steering Pilot
(Y page 236) You can switch the Traffic Sign Assist message
RActivating or deactivating Active Brake Assist function on or off in the Traffic Sign Assist
(Y page 237) menu. When the function is activated, detected
traffic signs and information appear in the mul-
RActivating or deactivating Active Brake Assist
tifunction display for five seconds.
with cross-traffic function (Y page 237)
X Press the = or ; button on the steering
RActivating/deactivating ATTENTION ASSIST
(Y page 237) wheel to select the DriveAssist menu.
X Press the 9 or : button to select
RActivating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist or
Active Blind Spot Assist (Y page 237) Traffic Sign Assist.
Assist
X Confirm by pressing a on the steering
RActivating/deactivating Lane Keeping Assist
or Active Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 237) wheel.
The current selection appears.
X To activate/deactivate the message func-
Displaying the assistance graphic tion: press the a button again.
For further information about Traffic Sign Assist,
see (Y page 203).

Activating or deactivating Steering Pilot


X Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the DriveAssist menu.
X Press 9 or : to select Steering
X Press the = or ; button on the steering Pilot
Pilot.
wheel to select the DriveAssist menu.
X Confirm by pressing a on the steering
X Press 9 or : to select Assistance wheel.
Graphic
Graphic. The current selection appears.
X Confirm by pressing a on the steering X To activate/deactivate: press the a but-
wheel. ton again.
The multifunction display shows the Distance When the Steering Pilot is activated, the mul-
Pilot DISTRONIC distance display in the assis- tifunction display displays a Steering Pilot
tance graphic display. On message.
The assistance graphic displays the status of
and information from the following driving Further information about Distance Pilot
systems or driving safety systems: DISTRONIC with Steering Pilot (Y page 177).
Menus and submenus 237

Activating/deactivating Active Brake X Confirm by pressing a on the steering


Assist wheel.
The current selection appears.
You can use these functions to activate/deac- X To activate/deactivate: press the a but-
tivate Active Brake Assist or, on vehicles with

On-board computer and displays


ton again.
the Driving Assistance package, to activate or
deactivate Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic For further information about Blind Spot Assist,
function. see (Y page 204).
X Press the = or ; button on the steering For further information about Active Blind Spot
wheel to select the DriveAssist menu. Assist, see (Y page 208).
X Press the 9 or : button to select
Brake Assist.
Assist Activating/deactivating Lane Keeping
X Press a to confirm. Assist
The current selection appears. X Press the = or ; button on the steering
X To activate/deactivate: press the a but- wheel to select the DriveAssist menu.
ton again. X Press the 9 or : button to select
When Active Brake Assist or Active Brake Lane Keeping Assist.
Assist
Assist with cross-traffic function is deactiva-
X Press a to confirm.
ted, the æ symbol appears in the multi-
function display in the assistance graphic dis- The current selection appears.
play. X Press a to confirm.
X Press the : or 9 button to set Off, Off
Further information on Active Brake Assist
(Y page 67) and Active Brake Assist with cross- Standard or Adaptive
Adaptive.
traffic function (Y page 72). When Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane
Keeping Assist is activated, the multifunction
display shows the lane markings as bright
Activating/deactivating ATTENTION lines in the assistance graphic.
ASSIST X Press the a button to save the setting.
X Press the = or ; button on the steering For further information about Lane Keeping
wheel to select the DriveAssist menu. Assist, see (Y page 206).
X Press the 9 or : button to select For further information about Active Lane Keep-
Attention Assist.
Assist ing Assist, see (Y page 210).
X Press the a button.
The current selection appears.
X Press a to confirm. Service menu
X Press the : or 9 button to set Off, Off
Standard or Sensitive
Sensitive. Introduction
X Press the a button to save the setting. Depending on the equipment installed in the
When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the vehicle, you have the following options in the
é symbol appears in the multifunction dis- Serv. menu:
play in the assistance graphics display. Rcalling up display messages in message mem-
For further information about ATTENTION ory (Y page 243)
ASSIST, see (Y page 202). Rrestarting the tire pressure loss warning sys-
tem (Y page 358) or checking the tire pres-
Activating/deactivating Blind Spot sure electronically (Y page 360)
Assist Rcalling up the service due date (Y page 325).

X Press the = or ; button on the steering


wheel to select the DriveAssist menu.
X Press the 9 or : button to select
Assist.
Blind Spot Assist

Z
238 Menus and submenus

Settings menu The speed display is inverse to the speedome-


ter.
Introduction X Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the Sett. menu.
On-board computer and displays

Depending on the equipment installed in the X Press the : or 9 button to select the
vehicle, In the Sett. menu you have the follow- Instrument Cluster submenu.
ing options: X Confirm by pressing a on the steering
RChanging the instrument cluster settings wheel.
(Y page 238) X Press the : or 9 button to select the
RChanging the light settings (Y page 238) Permanent Display: function.
RChanging the vehicle settings (Y page 239) The current setting, Outside Temperature,
Temperature
RChanging the convenience settings Speedometer [km/h] or Speedometer
(Y page 239) [mph] appears.
RRestoring the factory settings (Y page 240) X To change the setting: press a again.

Instrument cluster submenu Light submenu


Selecting the distance unit Setting the daytime running lamps
The Display Unit Speedometer / Odome‐ This function is not available in Canada.
ter: function allows you to choose whether X Press the = or ; button on the steering
certain displays appear in kilometers or miles in wheel to select the Sett. menu.
the multifunction display.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
X Press the = or ; button on the steering
Light submenu.
wheel to select the Sett. menu.
X Press a to confirm.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
X Press : or 9 to select the Daytime
Instrument Cluster submenu.
Running Lights function.
X Press a to confirm.
If the Daytime Running Lights function has
X Press the : or 9 button to select the been switched on, the cone of light and the
Display Unit Speedometer / Odometer W symbol in the multifunction display are
function. shown in orange.
You will see the selected setting: km or miles.
miles X Press the a button to save the setting.
X Press the a button to save the setting.
Further information on daytime running lamps
The selected unit of measurement for distance (Y page 110).
applies to:
RDigital
Switching the Intelligent Light System
speedometer in the Trip menu
on/off
ROdometer and the trip odometer
RTrip computer
X Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the Sett. menu.
RCurrent consumption and the range
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
RNavigation instructions in the Navi menu
Light submenu.
RCruise control X Press a to confirm.
RDistance Pilot DISTRONIC X Press the : or 9 button to select the
RASSYST PLUS service interval display Intell. Light System function.
If the Intell. Light System function has
Selecting permanent display been switched on, the cone of light and the
The Permanent Display: function allows you L symbol in the multifunction display are
to choose whether the multifunction display shown in orange.
always shows the outside temperature or the X Press the a button to save the setting.
speed.
When you activate Intell. Light SystemSystem,
you activate the following functions:
Menus and submenus 239

RHighway mode Convenience submenu


RActive light function
RCornering light function Activating/deactivating the EASY-
RExtended range fog lamps ENTRY/EXIT feature

On-board computer and displays


ROff-road lights G WARNING
Further information on the Intelligent Light Sys- When the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature adjusts
tem (Y page 112). the steering wheel, you and other vehicle
occupants – particularly children – could
Vehicle submenu become trapped. There is a risk of injury.
Activating/deactivating the automatic While the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is mak-
door locking mechanism ing adjustments, make sure that no one has
any body parts in the sweep of the steering
If you activate the Automatic Door Lock func-
tion, the vehicle is centrally locked above a wheel.
speed of approximately 9 mph (15 km/h). If somebody becomes trapped:
X Press the = or ; button on the steering Rpress one of the memory function position
wheel to select the Sett. menu. buttons, or
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Rmove the switch for steering wheel adjust-
Vehicle submenu.
X Press a to confirm.
ment in the opposite direction to that in
which the steering wheel is moving.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Automatic Door Lock function. The adjustment process is stopped.
When the Automatic Door Lock function is
activated, the vehicle doors are displayed in X Press the = or ; button on the steering
orange in the multifunction display. wheel to select the Sett. menu.
X Press the a button to save the setting. X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Convenience submenu.
For further information on the automatic locking
X Press a to confirm.
feature, see (Y page 84).
X Using : or 9, select the Easy Entry/
Activating/deactivating the acoustic Exit function.
locking verification signal If the Easy Entry/Exit function is activated,
If you switch on the Acoustic Lock function, an the vehicle steering wheel is displayed in
acoustic signal sounds when you lock the vehi- orange in the multifunction display.
cle. X Press the a button to save the setting.

X Press the = or ; button on the steering Further information on the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT


wheel to select the Settings menu. feature (Y page 104).
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Switching the seat belt adjustment on/off
Vehicle submenu.
X Press a to confirm.
X Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the Settings menu.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Acoustic Lock function.
If the Acoustic Lock function is activated, Convenience submenu.
the & symbol in the multifunction display X Press a to confirm.
lights up orange. X Press the : or 9 button to select the
X Press the a button to save the setting. Belt Adjustment function.
If the Belt Adjustment function is activated,
the vehicle seat belt is shown in orange in the
multifunction display.
X Press the a button to save the setting.

Z
240 Menus and submenus

For further information on belt adjustment, see X Press the : or 9 button to select No or
(Y page 48). Yes.
Yes
X Press a to confirm the selection.
Switching the fold-in mirrors when lock- If you select Yes,
Yes the multifunction display
ing feature on/off
On-board computer and displays

shows a confirmation message.


This function is only available when the vehicle is If you want to reset the Daytime Running
equipped with the electrical fold-in function. Lights function in the Light submenu, you
When you activate the Auto. Mirror Folding must turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the
function, the exterior mirrors are folded in when ignition lock.
the vehicle is locked. The exterior mirrors fold
out automatically again as soon as you unlock
the vehicle.
ON&OFFROAD menu
X Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the Sett. menu. X Press the = or ; button on the steering
X Press the : or 9 button to select the wheel to select the ON&OFFROAD menu.
Convenience submenu. You can view the current off-road program set-
X Press a to confirm. tings in the ON&OFFROAD menu:
X Press the : or 9 button to select the RVehicles with the Off-Road Engineering pack-
Auto. Mirror Folding function. age (Y page 215)
If the Auto. Mirror Folding function is RVehicles without the Offroad Engineering
switched on, the multifunction display shows package (Y page 214)
the exterior mirror in orange.
X Press the a button to save the setting.
AMG menu (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
Warm-up

: Digital speedometer
If you have switched the Auto. Mirror Fold‐ ; Gear indicator
ing on and you fold the exterior mirrors in using = Upshift indicator
button :, they will not fold out automatically ? Engine oil temperature
(Y page 106). A Coolant temperature
You can then only fold out the exterior mirrors B Transmission oil temperature
using button :. X Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the AMG menu.
Restoring the factory settings Upshift indicator: upshift indicator Up =
indicates that the engine has reached the
X Press the = or ; button on the steering
overrevving range when in the manual drive
wheel to select the Sett. menu.
program.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Engine/transmission oil temperature:
Factory Setting submenu.
when the engine and transmission are at nor-
X Press a to confirm. mal operating temperature, oil tempera-
The Reset All Settings? message ture ? and B are displayed in white in the
appears. multifunction display.
Menus and submenus 241

If the multifunction display shows oil temper- You can start the RACETIMER when the engine is
ature ? or B in blue, the engine or the running or if the SmartKey is in position 2 in the
transmission are not yet at normal operating ignition lock.
temperature. Avoid driving at full engine out- X Press the = or ; button on the steering
put during this time.

On-board computer and displays


wheel to select the AMG menu.
X Press the 9 button repeatedly until the
SETUP RACETIMER is shown.
X To start: press the a button to start the
RACETIMER.

Displaying the intermediate time

: Engine mode (Comfort


Comfort/Sport
Sport/Sport
Sport +)
+
; Suspension setting Comfort
Comfort/Sport
Sport/
Sport +
= Transmission position D/M
M
? ESP® mode (ON
ON/OFF
OFF) X Press the = or ; button to select
Time
Interm. Time.
SETUP displays the following information/func-
X Press a to confirm.
tions:
The intermediate time is displayed for five
Rthe digital speedometer seconds.
Rthe gear indicator
Rthe engine mode Starting a new lap
Rthe suspension mode
Rthe transmission position
Rthe ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) mode
X Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the AMG menu.
X Press the 9 button repeatedly until SETUP
is displayed.
: RACETIMER
RACE TIMER ; Fastest lap time (best lap)
= Lap
Displaying and starting RACETIMER X Press a to confirm New Lap.
Lap
The RACETIMER is only intended for use on a
closed race circuit. Do not use the function on i It is possible to store a maximum of sixteen
public roads. laps. The 16th lap can only be completed with
Finish Lap
Lap.
Stopping the RACETIMER

: Lap
; RACETIMER

Z
242 Menus and submenus

X Press the % button on the steering wheel. = Average speed


X Confirm Yes with a. ? Distance covered
The RACETIMER interrupts timing if you stop the A Maximum speed
vehicle and turn the SmartKey to position 1 in This function is shown if you have stored at least
On-board computer and displays

the ignition lock. If you turn the SmartKey to one lap and stopped the RACETIMER.
position 3 and then press a to confirm
X Press the = or ; button on the steering
Start timing is continued.
wheel to select the AMG menu.
Resetting the current lap X Press the 9 button repeatedly until the
X Stop the RACETIMER. overall evaluation is shown.
X Press the = or ; button to select
Lap
Reset Lap. Lap statistics
X Press a to reset the lap time to "0".

Deleting all laps

: Lap
; Lap time
= Average lap speed
If you switch off the engine, the RACETIMER is ? Lap length
reset to "0" after 30 seconds. All laps are A Top speed during lap
deleted.
You cannot delete individual stored laps. If you This function is only available if you have stored
have stopped 16 laps, the current lap does not at least two laps and have stopped the RACE-
have to be reset. TIMER.
X Reset the current lap. X Press the = or ; button on the steering
X Press a to confirm ResetReset. wheel to select the AMG menu.
Reset Race Timer? appears in the multi- X Press the 9 button repeatedly until the lap
function display. evaluation is shown.
X Press the : button to select Yes and press
Each lap is shown in a separate submenu. The
the a button to confirm. fastest lap is indicated by flashing symbol :.
All laps are deleted. X Press the 9 or : button to select a dif-
ferent lap evaluation.
Overall statistics

: RACETIMER overall evaluation


; Total time driven
Display messages 243

Display messages
Introduction
General notes

On-board computer and displays


Display messages appear in the multifunction display.
Display messages with graphic displays may be shown in simplified form in the Operator's Manual
and may therefore differ from the multifunction display.
Please respond in accordance with the display messages and follow the additional notes in this
Operator's Manual.
Certain display messages are accompanied by an audible warning tone or a continuous tone.
When you stop and park the vehicle, please observe the notes on:
RHOLD function (Y page 182)
RParking (Y page 156)

Hiding display messages


X Press the a or % button on the steering wheel.
The multifunction display hides the display message.
High-priority display messages are shown in red in the multifunction display. Some high-priority
display messages cannot be hidden.
The multifunction display shows these messages continuously until the causes for the messages
have been remedied.

Message memory
The on-board computer saves certain display messages in the message memory. You can call up
the display messages:
X Press = or ; on the steering wheel to select the Serv. menu.
If there are display messages, the multifunction display shows 2 Messages
Messages, for example.
messages.
X Press the 9 or : button to select the entry, e.g. 2 messages
X Press a to confirm.
X Press the 9 or : button to scroll through the display messages.
When the ignition is switched off, all display messages are deleted, apart from some high-priority
display messages. Once the causes of the high-priority display messages have been rectified, the
corresponding display messages are also deleted.

Z
244 Display messages

Safety systems
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions


On-board computer and displays

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) and ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro-


gram) are temporarily not available.
Currently Unavaila‐ Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunc-
ble See Operator's tion.
Manual
In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in the
instrument cluster.
Possible causes are:
Rself-diagnosis is not yet complete
Rthe on-board voltage may be insufficient

G WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake
hard, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected.
The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering move-
ments at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).
If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned above
are available again.
If the multifunction display still shows the display message:
X Drive on carefully.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

!÷ ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning.


Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunc-
Inoperative See tion.
Operator's Manual
The $ (USA only) or J (Canada only), ÷, å and !
warning lamps in the instrument cluster also light up.
G WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake
hard, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected.
The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X Drive on carefully.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Display messages 245

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

÷ ESP® is temporarily unavailable.


Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunc-

On-board computer and displays


Currently Unavaila‐ tion.
ble See Operator's
Manual In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps light up in the instru-
ment cluster.
The self-diagnosis function might not be complete, for example.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
G WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake
hard, for example.
The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus
increase.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering move-
ments at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).
If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned above
are available again.
If the multifunction display still shows the display message:
X Drive on carefully.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

÷ ESP® is malfunctioning.
Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunc-
Inoperative See tion.
Operator's Manual
In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps light up in the instru-
ment cluster.
G WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake
hard, for example.
The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus
increase.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X Drive on carefully.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Z
246 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

T! EBD (electronic brake force distribution), ABS and ESP® are malfunc-
tioning.
÷
On-board computer and displays

Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunc-
Inoperative See tion.
Operator's Manual In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in the
instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds.
G WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake
hard, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected.
The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X Drive on carefully.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

F (USA The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp lights
up.
only) ! (Canada You attempted to release the electric parking brake while the ignition
only) was switched off.
Turn On the Igni‐ X SmartKey : insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and turn to
tion to Release the position 1.
Parking Brake X KEYLESS-GO: switch on the ignition.

F (USA The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes
and a warning tone sounds. A condition for automatic release of the
only) ! (Canada electric parking brake is not fulfilled (Y page 157).
only) You are driving with the electric parking brake applied.
Please Release Park‐ X Release the electric parking brake manually.
ing Brake
The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes
and a warning tone sounds.
You are using the electric parking brake for emergency braking
(Y page 157).

F (USA The yellow ! warning lamp lights up.


The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.
only) ! (Canada To apply:
only) X Switch the ignition off.
Parking Brake See X Press the electric parking brake handle for at least ten seconds.
Operator's Manual
X Shift the transmission to position j .
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Display messages 247

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions


The yellow ! warning lamp and the red F (USA only) or !
(Canada only) indicator lamp light up.

On-board computer and displays


The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.
To release:
X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.
X Release the electric parking brake manually.
or
X Release the electric parking brake automatically (Y page 157).
If the electric parking brake still cannot be released:
X Do not drive on.
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes


and the yellow ! warning lamp lights up.
The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.
To release:
X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.
X Release the electric parking brake manually.
To apply:
X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.
X Apply the electric parking brake manually.
If the red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp con-
tinues to flash:
X Do not drive on.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 372).
X Shift the transmission to position j .
X Turn the front wheels towards the curb.
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Z
248 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions


The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. The red F (USA only)
or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes for about ten seconds
On-board computer and displays

after the electric parking brake has been applied or released. It then
goes out or remains lit.
The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.
X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.
X Apply the electric parking brake.

If it is not possible to engage the electric parking brake:


X Shift the transmission to position j.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

If it is not possible to release the electric parking brake:


X Release the electric parking brake automatically (Y page 157).

If the electric parking brake still cannot be released:


X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. If you manually apply or


release the electric parking brake, the red F (USA only) or !
(Canada only) indicator lamp flashes.
The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. It is not possible to apply
the electric parking brake manually.
X Shift the transmission to position j .
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

F (USA The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. The red F (USA only)
or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes for about ten seconds
only) ! (Canada after the electric parking brake has been applied or released. It then
only) goes out or remains lit.
The electric parking brake is malfunctioning, e.g. because of over-
Parking Brake Inop‐
voltage or undervoltage.
erative
X Remove the cause for the overvoltage or undervoltage, e.g. by
charging the battery or restarting the engine.
X Engage or release the electric parking brake.

If it remains impossible to apply or release the electric parking brake:


X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.
X Engage or release the electric parking brake.

If the electric parking brake still cannot be released:


X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

If the electric parking brake still cannot be applied:


X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Display messages 249

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions


The yellow ! warning lamp lights up and the red F (USA only)
or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes.

On-board computer and displays


It is not possible to apply the electric parking brake manually.
X Shift the transmission to position j .
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

$ (USA only) There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir. In addition,
the $ (USA only) or J (Canada only) warning lamp lights up in
J (Canada only) the instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds.
Check Brake Fluid G WARNING
Level
The braking effect may be impaired.
There is a risk of an accident.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving
under any circumstances.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 156).
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
X Do not add brake fluid. This does not correct the malfunction.

# The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit.


USA only: the $ red brake system warning lamp is lit while the
Check Brake Pad Wear engine is running.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

G One or more main features of the mbrace system are malfunctioning.


X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Inoperative
Active Brake Assist Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function is temporarily inopera-
Functions Currently tive.
Limited See Opera‐ Possible causes are:
tor's Manual
RThe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to
electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or
other sources of electromagnetic radiation.
RThe system is outside the operating temperature range.
RThe on-board voltage is too low.
When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message
disappears.
Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function or PRE‑SAFE® PLUS is
functional again.
If the display message does not disappear:
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 156).
X Restart the engine.

Z
250 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions


Active Brake Assist Active Brake Assist is unavailable due to a malfunction. Adaptive
Functions Currently Brake Assist may also have failed.
On-board computer and displays

Limited See Opera‐ X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.


tor's Manual

PRE-SAFE Inopera‐ Important functions of PRE-SAFE® have failed. All other occupant
tive See Operator's safety systems, e.g. air bags, remain available.
Manual X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Active Brake Assist Active Brake Assist or PRE‑SAFE® PLUS is temporarily inoperative.
Functions Currently Possible causes are:
Limited See Opera‐
tor's Manual RFunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.
RThe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to
electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or
other sources of electromagnetic radiation.
RMercedes-AMG vehicles: ESP® is deactivated.
RThe system is outside the operating temperature range.
RThe on-board voltage is too low.
When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message
disappears.
Active Brake Assist or PRE‑SAFE® PLUS is operative again.
If the display message does not disappear:
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 156).
X Restart the engine.
X Mercedes-AMG vehicles: switch ESP® on again (Y page 71).

Active Brake Assist Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function or PRE‑SAFE® PLUS is
Functions Limited not available due to a malfunction.
See Operator's Man‐ X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
ual
Display messages 251

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions


Radar Sensors Dirty The radar sensor system is malfunctioning.
See Operator's Man‐ Possible causes are:

On-board computer and displays


ual
Rdirt on sensors
Rheavy rain or snow
Rwhen driving on inter-urban roads without traffic or infrastructure,
e.g. in desert-like areas
At least one driving system or driving safety system is malfunctioning
or is temporarily unavailable:
RPRE-SAFE® PLUS
RActive Brake Assist
RActive Lane Keeping Assist
RActive Blind Spot Assist
RDistance Pilot DISTRONIC
If the radar sensor system in front is dirty, Active Blind Spot Assist will
not perform a course-correcting brake application.
A warning tone also sounds.
Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the driving and
drive safety systems will be available again. The display message dis-
appears.
If the display message does not disappear:
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 156).
X Switch off the engine.
X Clean all sensors (Y page 330).
X Restart the engine.
The display message disappears.

6 The restraint system is malfunctioning.


The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.
SRS Malfunction Ser‐
vice Required G WARNING
The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered
unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.
There is an increased risk of injury.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
For further information about the restraint system, see (Y page 44).

6 The restraint system has malfunctioned at the front on the left or right.
The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.
Front Left Malfunc‐
tion Service G WARNING
Required or Front The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered
Left Malfunction unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.
Service Required There is an increased risk of injury.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Z
252 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

6 The rear left-hand or right-hand restraint system is malfunctioning.


The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.
On-board computer and displays

Rear Left Malfunc‐


tion Service G WARNING
Required or Rear The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered
Left Malfunction unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.
Service Required There is an increased risk of injury.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

6 The rear center restraint system is malfunctioning. The 6 warning


lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.
Rear Center Malfunc‐
tion Service G WARNING
Required The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered
unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.
There is an increased risk of injury.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

6 The left-hand or right-hand window curtain air bag is malfunctioning.


The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.
Left Side Curtain
Airbag Malfunction G WARNING
Service Required or The left or right window curtain air bag may either be triggered unin-
Right Side Curtain tentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.
Airbag Malfunction There is an increased risk of injury.
Service Required
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Display messages 253

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions


Front Passenger Air‐ The front-passenger front air bag is deactivated during the journey,
bag Disabled See even though:

On-board computer and displays


Operator's Manual Ran adult
or
Ra person of the corresponding stature is on the front-passenger seat
If additional forces are applied to the seat, the system may interpret
the occupant's weight as lower than it actually is.
G WARNING
The front-passenger air bag does not deploy during an accident.
There is an increased risk of injury.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 156).
X Switch the ignition off.
X Have the occupant on the front-passenger seat get out of the vehi-
cle.
X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door and
switch on the ignition.
X Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps in the center
console and the multifunction display and check the following:
Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:
Ra self-diagnosis is carried out. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and
PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps must light up simulta-
neously for approximately six seconds.
Rthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must then light up
and remain lit after the self-diagnosis. If the indicator lamp is on,
OCS (Occupant Classification System) has deactivated the front-
passenger front air bag (Y page 52)
Rthe Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's
Manual or Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Opera‐
tor's Manual display messages must not be shown on the mul-
tifunction display.
X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary system
checks have been completed.
X Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the multi-
function display.
If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can be occu-
pied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF or ON indicator
lamp remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS classifies the occu-
pant.
If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating correctly.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
For further information about the Occupant Classification System, see
(Y page 52).

Z
254 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions


Front Passenger Air‐ The front-passenger front air bag is enabled during the journey, even
bag Enabled See though:
On-board computer and displays

Operator's Manual Ra child, a small adult or an object weighing less than the system's
weight threshold is located on the front-passenger seat
or
Rthe front-passenger seat is unoccupied
The system may detect objects or forces applying additional weight on
the seat.
G WARNING
The front-passenger front air bag may deploy unintentionally.
There is an increased risk of injury.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 156).
X Switch the ignition off.
X Open the front-passenger door.
X Remove the child and the child restraint system from the front-
passenger seat.
X Make sure that there are no objects on the seat adding to the
weight.
The system might otherwise detect the additional weight and inter-
pret the seat occupant's weight as greater than it actually is.
X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door and
switch on the ignition.
X Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps in the center
console and the multifunction display and check the following:
Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:
Ra self-diagnosis is carried out. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and
PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps must light up simulta-
neously for approximately six seconds.
Rthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must then light up
and remain lit after the self-diagnosis. If the indicator lamp is on,
OCS has disabled the front-passenger front air bag (Y page 52)
Rthe Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's
Manual or Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Opera‐
tor's Manual display messages must not be shown on the mul-
tifunction display.
X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary system
checks have been completed.
X Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the multi-
function display.
If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can be occu-
pied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF or ON indicator
lamp remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS classifies the occu-
pant.
If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating correctly.
Display messages 255

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions


X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
For further information about the Occupant Classification System, see

On-board computer and displays


(Y page 52).

Lights
i Vehicles with LED bulbs in the light clusters:
The display message for the corresponding lamp only appears when all of the LEDs in the lamp
have failed.
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

b The bulb in question is malfunctioning.


X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Check Left Low Beam
(Example) or
X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself
(Y page 115).

b The active light function is faulty.


X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Active Headlamps
Inoperative

b The Intelligent Light System is faulty. The lights remain available with-
out the Intelligent Light System.
Intell. Light Sys‐ X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
tem Inoperative

b The exterior lighting is malfunctioning.


X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Malfunction See
Operator's Manual Vehicles with trailer tow hitch: a fuse may have blown.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 156).
X Check the fuses (Y page 348).
X If necessary, replace the blown fuse. Observe the warning notes.

If the multifunction display still shows the display message:


X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

b The exterior lighting is malfunctioning.


X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Malfunction See
Operator's Manual

b The light sensor is defective.


X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Auto Lamp Function
Inoperative

Z
256 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

b You leave the vehicle and the lights are switched on. A warning tone
also sounds.
On-board computer and displays

Switch Off Lights X Turn the light switch to the à position.

b You are driving with low-beam headlamps switched off.


X Turn the light switch to the L or à position.
Switch On Headlamps
Adaptive Highbeam Adaptive Highbeam Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative.
Assist Currently Possible causes are:
Unavailable See
RThe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty.
Operator's Manual
RVisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.
X Clean the windshield.
If the system detects that the camera is fully operational, the Adap‐
tive Highbeam Assist Now Available message is displayed.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist is operational again.

Adaptive Highbeam Adaptive Highbeam Assist is faulty.


Assist Inoperative X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Engine
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

+ The coolant level is too low.

Check Coolant Level ! Avoid making long journeys with too little coolant in the engine
See Operator's Man‐ cooling system. The engine will otherwise be damaged.
ual X Add coolant, observing the warning notes before doing so
(Y page 324).
If you have to add coolant frequently:
X Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have the engine cooling
system checked.

? The fan motor is malfunctioning.


X At coolant temperatures below 248 ‡ (120 †), drive to the nearest
qualified specialist workshop.
X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in moun-
tainous terrain and stop-and-go traffic.
Display messages 257

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

? The coolant is too hot.


A warning tone also sounds.

On-board computer and displays


Coolant Too Hot
Stop Vehicle Turn G WARNING
Engine Off Do not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause some
fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch
fire.
Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burns which
can occur just by opening the hood.
There is a risk of injury.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, pay-
ing attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 156).
X Wait until the engine has cooled down.
X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked,
e.g. by snow, slush or ice.
X Do not start the engine again until the display message goes out and
the coolant temperature is below 248 ‡ (120 †). Otherwise, the
engine could be damaged.
X Pay attention to the coolant temperature gauge.

If the temperature increases again:


X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Under normal operating conditions and with the specified coolant
level, the coolant temperature may rise to 248 ‡ (120 †).

# The battery is not being charged.


A warning tone also sounds.
See Operator's Man‐ Possible causes are:
ual
Ra defective alternator
Ra torn poly-V-belt
Ra malfunction in the electronics

! Do not continue driving. The engine could otherwise overheat.


X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, pay-
ing attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 156).
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Z
258 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

# The battery is no longer being charged and the condition of charge is


too low.
On-board computer and displays

Stop Vehicle See A warning tone also sounds.


Operator's Manual
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, pay-
ing attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 156).
X Observe the instructions in the # See Operator's Manual
display message.
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

4 The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level.


A warning tone also sounds.
Check Engine Oil At
Next Refueling ! Avoid long journeys with too little engine oil. The engine will oth-
erwise be damaged.
X Check the oil level when next refueling, at the latest (Y page 323).
X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 323).

If the engine oil needs topping up more often:


X Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have the engine
checked.
Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from any quali-
fied specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-
benz.com.

4 Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the engine oil level is too low.

Check Engine Oil ! Avoid long journeys with too little engine oil. The engine will oth-
Level (Add 1 quart) erwise be damaged.
X Check the oil level when next refueling, at the latest (Y page 323).
X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 323).

If the engine oil needs topping up more often:


X Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have the engine
checked.
Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from any quali-
fied specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-
benz.com.

4 Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the engine oil level is too low.


There is a risk of engine damage.
Engine Oil Level
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, pay-
Low Stop Vehicle
Turn Engine Off ing attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 156).
X Check the engine oil level (Y page 323).
X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 323).

8 The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.


X Refuel at the nearest gas station.
Fuel Level Low
Display messages 259

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

C There is only a very small amount of fuel in the fuel tank.


X Refuel at the nearest gas station without fail.

On-board computer and displays


8 The fuel filler cap is not closed correctly or the fuel system is leaking.
X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.
Gas Cap Loose
If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed:
X Close the fuel filler cap.
If the fuel filler cap is correctly closed:
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

8 Vehicles with a diesel engine: the fuel level has fallen below the
reserve range.
Ultra Low-sulfur X Refuel at the nearest gas station.
Diesel Fuel Only
X Only use commercially available vehicular ULTRA-LOW SULFUR
HIGHWAY DIESEL FUEL (ULSD, 15 ppm SULFUR MAXIMUM).

¸ Vehicles with a diesel engine: the engine air filter is dirty and must be
replaced.
Replace Air Filter X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

! Vehicles with a diesel engine: there is water in the fuel filter. The water
must be drained off.
Check Fuel Filter X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Ø The DEF tank is almost empty.


X Have the DEF tank filled immediately at a qualified specialist work-
Check Additive See shop (Y page 153).
Operator's Manual
The DEF system is malfunctioning.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Ø The DEF level has fallen to a minimum. You can start the engine a
further 16 times.
Remaining Starts: 16 X Have the DEF tank filled immediately at a qualified specialist work-
shop (Y page 153).
i You can start the engine a further 16 times. If DEF is not added, it
will then not be possible to restart the engine. Refill the DEF tank
with approximately 2 gal (7.5 l) of DEF (Y page 153).
If the 'ten starts' message appears in the display and a warning tone
sounds, the DEF system is malfunctioning.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Z
260 Display messages

Driving systems
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

À
On-board computer and displays

Based on certain criteria, ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigue or


a lack of concentration on the part of the driver. A warning tone also
Attention Assist: sounds.
Take a Break! X If necessary, take a break.
During long journeys, take regular breaks in good time so you get
enough rest.

À ATTENTION ASSIST is inoperative.


X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Attention Assist
Inoperative

Á You cannot change the vehicle level.


Possible causes are:
Drive More Slowly
RYou are driving too fast for the selected vehicle level
RYou are driving too fast with a trailer or the trailer-coupling socket is
being used, e.g. for a bicycle rack
X Drive more slowly and then select the desired vehicle level again.
RVehicles with the Off-Road Engineering package (Y page 179)
RVehicles with the AIRMATIC package (Y page 185)
X Observe the notes on towing a trailer (Y page 220).

Á You have selected a higher vehicle level. The compressor first needs
to cool down because of frequent level changes.
Compressor Is Cool‐ X Drive in a manner appropriate for the current vehicle level.
ing
X Make sure that there is sufficient ground clearance.
X Allow the compressor to cool down.
When the compressor has cooled down, the display message dis-
appears. The vehicle then continues rising to the selected level.

Á AIRMATIC is malfunctioning.
X Drive as appropriate for the current vehicle level, but do not exceed
Malfunction 50 mph (80 km/h).
X Make sure that there is sufficient ground clearance.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Display messages 261

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Á You are exceeding the speed permissible for the selected off-road
level.

On-board computer and displays


Max. Speed 12 mph In addition, the vehicle level display appears above the display mes-
sage, and a warning tone sounds.
G WARNING
The vehicle could tip and rollover.
There is a risk of an accident.
X Adjust your driving style to the altered handling characteristics.
X Only make slight steering movements and avoid fast steering move-
ments.
X Do not exceed 12 mph (20 km/h) until the vehicle has reached off-
road level 2.

Á The vehicle is being adjusted to off-road level 3.


In addition, the vehicle level display appears above the display mes-
Raising Max. Speed sage.
12 mph The display message refers to the maximum speed permissible
(depending on the model type) for off-road level 3.
X Do not drive at speeds above 12 mph (20 km/h).

g The vehicle is being lowered from off-road level 3 to off-road level 2.


In addition, the vehicle level display appears above the display mes-
Lowering Max. sage.
Speed 12 mph The display message refers to the maximum speed permissible
(depending on the model type) for off-road level 3.
X Do not exceed 12 mph (20 km/h) until the vehicle has reached off-
road level 2.

ACTIVE CURVE SYSTEM The ACTIVE CURVE SYSTEM is faulty. The vehicle's handling charac-
Malfunction teristics may be affected.
X Do not drive at speeds above 50 mph (80 km/h).
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

ACTIVE CURVE SYSTEM The ACTIVE CURVE SYSTEM is faulty. The vehicle's handling charac-
Malfunction see teristics are severely impaired. A warning tone also sounds.
Operator's Manual
G WARNING
There is a risk of an accident.
X Drive on carefully.
X Adjust your driving style to the altered handling characteristics.
X Avoid sudden acceleration around tight corners and fast steering
movements.
X Do not drive at speeds above 50 mph (80 km/h).
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Z
262 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

ý The differential lock is faulty.


X Do not drive at speeds above 50 mph (80 km/h).
On-board computer and displays

Different. Lock
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Sys. Malfunction

ý The differential lock is too hot and has been disengaged.


X Drive on carefully.
Different. Locking
X Allow the differential lock to cool down.
Sys. Cooling Down
Please Wait The differential lock re-engages as soon as it has cooled down.

LOW RANGE Stop A gearshift process has been canceled. LOW RANGE is in the neutral
Apply Parking Brake position. There is no connection between the engine and the drive
wheels.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Apply the electric parking brake. Do not continue driving under any
circumstances.
X Repeat the gearshift process.

LOW RANGE Malfunc‐ LOW RANGE is malfunctioning.


tion To Park, Apply X Do not drive at speeds above 50 mph (80 km/h).
Brake
X When parking, secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 156).
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

LOW RANGE Max. You have exceeded the maximum speed for the gearshift process.
Speed 25 mph X Drive more slowly.
The gear change is made.

LOW RANGE Max. You have exceeded the maximum speed for the gearshift process.
Speed 40 mph X Drive more slowly.
The gear change is made.

LOW RANGE Shift to You have reduced the vehicle speed, but the automatic transmission
Position N Briefly is not in position i.
X Briefly shift the automatic transmission to i.

LOW RANGE Shifting The gearshift process has been canceled.


Canceled Please X Repeat the gearshift process.
Reactivate

à DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation) is deactivated due to a malfunction.


X Have DSR checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Inoperative
Display messages 263

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions


Traffic Sign Assist Traffic Sign Assist is temporarily inoperative.
Currently Unavaila‐ Possible causes are:

On-board computer and displays


ble See Operator's
RThe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty.
Manual
RVisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.
X Clean the windshield.
If the system detects that the camera is fully operational, the display
message disappears.
Traffic Sign Assist is operational again.

Traffic Sign Assist Traffic Sign Assist is malfunctioning.


Inoperative X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

ë The HOLD function is deactivated. The vehicle is skidding.


A warning tone also sounds.
Off
X Reactivate the HOLD function later (Y page 182).

Lane Keeping Assist Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated and
Currently Unavaila‐ temporarily inoperative.
ble See Operator's Possible causes are:
Manual or Active
RThe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty.
Lane Keeping Assist
Currently Unavaila‐ RVisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.
ble See Operator's RThere have been no lane markings for an extended period.
Manual RThe lane markings are worn away, dark or covered up, e.g. by dirt or
snow.
When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message
disappears.
Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is operational
again.
If the display message does not disappear:
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 156).
X Clean the windshield.

Lane Keeping Assist Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is malfunctioning.
Inoperative or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Active Lane Keeping
Assist Inoperative

Z
264 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions


Blind Spot Assist Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is temporarily inoperative.
Currently Unavaila‐ Possible causes are:
On-board computer and displays

ble See Operator's


RThe radar sensor system is outside the operating temperature
Manual or Active
Blind Spot Assist range.
Currently Unavaila‐ RThe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to
ble See Operator's electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or
Manual other sources of electromagnetic radiation.
The yellow 9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mirrors.
When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message
disappears.
Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is operational again.
If the display message does not disappear:
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 156).
X Restart the engine.

Blind Spot Assist Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is deactivated while tow-
Not Available When ing a trailer.
Towing a Trailer You have established the electrical connection between the trailer and
See Operator's Man‐ your vehicle.
ual or Active Blind
X Press a on the steering wheel to confirm the display message.
Spot Assist Not
Available When Tow‐
ing a Trailer See
Operator's Manual

Blind Spot Assist Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is malfunctioning.
Inoperative or The yellow 9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mirrors.
Active Blind Spot
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Assist Inoperative
Parking Pilot Can‐ The driver's door is open.
celed X Repeat the parking gap measurement and parking process with the
driver's door closed.

You have inadvertently touched the multifunction steering wheel while


steering intervention was active.
X While steering intervention is active, make sure that the multifunc-
tion steering wheel is not touched unintentionally.

The vehicle has started to skid and ESP® has intervened.


X Use Parking Pilot again later (Y page 190).
Display messages 265

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions


Parking Pilot Inop‐ Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is malfunctioning or faulty.
erative X Follow the instructions and helpful hints in the "Problems with

On-board computer and displays


Parking Assist PARKTRONIC" section (Y page 190).
If the multifunction display still shows the display message:
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Parking Pilot is unavailable or malfunctioning.
X Switch off the ignition and restart the engine.

If the Parking Pilot continues to be unavailable (the j symbol does


not appear in the multifunction display):
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Parking Pilot Fin‐ The vehicle is parked. A warning tone also sounds.
ished The display message disappears automatically.
Distance Pilot Off Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is deactivated.
If a warning tone also sounds, Distance Pilot has deactivated auto-
matically (Y page 171).

Distance Pilot Now Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is operational again after having been tem-
Available porarily unavailable. You can now reactivate Distance Pilot
DISTRONIC (Y page 171).
Distance Pilot Cur‐ Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is temporarily inoperative.
rently Unavailable Steering Pilot is also temporarily inoperative.
See Operator's Man‐ Possible causes are:
ual
RThe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to
electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or
other sources of electromagnetic radiation.
RThe system is outside the operating temperature range.
RThe on-board voltage is too low.
A warning tone also sounds.
When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message
disappears.
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is operational again.
If the display message does not disappear:
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 156).
X Restart the engine.

Z
266 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions


Distance Pilot Inop‐ Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is malfunctioning.
erative The following may have also failed:
On-board computer and displays

RActive Brake Assist


RActive Brake Assist with cross-traffic function
A warning tone also sounds.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Distance Pilot Pas‐ You have depressed the accelerator pedal. Distance Pilot DISTRONIC
sive is no longer controlling the speed of the vehicle.
X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.

Distance Pilot A condition for activating Distance Pilot DISTRONIC has not been met.
- - - mph X Check the activation conditions for Distance Pilot DISTRONIC
(Y page 171).

Steering Pilot Cur‐ Steering Pilot is temporarily inoperative.


rently Unavailable Possible causes are:
See Operator's Man‐
RThe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty.
ual
RVisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.
RThere have been no lane markings for an extended period.
RThe lane markings are worn away, dark or covered up, e.g. by dirt or
snow.
When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message
disappears.
Steering Pilot is operational again.
If the display message does not disappear:
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 156).
X Clean the windshield.

Steering Pilot Inop‐ Steering Pilot is malfunctioning.


erative However, the Distance Pilot DISTRONIC functions are still available.
A warning tone also sounds.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Cruise Control Inop‐ Cruise control is malfunctioning.


erative X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Display messages 267

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions


Cruise Control RA condition for activating cruise control has not been met.
--- mph You have tried to store a speed below 20 mph (30 km/h), for exam-

On-board computer and displays


ple.
RESP® is deactivated. The yellow ESP® OFF warning lamp is lit.
X If conditions permit, drive faster than 20 mph (30 km/h) and store
the speed.
or
X Check the activation conditions for cruise control (Y page 169).
or
X Reactivate ESP® (Y page 71).

Cruise Control Off Cruise control has been deactivated.


If a warning tone also sounds, cruise control has deactivated auto-
matically (Y page 169).

Z
268 Display messages

Tires
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
On-board computer and displays

Check Tire Pressure The tire pressure loss warning system has detected a significant loss
Soon in pressure.
A warning tone also sounds.
Possible causes:
Ryou have changed the positions of the wheels and tires or installed
new wheels and tires.
Rthe tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly

G WARNING
Tire pressures that are too low pose the following hazards:
Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase.
Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly
impair tire traction.
Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be
greatly impaired.
There is a risk of an accident.
X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking
maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 156).
X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat
tire (Y page 335).
X Check the tire pressures and, if necessary, correct the tire pressure.
X Restart the tire pressure loss warning system when the tire pres-
sure is correct (Y page 358).

Check Tire Pressure The tire pressure loss warning system generated a display message
Then Restart Run and has not been restarted since.
Flat Indicator X Set the correct tire pressure in all four tires.
X Restart the tire pressure loss warning system (Y page 358).

Run Flat Indicator The tire pressure loss warning system is faulty.
Inoperative X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Please Correct Tire The tire pressure is too low in at least one of the tires, or the tire
Pressure pressure difference between the wheels is too great.
X Check the tire pressures at the next opportunity (Y page 358).
X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.
X Restart the tire pressure monitor (Y page 361).
Display messages 269

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions


Check Tires The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly. The
wheel position is displayed in the multifunction display.

On-board computer and displays


A warning tone also sounds.
G WARNING
Tire pressures that are too low pose the following hazards:
Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase.
Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly
impair tire traction.
Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be
greatly impaired.
There is a risk of an accident.
X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking
maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 156).
X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat
tire (Y page 335).
X Check the tire pressure (Y page 358).
X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.

Warning Tire Mal‐ The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped suddenly. The wheel
function position is shown in the multifunction display.
G WARNING
Driving with a flat tire poses a risk of the following hazards:
Ra flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.
Ryou could lose control of the vehicle.
Rcontinued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up
and possibly a fire.
There is a risk of an accident.
X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking
maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 156).
X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat
tire (Y page 335).

Tire Press. Monitor Because there is interference from a strong source of radio waves, no
Currently Unavaila‐ signals from the tire pressure sensors are detected. The tire pressure
ble monitor is temporarily malfunctioning.
X Drive on.
The tire pressure monitor restarts automatically as soon as the
problem has been resolved.

Tire Press. Sen‐ There is no signal from the tire pressure sensor of one or several
sor(s) Missing wheels. The pressure of the affected tire is not displayed in the mul-
tifunction display.
X Have the faulty tire pressure sensor replaced at a qualified special-
ist workshop.

Z
270 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions


Tire Pressure Moni‐ The wheels mounted do not have a suitable tire pressure sensor. The
tor Inoperative No tire pressure monitor is deactivated.
On-board computer and displays

Wheel Sensors X Mount wheels with suitable tire pressure sensors.


The tire pressure monitor is activated automatically after driving for
a few minutes.

Tire Press. Monitor The tire pressure monitor is faulty.


Inoperative X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Vehicle
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Shift to 'P' or 'N' You attempted to start the engine with the transmission in position k
to Start Engine or h.
X Shift the transmission to position j or i.

Apply Brake to You attempted to shift the transmission to position h, k or i


Shift from 'P' without depressing the brake pedal.
X Depress the brake pedal.

To Deselect P or N, You attempted to shift the transmission out of position j or i into


Depress Brake and another transmission position with the engine switched off.
Start Engine X Depress the brake pedal.
X Start the engine.

Apply Brake to You have attempted to shift from position h to position k without
Select R applying the brakes.
X Depress the brake pedal.
X Shift the transmission to position k .

Transmission Not in The driver's door is open or not fully closed and the transmission is in
P Risk of Vehicle position k, i or h.
Rolling Away A warning tone also sounds.
G WARNING
The vehicle may roll away.
There is a risk of an accident.
X Shift the transmission to position j .
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 156).
X Close the driver's door completely.

Only Shift to 'P' The vehicle is moving.


when Vehicle is Sta‐ X Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road
tionary and traffic conditions.
X Shift the transmission to position j .
Display messages 271

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions


Service Required Do You cannot change the transmission position due to a malfunction.
Not Shift Gears A warning tone also sounds.

On-board computer and displays


Visit Dealer
If transmission position h is selected:
X Drive to a qualified specialist workshop without shifting the trans-
mission from position h .
If position k, i or j is selected:
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 156).
X Notify a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service.

Reversing Not Possi‐ You can no longer shift to transmission position k due to a malfunc-
ble Service Required tion.
Transmission positions j, i or h continue to be available.
A warning tone also sounds.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Transmission Mal‐ A malfunction has occurred in the mechanical transmission compo-


function Stop nents.
A warning tone also sounds. The transmission shifts automatically to
position i.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Shift the transmission to position j .
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 156).
X Notify a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service.

Auxiliary Battery The auxiliary battery for the automatic transmission is no longer being
Malfunction charged.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
X Until then, always set the automatic transmission to position j
before switching off the engine.
X Before leaving the vehicle, apply the electric parking brake.

A The tailgate is open


G WARNING
When the engine is running, exhaust gases can enter the vehicle inte-
rior if the tailgate is open.
There is a risk of poisoning.
X Close the tailgate.

Z
272 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

? The hood is open.


G WARNING
On-board computer and displays

The open hood may block your view when the vehicle is in motion.
There is a risk of an accident.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 156).
X Close the hood.

C At least one door is open.


A warning tone also sounds.
X Close all the doors.

Ð The power steering is malfunctioning.


A warning tone also sounds.
Power Steering Mal‐
function See Opera‐ G WARNING
tor's Manual You will need to use more force to steer.
There is a risk of an accident.
X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required.

If you are able to steer safely:


X Drive on carefully.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
If you are unable to steer safely:
X Do not drive on.
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Phone No Service Your vehicle is outside the network provider's transmitter/receiver


range.
X Wait until the mobile phone operational readiness symbol appears
in the multifunction display.

¥ The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has dropped below
the minimum.
Check Washer Fluid X Add washer fluid (Y page 325).

Wiper Malfunction‐ The windshield wipers are malfunctioning.


ing X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Hazard Warning The hazard warning lamps are faulty.


Flashers Malfunc‐ X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
tioning
Display messages 273

SmartKey
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays


You have put the wrong SmartKey in the ignition lock.
X Use the correct SmartKey.
Key Does Not Belong
to Vehicle

 The SmartKey is in the ignition lock.


A warning tone also sounds.
Take Your Key from
X Remove the SmartKey.
Ignition

 The SmartKey needs to be replaced.


X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Obtain a New Key

 The SmartKey battery is discharged.


X Change the battery (Y page 80).
Replace Key Battery

 The SmartKey is not in the ignition lock. You have opened the driver's
door with the engine switched off.
Don't Forget Your A warning tone also sounds.
Key This display message is displayed for a maximum of 60 seconds and is
simply a reminder.
X Take the SmartKey with you when you leave the vehicle.

 The SmartKey is currently undetected.


X Change the location of the SmartKey in the vehicle.
Key Not Detected
(white display message) If the SmartKey still cannot be detected:
X Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.

 The SmartKey is not in the vehicle.


A warning tone also sounds.
Key Not Detected If the engine is switched off, you can no longer lock the vehicle cen-
(red display message) trally or start the engine.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 156).
X Locate the SmartKey.

Z
274 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions


Because there is interference from a strong source of radio waves, the
SmartKey is not detected whilst the engine is running.
On-board computer and displays

A warning tone also sounds.


X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 156).
X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and drive in SmartKey
mode.

 RThe SmartKey detection function has a temporary malfunction or is


faulty.
Remove 'Start' But‐ RThe SmartKey is continually undetected.
ton and Insert Key A warning tone also sounds.
X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and turn it to the desired
position.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster


General notes
Some systems carry out a self-diagnosis when the ignition is switched on. Therefore, some indicator
and warning lamps may light up or flash temporarily. This behavior is non-critical. These indicator
and warning lamps only indicate a malfunction if they light up or flash after starting the engine or
whilst driving.

Safety
Seat belts
Warning/ N Signal type
indicator Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
lamp
ü N After starting the engine, the red seat belt warning lamp lights up for 6 seconds.
The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger to fasten their
seat belts.
X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 48).

ü N After starting the engine, the red seat belt warning lamp lights up. In addition, a
warning tone sounds for up to 6 seconds.
The driver's seat belt is not fastened.
X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 48).
The warning tone ceases.
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 275

Warning/ N Signal type


indicator Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
lamp

On-board computer and displays


ü N The red seat belt warning lamp lights up after the engine starts, as soon as the
driver's or the front-passenger door is closed.
The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt.
X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 48).
The warning lamp goes out.
There are objects on the front-passenger seat.
X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them in a secure
place.
The warning lamp goes out.

ü N The red seat belt warning lamp flashes and an intermittent audible warning
sounds.
The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. The vehicle is being
driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or has briefly been driven faster than 15 mph
(25 km/h).
X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 48).
The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases.
There are objects on the front-passenger seat. The vehicle is being driven faster
than 15 mph (25 km/h) or has briefly been driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h).
X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them in a secure
place.
The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases.

Z
276 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

Safety systems
Warning/ N Signal type
indicator Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
On-board computer and displays

lamp
J$ N $ (USA only), J (Canada only): the red brake system warning lamp is lit
while the engine is running.
A warning tone also sounds.
G WARNING
The brake boosting effect is malfunctioning and the braking characteristics may be
affected.
There is a risk of an accident.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road
and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 156).
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.

J$ N $ (USA only), J (Canada only): the red brake system warning lamp is lit
while the engine is running.
A warning tone also sounds.
G WARNING
There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.
There is a risk of an accident.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road
and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 156).
X Do not add brake fluid. Adding more will not correct the malfunction.
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.

$ N USA only: the red brake system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
The multifunction display also shows a display message with the # symbol.
The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 277

Warning/ N Signal type


indicator Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
lamp

On-board computer and displays


! N The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) is deactivated due to a malfunction.
Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunction.
In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps may light up in the instrument
cluster.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
G WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed
above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking
distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.
X Drive on carefully.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
If the ABS control unit is faulty, there is also a possibility that other systems, such
as the navigation system or the automatic transmission, will not be available.

Z
278 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

Warning/ N Signal type


indicator Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
lamp
On-board computer and displays

! N The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
ABS is temporarily unavailable.
Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunction.
In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps may light up in the instrument
cluster.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
Possible causes are:
Rself-diagnosis is not yet complete
Rthe on-board voltage may be insufficient

G WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed
above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for exam-
ple.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking
distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is a risk of an accident.
X Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering movements at a speed
above 12 mph (20 km/h).
The functions mentioned above are available again when the warning lamp goes
out.
If the warning lamp is still on:
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.
X Drive on carefully.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 279

Warning/ N Signal type


indicator Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
lamp

On-board computer and displays


! N The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
EBD is not available due to a malfunction.
Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunction.
In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps may light up in the instrument
cluster.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
G WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed
above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for exam-
ple.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking
distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.
X Drive on carefully.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

$J N $ (USA only), J (Canada only): the red brake warning lamp and the yellow
÷å ESP®, ESP® OFF and ABS warning lamps are lit while the engine is running.
! ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning.
Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunction.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
G WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed
above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for exam-
ple.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking
distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.
X Drive on carefully.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Z
280 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

Warning/ N Signal type


indicator Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
lamp
On-board computer and displays

÷ N The yellow ESP® warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion.
ESP® or traction control has intervened because there is a risk of skidding or at
least one wheel has started to spin.
Cruise control or Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is deactivated.
X When pulling away, only depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary.
X Ease off the accelerator pedal while the vehicle is in motion.
X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.
X Do not deactivate ESP®.
In rare cases (Y page 71), it may be best to deactivate ESP®.
Observe the important safety notes on ESP® (Y page 70).

å N The yellow ESP® OFF warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
ESP® is deactivated.
G WARNING
If ESP® is switched off, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
Further driving systems or driving safety systems are thus restricted, e.g. Active
Blind Spot Assist. The system does not perform course-correcting brake applica-
tions.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X Reactivate ESP®.
In rare cases (Y page 71), it may be best to deactivate ESP®.
Observe the important safety notes on ESP® (Y page 70).
X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.

If ESP® cannot be activated:


X Drive on carefully.
X Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have ESP® checked.
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 281

Warning/ N Signal type


indicator Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
lamp

On-board computer and displays


÷å N The yellow ESP® and ESP® OFF warning lamps are lit while the engine is running.
ESP®, BAS, Active Brake Assist, Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function,
ESP® trailer stabilization, PRE‑SAFE®, PRE‑SAFE® PLUS, the HOLD function, hill
start assist, Crosswind Assist, STEER CONTROL, Active Lane Keeping Assist and
Active Blind Spot Assist are not available due to a malfunction.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
G WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed
above.
The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus increase.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.
X Drive on carefully.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

÷å N The yellow ESP® and ESP® OFF warning lamps are lit while the engine is running.
ESP®, BAS, Active Brake Assist, Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function,
ESP® trailer stabilization, PRE‑SAFE®, PRE‑SAFE® PLUS, the HOLD function, hill
start assist, Crosswind Assist, STEER CONTROL, Active Lane Keeping Assist and
Active Blind Spot Assist are not available due to a malfunction.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
Self-diagnosis is not yet complete
G WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed
above.
The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus increase.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering movements at a speed
above 12 mph (20 km/h).
The functions mentioned above are available again when the warning lamp goes
out.
If the warning lamp is still on:
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.
X Drive on carefully.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Z
282 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

Warning/ N Signal type


indicator Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
lamp
On-board computer and displays

F! N F (USA only), ! (Canada only): the red indicator lamp for the electric
parking brake flashes or is lit and/or the yellow warning lamp for the electric
parking brake is lit.
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.

6 N The red restraint system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
The restraint system is malfunctioning.
G WARNING
The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered uninten-
tionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.
There is an increased risk of injury.
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.
X Drive on carefully.
X Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have the restraint system checked.
For further information about the restraint system, see (Y page 44).
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 283

Engine
Warning/ N Signal type
indicator Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays


lamp
; N The yellow Check Engine warning lamp lights up while the engine is running.
There may be a malfunction, for example:
Rin the engine management
Rin the fuel injection system
Rin the exhaust system
Rin the ignition system (for vehicles with gasoline engines)
Rin the fuel system
The emission limit values may be exceeded and the engine may be in emergency
mode.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Vehicles with a diesel engine: the fuel tank has been run dry (Y page 153).
X Start the engine three to four times after refueling.
If the yellow Check Engine warning lamp goes out, emergency running mode is
canceled. The vehicle need not be checked.
In some states, you must immediately visit a qualified specialist workshop as soon
as the yellow Check Engine warning lamp lights up. This is due to the legal require-
ments in effect in these states. If in doubt, check whether such legal regulations
apply in the state in which you are currently driving.
8 N The yellow reserve fuel warning lamp lights up while the engine is running.
The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.
X Refuel at the nearest gas station.

8 N The yellow reserve fuel warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion.
In addition, the ; Check Engine warning lamp may light up.
The fuel filler cap is not closed correctly or the fuel system is leaking.
X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.
X If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed: close the fuel filler cap.
X If the fuel filler cap is closed: visit a qualified specialist workshop.

? N The red coolant warning lamp lights up while the engine is running and the
coolant temperature gauge is at the start of the scale.
The temperature sensor for the coolant temperature gauge is malfunctioning.
The coolant temperature is no longer being monitored. There is a risk of engine
damage if the coolant temperature is too high.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention
to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 156).
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Z
284 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

Warning/ N Signal type


indicator Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
lamp
On-board computer and displays

? N The red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running.
The coolant level is too low.
If the coolant level is correct, the airflow to the engine radiator may be blocked or
the electric engine radiator fan may be defective.
The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled sufficiently.
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention
to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 156).
X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine has
cooled down.
X Check the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warning notes
(Y page 324).
X If you have to add coolant frequently, have the engine cooling system checked.
X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by snow,
slush or ice.
X Do not start the engine again until the coolant temperature is below 248 ‡
(120 †). Otherwise, the engine could be damaged.
X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.
X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain
and stop-and-go traffic.

? N The red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running.
The coolant temperature has exceeded 248 ‡ (120 †). The airflow to the engine
radiator may be blocked or the coolant level may be too low.
G WARNING
The engine is not being cooled sufficiently and may be damaged.
Do not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause some fluids which
may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire.
Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burns which can occur
just by opening the hood.
There is a risk of injury.
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention
to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 156).
X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine has
cooled down.
X Check the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warning notes
(Y page 324).
X If you have to add coolant frequently, have the engine cooling system checked.
X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by snow,
slush or ice.
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 285

Warning/ N Signal type


indicator Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
lamp
X At coolant temperatures below 248 ‡ (120 †), drive to the nearest qualified

On-board computer and displays


specialist workshop.
X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain
and stop-and-go traffic.

Driving systems
Warning/ N Signal type
indicator Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
lamp
· N The red distance warning lamp lights up while the vehicle is in motion. A warning
tone also sounds.
You are approaching a vehicle, a pedestrian or a stationary obstacle in your line of
travel at too high a speed.
X Be prepared to brake immediately.
X Pay careful attention to the traffic situation. You may have to brake or take
evasive action.
Further information on Distance Pilot DISTRONIC (Y page 171).
Further information on the distance warning function of Active Brake Assist
(Y page 67).
Further information on the distance warning function of Active Brake Assist with
cross-traffic function (Y page 72).

Z
286 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

Tires
Warning/ N Signal type
indicator Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
On-board computer and displays

lamp
h N The yellow tire pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) is lit.
The tire pressure monitor has detected a loss of pressure in at least one of the tires.
G WARNING
Tire pressures that are too low pose the following hazards:
Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase.
Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tire trac-
tion.
Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly
impaired.
There is a risk of an accident.
X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking maneuvers. Pay
attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 156).
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.
X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tire
(Y page 335).
X Check the tire pressure (Y page 358).
X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.

h N The yellow tire pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction)


flashes for approximately one minute and then remains lit.
The tire pressure monitor is faulty.
G WARNING
The system is possibly unable to recognize or register low tire pressure.
There is a risk of an accident.
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Function restrictions 287

General notes Navigation announcements are intended to


direct you while driving without diverting your
attention from the road and driving.
The multimedia system section in this Opera-
tor's Manual describes the basic principles for Please always use this feature instead of con-
operation. More information can be found in the sulting the map display for directions. Looking
Digital Operator's Manual. at the icons or map display can distract you from
traffic conditions and driving, and increase the
risk of an accident.
Important safety notes This equipment complies with FCC radiation
exposure limits set forth for uncontrolled equip-
ment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF)
G WARNING Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65.
If you operate information systems and com- This equipment has very low levels of RF energy
munication equipment integrated in the vehi- that is deemed to comply without maximum
permissive exposure evaluation (MPE). How-

Multimedia system
cle when driving, you may be distracted from
ever, it is recommended to install it at a distance
the traffic situation. You could also lose con- of at least 8 inches (approx. 20 cm) between the
trol of the vehicle. There is a risk of an acci- radiation source and a person's body (not
dent. including limbs such as hands, wrists, feet and
Only operate this equipment when the traffic legs).
situation permits. If you are not sure that this G WARNING
is possible, park the vehicle paying attention Modifications to electronic components, their
to traffic conditions and operate the equip- software as well as wiring can impair their
ment when the vehicle is stationary. function and/or the function of other net-
You must observe the legal requirements for the worked components. In particular, systems
country in which you are currently driving when relevant to safety could also be affected. As a
operating the multimedia system. result, these may no longer function as inten-
The multimedia system calculates the route to ded and/or jeopardize the operating safety of
the destination without taking the following into the vehicle. There is an increased risk of an
account, for example: accident and injury.
Rtraffic lights Never tamper with the wiring as well as elec-
Rstop and yield signs tronic components or their software. You
Rparking or stopping restrictions should have all work to electrical and elec-
Rroad narrowing tronic equipment carried out at a qualified
Rother road and traffic rules and regulations specialist workshop.
The multimedia system may give incorrect nav-
igation recommendations if the actual street/
traffic situation does not correspond with the Function restrictions
digital map's data.
For example: For safety reasons, some functions are restric-
Ra diverted route ted or unavailable while the vehicle is in motion.
Rthe road layout or the direction of a one-way You will notice this, for example, because either
street has been changed you will not be able to select certain menu items
or a message will appear to this effect.
For this reason, you must always observe road
and traffic rules and regulations during your
journey. Road and traffic rules and regulations
always have priority over multimedia system
driving recommendations.

Z
288 Operating system

Operating system the media source or set the volume, the sound
is automatically switched on.
Overview i Navigation announcements will be heard
even if the sound is muted.
General notes
! Do not use the space in front of the display Functions
for storage. Objects placed here could dam- The multimedia system has the following func-
age the display or impair its function. Avoid tions:
any direct contact with the display surface.
Pressure on the display surface may result in RRadio mode
impairments to the display, which could be RMedia mode with media search
irreversible. RSound systems
Wearing polarized sunglasses may impair your RNavigation system
ability to read the display. COMAND: navigation via the hard drive
Multimedia system

The display has an automatic temperature-con- Audio 20: navigation via SD card
trolled switch-off feature. The brightness is RCommunication functions
automatically reduced if the temperature is too
high. The display may temporarily switch off RSIRIUS Weather (COMAND)
completely. RVehicle functions with system settings
RFavorites functions
Cleaning instructions
Controller
! Do not touch the display. The display has a
very sensitive high-gloss surface; there is a The controller in the center console lets you:
risk of scratching. If you have to clean the Rselect menu items on the display
screen, however, use a mild cleaning agent
Renter characters
and a soft, lint-free cloth.
Rselect a destination on the map
The display must be switched off and have
Rsave entries
cooled down before you start cleaning. Do not
apply pressure to the display surface when The controller can be:
cleaning it, as this could cause irreversible dam- Rturned 3
age to the display.
Rslid left or right 1
Rslid forwards or back 4
Switching the multimedia system
Rslid diagonally 2
on/off
Rpressed briefly or pressed and held7
X Press the q control knob.
Back button
Adjusting the volume
You can use the % button to exit a menu or to
X Turn the q control knob. call up the main menu of the current operating
The volume is adjusted: mode.
X To exit the menu: briefly press the %
Rfor the currently selected media source
button.
Rduring traffic or navigation announcements
The multimedia system changes to the next
Rin hands-free mode during an active call higher menu level in the current operating
mode.
Switching the sound on or off X To call up the main menu: press the %
button for longer than two seconds.
X Press the 8 button on the control panel. The multimedia system changes to the main
If the audio output is switched off, the status menu of the current operating mode.
line will show the 8 symbol. If you switch
Operating system 289

Favorites button Navigation mode


You can assign predefined functions using the Important safety notes
g favorites button and call them up by press-
ing the button (Y page 289). G WARNING
If you operate information systems and com-
Favorites munication equipment integrated in the vehi-
cle when driving, you may be distracted from
Calling up and exiting favorites the traffic situation. You could also lose con-
trol of the vehicle. There is a risk of an acci-
X To call up: press the g button on the con-
troller. dent.
X Select a favorite, e.g. Vehicle
Vehicle. Only operate this equipment when the traffic
The favorites are displayed. situation permits. If you are not sure that this

Multimedia system
X To exit: press the g button again. is possible, park the vehicle paying attention
to traffic conditions and operate the equip-
Adding favorites ment when the vehicle is stationary.

You must observe the legal requirements for the


Adding predefined favorites country in which you are currently driving when
X Press the g button. operating the navigation system.
X COMAND: slide 6 the controller.
X Audio 20: slide 5 or 6 the controller. General notes
The menu bar is displayed.
Among other things, correct functioning of the
X Select Reassign.
Reassign navigation system depends on GPS reception. In
The categories are displayed. certain situations, GPS reception may be
X Select a category. impaired, there may be interference or there
The favorites are displayed. may be no reception at all, e.g. in tunnels or
X Select a favorite. parking garages.
X COMAND: to add the favorite to the desired Audio 20 is equipped with Garmin® MAP PILOT
position, turn and press the controller. (see the manufacturer's operating instructions).
If a favorite has already been added at this The Garmin® MAP PILOT operating instructions
position, it will be overwritten. are stored on the SD card as a PDF file. The SD
X Audio 20: to add the favorite to the desired card box contains a quick guide.
position, turn, slide 5 or 6 and press the The following descriptions apply to navigation
controller. with COMAND. Further information can be
If a favorite has already been added at this found in the Digital Operator's Manual.
position, it will be overwritten.
Selecting a route type and route options
Adding your own favorites
You can add climate control as a favorite, for Multimedia system:
example. X NaviQNavigation
Select Navi Navigation.
X Select VehicleQVehicle
Vehicle Vehicle Settings.
Settings The map shows the vehicle's current position.
X Press and hold the g button until the X Slide 6 the controller.
favorites are displayed. X Select Options
OptionsQRoute
Route Settings.
Settings
X Add a favorite to the desired position. Notes for route types:
If a favorite has already been added at this
REco Route
position, it will be overwritten.
RDynamic Traffic Route

Z
290 Operating system

Traffic reports on the route for the route guid- X Select the location.
ance are taken into account (not available in If available, the ZIP code is shown. If there are
all countries). different ZIP codes available for the location,
RDynamic TRF. Route After Request the corresponding digits are displayed with an
You can decide whether or not current traffic X.
reports should be included in the route cal- X Enter the street and house number.
culation (not available in all countries). The address is in the menu.
RCalculate Alternative Routes Further options for destination entry:
Different routes are being calculated. In order Rsearch for a keyword
to do so, instead of Start
Start, select the menu The keyword search finds destinations using
item Continue.
Continue fragments of words.
X To avoid/use route options: select Avoid
Rselect the last destination
Options.
Options
Rselect a contact
X Select a route option.
Rselect a POI
Multimedia system

Notes for route options:


You can search for a POI by location, name or
RUse Toll Roads telephone number.
The route calculation includes roads which Rselect destination on the map
require you to pay a usage fee (toll). Renter intermediate destination
RNumber of Occupants in the Vehicle:
You can map the route to the destination
(only available in the USA) yourself with up to four intermediate destina-
Prerequisite: your vehicle meets the access tions.
conditions for carpool lanes. Rselect destinations from Mercedes-Benz
Carpool lanes will be included if the carpool Apps
lanes option is activated. Rselect geo-coordinates

Entering an address Calculating the route


Multimedia system: Prerequisite: the address has been entered and
X NaviQNavigation
Select Navi Navigation. is in the menu.
The map shows the vehicle's current position. X Select Start or Continue
Continue.
X Slide 6 the controller. The route is calculated with the selected route
X Select Destination
DestinationQAddressAddress Entry.
Entry type and the selected route options.
Enter an address, e.g. as follows: If route guidance has already been activated,
a prompt will appear asking whether you wish
Rcity or ZIP code, street, house number
to end the current route guidance.
Rstate/province, city or ZIP code X Select Cancel Active Route Guidance or
Rcity or ZIP code, center Set as Intermediate Destination.
Destination
Rstreet, city or ZIP code, intersection Cancel Active Route Guidance cancels
X Select City
City. the current route guidance and starts route
The city in which the vehicle is currently loca- calculation to the new destination.
ted (current vehicle position) is at the top. Set as Intermediate Destination adds
Below this, you will see locations for which the new destination in addition to the existing
route guidance has already been carried out. destination and opens the intermediate des-
X Enter the city. tinations list.
The G symbol: the location is contained on
the digital map multiple times.
X To switch to the list: slide 5 the control-
ler.
Operating system 291

Connecting a mobile phone procedure that is relevant for your mobile phone
(COMAND) available. The mobile phone is always connec-
ted automatically after authorization. Further
Requirements information on using a mobile phone with the
multimedia system (see the Digital Operator's
For telephony via the Bluetooth® interface, you Manual).
require a Bluetooth®-capable mobile phone. The If the multimedia system does not detect your
mobile phone must support Hands-Free Profile mobile phone, this may be due to particular
1.0 or above. security settings on your mobile phone (see the
Multimedia system: manufacturer's operating instructions).
Only one mobile phone can be connected to the
X Select Vehicle
VehicleQSystem
System Set‐ multimedia system at any one time.
tingsQActivate
tings Activate Bluetooth.
Bluetooth
Searching for a mobile phone
X Activate Bluetooth® O.
Multimedia system:
Mobile phone:

Multimedia system
X Select Tel/®QConn.
Tel/ Conn.
X Activate Bluetooth® and, if necessary, Blue- Device Search for PhonesQStart
DeviceQSearch Phones Start
tooth® visibility for other devices (see the Search.
Search
manufacturer's operating instructions). The available mobile phones are displayed.
The Bluetooth® device names for all of one man- Symbols in the device list
ufacturer's products might be identical. To
make it possible to clearly identify your mobile Sym- Explanation
phone, change the device name (see the man- bol
ufacturer's operating instructions). Ï New mobile phone found, not yet
If the mobile phone supports the PBAP (Phone authorized.
Book Access Profile) and MAP (Message
Access Profile) Bluetooth® profiles, the follow- Ñ Mobile phone is authorized, but is
ing information will be transmitted after you not connected.
connect:
RPhone book Connecting a mobile phone
RCall lists Authorization using Secure Simple Pairing:
RText messages and e-mail X Select mobile phone.
A code is displayed in the multimedia system
i Further information on suitable mobile and on the mobile phone.
phones can be found at: http://
X If codes match: select Yes on the multimedia
www.mercedes-benz.com/connect
system.
i In the USA, you can get in touch with the X Confirm code on the mobile phone. Depend-
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center ing on the mobile phone used, confirm the
on 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372). connection to the multimedia system and for
In Canada, you can get in touch with the Cus- the PBAP and MAP Bluetooth® profiles. The
tomer Relations Center on 1-800-387-0100. prompt to confirm may take up to two
minutes to be displayed (see the manufactur-
Searching for and authorizing (connect- er's operating instructions).
ing) a mobile phone X If the codes are different: select No on the
multimedia system.
Before using your mobile phone with the multi- The process is canceled.
media system for the first time, you will need to Repeat authorization.
search for the phone and then authorize (con-
nect) it. Depending on the mobile phone, author-
ization either takes place by means of Secure
Simple Pairing or by entering a passkey. The
multimedia system automatically makes the

Z
292 Operating system

Authorization by entering a passkey (passcode): If the mobile phone supports the PBAP (Phone
X Select the Bluetooth® name of the mobile Book Access Profile) and MAP (Message
phone. Access Profile) Bluetooth® profiles, the follow-
The input menu for the passkey is displayed. ing information is transmitted after you connect
X Choose a one to sixteen-digit number combi-
the main telephone:
nation as a passkey. RPhone book
X Enter the passkey on the multimedia system. RCall lists
X Press ¬ to confirm. RText messages and e-mail
X Enter and confirm the passkey on the mobile
i Further information on suitable mobile
phone. Depending on the mobile phone used, phones can be found at: http://
confirm the connection to the multimedia sys- www.mercedes-benz.com/connect
tem and for the PBAP and MAP Bluetooth®
profiles. The prompt to confirm may take up i In the USA, you can get in touch with the
to two minutes to be displayed (see the man- Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
Multimedia system

ufacturer's operating instructions). on 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372).


In Canada, you can get in touch with the Cus-
tomer Relations Center on 1-800-387-0100.
Connecting a mobile phone (Audio 20)
Searching for and authorizing (connect-
Requirements ing) a mobile phone
For telephony via the Bluetooth® interface, you Before using your mobile phone with the multi-
require at least one Bluetooth®-capable mobile media system for the first time, you will need to
phone depending on use of one-telephone search for the phone and then authorize (con-
mode or two-telephone mode. The mobile nect) it. Depending on the mobile phone, author-
phone must support Hands-Free Profile 1.0 or ization either takes place by means of Secure
above. Simple Pairing or by entering a passkey. The
In two-telephone mode you can use all the multimedia system automatically makes the
functions of the multimedia system with the procedure that is relevant for your mobile phone
main telephone. With the additional tele- available. The mobile phone is always connec-
phone, you can receive incoming calls. ted automatically after authorization. Further
information on using a mobile phone with the
Multimedia system: multimedia system (see the Digital Operator's
X Select Vehicle
VehicleQSystem
System Set‐ Manual).
tings
tingsQActivate
Activate Bluetooth.
Bluetooth If the multimedia system does not detect your
X Activate Bluetooth® O. mobile phone, this may be due to particular
security settings on your mobile phone (see the
Mobile phone: manufacturer's operating instructions).
X Activate Bluetooth® and, if necessary, Blue- Searching for a mobile phone
tooth® visibility for other devices (see the Multimedia system:
manufacturer's operating instructions). X Select Tel/®QConn.
Tel/ Conn. DeviceQCon‐
Device Con‐
The Bluetooth® device names for all of one man- nect New Device
Device.
ufacturer's products might be identical. To X Select Connect via Vehicle.
Vehicle
make it possible to clearly identify your mobile X Select mobile phone.
phone, change the device name (see the man-
ufacturer's operating instructions). Connecting a mobile phone
X One-telephone mode: select Connect as
New Main Phone.
Phone
X Two-telephone mode: select Connect as
Additional Phone when a mobile phone is
already connected.
Operating system 293

X Authorization using Secure Simple Pair- The following external media sources can be
ing: used:
A code is displayed in the multimedia system RApple® devices (e.g. iPhone®)
and on the mobile phone. RUSB devices (e.g. USB stick, MP3 player)
X Confirm code on the mobile phone. Depend- (Y page 294)
ing on the mobile phone used, confirm the RCD
connection to the multimedia system and for
RDVD (COMAND)
the PBAP and MAP Bluetooth® profiles. The
prompt to confirm may take up to two RSD cards
minutes to be displayed (see the manufactur- Rvia devices connected by Bluetooth®
er's operating instructions).
X If the codes are different: select No on the
i Information on single CD/DVD drive or DVD
multimedia system. changer (see the Digital Operator's Manual).
The process is canceled.
Repeat authorization. Selecting using the device list

Multimedia system
or Multimedia system:
X Authorization by entering a passkey
X Select Media
MediaQDevices
Devices.
(passcode): enter any one- to sixteen-digit The available media sources will be shown.
number sequence which you have chosen The # dot indicates the current setting.
yourself into the passkey input menu.
X Select the media source.
X Press ¬ to confirm.
Playable files are played.
X Enter and confirm the passkey on the mobile
phone. Depending on the mobile phone used,
confirm the connection to the multimedia sys- Inserting/removing an SD card
tem and for the PBAP and MAP Bluetooth®
profiles. The prompt to confirm may take up Important safety notes
to two minutes to be displayed (see the man- G WARNING
ufacturer's operating instructions).
SD cards are small parts. They can be swal-
lowed and cause choking. This poses an
Symbols in the device manager increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
The symbols are shown in color depending on Keep the SD card out of the reach of children.
their use. If a SD card is swallowed, seek medical atten-
Symbol Explanation tion immediately.

Mobile phone connected to the ! If you are no longer using the SD card, you
multimedia system should remove it and store it outside the vehi-
cle. High temperatures can damage the card.
Main telephone with full range of
functions Inserting an SD card
Additional telephone for incoming The SD card slot is located on the control panel.
calls in two telephone mode X Insert the SD card into the SD card slot until
the SD card engages. The side with the con-
tacts must face down.
Media mode Removing an SD card
General notes X Press the SD card.
The SD card is ejected.
If you wish to play external media sources, the X Remove the SD card.
appropriate media mode must already be turned
on. Further information on media mode (see the
Digital Operator's Manual).

Z
294 Operating system

Connecting USB devices

X Connect the USB device to the USB port.


Multimedia system

There are two USB ports in the stowage space


under the armrest.
X Select the media source (Y page 293).

CD/DVD drive and AUX jacks (Rear Seat


Entertainment System)

: Disc slot
; AUX, right-hand (R) jack for audio signal
(red)
= AUX, left-hand (L) jack for audio signal
(white)
? AUX, video (V) jack (yellow)
A Disc eject button
The AUX jacks shown are for the AUX drive.
Identical jacks can be found on the right-hand
side of the rear-compartment screens (AUX dis-
play).
Stowage areas 295

Stowage areas are on the vehicle identification plate on the B-


pillar of the driver's door (Y page 361).
Loading guidelines Observe the notes on loading the vehicle
(Y page 361).
G WARNING The handling characteristics of a laden vehicle
If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or are dependent on the distribution of the load
not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip within the vehicle. For this reason, you should
over or be flung around and thereby hit vehicle observe the following notes when transporting a
load:
occupants. There is a risk of injury, particu-
larly in the event of sudden braking or a sud- RNever exceed the maximum permissible
den change in direction. gross vehicle mass or the gross axle weight
rating for the vehicle (including occupants).
Always store objects so that they cannot be RThe cargo compartment is the preferred place
flung around. Secure objects, luggage or to carry objects.
loads against slipping or tipping before the RPosition heavy loads as far forward as possi-
journey. ble and as low down in the cargo compart-

Stowage and features


ment as possible.
G WARNING RThe load must not protrude above the upper
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust edge of the seat backrests.
gases such as carbon monoxide. If the tailgate RAlways place the load against the rear or front
is open when the engine is running, particu- seat backrests. Make sure that the seat
backrests are securely locked into place.
larly if the vehicle is moving, exhaust fumes
RAlways place the load behind unoccupied
could enter the passenger compartment.
seats if possible.
There is a risk of poisoning.
RUse the cargo tie-down rings and the parcel
Turn off the engine before opening the tail- nets to transport loads and luggage.
gate. Never drive with the tailgate open. RUse cargo tie-down rings and fastening mate-
rials appropriate for the weight and size of the
G WARNING load.
The exhaust tail pipe and tail pipe trim can RSecure the load with sufficiently strong and
become very hot. If you come into contact wear-resistant tie-downs. Pad sharp edges for
protection.
with these parts of the vehicle, you could burn
yourself. There is a risk of injury.
Always be particularly careful around the Stowage spaces
exhaust tail pipe and the tail pipe trim. Allow
these components to cool down before touch- Important safety notes
ing them.
G WARNING
The gross vehicle weight (GVW) is the vehicle If you transport objects in the vehicle interior
weight including fuel, vehicle tool kit, spare and these are not adequately secured, they
wheel, installed accessories, vehicle occupants could slip or be flung around and thereby
and luggage/cargo.
strike vehicle occupants. In addition, cup
Do not exceed the load limit or permitted gross holders, open stowage spaces and mobile
vehicle weight rating (GVWR) for your vehicle.
The gross load limit and the GVWR are specified phone brackets may not always be able to
on the vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar hold the objects placed in them in the event of
of the driver's door (Y page 361). an accident. There is a risk of injury, particu-
The load must also be distributed so that the larly in the event of sharp braking or sudden
weight on each axle never exceeds the gross changes of direction.
axle weight rating (GAWR) for the front and rear
axles. The specifications for GVWR and GAWR
Z
296 Stowage areas

RAlways stow objects in such a way that they


cannot be tossed about in these or similar
situations.
RAlways make sure that objects do not pro-
trude out of the stowage spaces, luggage
nets or stowage nets.
REnsure that closable stowage spaces are
shut before beginning your journey.
RAlways stow and secure heavy, hard, poin-
ted, sharp-edged, fragile or large objects in
the cargo compartment. Partition : for stowing flat objects is located in
the upper section of the glove box. It can be
Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 295). removed to increase the stowage space in the
glove box.
Stowage and features

Glove box X To remove: pull out partition :.


X To install: insert partition : and push it back
until it engages.

Stowage compartment under the arm-


rest

X To open: pull handle : and open glove box


flap ;.
X To close: fold glove box flap ; up until it
engages.
i The glove box can be cooled (Y page 132).
Vehicles without touchpad
X To open: pull handle : up.
The armrest folds out.

1 Glove box unlocked


2 Glove box locked
The glove box can be locked and unlocked using
the mechanical key.
Stowage areas 297

Vehicles with touchpad and COMAND Stowage compartment in the rear cen-
X To open: press button : at the front. ter console
Armrest ; folds out.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, there is a
multimedia connector unit with two USB ports,
e.g. for iPod®, iPhone® or MP3 player in the
stowage compartment .
i There is a removable stowage tray in the
storage compartment, in which objects such
as an iPod® can be stored.

Eyeglasses compartment

X To open: briefly press the stowage compart-

Stowage and features


ment marking.
The stowage compartment opens.
i Depending on the vehicle's equipment,
there may be open stowage spaces above and
below the stowage compartment.

Stowage net
G WARNING
X To open: press marking :.
The eyeglasses compartment opens down. Vehicles with the Occupant Classification
X To close: press marking : again and the System (OCS):
eyeglasses compartment moves up and If the gross weight of the objects in the stow-
engages. age net on the back of the front-passenger
Make sure that the eyeglasses compartment is seat is greater than 4.4 lb (2 kg), OCS cannot
always closed while the vehicle is in motion. correctly assess the occupant's weight cate-
gory. The front-passenger front air bag could
Stowage compartment in the front cen- deploy without cause, or may fail to deploy in
ter console the event of an accident. This poses an
increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
Always observe the permissible gross weight
of 4.4 lb (2 kg). Stow and secure heavy
objects in the cargo compartment.

Stowage nets are located in the front-passenger


footwell and on the back of the driver's and the
front-passenger seat.
Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 295)
and the safety notes regarding stowage spaces
(Y page 295).

X To open: slide cover : forwards.


Stowage compartment ; appears.
X To close: pull cover : back as far as it will go.

Z
298 Stowage areas

Through-loading facility in the rear Cargo compartment enlargement


There is a through-loading facility above the Important safety notes
armrest in the rear for transporting longer
objects. You can continue to use both of the G WARNING
outer rear seats.
If the rear bench seat/rear seat and seat
If objects or loads are not secured when being
transported in the through-loading facility, they backrest are not engaged they could fold for-
could slip or be thrown around and thereby hit wards, e.g. when braking suddenly or in the
vehicle occupants. event of an accident.
Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 295) RThe vehicle occupant would thereby be
and the safety notes regarding stowage spaces pushed into the seat belt by the rear bench
(Y page 295). seat/rear seat or by the seat backrest. The
seat belt can no longer offer the intended
level of protection and could even cause
injuries.
Stowage and features

RObjects or loads in the trunk/cargo com-


partment cannot be restrained by the seat
backrest.
There is an increased risk of injury.
Before every trip, make sure that the seat
backrests and the rear bench seat/rear seat
are engaged.
The through-loading facility is opened from the
cargo compartment. Make sure that the seat backrest and the seat
cushion are correctly engaged in position. To do
X Fold down the rear seat armrest. so, pull firmly on the seat backrest.
X Pull the center head restraint on the rear
bench seat into the uppermost position ! Fold the seat cushion upwards before fold-
(Y page 99). ing the rear bench seat forward. Otherwise,
the backrests may be damaged.
X Slide release catch : to the left and swing
flap ; to the left until it is lying on the rear When the backrest is folded forwards, the
side of the rear bench seat. front seats should not be moved to their rear-
most position. Otherwise, the front seats and
the rear bench seat could be damaged.
! The backrest is heavy. Therefore, take care
when folding it down. Make sure that the head
restraints are pushed all the way in so that the
backrests and seat cushions are not dam-
aged.
Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 295).
The left-hand and right-hand rear seat backrests
can be folded forward separately to increase the
cargo compartment capacity.

X Push cover = forward until it is lying on the


rear seat armrest.
Stowage areas 299

Folding the rear bench seat forward Folding the rear bench seat back

If the driver's or front-passenger seat is set for a X Fold seat backrest ; back until it engages.
larger person, it may not be possible to fold the Make sure not to trap the seat belt while doing

Stowage and features


rear bench seat forward. In this case, move the so.
front seats as far forward as possible. X Swing seat cushion : back.
X Move the head restraints to the lowest posi- X Pull up and adjust the head restraints if nec-
tion (Y page 100). essary (Y page 100).
X Fold seat cushion : up.

Securing loads
Cargo tie-down rings
G WARNING
The Top Tether anchorages cannot secure a
load. If you secure a load with the Top Tether
anchorages, the Top Tether anchorages could
be pulled out during braking, abrupt changes
in direction or in the event of an accident. The
load could slip, tip over or be flung around and
X Pull release handle ; up in the direction of thereby hit vehicle occupants. There is a risk
the arrow until the backrest is fully released.
of injury.
X Fold the backrest forward until it reaches the
cargo compartment position. Only use the cargo tie down rings when secur-
ing a load.

Observe the following notes on securing loads:


RSecure the load using the cargo tie-down
rings.
RDistribute the load on the cargo tie-down
rings evenly.
RDo not use elastic straps or nets to secure a
load, as these are only intended as an anti-slip
protection for light loads.
RDo not route tie-downs across sharp edges or
corners.
X Guide seat belts ; under respective clips :. RPad sharp edges for protection.

Z
300 Stowage areas

Securing hooks

There are four cargo tie-down rings : in the


cargo compartment.
The parcel net must be pushed down before There is a securing hook : on each side of the
using the cargo tie-down rings on the front right- cargo compartment.
Stowage and features

hand side of the cargo compartment. Only secure lightweight luggage items on the
securing hooks (maximum 9 lbs (4 kg)).
Bag hook
G WARNING Cargo compartment cover
The bag hooks cannot restrain heavy objects Important safety notes
or items of luggage. Objects or items of lug-
gage could be flung around and thereby hit G WARNING
vehicle occupants when braking or abruptly On its own, the cargo compartment cover
changing directions. There is a risk of injury. cannot secure or restrain heavy objects,
Only hang light objects on the bag hooks. items of luggage and heavy loads. You could
Never hang hard, sharp-edged or fragile be hit by an unsecured load during sudden
objects on the bag hooks. changes in direction, braking or in the event of
an accident. There is an increased risk of
! The bag hook can bear a maximum load of injury or even fatal injury.
6.6lbs (3kg) and should not be used to secure
a load. Always store objects so that they cannot be
flung around. Secure objects, luggage or
loads against slipping or tipping over, e.g. by
using tie downs, even if you are using the
cargo compartment cover.

! When loading the vehicle, make sure that


you do not stack the load in the cargo com-
partment higher than the lower edge of the
side windows. Do not place heavy objects on
top of the cargo compartment cover.
A cargo compartment cover or a combined
cargo cover and net (cargo compartment cover
There is a bag hook in the cargo compartment with cargo net) is installed, depending on equip-
on the left-hand side. ment, behind the rear bench seat backrest.
X Press bag hook marking :.
X Turn bag hook : until it engages.
Stowage areas 301

Extending/retracting the cargo com- X To install: place cargo compartment


partment cover cover : into anchorage ; on the right or
left-hand side.
X Push in opposite end cap = of cargo com-
partment cover : in the direction of the
arrow and insert cargo compartment
cover : into opposite anchorage ;.

Cargo net in combined cargo cover


and net
Important safety notes
G WARNING
X To extend: pull the cargo compartment cover
On its own, the cargo net cannot secure or

Stowage and features


back by grab handle : and clip it into retain-
ers ; on the left and right. restrain heavy objects, items of luggage and
X To retract: unhook the cargo compartment heavy loads. You could be hit by an unsecured
cover from left-hand and right-hand retain- load during sudden changes in direction,
ers ;. braking or in the event of an accident. There is
X Guide cargo compartment cover forwards by an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
grab handle : until it is completely rolled up. Always store objects so that they cannot be
flung around. Secure objects, luggage or
Removing/installing the cargo com- loads against slipping or tipping over, e.g. by
partment cover (without integrated using tie downs, even if you are using the
cargo net) cargo net.

It is important to use a cargo net if you load the


vehicle with small objects above the seat backr-
ests. For safety reasons, always use a cargo net
when transporting loads.
Damaged cargo nets can no longer fulfill their
protective function and must be replaced. Visit a
qualified specialist workshop.

Attaching the cargo net

X To remove: make sure that cargo compart-


ment cover : is rolled up.
X Push end cap = of cargo compartment
cover : in the direction of the arrow on the
right or left-hand side.
X Push cargo compartment cover : into oppo-
site anchorage ;.
X Remove cargo compartment cover :.

X Pull the cargo net up by tab : and hook it into


eyelets ; using both hands.

Z
302 Stowage areas

Coat hooks on the tailgate Installation

: Coat hook X Open cargo compartment floor ;


(Y page 302).
Stowage and features

X Attach brackets : in the desired position on


EASY-PACK load-securing kit the side of cargo compartment floor ;.
X Close cargo compartment floor ;.
General notes
The EASY-PACK load-securing kit allows you to
use your cargo compartment for a variety of
purposes. The following accessory parts are
located under the cargo compartment floor:
Ra telescopic rod
Rtwo mounting elements
Rtwo brackets

Important safety notes


G WARNING
X Turn mounting elements = to =.
If you drive when the cargo compartment floor
is open, objects could be flung around, thus X Insert mounting elements = into brack-
ets :.
striking vehicle occupants. There is a risk of
X Pull telescopic rod ? apart.
injury, particularly in the event of sudden
X Insert telescopic rod ? into mounting ele-
braking or a sudden change in direction.
ments =.
Always close the cargo compartment floor X Turn both mounting elements = to & until
before a journey. you feel them engage.

Stowage well under the cargo com-


partment floor
Important safety notes
G WARNING
If you drive when the cargo compartment floor
is open, objects could be flung around, thus
striking vehicle occupants. There is a risk of
Stowage areas 303

injury, particularly in the event of sudden


braking or a sudden change in direction.
Always close the cargo compartment floor
before a journey.

The accessory parts of the EASY–PACK load-


securing kit, as well as TIREFIT and the tire-
changing tools are located in the removable
insert in the stowage well.

Opening/closing the cargo compart-


ment floor X Attach hook = to the cargo compartment's
upper seal ?.
X To close: detach hook = from the cargo
compartment's upper seal ?.

Stowage and features


X Fasten hook = to the retainer on the under-
side of the cargo compartment floor.
X Fold the cargo compartment floor down.
X Press the cargo compartment floor down ;
until it engages.
i To remove the cargo compartment floor,
undo the press studs below the cargo com-
partment floor. When you re-install the cargo
X To open: holding the ribbing, press handle : compartment floor, fasten it with the press
studs.
down ;.
Handle : folds up.
X Swing the cargo compartment floor up using Locking/unlocking the cargo compart-
handle : until it rests against the cargo com- ment floor
partment cover.

1 Cargo compartment floor unlocked


X Fold out hook = on the underside of the 2 Cargo compartment floor locked
cargo compartment floor in the direction of The cargo compartment floor can be locked and
the arrow. unlocked using the mechanical key.

Z
304 Features

Roof carrier X Secure the roof carrier to roof rails :. In


doing so, observe the manufacturer's instal-
Important safety notes lation instructions.

G WARNING
When you load the roof, the center of gravity Features
of the vehicle rises and the driving character-
istics change. If you exceed the maximum roof Cup holder
load, the driving characteristics, as well as Important safety notes
steering and braking, will be greatly impaired.
There is a risk of an accident. G WARNING
Never exceed the maximum roof load and If you transport objects in the vehicle interior
adjust your driving style. and these are not adequately secured, they
could slip or be flung around and thereby
! Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only strike vehicle occupants. In addition, cup
Stowage and features

use roof carriers that have been tested and holders, open stowage spaces and mobile
approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. This
helps to prevent damage to the vehicle. phone brackets may not always be able to
hold the objects placed in them in the event of
Position the load on the roof carrier in such a
way that the vehicle will not sustain damage an accident. There is a risk of injury, particu-
even when it is in motion. larly in the event of sharp braking or sudden
Depending on the vehicle equipment, ensure changes of direction.
that when the roof carrier is installed you can: RAlways stow objects in such a way that they
Rraise the sliding sunroof fully cannot be tossed about in these or similar
Ropen the panorama roof with power tilt/ situations.
sliding panel fully RAlways make sure that objects do not pro-
Ropen the tailgate fully trude out of the stowage spaces, luggage
You will find information on the maximum roof nets or stowage nets.
load in the "Technical data" section REnsure that closable stowage spaces are
(Y page 390). shut before beginning your journey.
An incorrectly secured roof carrier or roof load
RAlways stow and secure heavy, hard, poin-
may become detached from the vehicle. You
must therefore ensure that you observe the roof ted, sharp-edged, fragile or large objects in
carrier manufacturer's installation instructions. the cargo compartment.

Attaching the roof carrier Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 295).
! Only use the cup holders for containers of
the right size and which have lids. The drinks
could otherwise spill.
! Do not expose drinks bottles in the cup
holder in the center console to continuous,
strong and direct sunlight. The passenger
compartment in the area of the center con-
sole can otherwise be damaged by the con-
centrated and reflected sunlight.
Do not keep the KEYLESS-GO key in the tem-
perature-controlled cup holder (Y page 305).
Otherwise, the KEYLESS-GO key will not be rec-
ognized.
Features 305

The stowage compartments in the doors provide X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
space for bottles with a capacity of up to tion lock.
34 fl. oz. (1.0 l). X To switch on the cooling function: press
The bottles are not secured or prevented from and hold button = until the blue indicator
tipping over. Therefore, do not place any open lamp on the button lights up.
drink containers in the stowage compartments. X To switch on the heating function: press
and hold button = until the red indicator
Cup holder in the front center console lamp on the button lights up.
X To switch off the function: press and hold
button = until the indicator lamp on the but-
ton goes out.
When the heating function is used, the metal
insert of the cup holder is heated. Once a certain
temperature is reached, residual heat indicator
lamp ; lights up. This means that the metal
insert of the cup holder is hot. For this reason,

Stowage and features


you must not reach into the cup holder metal
insert.
Do not use hard or sharp objects to clean the
cup holder. Use only a soft cloth to clean it.
: Cup holder
; Cover Cup holder in the rear seat armrest
X To open: slide cover ; to its foremost posi- ! Do not sit on or support your body weight on
tion. the rear seat armrest when it is folded down,
X To close: pull cover ; back as far as it will go. as you could otherwise damage it.
You can remove the cup holder's rubber mat for
cleaning. Clean with clear, lukewarm water only.

Temperature-controlled cup holder in


the front-compartment center console

X Fold down the rear seat armrest.


Cup holder : is located in the rear seat arm-
rest.

: Cup holder Sun visors


; Residual heat indicator lamp
Overview
= Switch
The temperature-controlled cup holder can be G WARNING
used to keep cold drinks cool and warm drinks If the mirror cover of the vanity mirror is folded
warm. up when the vehicle is in motion, you could be

Z
306 Features

blinded by incident light. There is a risk of an Roller sunblinds on the rear side win-
accident. dows
Always keep the mirror cover folded down ! Always guide the roller sunblind by hand. Do
while driving. not let it snap back suddenly as this would
damage the automatic roller mechanism.
! Do not drive the vehicle with the roller sun-
blind hooked in and the side windows opened
simultaneously. The roller sunblind can jump
out of the retainers and spring back suddenly
when driving at high speeds, e.g. when driving
on the freeway. This could damage the inertia
reel. Therefore, either close the side window
or retract the roller sunblind before driving at
high speeds.
Stowage and features

: Mirror light
; Additional sun visor
= Retainer
? Retaining clip, e.g. for a car park ticket
A Vanity mirror
B Mirror cover

Vanity mirror in the sun visor


Mirror light : only functions if the sun visor is
clipped into retainer = and mirror cover B has X To extend: pull the roller sunblind out by
been folded up. tab : and hook it onto retainers ; at the
back of the window.
Glare from the side

The roller sunblind can be hooked back into


place should it pop out from the top of the guide
X Fold down sun visor :. rail.
X Pull sun visor : out of retainer =. X Tilt pull-out profile : as illustrated.
X Swing sun visor : to the side.
X Slip guide bush ; into open area of guide rail
Vehicles with additional sun visor: =.
X Slide sun visor : horizontally as required. X Straighten up pull-out profile : again.

X Fold down additional sun visor ; to the wind-


shield.
Features 307

Ashtray Vehicles without a Rear Seat Entertainment Sys-


tem have an ashtray in the center console in the
Front ashtray rear compartment.
X To open: briefly press cover ; at the top.
! The holder under the ashtray is not heat The ashtray opens.
resistant. Before placing lit cigarettes in the
X To remove the insert: push into recess =
ashtray, make sure that the ashtray is prop-
erly engaged. Otherwise, the holder could be from the right.
damaged. Ashtray insert : slides out slightly to the
right.
X Lift insert : up and out.
X To re-install the insert: place insert : into
the holder and press down on the right until it
engages.

Stowage and features


Cigarette lighter
G WARNING
You can burn yourself if you touch the hot
heating element or the socket of the cigarette
X To open: slide cover : to its foremost posi- lighter.
tion.
In addition, flammable materials can ignite if:
X Fold cover = of the insert upwards.
X To remove the insert: push insert = to the Rthe hot cigarette lighter falls
left ?. Ra child holds the hot cigarette lighter to
Insert = slides out slightly to the right. objects, for example
X Lift insert = up ; and out.
There is a risk of fire and injury.
X To re-install the insert: place insert = into
Always hold the cigarette lighter by the knob.
the holder and press it down on the right until
it engages. Always make sure that the cigarette lighter is
X To close: pull cover : back as far as it will go. out of reach of children. Never leave children
unsupervised in the vehicle.
Rear-compartment ashtray ! The cigarette lighter in the center console in
the front compartment is not intended for
! Close the ashtray when it is not in use and operating the tire inflation compressor.
before you fold the rear seats forward. You
can otherwise damage the ashtray.

Your attention must always be focused on the


traffic conditions. Only use the cigarette lighter
when road and traffic conditions permit.

Z
308 Features

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- Socket in the cargo compartment
tion lock (Y page 135).
X To open: slide cover : to its foremost posi-
tion.
X Press in cigarette lighter ;.
Cigarette lighter ; will pop out automatically
when the heating element is red-hot.
X To close: pull cover : back as far as it will go.

12 V sockets
General notes
X Lift up the cover of socket :.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the igni-
tion lock (Y page 135).
Stowage and features

With the exception of the socket in the front


center console, all sockets can be used for 115 V socket
accessories with a maximum current draw of
240 W (20 A). The socket in the front center
Important safety notes
console can be used for accessories with a max- G DANGER
imum current draw of 180 W (15 A). Accessories
include such items as chargers for mobile When a suitable device is connected, the
phones. 115 V power socket will be carrying a high
If you use the sockets for long periods when the voltage. You could receive an electric shock if
engine is switched off, the battery may dis- the connector cable or the 115 V power
charge. socket is pulled out of the trim or is damaged
i An emergency cut-out ensures that the on- or wet. There is a risk of fatal injury.
board voltage does not drop too low. If the on- RUse only connector cables that are dry and
board voltage is too low, the power to the free of damage.
sockets is automatically cut. This ensures
that there is sufficient power to start the RWhen the ignition is off, make sure that the
engine. 115 V power socket is dry.
RHave the 115 V power socket checked or
Socket in the front center console replaced immediately at a qualified speci-
alized workshop if it is damaged or has been
! The socket is not suitable for operating the
tire inflation compressor. pulled out of the trim.
RNever plug the connector cable into a 115 V
X To open: slide the cover to its foremost posi-
tion. power socket that is damaged or has been
X Lift up the cover of the socket.
pulled out of the trim.
X To close: pull the cover back as far as it will
go. G DANGER
If you reach into the power socket or plug
Socket in the rear compartment center inappropriate devices into the power socket,
console you could receive an electric shock. There is a
risk of fatal injury.
Vehicles with the Rear Seat Entertainment Sys- Only connect appropriate devices to the
tem have two sockets in the center console in
the rear compartment. power socket.
X Lift up the cover of the socket.
Features 309

! Note that work and repairs on the 115 V Using the 115 V power socket
power socket should only be carried out by
qualified specialist personnel.

General notes
The 115 V power socket provides an alternating
voltage of 115 V so that small electronic devices
can be connected. These devices, such as
games consoles, chargers and laptops, must not
consume more than a maximum of 150 watts
altogether.
Requirements for operation of these devices:
Rthe electronic device that you connect has a
suitable connector and conforms to stand- X To switch on: switch the ignition on.
ards specific to the country you are in. X Open flap =.

Stowage and features


Rthe plug of the electronic device is plugged X Insert the plug of the electronic device into
correctly into 115 V power socket. 115 V power socket :.
Rthe maximum wattage of the device to be Indicator lamp ; lights up.
connected must not exceed 150 watts. X To switch off: disconnect the plug from
Rthe on-board power supply is within a permis- 115 V power socket :.
sible voltage range. Ensure that you do not pull on the cord.
Rthe 12 V sockets in the rear compartment and
the cargo compartment are operational.

Problems with the 115 V power socket


Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The warning lamp on the The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weak.
115 V power socket is X Start the engine.
not lit.
or
X Charge the battery (Y page 342).

If the indicator lamp still does not light up:


X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

The temperature of the DC/AC converter is temporarily too high.


X Remove the electronic device connector from the 115 V socket.
X Let the DC/AC converter cool down.

If the indicator lamp still does not light up after cooling down the
converter:
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

You have connected an electronic device that has a constant nominal


power of less than 150 watts, but has a very high switch-on current.
This device will not work. If you connect such a device, the 115 V
power socket will not supply it with power.
X Connect a suitable electronic device.

Z
310 Features

mbrace System self-test

General notes After you have switched on the ignition, the sys-
tem carries out a self-diagnosis.
The mbrace system is only available in the USA. A malfunction in the system has been detected
A license agreement must be in place in order to if one of the following occurs:
activate the mbrace service. Make sure that RThe indicator lamp in the SOS button does not
your system is activated and operational. To come on during the system self-test.
register, press the ï Info call button. If any of RThe indicator lamp in the F Roadside
the steps mentioned are not carried out, the
Assistance button does not light up during
system may not be activated.
self-diagnosis of the system.
If you have questions about the activation, con- RThe indicator lamp in the ï Info call button
tact one of the following telephone hotlines:
does not light up during the system self-diag-
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at nosis.
1-800 FOR-MERCEDES (1-800-367-6372) or RThe indicator lamp in one or more of the fol-
1-866-990-9007
lowing buttons continues to light up red after
Stowage and features

Shortly after successfully registering with the the system self-diagnosis:


mbrace service, a user ID and password will be - SOS button
sent to you by mail. You can use this password
to log onto the mbrace area under "Owners - F Roadside Assistance call button
Online" at http://www.mbusa.com. - ï Info call button
The system is available if: RThe Inoperative or the Service Not

Rit has been activated and is operational


Activated message appears in the multi-
function display after the system self-diagno-
Rthe corresponding mobile phone network is sis.
available for transmitting data to the Cus-
If a malfunction is indicated as outlined above,
tomer Center
the system may not operate as expected. In the
Ra service subscription is available event of an emergency, help will have to be
Determining the location of the vehicle on a map summoned by other means.
is only possible if: Have the system checked at the nearest author-
RGPS reception is available ized Mercedes-Benz Center or call the following
Rthe vehicle position can be forwarded to the telephone assistance services:
Customer Assistance Center Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at
1-800 FOR-MERCEDES (1-800-367-6372) or
The mbrace system 1-866-990-9007.

To adjust the volume during a call, proceed as Emergency call


follows:
X Press the W or X button on the multi- Important safety notes
function steering wheel. G WARNING
or
It can be dangerous to remain in the vehicle,
X Use the multimedia system volume control.
even if you have pressed the SOS button in an
The system offers various services, e.g.: emergency if:
RAutomatic and manual emergency call
Ryou see smoke inside or outside of the vehi-
RRoadside Assistance call
cle, e.g. if there is a fire after an accident
RInfo call
Rthe vehicle is on a dangerous section of
You can find information and a description of all road
available features under "Owners Online" at
http://www.mbusa.com. Rthe vehicle is not visible or cannot easily be
seen by other road users, particularly when
dark or in poor visibility conditions
Features 311

There is a risk of an accident and injury. In this case, summon assistance by other
means.
Leave the vehicle immediately in this or simi-
lar situations as soon as it is safe to do so. Making an emergency call
Move to a safe location along with other vehi-
cle occupants. In such situations, secure the
vehicle in accordance with national regula-
tions, e. g. with a warning triangle.

General notes
Observe the notes on system activation
(Y page 310).
The emergency call is triggered automatically if
an air bag is deployed or an Emergency Ten-
sioning Device is triggered. You cannot end an
automatically triggered emergency call yourself.

Stowage and features


An emergency call can also be initiated man- X To initiate an emergency call manually:
ually. press cover : briefly to open.
X Press and hold the SOS button for at least one
As soon as the emergency call has been initi-
ated, the indicator lamp in the SOS button second ;.
flashes. The Connecting Call message The indicator lamp in SOS button ; flashes
appears in the multifunction display. until the emergency call is concluded.
X Wait for a voice connection to the Mercedes-
The audio output is muted.
Benz Customer Assistance Center.
Once the connection has been made, the Call
X After the emergency call, close cover :.
Connected message appears in the multifunc-
tion display. If the mobile phone network is unavailable,
All important information on the emergency is mbrace will not be able to make the emergency
transmitted, for example: call. If you leave the vehicle immediately after
pressing SOS button ;, you do not know if
RCurrent location of the vehicle (as determined
mbrace has successfully made the emergency
by the GPS system) call. In this case, always summon assistance by
RVehicle identification number other means.
RInformation on the severity of the accident
Shortly after the emergency call has been initi- Breakdown assistance button
ated, a voice connection is automatically estab-
lished between the Customer Assistance Center
and the vehicle occupants.
RIf the vehicle occupants respond, the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
attempts to get more information on the
emergency.
RIf there is no response from the vehicle occu-
pants, an ambulance is immediately sent to
the vehicle.
RIf the relevant mobile phone network is not
available, no emergency call can be initiated.
The indicator lamp in the SOS button flashes
continuously. X To call: press Roadside Assistance but-
ton :.
No voice connection can be established to the This initiates a call to the Mercedes-Benz Cus-
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center. tomer Assistance Center.
The Call Failed message appears on the mul-
tifunction display and must be confirmed.

Z
312 Features

The indicator lamp in Roadside Assistance X To end a call: press the ~ button on the
button : flashes while the call is active. The multifunction steering wheel.
Connecting Call message appears in the or
multifunction display. The audio output is X Press the corresponding multimedia system
muted. button for ending a phone call.
If a connection can be established, the Call
Connected message appears in the multifunc-
tion display. Info call button
If a mobile phone network and GPS reception
are available, the system transfers data to the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center,
for example:
RCurrent location of the vehicle
RVehicle identification number
The multimedia system display indicates that a
Stowage and features

call is active. During the call, you can change to


the navigation menu by pressing the NAVI but-
ton on the multimedia system, for example.
Voice output is not available in this case.
A voice connection is established between the X To call: press Info call button :.
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center This initiates a call to the Mercedes-Benz Cus-
and the vehicle occupants. tomer Assistance Center.
From the remote malfunction diagnosis, the The indicator lamp in Info call button :
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center flashes while the connection is being made.
can ascertain the nature of the problem The Connecting Call message appears in
(Y page 315). the multifunction display. The audio output is
The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen- muted.
ter either sends a qualified Mercedes-Benz tech-
nician or makes arrangements for your vehicle If a connection can be established, the Call
to be transported to the nearest Mercedes-Benz Connected message appears in the multifunc-
Service Center. tion display.
You may be charged for services such as repair If a mobile phone network and GPS reception
work and/or towing. are available, the system transfers data to the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center,
You can find more information in the separate for example:
mbrace manual.
RCurrent location of the vehicle
The system has not been able to initiate a Road-
side Assistance call, if: RVehicle identification number

Rthe F indicator lamp for the Roadside The multimedia system display indicates that a
Assistance call button is flashing continu- call is active. During the call, you can change to
ously. the navigation menu by pressing the NAVI but-
ton on COMAND, for example.
Rno voice connection to the Mercedes-Benz
Customer Assistance Center was estab- Voice output is not available in this case.
lished. A voice connection is established between the
This can occur if the relevant mobile phone net- Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
work is not available, for example. and the vehicle occupants.
The Call Failed message appears in the mul- You receive information about operating your
tifunction display. vehicle, about the nearest Mercedes-Benz Ser-
vice Center and about other products and serv-
ices from Mercedes-Benz.
Features 313

You can find further information on the mbrace destination, the address can be downloaded.
system under "Owners Online" at Alternatively, you can obtain the location of
http://www.mbusa.com. Points of Interest (POIs)/important destinations
The system was unable to initiate an Info call if: in the vicinity.
Rthe indicator lamp in the ï Info call button
Furthermore, you can download routes with up
to four way points.
is flashing continuously.
Rno voice connection to the Mercedes-Benz You are prompted to confirm route guidance to
Customer Assistance Center has been estab- the address entered.
lished. X Yes by turning 3 or sliding 1
SelectYes
This can occur if the relevant mobile phone net- the controller and confirm with 7.
work is not available, for example. The system calculates the route and subse-
The Call Failed message appears in the mul- quently starts the route guidance with the
tifunction display. address entered.
X To end a call: press the ~ button on the
If you select No the address can be stored in
multifunction steering wheel. the address book.

Stowage and features


or The destination download function is available
X Press the corresponding multimedia system
if:
button for ending a phone call. Rthe vehicle is equipped with a navigation sys-
tem.
Rthe relevant mobile phone network is availa-
Call priority
ble and data transfer is possible.
When service calls are active, e.g. Roadside
Assistance or Info calls, an emergency call can Route Assistance
still be initiated. In this case, an emergency call This service is part of the mbrace PLUS Package
will take priority and override all other active and cannot be purchased separately.
calls. You can use the Route Assistance function even
The indicator lamp of the respective button if the vehicle is not equipped with a navigation
flashes until the call is ended. system.
An emergency call can only be terminated by the Within the framework of this service, you receive
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center. a professional and reliable form of navigation
All other calls can be ended by pressing: support without having to leave your vehicle.
Rthe ~ button on the multifunction steering The customer service representative finds a
wheel suitable route depending on your vehicle's cur-
rent position and the desired destination. You
Rthe corresponding button in the multimedia
will then be guided live through the current route
system to end the voice call section.
When a call is initiated, the audio system is
muted.
Search and Send
The mobile phone is no longer connected to the
multimedia system. General notes
However, if you want to use your mobile phone,
To use "Search & Send", your vehicle must be
do so only when the vehicle is stationary and in
equipped with mbrace and a navigation system.
a safe location.
Additionally, an mbrace service subscription
must be completed.
Downloading destinations in COMAND "Search & Send" is a service for entering desti-
nations in the navigation system. A destination
Downloading destinations address which is found on Google Maps® can be
Downloading destinations gives you access to a transferred via mbrace directly to your vehicle's
database with over 15 million points of interest navigation system.
(POIs). These can be downloaded on the navi-
gation system in your vehicle. If you know the

Z
314 Features

Specifying and sending the destination Vehicle remote opening


address
You can use the vehicle remote unlocking if you
X Go to the website http://maps.google.com have unintentionally locked your vehicle and a
and enter a destination address into the entry replacement SmartKey is not available.
field. The vehicle can then be unlocked by the
X To send the destination address to the e- Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center.
mail address of your mbrace account:
The vehicle can be immediately unlocked
click on the corresponding button on the web- remotely within four days of the ignition being
site. turned off. After this time, the remote unlocking
Example: may be delayed by 15 to 60 minutes. After
If you select "Send to vehicle" and then 30 days, the vehicle can no longer be unlocked
"Mercedes-Benz", the destination address remotely.
will be sent to your vehicle. The vehicle remote unlocking feature is availa-
X When the "Send" dialog window appears: ble if the relevant mobile phone network is avail-
Enter the e-mail address you specified when able and a data connection is possible.
Stowage and features

setting up your mbrace account into the cor- X Contact the following service hotlines:
responding field. Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
X Click "Send". at 1-800 FOR-MERCEDES (1-800-367-6372)
Information on specific commands such as or 1-866-990-9007
"Address entry" or "Send" can be found on the You will be asked for your password.
website. X Return to your vehicle at the time agreed upon
with the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assis-
Calling up a transmitted destination tance Center.
address Alternatively, the vehicle can be opened via:
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- Rthe Internet, under the "Owners Online" sec-
tion lock (Y page 135).
tion
The transmitted destination address is loaded
into the vehicle's navigation system. Rtelephone applications (e.g. for iPhone®,

A display message appears, asking whether Android™)


navigation should be started. To do this, you will need your identification num-
X SelectYes
Yes by turning 3 or sliding 1 ber and password.
the controller and confirm with 7.
The system calculates the route and subse- Vehicle remote closing
quently starts the route guidance with the
address entered. The vehicle remote closing feature can be used
when you have forgotten to lock the vehicle and
If you select No the address can be stored in you are no longer nearby.
the address book.
The vehicle can then be locked by the Mercedes-
If you have sent more than one destination Benz Customer Assistance Center.
address, each individual destination must be
confirmed separately. The vehicle can be immediately remotely locked
within four days of the ignition being turned off.
Destination addresses are loaded in the same After this time, remote closing may be delayed
order as the order in which they were sent. by 15 to 60 minutes. After 30 days the vehicle
If you have multiple Mercedes-Benz vehicles can no longer be locked remotely.
with mbrace and active mbrace accounts: The vehicle remote closing feature is available if
If multiple vehicles are registered under the the relevant mobile phone network is available
same e-mail address, the destination will be and a data connection is possible.
sent to all the vehicles. X Contact the following service hotlines:
Features 315

Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center The Roadside Assistance Connected mes-


at 1-800 FOR-MERCEDES (1-800-367-6372) sage appears in the display. If the Vehicle Health
or 1-866-990-9007 Check can be started, the Request for Vehi‐
You will be asked for your password. cle Diagnostics Received Start vehi‐
The next time you are inside the vehicle and you cle diagnostics? message appears in the
switch on the ignition, the Doors Locked display.
Remotely message appears in the multifunction X Press the Yes button to confirm the message.
display. X If the Vehicle Diagnostics Please
Alternatively, the vehicle can be locked via: Start Ignition message appears: turn the
Rthe Internet, under the "Owners Online" sec-
SmartKey to key position 2 in the ignition
lock (Y page 135).
tion
X If the Please follow the instructions
Rtelephone applications (e.g. for iPhone®,
received by phone and move your vehi‐
Android™) cle to a safe position. message
To do this, you will need your identification num- appears: please follow the instructions
ber and password. received by phone and move your vehicle to a

Stowage and features


safe position.
Stolen vehicle recovery service The message in the display disappears.
The vehicle operating state check begins.
If your vehicle has been stolen: During this procedure, you will see the Vehi‐
X Notify the police. cle Diagnostics Active message.
The police will issue a numbered incident If you select Cancel
Cancel, the Vehicle Health
report. Check is canceled completely.
X Forward this number to the Mercedes-Benz
When the check is complete, the Sending
Customer Assistance Center along with your vehicle diagnostics data. (Voice con‐
PIN. nection may be interrupted during
The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance data transfer) message appears. The vehicle
Center then tries to locate the system. The data can now be sent.
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
contacts you and the local law enforcement X Press the OK button to confirm the message.
agency if the vehicle is located. The voice connection with the Customer
However, only the law enforcement agency is Assistance Center is terminated.
informed of the location of the vehicle. The Vehicle Diagnostics: Transfer‐
ring Data... message appears.
If the anti-theft alarm system is activated for
longer than 30 seconds, mbrace automatically The vehicle data is sent to the Customer
notifies the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assis- Assistance Center.
tance Center. Depending on what the customer service rep-
resentative agreed with you, the voice connec-
Vehicle Health Check tion is re-established after the transfer is com-
plete. If necessary, you will be contacted at a
With the Vehicle Health Check, the Customer later time by another means, e.g. by e-mail or
Assistance Center can provide improved sup- phone.
port for problems with your vehicle. During an Another function of the Vehicle Health Check is
existing call, vehicle data is transferred to the the transfer of service data to the Customer
Customer Assistance Center. Assistance Center. If a service is due, the display
The customer service representative can use shows a message to this effect together with
the received data to decide what kind of assis- information about any special offers at your
tance is required. You are then, for example, workshop.
guided to the nearest Mercedes-Benz Service This information can also be called up under
Center or a recovery vehicle is called. "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.
If vehicle data need to be transferred during an Information on the data stored in the vehicle
Info call or a Roadside Assistance call, this is (Y page 32).
initiated by the Customer Assistance Center.

Z
316 Features

Information on Roadside Assistance Geo fencing


(Y page 29).
Geo fencing allows you to select areas which the
vehicle should not enter or leave. You will be
Downloading routes informed if the vehicle crosses the boundaries
Downloading routes allows you to transfer and of the selected areas. You can select the way in
save predefined routes in the navigation sys- which you receive this information beforehand.
tem. Possible options include text message, e-mail or
an automated call.
A route can be prepared and sent either by a
customer service representative or under "Own- The area can be determined as either a circle or
ers Online" at http://www.mbusa.com. a polygon with a maximum of ten corners. You
can specify up to ten areas simultaneously. Dif-
Each route can include up to four way points.
ferent settings are possible for each area.
Once a route has been received by the naviga-
These settings can be called up under "Owners
tion system, you will see the Do you want to Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.
start route guidance? Destination
Received destination has been saved Alternatively, you can also trigger an Info call
Stowage and features

in "Previous destinations". message on and notify the customer service representative


the multimedia system display. that you wish to activate geo-fencing.
The route is saved. Currently inactive areas can be activated by text
message.
X To start route guidance: select Yes.Yes
An overview of the route is shown in the dis-
play. Triggering the vehicle alarm
If you select No
No, the saved route can be called With this function, you can trigger the vehicle's
up later in the navigation menu. panic alarm via text message. An alarm sounds
Start.
X Select Start and the exterior lighting flashes. Depending on
Route guidance starts. the setting, the panic alarm lasts five or ten sec-
onds. Afterwards, the alarm switches off.
Downloaded and saved routes can be called up
again.

Speed alert Garage door opener

You can define the upper speed limit, which General notes
must not be exceeded by the vehicle.
The HomeLink® garage door opener integrated
If the vehicle exceeds the set speed, a message in the rear-view mirror allows you to operate up
is sent to the Customer Assistance Center. The to three different door and gate systems.
Customer Assistance Center then forwards this
Use the integrated garage door opener only on
information to you.
garage doors that:
You can select the way in which you receive this
information beforehand. Possible options Rhave safety stop and reverse features and
include text message, e-mail or an automated Rmeet current U.S. federal safety standards
call. Once programed, the integrated garage door
The data you receive contains the following opener in the rear-view mirror will assume the
information: function of the garage door system's remote
Rthe location where the speed limit was excee-
control. Please also read the operating instruc-
tions for the garage door system.
ded
Rthe time at which the speed limit was excee-
When programming a garage door opener, park
the vehicle outside the garage. Do not run the
ded
engine while programming.
Rthe selected speed limit which was exceeded
Certain garage door drives are incompatible
with the integrated garage door opener. If you
have difficulty programing the integrated garage
Features 317

door opener, contact a Mercedes-Benz Service


Center.
Alternatively, you can call the following tele-
phone assistance services:
RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center at 1-800 FOR-MERCEDES
RCanada: Customer Service at
1-800-387-0100
RHomeLink® hotline 1-800-355-3515 (free of
charge)
More information on HomeLink® and/or com-
patible products is also available online at Garage door remote control A is not included
http://www.homelink.com. with the integrated garage door opener.
Notes on the declaration of conformity X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
(Y page 30). tion lock (Y page 135).

Stowage and features


USA: FCC ID: CB2HMIHL4 X Select one of buttons ; to ? to use to con-
Canada: IC: 279B-HMIHL4 trol the garage door drive.
X To start programming mode: press and
Important safety notes hold one of buttons ; to ? on the integrated
garage door opener.
G WARNING The garage door opener is now in program-
When you operate or program the garage door ming mode. After a short time, indicator
lamp : lights up yellow.
with the integrated garage door opener, per-
Indicator lamp : lights up yellow as soon as
sons in the range of movement of the garage button ;, = or ? is stored for the first time.
door can become trapped or struck by the If the selected button has already been pro-
garage door. There is a risk of injury. gramed, indicator lamp : will only light up
When using the integrated garage door yellow after ten seconds have elapsed.
opener, always make sure that nobody is X Release button ;, = or ?. Indicator
within the range of movement of the garage lamp : flashes yellow.
door. X To program the remote control: point
garage door remote control A towards but-
tons ; to ? on the rear-view mirror at a dis-
G WARNING tance of 2 to 8 in (5 to 20 cm).
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust X Press and hold button B on remote control
gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling A until indicator lamp : lights up green.
these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There When indicator lamp : lights up green: pro-
is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave gramming is finished.
the engine running in enclosed spaces with- When indicator lamp : flashes green: pro-
out sufficient ventilation. gramming was successful. The next step is to
synchronize the rolling code (Y page 318).
X Release button B on remote control A for
Programming the garage door drive system.
If indicator lamp : lights up red: repeat the
Programming the buttons programing procedure for the corresponding
Pay attention to the "Important safety notes" button on the rear-view mirror. When doing
(Y page 317). so, vary the distance between remote control
A and the rear-view mirror.
The required distance between remote con-
trol A and the integrated garage door opener
depends on the garage door drive system.

Z
318 Features

Several attempts might be necessary. You Proceed as follows:


should test every position for at least Rif you live in Canada.
25 seconds before trying another position.
Rif you have difficulties programming the
Synchronizing the rolling code garage door opener (regardless of where you
live) when following the programming steps.
Pay attention to the "Important safety notes"
X Press and hold one of buttons ; to ? on the
(Y page 317).
integrated garage door opener.
If the garage door system uses a rolling code, After a short time, indicator lamp : lights up
you will also have to synchronize the garage yellow.
door system with the integrated garage door
X Release the button.
opener in the rear-view mirror. To do this you will
need to use the programming button on the door Indicator lamp : flashes yellow.
drive control panel. The programming button X Press button B of garage door remote con-
may be located in different places depending on trol A for two seconds, then release it for two
the manufacturer. It is usually located on the seconds.
door drive unit on the garage ceiling. X Press button B again for two seconds.
Stowage and features

Familiarize yourself with the garage door drive X Repeat this sequence on button B of remote
operating instructions, e.g. under "Program- control A until indicator lamp : lights up
ming additional remote controls", before carry- green.
ing out the following steps. When indicator lamp : lights up green: pro-
Your vehicle must be within reach of the garage gramming is finished.
door or gate opener drive. Make sure that nei- When indicator lamp : flashes green: pro-
ther your vehicle nor any persons/objects are gramming was successful. The next step is to
present within the sweep of the door or gate. synchronize the rolling code.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- X Release button B of remote control A of the
tion lock (Y page 135). garage door drive.
X Get out of the vehicle. When indicator lamp : lights up red: repeat
X Press the programming button on the door
the programming process for the correspond-
drive unit. ing button on the rear-view mirror. When
doing so, vary the distance between remote
You now have 30 seconds to initiate the next control A and the rear-view mirror.
step.
The required distance between remote con-
X Get into the vehicle.
trol A and the integrated garage door opener
X Press previously programed button ;, = depends on the garage door drive system.
or ? on the integrated garage door opener Several attempts might be necessary. You
repeatedly until the door closes. should test every position for at least
The rolling code synchronization is then com- 25 seconds before trying another position.
plete.
Problems when programming
Notes on programming the remote con- If you are experiencing problems programming
trol the integrated garage door opener on the rear-
Canadian radio frequency laws require a "break" view mirror, take note of the following instruc-
(or interruption) of the transmission signals tions:
after broadcasting for a few seconds. Therefore, RCheck the transmitter frequency used by
these signals may not last long enough for the garage door drive remote control A and
integrated garage door opener. The signal is not whether it is supported. The transmitter fre-
recognized during programming. Comparable quency can usually be found on the back of
with Canadian law, some U.S. garage door open- remote control A for the garage door drive.
ers also feature a "break".
The integrated garage door opener is com-
patible with devices that have units which
Features 319

operate in the frequency range of 280 to Clearing the memory


433 MHz.
RReplace the batteries in garage door remote
Make sure that you clear the memory of the
control A. This increases the likelihood that integrated garage door opener before selling the
garage door remote control A will transmit a vehicle.
strong and precise signal to the integrated X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
garage door opener. tion lock (Y page 135).
RWhen programming, hold remote control A X Press and hold buttons ; and ?.
at varying distances and angles from but- Indicator lamp : initially lights up yellow and
tons ; to ? which you are programming. Try then green.
various angles at a distance between 2and X Release buttons ; and ?.
8 inches (5to 20 cm) or at the same angle but The memory of the integrated garage door
at varying distances. opener in the rear-view mirror is cleared.
RIf a further remote control A is available for
the same garage door drive, repeat the same
programming steps with this remote control Floormats

Stowage and features


A. Before performing these steps, make sure
that new batteries have been installed in G WARNING
garage door drive remote control A.
RNote that some remote controls only transmit
Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the
for a limited amount of time (the indicator pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.
lamp on the remote control goes out). Press The operating and road safety of the vehicle is
button B on remote control A again before jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.
transmission ends. Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are
RAlign the antenna cable of the garage door stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter
opener unit. This can improve signal recep- the driver's footwell. Install the floormats
tion/transmission.
securely and as specified in order to ensure
sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use
Opening/closing the garage door
loose floormats and do not place floormats on
After it has been programmed, the integrated top of one another.
garage door opener performs the function of the
garage door system remote control. Please also
read the operating instructions for the garage
door system.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock (Y page 135).
X Press button ;, = or ? which you pro-
grammed to operate the garage door.
Garage door system with a fixed code: indi-
cator lamp : lights up green.
Garage door system with a rolling code: indi-
cator lamp : flashes green.
The transmitter will transmit a signal as long
as the button is pressed. The transmission is X Driver's seat/front-passenger seat: slide
halted after a maximum of ten seconds and the respective seat back.
indicator lamp : lights up yellow. X Rear seats: slide the corresponding front
X Press button ;, = or ? again if necessary. seat forwards.
X To install: place the floormat in the footwell.
X Press studs : onto retainers ;.

Z
320 Features

X To remove: pull the floormat from retain-


ers ;.
X Remove the floormat.

Infrared reflective windshield


Stowage and features

The infrared reflecting glass prevents the vehi-


cle interior from becoming too hot. It also blocks
radio waves up into the gigahertz range.
To enable operation of radio-controlled equip-
ment, e.g. toll recording systems, areas on the
windshield are permeable to radio waves :. In
these areas, you can install radio-controlled sys-
tems.
These areas can best be seen from outside the
vehicle by observing the light reflected off the
windshield.
Engine compartment 321

Engine compartment Rremove jewelry and watches


Rkeep items of clothing and hair, for exam-
Hood
ple, away from moving parts
Important safety notes
G WARNING
G WARNING The ignition system and the fuel injection sys-
If the hood is unlatched, it may open up when tem work under high voltage. If you touch
the vehicle is in motion and block your view. components which are under voltage, you
There is a risk of an accident. could get an electric shock. There is a risk of
Never unlatch the hood while driving. Before injury.
every trip, ensure that the hood is locked. Never touch components of the ignition sys-
tem or fuel injection system when the ignition
G WARNING is switched on.
When opening and closing the hood, it may
suddenly fall into the closed position. There is Electrically live components include ignition
a risk of injury to persons within range of coils, spark plug connectors and the test socket.
Plug-in hybrid: be sure to read the separate

Maintenance and care


movement of the hood.
Operator's Manual. You could otherwise fail to
Open and close the hood only when no one is recognize dangers, e.g. due to high voltage.
within its range of movement.
Opening the hood
G WARNING
Opening the hood when the engine is over- G WARNING
heated or when there is a fire in the engine Certain components in the engine compart-
compartment could expose you to hot gases ment, such as the engine, radiator and parts
or other service products. There is a risk of of the exhaust system, can become very hot.
injury. Working in the engine compartment poses a
Let an overheated engine cool down before risk of injury.
opening the hood. If there is a fire in the Where possible, let the engine cool down and
engine compartment, keep the hood closed touch only the components described in the
and contact the fire department. following.

G WARNING G WARNING
The engine compartment contains moving When the hood is open and the windshield
components. Certain components, such as wipers are set in motion, you can be injured by
the radiator fan, may continue to run or start the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury.
again suddenly when the ignition is off. There Always switch off the windshield wipers and
is a risk of injury. the ignition before opening the hood.
If you need to do any work inside the engine
compartment: ! Make sure that the windshield wipers are
not folded away from the windshield. You
Rswitch off the ignition could otherwise damage the windshield wip-
Rnever reach into the area where there is a ers or the hood.
risk of danger from moving components,
such as the fan rotation area

Z
322 Engine compartment

Engine oil
Important safety notes
G WARNING
Certain components in the engine compart-
ment, such as the engine, radiator and parts
of the exhaust system, can become very hot.
Working in the engine compartment poses a
risk of injury.
Where possible, let the engine cool down and
X Make sure that the windshield wipers are touch only the components described in the
turned off. following.
X Pull release lever : on the hood.
The hood is released. G WARNING
Opening the hood when the engine is over-
heated or when there is a fire in the engine
Maintenance and care

compartment could expose you to hot gases


or other service products. There is a risk of
injury.
Let an overheated engine cool down before
opening the hood. If there is a fire in the
engine compartment, keep the hood closed
and contact the fire department.

G WARNING
X Reach into the gap, pull hood catch handle ;
up and lift the hood. If engine oil comes into contact with hot com-
If you lift the hood by approximately 15 in ponents in the engine compartment, it may
(40 cm), the hood is opened and held open ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.
automatically by the gas-filled strut. Make sure that engine oil is not spilled next to
the filler neck. Let the engine cool down and
Closing the hood thoroughly clean the engine oil off the com-
ponents before starting the engine.
X Lower the hood and let it fall from a height of
approximately 8 in (20 cm). Plug-in hybrid: be sure to read the separate
X Check that the hood has engaged properly. Operator's Manual. You could otherwise fail to
If the hood can be raised slightly, it is not recognize dangers, e.g. due to high voltage.
properly engaged. Open it again and close it
with a little more force.
General notes
Depending on your driving style, the vehicle
Radiator consumes up to 0.9 US qt (0.8 liters) of oil per
600 miles (1,000 km). The oil consumption may
Vehicles with a diesel engine: do not cover be higher than this when the vehicle is new or if
the radiator. such as with a thermal mat or you frequently drive at high engine speeds.
insect protection cover. Otherwise, the values of Depending on the engine, the oil dipstick may be
the European on-board diagnostics may be in a different location.
affected. Some of these readings are required
by law and must be accurate at all times.
Engine compartment 323

When checking the oil level: Adding engine oil


Rpark the vehicle on a level surface.
H Environmental note
Rthe engine should be switched off for approx-
imately five minutes if the engine is at normal When adding oil, take care not to spill any. If
operating temperature. oil enters the soil or waterways, it is harmful to
Rif the engine is not at normal operating tem- the environment.
perature, e.g. if the engine was only started
briefly, wait about 30 minutes before carrying ! Use only engine oils and oil filters that are
out the measurement. approved for vehicles with a service system. A
list of the engine oils and oil filters that have
Checking the oil level using the oil dip- been tested and approved in accordance with
stick Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service
Products is available at any authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
The following cause engine failure or damage
to the exhaust system:
RUse of engine oils and oil filters that have
not been expressly approved for the service

Maintenance and care


system
RReplacement of engine oil and oil filter after
the replacement interval specified by the
service system has expired
RUse of engine oil additives

! Do not add too much oil. adding too much


Example: vehicles with a gasoline engine engine oil can result in damage to the engine
or to the catalytic converter. Have excess
engine oil siphoned off.

Example: vehicles with a diesel engine


X Pull oil dipstick : out of the dipstick tube.
Example: engine oil cap
X Wipe off oil dipstick :.
X Slowly slide oil dipstick : into the guide tube X Turn cap : counter-clockwise and remove it.
to the stop, and take it out again. X Add engine oil.
If the level is between MIN mark = and MAX If the oil level is at or below the MIN mark on
mark ;, the oil level is correct. the oil dipstick, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter) of
X If the oil level has dropped to MIN mark = or engine oil.
below, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter) engine oil. X Replace cap : on the filler neck and tighten
clockwise.
Ensure that the cap locks into place securely.
X Check the oil level again with the oil dipstick
(Y page 323).

Z
324 Engine compartment

Further information on engine oil (Y page 387). Checking coolant level

Additional service products


Important safety notes
G WARNING
Certain components in the engine compart-
ment, such as the engine, radiator and parts
of the exhaust system, can become very hot.
Working in the engine compartment poses a
risk of injury.
Where possible, let the engine cool down and X Park the vehicle on a level surface.
touch only the components described in the Only check the coolant level when the vehicle
following. is on a level surface and the engine has cooled
down.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
G WARNING
Maintenance and care

tion lock (Y page 135).


The cooling system is pressurized, particularly On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, press the
when the motor is warm. If you open the cap, Start/Stop button twice (Y page 137).
you could be scalded if hot coolant sprays out. X Check the coolant temperature gauge in the
There is a risk of injury. multifunction display.
Let the engine cool down before you open the The coolant temperature must be below
cap. Wear gloves and eye protection. Slowly 158 ‡ (70 †).
X Turn the SmartKey to position in the ignition
open the cap to relieve pressure.
lock u (Y page 135).
The coolant level may only be checked and cool- X On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, press the
ant refilled when the engine and engine cooling Start/Stop button (Y page 137).
system have cooled down. X Press the Start/Stop button (Y page 137).
X Slowly turn cap : half a turn counter-clock-
G WARNING
wise and allow excess pressure to escape.
Windshield washer concentrate could ignite if X Turn cap : further counter-clockwise and
it comes into contact with hot engine compo- remove it.
nents or the exhaust system. There is a risk of If the coolant is at the level of marker bar =
fire and injury. in the filler neck when cold, there is enough
Make sure that no windshield washer con- coolant in coolant expansion tank ;.
centrate is spilled next to the filler neck. If the coolant level is approximately 0.6 in
(1.5 cm) above marker bar = in the filler neck
when warm, there is enough coolant in expan-
sion tank ;.
X If necessary, add coolant that has been tested
and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
X Replace cap : and turn it clockwise as far as
it will go.
For further information on coolant, see
(Y page 388).
ASSYST PLUS 325

Adding washer fluid to the windshield The letter A or B, possibly in connection with a
washer system number or another letter, shows the type of ser-
vice. A stands for a minor service and B for a
major service.
Further information can be obtained at a quali-
fied specialist workshop.
The ASSYST PLUS service interval display does
not take into account any periods of time during
which the battery is disconnected.
Maintaining the time-dependent service sched-
ule:
X Note down the service due date displayed in
the multifunction display before disconnect-
ing the battery.
Example: washer fluid reservoir or
X To open: pull cap : upwards by the tab. X After reconnecting the battery, subtract the
X Add the premixed washer fluid. battery disconnection periods from the ser-
vice date shown on the display.

Maintenance and care


X To close: press cap : onto the filler neck
until it engages.
If the washer fluid level drops below the recom- Hiding a service message
mended minimum of 1 liter, a message appears
in the multifunction display prompting you to X Press the % or a button on the steering
add washer fluid (Y page 272). wheel.
Further information on windshield washer fluid
(Y page 389).
Displaying service messages
ASSYST PLUS X Switch on the ignition.
X Press the = or ; button on the steering
Service message wheel to select the Serv. menu.
X Press the 9 or : button to select the
i If the scheduled service intervals are excee- ASSYST PLUS submenu and confirm by press-
ded, this may result in damage to the vehicle.
ing the a button.
You can obtain up-to-date information concern- The service due date appears in the multi-
ing the servicing of your vehicle from a qualified function display.
specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center or at
http://www.mbusa.com (USA only).
Information about Service
i The ASSYST PLUS service interval display
does not show any information on the engine Resetting the ASSYST PLUS service
oil level. Observe the notes on the engine oil interval display
level (Y page 322).
The multifunction display shows a service mes-
! If the ASSYST PLUS service interval display
has been inadvertently reset, this setting can
sage for several seconds, e.g.:
be corrected at a qualified specialist work-
RService A in .. Days shop.
RService A Due Have service work carried out as described in
RService A Exceeded by .. Days the Maintenance Booklet. This may otherwise
Depending on the operating conditions of the lead to increased wear and damage to the
vehicle, the remaining time or distance until the major assemblies or the vehicle.
next service due date is displayed.
Z
326 Care

A qualified specialist workshop will reset the you may scratch or damage the surfaces and
ASSYST service interval display after the service films.
work has been carried out. You can also obtain
further information on maintenance work, for ! Do not park your vehicle for a long period of
example. time directly after cleaning, particularly after
cleaning the wheel rim with wheel cleaner.
Wheel cleaner can lead to the increased cor-
Special service requirements rosion of the brake discs and pads. Therefore,
The specified maintenance interval takes only drive for a few minutes after cleaning. By
the normal operation of the vehicle into heating up the brakes, the brake discs and
account. Under increased load on the vehicle, pads dry. The vehicle can then be parked for a
maintenance work must be carried out more long period of time.
frequently, for example: Regular care of your vehicle is a condition for
RRegular city driving with frequent intermedi- retaining the quality in the long term.
ate stops Use care products and cleaning agents recom-
RIf the vehicle is primarily used to travel short mended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
distances
RUse in mountainous terrain or on poor road
surfaces Washing the vehicle and cleaning the
Maintenance and care

RIf the engine is often left idling for long periods paintwork
Under these or similar conditions, have, for Automatic car wash
example, the air filter, engine oil and oil filter
replaced or changed more frequently. Under G WARNING
arduous operating conditions, the tires must be
checked more often. Further information can be Braking efficiency is reduced after washing
obtained at a qualified specialist workshop. the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
After the vehicle has been washed, brake
Driving abroad carefully while paying attention to the traffic
An extensive Mercedes-Benz Service network is conditions until full braking power is restored.
also available in other countries. You can obtain
further information from any authorized ! Before driving into an automatic car wash,
Mercedes-Benz Center. make sure that it is suitable for the dimen-
sions of the vehicle. In particular, make sure
that:
Care Rthere is enough ground clearance between
the vehicle underbody and the guide rails of
General notes the automatic car wash.
Rthe clearance width of the automatic car
H Environmental note wash is sufficient, particularly the width of
Dispose of empty packaging and cleaning the guide rails.
cloths in an environmentally responsible man- Ryou enter the automatic car wash straight
ner. and in the center of the guide rails in order
to avoid damaging the tires or wheel rims.
! When cleaning your car, do not use: Fold in the exterior mirrors before the vehicle
is washed. The exterior mirrors could other-
Rdry, coarse or hard cloths wise be damaged.
Rabrasive cleaning agents
Rsolvents
! When Distance Pilot DISTRONIC or the
HOLD function is activated, the vehicle
Rcleaning agents containing solvents
brakes automatically in certain situations.
Do not scrub.
Do not touch the surfaces and films with hard
objects, e.g. rings or ice scrapers. Otherwise,
Care 327

To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate X Release the electric parking brake.
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC and the HOLD X Switch off the ignition and leave the SmartKey
function in the following or similar situations: in the ignition lock.
Rwhen towing the vehicle You can wash the vehicle in an automatic car
Rin the car wash wash from the very start.
! Never clean your vehicle in a Touchless If the vehicle is very dirty, pre-wash it before
Automatic Car Wash as these use special cleaning it in an automatic car wash.
cleaning agents. These cleaning agents can After using an automatic car wash, wipe off wax
damage the paintwork or plastic parts. from the windshield and the wiper blades. This
will prevent smears and reduce wiping noises
! Make sure that: caused by residue on the windshield.
Rthe side windows and the sliding sunroof
are fully closed. Washing by hand
Rthat the blower of the ventilation/heating
system is switched off (OFF button has In some countries, washing by hand is only
been pressed). allowed at specially equipped washing bays.
Rthe windshield wiper switch is at position
Observe the legal requirements in all countries
g. concerned.

Maintenance and care


X Do not use hot water and do not wash the
The vehicle may otherwise be damaged.
vehicle in direct sunlight.
! In car washes with a towing mechanism, X Use a soft sponge to clean.
make sure that the automatic transmission is X Use a mild cleaning agent, such as a car
in transmission position i; otherwise, the shampoo approved by Mercedes-Benz.
vehicle could be damaged.
X Thoroughly hose down the vehicle with a gen-
RVehicles with a SmartKey:
tle jet of water.
Do not remove the SmartKey from the igni- X Do not point the water jet directly towards the
tion lock. Do not open the driver's door or air inlets.
front-passenger door when the engine is
X Use plenty of water and rinse out the sponge
switched off. Otherwise, the automatic
transmission selects park position j auto- frequently.
matically and locks the wheels. You can X Rinse the vehicle with clean water and dry
prevent this by shifting the automatic trans- thoroughly with a chamois.
mission to i beforehand. X Do not let the cleaning agent dry on the paint-
RVehicles with KEYLESS-GO: work.
Do not open the driver's door or front- When using the vehicle in winter, remove all
passenger door when the engine is traces of road salt deposits carefully and as
switched off. Otherwise, the automatic soon as possible.
transmission selects park position j auto-
matically and locks the wheels. Power washers
Observe the following to make sure that the
automatic transmission stays in position i: G WARNING
X Make sure the vehicle is stationary and the The water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirt
ignition is switched off. blasters) can cause invisible exterior damage
X Turn the SmartKey to position in the ignition to the tires or chassis components. Compo-
lock 2 (Y page 135). nents damaged in this way may fail unexpect-
Use the SmartKey instead of the Start/Stop edly. There is a risk of an accident.
button on vehicles with KEYLESS-GO.
X Depress and hold the brake pedal.
Do not use power washers with circular jet
X Shift the automatic transmission to position
nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged
i. tires or chassis components replaced imme-
X Release the brake pedal. diately.

Z
328 Care

! Always maintain a distance of at least X Remove coolant, brake fluid, tree resin, oils,
11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehicle and the fuels and greases by rubbing gently with a
power washer nozzle. Information about the cloth soaked in petroleum ether or lighter
correct distance is available from the equip- fluid.
ment manufacturer. X Use tar remover to remove tar stains.
Move the power washer nozzle around when X Use silicone remover to remove wax.
cleaning your vehicle.
If water no longer forms "beads" on the paint
Do not aim directly at any of the following: surface, use the paint care products recommen-
Rtires ded and approved by Mercedes-Benz. This is the
Rdoor gaps, roof gaps, joints, etc. case approximately every three to five months,
Relectrical components
depending on the climate conditions and the
care product used.
Rbattery
If dirt has penetrated the paint surface or if the
Rplug-type couplings paint has become dull, the paint cleaner recom-
Rlights mended and approved by Mercedes-Benz
Rseals should be used.
Rtrim Do not use these care products in the sun or on
Rventilation slots the hood while the hood is hot.
Maintenance and care

Damaged seals or electrical components can X Use a suitable touch-up stick, e.g. MB Touch-
lead to leaks or failures. Up Stick, to repair slight damage to the paint-
work quickly and provisionally.
! Vehicles with decorative foil: parts of your
vehicle are covered with decorative foil. Main-
tain a distance of at least 27.5 in (70 cm) Matte finish care
between the foil-wrapped parts of the vehicle ! Never polish the vehicle or the light alloy
and the nozzle of the high pressure cleaner. wheels. Polishing causes the finish to shine.
Information about the correct distance is
available from the equipment manufacturer. ! The following can give the paint a glossy
Move the power washer nozzle around when appearance and thus reduce the matt effect:
cleaning your vehicle. RRubbing hard with unsuitable agents
The water temperature of the high-pressure RWashing the vehicle in direct sunlight
cleaner must not exceed 140 °F (60 °C).
! Never use paint cleaner, buffing or polishing
products, or gloss preserver, e.g. wax, for the
Cleaning the paintwork purpose of paintwork care. These products
! Do not affix: are only suitable for high-gloss surfaces. Their
use on vehicles with matte paintwork leads to
Rstickers considerable surface damage or, more spe-
Rfilms cifically, to shiny, spotted areas.
Rmagnetic plates or similar items Always have paintwork repairs carried out at a
to painted surfaces. You could otherwise qualified specialist workshop.
damage the paintwork. ! Only use automatic car washes which cor-
Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected by respond to the latest technological stand-
corrosion and damage caused by inadequate ards. Never use wash programs which finish
care cannot always be completely repaired. In by treating the vehicle with hot wax.
such cases, visit a qualified specialist workshop. Observe these notes if your vehicle has a clear
X Remove dirt immediately, where possible, matte finish. This will help you to avoid damage
while avoiding rubbing too hard. to the paintwork due to incorrect treatment.
X Soak insect remains with insect remover and These notes also apply to light alloy wheels with
rinse off the treated areas afterwards. a clear matt finish.
X Soak bird droppings with water and rinse off
the treated areas afterwards.
Care 329

i Use only insect remover and car shampoo ! Clean the water drainage channels of the
from the range of recommended and windshield and the rear window at regular
approved Mercedes-Benz care products. intervals. Deposits such as leaves, petals and
pollen may under certain circumstances pre-
vent water from draining away. This can lead
Cleaning the vehicle parts to corrosion damage and damage to elec-
tronic components.
Cleaning the wheels X Clean the inside and outside of the windows
with a damp cloth and a cleaning product that
G WARNING is recommended and approved by Mercedes-
The water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirt Benz.
blasters) can cause invisible exterior damage
to the tires or chassis components. Compo- Cleaning wiper blades
nents damaged in this way may fail unexpect-
edly. There is a risk of an accident. G WARNING
Do not use power washers with circular jet You could become trapped by the windshield
nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged wipers if they start moving while cleaning the
tires or chassis components replaced imme- windshield or wiper blades. There is a risk of

Maintenance and care


diately. injury.
Always switch off the windshield wipers and
! Do not use acidic wheel cleaning products the ignition before cleaning the windshield or
to remove brake dust. This could damage wiper blades.
wheel bolts and brake components.
! Do not park your vehicle for a long period of ! Do not pull the wiper blade. Otherwise, the
time directly after cleaning, particularly after wiper blade could be damaged.
cleaning the wheel rim with wheel cleaner. ! Do not clean wiper blades too often and do
Wheel cleaner can lead to the increased cor- not rub them too hard. Otherwise, the graph-
rosion of the brake discs and pads. Therefore, ite coating could be damaged. This could
drive for a few minutes after cleaning. By cause wiper noise.
heating up the brakes, the brake discs and
pads dry. The vehicle can then be parked for a ! Hold the wiper arm securely when folding
long period of time. back. The windshield could be damaged if the
wiper arm smacks against it suddenly.
Cleaning the windows X Fold the windshield wiper arms away from the
windshield (Y page 118).
G WARNING X Carefully clean the wiper blades with a damp
You could become trapped by the windshield cloth.
wipers if they start moving while cleaning the X Fold the windshield wiper arms back again
windshield or wiper blades. There is a risk of before switching on the ignition.
injury.
Always switch off the windshield wipers and Cleaning the exterior lighting
the ignition before cleaning the windshield or
! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths
wiper blades. which are suitable for plastic light lenses.
Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaning cloths
! Do not use dry cloths, abrasive products, could scratch or damage the plastic light len-
solvents or cleaning agents containing sol- ses.
vents to clean the inside of the windows. Do
X Clean the plastic lenses of the exterior light-
not touch the insides of the windows with
hard objects, e.g. an ice scraper or ring. There ing using a wet sponge and a mild cleaning
is otherwise a risk of damaging the windows. agent, e. g. Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or
cleaning cloths.
Z
330 Care

Cleaning the mirror turn signals Cleaning the rear view camera and 360°
camera
! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths
that are suitable for plastic lenses. Unsuitable ! Do not clean the camera lens and the area
cleaning agents or cleaning cloths could around the rear view camera or 360° camera
scratch or damage the plastic lenses of the with a power washer.
mirror turn signals.
X Clean the plastic lenses of the mirror turn sig-
nals in the exterior mirror housing using a wet
sponge and mild cleaning agent, e.g.
Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or cleaning
cloths.

Cleaning the side running board


! Do not clean the aluminum inserts of the
side running board with alkaline or acidic
cleaners, such as wheel cleaner. Do not use
acidic wheel cleaners to remove brake dust. Make sure that the vehicle is stationary and
Maintenance and care

X
The aluminum inserts could otherwise be the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition
damaged. lock.
X Open the camera cover for cleaning via the
Cleaning the sensors multimedia system (see Digital Operator's
Manual).
! If you clean the sensors with a power
washer, make sure that you keep a distance X To clean the camera: use clean water and a
of at least 11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehicle soft cloth to clean the camera lens :.
and the power washer nozzle. Information 360° camera: if you drive at speeds above
about the correct distance is available from 20 mph (30 km/h) or with the SmartKey in posi-
the equipment manufacturer. tion u or 1 in the ignition lock, the cover of
the 360° camera closes.

Cleaning the exhaust pipe


G WARNING
The exhaust tail pipe and tail pipe trim can
become very hot. If you come into contact
with these parts of the vehicle, you could burn
yourself. There is a risk of injury.
Always be particularly careful around the
exhaust tail pipe and the tail pipe trim. Allow
these components to cool down before touch-
ing them.

! Vehicles with black exhaust pipes: black


chromed screens should not be polished with
a chrome polish. They will otherwise lose their
X Clean sensors : of the driving systems with black shine. For optimal care, the screens
water, car shampoo and a soft cloth. should be rubbed with a lightly oiled cloth
after every car wash. Commercially available
engine and care oils are suitable for this.
Care 331

For heavier soiling, you can apply a fine paint- Interior care
work polish with a microfiber cloth. Remove
the excess polish residue after polishing. Cleaning the display
Impurities combined with the effects of road grit
and corrosive environmental factors may cause ! For cleaning, do not use any of the following:
flash rust to form on the surface. You can Ralcohol-based thinner or gasoline
restore the original shine of the exhaust pipe by Rabrasive cleaning agents
cleaning it regularly, especially in winter and Rcommercially-available household cleaning
after washing. agents
X Clean the exhaust pipe with a chrome care These may damage the display surface. Do
product tested and approved by Mercedes- not put pressure on the display surface when
Benz. cleaning. This could lead to irreparable dam-
age to the display.
Cleaning the trailer tow hitch X Before cleaning the display, make sure that it
is switched off and has cooled down.
H Environmental note X Clean the display surface using a commer-
Dispose of rags soaked in oil and grease in an cially available microfiber cloth and TFT/LCD
environmentally responsible manner. display cleaner.

Maintenance and care


X Dry the display surface using a dry microfiber
! Do not clean the ball coupling with a power cloth.
washer. Do not use solvents.
! Please note the care instructions in the Cleaning the plastic trim
trailer coupling manufacturer's operating
instructions. G WARNING
Care products and cleaning agents containing
solvents cause surfaces in the cockpit to
become porous. As a result, plastic parts may
come loose in the event of air bag deploy-
ment. There is a risk of injury.
Do not use any care products and cleaning
agents to clean the cockpit.

! Never attach the following to plastic surfa-


ces:
Rstickers
The ball coupling must be cleaned if it becomes Rfilms
dirty or corroded. Rperfume oil container or similar
X Remove rust on the ball of the ball coupling, You could otherwise damage the plastic.
e.g. with a wire brush.
X Remove dirt with a clean, lint-free cloth or a
! Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent or
sunscreen to come into contact with the plas-
brush.
tic trim. This maintains the high-quality look of
X After cleaning, lightly oil or grease ball cou- the surfaces.
pling :.
X Wipe the plastic trim with a damp, lint-free
X Check that the vehicle's trailer tow hitch is
cloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth.
working properly.
X Heavy soiling: use care and cleaning prod-
i You can also have the maintenance work on ucts recommended and approved by
the ball coupling and the trailer tow hitch car- Mercedes-Benz.
ried out by a qualified specialist workshop. The surface may change color temporarily.
Wait until the surface is dry again.

Z
332 Care

Cleaning the steering wheel and gear or Genuine leather seat covers
selector lever ! To retain the natural appearance of the
X Thoroughly wipe with a damp cloth or use leather, observe the following cleaning
leather care agents that have been recom- instructions:
mended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. RClean genuine leather covers carefully with
a damp cloth and then wipe the covers
down with a dry cloth.
Cleaning genuine wood and trim ele-
RMake sure that the leather does not
ments become soaked. It may otherwise become
! Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents rough and cracked.
such as tar remover, wheel cleaners, polishes ROnly use leather care agents that have
or waxes. There is otherwise a risk of damag- been tested and approved by Mercedes-
ing the surface. Benz. You can obtain these from a qualified
specialist workshop.
! Do not use chrome polish on trim pieces.
The trim pieces have a chrome look but are Leather is a natural product.
mostly made of anodized aluminum and can It exhibits natural surface characteristics, for
lose their shine if chrome polish is used. Use example:
a damp, lint-free cloth instead when cleaning Rdifferences in the texture
Maintenance and care

the trim pieces. Rmarks caused by growth and injury


If the chrome-plated trim pieces are very Rslight nuances of color
dirty, you can use a chrome polish. If you are
unsure as to whether the trim pieces are These are characteristics of leather and not
chrome-plated or not, consult an authorized material defects.
Mercedes-Benz Center. Seat covers of other materials
X Wipe the wooden trim and trim pieces with a ! Observe the following when cleaning:
damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth.
Rclean artificial leather covers with a cloth
X Heavy soiling: use car care and cleaning
moistened with a solution containing 1%
products recommended and approved by
detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid).
Mercedes-Benz.
Rclean cloth covers with a microfiber cloth
moistened with a solution containing 1%
Cleaning the seat covers detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid). Rub
carefully and always wipe entire seat sec-
General notes tions to avoid leaving visible lines. Leave
! Do not use a microfiber cloth to clean covers the seat to dry afterwards. Cleaning results
made out of real leather, artificial leather or depend on the type of dirt and how long it
DINAMICA. If used often, these can damage has been there.
the cover. Rclean DINAMICA covers with a damp cloth.
Make sure that you wipe entire seat sec-
i Note that regular care is essential to ensure tions to avoid leaving visible lines.
that the appearance and comfort of the cov-
ers is retained over time.
Cleaning the seat belts
G WARNING
Seat belts can become severely weakened if
bleached or dyed. This could cause the seat
belts to tear or fail, for instance, in the event of
an accident. This poses an increased risk of
injury or fatal injury.
Never bleach or dye the seat belts.
Care 333

! Do not clean the seat belts using chemical


cleaning agents. Do not dry the seat belts by
heating at temperatures above 176 ‡ (80 †)
or in direct sunlight.
X Use clean, lukewarm water and soap solution.

Cleaning the headliner and carpets


X Headliner: if it is very dirty, use a soft brush or
dry shampoo.
X Carpets: use the carpet and textile cleaning
agents recommended and approved by
Mercedes-Benz.

Maintenance and care

Z
334 Where will I find...?

Where will I find...? Information on reflective safety jackets


Reflective safety jacket
Removing/replacing the reflective
safety jacket

: Maximum number of washes


; Maximum wash temperature
= Do not bleach
? Do not iron
A Do not use a laundry dryer
The reflective safety jackets are located in front B Do not dry-clean
door stowage compartments :. Reflective
safety jackets can also be stored in the rear door
C This is a class 2 vest
Breakdown assistance

stowage compartments. RThe reflective safety jackets meet the require-


X To remove: pull out the safety jacket bag ments defined by the legal standard only:
containing the reflective safety jacket. - if the correct size is used and
X Open the safety jacket bag and pull out the - if the reflective safety jackets are correctly
reflective safety jacket. fastened
X To stow: fold the reflective safety jacket, roll RBefore use, ensure that the reflective safety
it up and stow it in the safety jacket bag. jackets are clean and intact. The special prop-
X Replace the safety jacket bag in stowage
erties may otherwise be compromised.
compartment :. RThe reflective safety jackets should be stored
in their original packaging in a dry place away
i Remove a new reflective safety jacket from from sources of heat and light.
its packaging material before sliding it into
RThe maximum number of washes specified is
the stowage compartment. The packaging
material may otherwise cause it to slip out or not the only factor influencing the life span of
make removing it difficult. the reflective safety jackets. Their life span
also depends on use, care, storage, etc.
Observe the legal requirements in each country.
RThe reflective safety jackets should be dis-
posed of and replaced with new ones:
- after 15 washes, and/or
- if the reflective strips have become
scratched, and/or
- if the backing material and/or reflective
strips have become soiled and cannot be
cleaned off, and/or
- if the fluorescence has faded e.g. due to the
effects of sunlight
RDispose of reflective safety jackets in an envi-
ronmentally responsible manner. To do so,
contact your local waste disposal company.
Flat tire 335

Vehicle tool kit Vehicles with a "Minispare" emergency


spare wheel
General notes
The vehicle tool kit can be found in the stowage
well under the cargo compartment floor.
Apart from certain country-specific variations,
the vehicles are not equipped with a tire-change
tool kit. Some tools for changing a wheel are
specific to the vehicle. For more information on
which tools are required to perform a wheel
change on your vehicle, consult a qualified spe-
cialist workshop.
Necessary tire-changing tools can include, for
example:
Rjack
: Folding wheel chock
Rwheel chock
; Lug wrench
= Alignment bolt
Rlug wrench
? Towing eye
Rratchet wrench
A Jack
Ralignment bolt
B Ratchet wrench

Breakdown assistance
Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit X Open the tailgate.
X Lift the cargo compartment floor up
(Y page 303).
X Remove the "Minispare" emergency spare
wheel (Y page 377).

Flat tire
Preparing the vehicle
Your vehicle may be equipped with:
RMOExtended tires (tires with run-flat proper-
ties)
: Jack
; Folding wheel chock Vehicle preparation is not necessary on vehi-
cles with MOExtended tires
= Towing eye
Ra TIREFIT kit (Y page 335)
? Alignment bolt
Ran emergency spare wheel (only for certain
A Tire inflation compressor
countries)
B Lug wrench
Information on changing and mounting wheels
C Ratchet wrench (Y page 371).
D Tire sealant filler bottle
X Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and
X Open the tailgate. level ground, as far away as possible from
X Lift the cargo compartment floor up traffic.
(Y page 303). X Switch on the hazard warning lamps.
X Use the TIREFIT kit (Y page 337). X Secure the vehicle against rolling away
(Y page 156).
X If possible, bring the front wheels into the
straight-ahead position.
336 Flat tire

X Vehicles with the AIRMATIC package: sidewall of the tire. You will find this marking
make sure that the normal vehicle level is next to the tire size designation, the load-bear-
selected (Y page 185). ing capacity and the speed index (Y page 366).
X Vehicles with the Off-Road Engineering MOExtended tires may only be used in conjunc-
package: make sure that the normal vehicle tion with an active tire pressure loss warning
level is selected (Y page 179). system or with an active tire pressure monitor.
X Switch off the engine. If a pressure loss warning message appears
X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: remove the in the multifunction display:
SmartKey from the ignition lock. Robserve the instructions in the display mes-
X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: open the driv- sages (Y page 268).
er's door. Rcheck the tire for damage
The vehicle electronics are now in position Rif driving on, observe the following notes
u. This means no SmartKey is in the ignition
The driving distance possible in run-flat mode is
lock.
approximately 50 miles (80 km) when the vehi-
X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: remove the cle is partially laden and approximately 18 miles
Start/Stop button from the ignition lock (30 km) when the vehicle is fully laden.
(Y page 135). In addition to the vehicle load, the driving dis-
X Make sure that the engine cannot be started tance possible depends upon:
via your smartphone (Y page 137).
RVehicle speed
X Make sure that the passengers are not endan-
RRoad condition
gered as they do so. Make sure that no one is
Breakdown assistance

near the danger area while a wheel is being ROutside temperature


changed. Anyone who is not directly assisting The driving distance possible in run-flat mode
in the wheel change should, for example, may be reduced by extreme driving conditions
stand behind the barrier. or maneuvers, or it can be increased through a
X Get out of the vehicle. Pay attention to traffic moderate style of driving.
conditions when doing so. The driving distance possible in run-flat mode is
X Close the driver's door. counted from the moment the tire pressure loss
X Unload heavy luggage. warning appears in the multifunction display.
You must not exceed a maximum permissible
i Only operate the tire inflation compressor speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).
using a 12 V socket, even if the ignition is
turned off (Y page 308). i When replacing one or all tires, please
observe the following specifications for your
An emergency cut-out ensures that the on- vehicle's tires:
board voltage does not drop too low. If the on-
board voltage is too low, the power to the Rsize
sockets is automatically cut. This ensures Rtype and
that there is sufficient power to start the Rthe "MOExtended" mark
engine.
If a tire has gone flat and cannot be replaced
with a MOExtended tire, a standard tire may
be used as a temporary measure. Make sure
MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat that you use the proper size and type (sum-
properties) mer or winter tire).

General notes i Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires


are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the fac-
With MOExtended tires (tires with run flat char- tory. It is therefore recommended that you
acteristics), you can continue to drive your vehi- additionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT
cle even if there is a total loss of pressure in one kit if you mount tires that do not feature run-
or more tires. The affected tire must not show flat properties, e.g. winter tires. A TIREFIT kit
any clearly visible damage. may be obtained from a qualified specialist
You can recognize a MOExtended tire by the workshop.
MOExtended marking which appears on the
Flat tire 337

Important safety notes G WARNING


G WARNING The tire sealant is harmful and causes irrita-
tion. It must not come into contact with your
When driving in emergency mode, the driving
skin, eyes or clothing or be swallowed. Do not
characteristics deteriorate, e.g. when corner-
inhale TIREFIT fumes. Keep tire sealant away
ing, accelerating quickly and when braking.
from children. There is a risk of injury.
There is a risk of an accident.
If you come into contact with the tire sealant,
Do not exceed the stated maximum speed.
observe the following:
Avoid abrupt steering and driving maneuvers,
and driving over obstacles (curbs, potholes, RRinse off the tire sealant from your skin
off-road). This applies in particular to a laden immediately with water.
vehicle. RIf the tire sealant comes into contact with
Stop driving in emergency mode if: your eyes, immediately rinse them thor-
oughly with clean water.
Ryou hear banging noises.
RIf tire sealant is swallowed, immediately
Rthevehicle starts to shake.
rinse your mouth out thoroughly and drink
Ryou see smoke and smell rubber.
plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting,
RESP® is intervening constantly. and seek medical attention immediately.
Rthere are tears in the sidewalls of the tire. RImmediately change out of clothing which

Breakdown assistance
After driving in emergency mode, have the has come into contact with tire sealant.
wheel rims checked at a qualified specialist RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical
workshop with regard to their further use. The attention immediately.
defective tire must be replaced in every case.
! Do not operate the tire inflation compressor
for longer than eight minutes at a time without
a break. It may otherwise overheat.
TIREFIT kit
The tire inflation compressor can be operated
Important safety notes again once it has cooled down.
Comply with the manufacturer’s safety instruc-
TIREFIT is a tire sealant. tions on the sticker on the tire inflation com-
You can use TIREFIT to seal punctures of up to pressor.
0.16 in (4 mm), particularly those in the tire
tread. You can use TIREFIT at outside tempera-
tures down to Ò4 ‡ (Ò20 †).
Using the TIREFIT kit

G WARNING
In the following situations, the tire sealant is
unable to provide sufficient breakdown assis-
tance, as it is unable to seal the tire properly:
Rthere are cuts or punctures in the tire larger
than those mentioned above.
Rthe wheel rim is damaged.
Ryou have driven at very low tire pressures or
on a flat tire.
There is a risk of an accident. X Do not remove any foreign objects which have
Do not drive the vehicle. Contact a qualified penetrated the tire, e.g. screws or nails.
specialist workshop. X Remove the tire sealant bottle, the accompa-
nying TIREFIT sticker and the tire inflation
Z
338 Flat tire

compressor from the stowage well under- X Press on and off switch = on the tire inflation
neath the cargo compartment floor compressor to I.
(Y page 335). The tire inflation compressor is switched on.
X Affix part : of the TIREFIT sticker to the The tire is inflated.
instrument cluster within the driver's field of First, tire sealant is pumped into the tire. The
vision. pressure may briefly rise to approximately
X Affix part ; of the TIREFIT sticker near the 500 kPa (5 bar/73 psi).
valve on the wheel with the defective tire. Do not switch off the tire inflation com-
pressor during this phase.
X Let the tire inflation compressor run for a
maximum of five minutes. The tire should then
have attained a pressure of at least 180 kPa
(1.8 bar/26 psi).
If a pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has
been attained after five minutes, see "Tire pres-
sure reached" (Y page 339).
If a tire pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has
not been attained after five minutes, see "Tire
pressure not reached" (Y page 338).
If tire sealant has escaped, clean it off affected
X Pull connector ? with the cable and hose A areas as quickly as possible. It is preferable to
Breakdown assistance

out of the tire inflation compressor housing. use clean water.


X Screw hose A onto flange B of tire sealant If your clothes are soiled with tire sealant, have
bottle :. them cleaned with perchloroethylene at a dry
X Place tire sealant bottle : head down into cleaner as soon as possible.
recess ; of the tire inflation compressor.
Tire pressure not reached
If a pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has not
been attained after five minutes:
X Switch off the tire inflation compressor.
X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of the
faulty tire.
Note that tire sealant may escape when you
unscrew the filler hose.
X Very slowly drive forwards or reverse approx-
imately 30 ft (10 m).
X Pump up the tire again.
X Remove the cap from valve C on the faulty After a maximum of five minutes the tire pres-
tire. sure must be at least 180 kPa (1.8 bar/
X Screw filler hose D onto valve C. 26 psi).
X Insert connector ? into a socket in your vehi- G WARNING
cle. If the required tire pressure is not reached
Cigarette lighter socket: (Y page 307) after the specified time, the tire is too badly
12 V sockets: (Y page 308) damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair the
Observe the notes on the cigarette lighter tire in this instance. Damaged tires and a tire
(Y page 307). Observe the notes on sockets pressure that is too low can significantly
(Y page 308).
impair the vehicle's braking and driving char-
X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the igni-
tion lock (Y page 135). acteristics. There is a risk of accident.
Flat tire 339

Do not continue driving. Contact a qualified the tire in this instance. Damaged tires and a
specialist workshop. tire pressure that is too low can significantly
impair the vehicle's braking and driving char-
Tire pressure reached acteristics. There is a risk of accident.
Do not continue driving. Contact a qualified
G WARNING specialist workshop.
A tire temporarily sealed with tire sealant
impairs the driving characteristics and is not i In cases such as the one mentioned above,
suitable for higher speeds. There is a risk of contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
accident. ter. Or call 1-800 FOR-MERCEDES (in the
USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).
You should therefore adapt your driving style
X Correct the tire pressure if it is still at least
accordingly and drive carefully. Do not exceed 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). See the Tire and
the specified maximum speed with a tire that Loading Information placard on the driver's
has been repaired using tire sealant. side B-pillar or the tire pressure table in the
fuel filler flap for values.
The maximum permissible speed for a tire X To increase the tire pressure: switch on the
sealed with tire sealant is 50 mph (80 km/h). tire inflation compressor.
The upper part of the TIREFIT sticker must be
affixed to the instrument cluster in the driver's
field of vision.

Breakdown assistance
! Residue from the tire sealant may come out
of the filler hose after use. This could cause
stains.
Therefore, place the filler hose in the plastic
bag which contained the TIREFIT kit.
H Environmental note
Have the used tire sealant bottle disposed of
professionally, e.g. at a qualified specialist
workshop. X To reduce the tire pressure: press pressure
release button E on the filler hose.
If a tire pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has
X The tire pressure is shown on pressure gauge
been attained after five minutes:
F.
X Switch off the tire inflation compressor.
X When the tire pressure is correct, unscrew the
X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of the
filler hose from the valve of the sealed tire.
faulty tire.
X Screw the valve cap onto the tire valve of the
X Stow the tire sealant bottle and the tire infla-
sealed tire.
tion compressor.
X Pull the tire sealant bottle out of the tire infla-
X Pull away immediately.
tion compressor.
X Stop after driving for approximately ten
The filler hose remains attached to the tire
minutes and check the tire pressure with the sealant bottle.
tire inflation compressor.
The tire pressure must now be at least X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist work-
130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). shop and have the tire changed there.
X Have the tire sealant bottle replaced as soon
G WARNING as possible at a qualified specialist workshop.
If the required tire pressure is not reached X Have the tire sealant bottle replaced every
after driving for a short period, the tire is too four years at a qualified specialist workshop.
badly damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair

Z
340 Battery (vehicle)

Battery (vehicle) The highly flammable gas mixture forms when


charging the battery as well as when jump-start-
12 V battery - important safety notes ing.
Always make sure that neither you nor the bat-
Plug-in hybrid: be sure to read the separate tery is electrostatically charged. A build-up of
operating instructions. You could otherwise fail electrostatic charge can be caused, for exam-
to recognize dangers, e.g. due to high voltage. ple:
Special tools and expert knowledge are required
Rby wearing clothing made from synthetic
when working on the battery, e.g. removal and
installation. You should therefore have all work fibers
involving the battery carried out at a qualified Rdue to friction between clothing and seats
specialist workshop. Rif you push or pull the battery across the car-
pet or other synthetic materials
G WARNING Rif you wipe the battery with a cloth
Work carried out incorrectly on the battery
can lead, for example, to a short circuit and G WARNING
thus damage the vehicle electronics. This can During the charging process, a battery produ-
lead to function restrictions applying to ces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or
safety-relevant systems, e.g. the lighting sys- sparks are created, the hydrogen gas can
tem, the ABS (anti-lock braking system) or the ignite. There is a risk of an explosion.
ESP® (Electronic Stability Program). The oper- RMake sure that the positive terminal of a
Breakdown assistance

ating safety of your vehicle may be restricted. connected battery does not come into con-
You could lose control of the vehicle, for tact with vehicle parts.
example: RNever place metal objects or tools on a bat-

Rwhen braking tery.


RIt is important that you observe the descri-
Rin the event of abrupt steering maneuvers
and/or when the vehicle's speed is not bed order of the battery terminals when
adapted to the road conditions connecting and disconnecting a battery.
RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the
There is a risk of an accident.
battery poles with identical polarity are
In the event of a short circuit or a similar inci-
connected.
dent, contact a qualified specialist workshop
RIt is particularly important to observe the
immediately. Do not drive any further. You
should have all work involving the battery car- described order when connecting and dis-
ried out at a qualified specialist workshop. connecting the jumper cables.
RNever connect or disconnect the battery
For further information about ABS and ESP®, terminals while the engine is running.
see (Y page 66) and (Y page 70).
G WARNING G WARNING
Electrostatic build-up can lead to the creation Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.
of sparks, which could ignite the highly explo- Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do
sive gases of a battery. There is a risk of an not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over
explosion. the battery. Keep children away from batter-
Before handling the battery, touch the vehicle ies. Wash away battery acid immediately with
body to remove any existing electrostatic plenty of clean water and seek medical atten-
build-up. tion.
Battery (vehicle) 341

H Environmental note Battery acid is caustic. Avoid contact


with skin, eyes or clothing.
Batteries contain dangerous
Wear suitable protective clothing,
substances. It is against the especially gloves, apron and face-
law to dispose of them with guard.
the household rubbish. They Rinse any acid spills immediately
must be collected separately with clear water. Contact a physician
and recycled to protect the if necessary.
environment. Wear eye protection.
Dispose of batteries in an
environmentally friendly
manner. Take discharged Keep children away.
batteries to a qualified spe-
cialist workshop or a special
collection point for used bat-
teries. Observe this Operator's Manual.

! Have the battery regularly checked at a


qualified specialist workshop.
For more information, please contact a quali- For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-

Breakdown assistance
fied specialist workshop. mends that you only use batteries which have
been tested and approved for your vehicle by
! Always have work on batteries carried out at Mercedes-Benz. These batteries provide
a qualified specialist workshop. increased impact protection to prevent vehicle
Should it, in exceptional circumstances, be occupants from suffering acid burns should the
absolutely necessary to disconnect the 12- battery be damaged in the event of an accident.
volt battery yourself, please observe the fol- In order for the battery to achieve the maximum
lowing: possible service life, it must always be suffi-
RSecure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling
ciently charged.
away. Like other batteries, the vehicle battery may
RSwitch off the ignition.
discharge over time if you do not use the vehicle.
In this case, have the battery disconnected at a
RDisconnect the negative terminal first and qualified specialist workshop. However, you can
then the positive terminal. also charge the battery with a charger recom-
The transmission is locked in position j mended by Mercedes-Benz. Contact a qualified
after disconnecting the battery. specialist workshop for further information.
After the work has been done, install the bat- Have the battery condition of charge checked
tery and replace the cover of the positive ter- more frequently if you use the vehicle mainly for
minal clamp firmly. short trips or if you leave it standing idle for a
Comply with safety precautions and take pro- lengthy period. Consult a qualified specialist
tective measures when handling batteries. workshop if you wish to leave your vehicle
parked for a long period of time.
Risk of explosion.
Remove the SmartKey if you park the vehicle
and do not require any electrical consumers.
The vehicle will then use very little energy, thus
Fire, open flames and smoking are conserving battery power.
prohibited when handling the bat- If the power supply has been interrupted, e.g. if
tery. Avoid creating sparks. you reconnect the battery, you will have to:
Rset the clock; see the Digital Operator's Man-
ual

Z
342 Jump-starting

On vehicles with a multimedia system and Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before
navigation system, the clock is set automati- charging it or jump-starting.
cally.
Rreset the function for folding the exterior mir-
! Only use battery chargers with a maximum
rors in/out automatically, by folding the mir- charging voltage of 14.8 V.
rors out once (Y page 106)
! Only charge the battery using the jump-
starting connection point.
Charging the 12 V battery The jump-starting connection point is in the
engine compartment (Y page 342).
G WARNING X Open the hood.
During charging and jump-starting, explosive X Connect the battery charger to the positive
gases can escape from the battery. There is a terminal and ground point in the same order
risk of an explosion. as when connecting the donor battery in the
Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating jump-starting procedure (Y page 342).
sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient Keep away from fire and open flames. Do not
ventilation while charging and jump-starting. lean over a battery. Never charge the battery if it
Do not lean over a battery. is still installed in the vehicle, unless you use a
battery charger which has been tested and
approved by Mercedes-Benz. A battery charger
G WARNING unit specially adapted for Mercedes-Benz vehi-
Breakdown assistance

Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury. cles and tested and approved by Mercedes-
Benz is available as an accessory. It permits the
Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do
charging of the battery in its installed position.
not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
the battery. Keep children away from batter- for further information and availability. Read the
ies. Wash away battery acid immediately with battery charger's operating instructions before
plenty of clean water and seek medical atten- charging the battery.
tion. If, at low temperatures, the indicator lamps/
warning lamps in the instrument cluster do not
G WARNING light up, it is highly likely that the discharged
battery has frozen. In this case you may neither
A discharged battery can freeze at tempera- jump-start the vehicle nor charge the battery.
tures below freezing point. When jump-start- The service life of a thawed-out battery may be
ing the vehicle or charging the battery, gases shorter. The starting characteristics can be
can escape from the battery. There is a risk of impaired, particularly at low temperatures. Have
an explosion. the thawed-out battery checked at a qualified
specialist workshop.

Jump-starting

Plug-in hybrid: be sure to read the separate Operator's Manual. You could otherwise fail to rec-
ognize dangers, e.g. due to high voltage.
For the jump-starting procedure, use only the jump-starting connection point in the engine com-
partment, consisting of a positive terminal and a ground point.
G WARNING
Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.
Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over the
battery. Keep children away from batteries. Wash away battery acid immediately with plenty of
clean water and seek medical attention.
Jump-starting 343

G WARNING
During charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk
of an explosion.
Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient ven-
tilation while charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery.

G WARNING
During the charging process, a battery produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or sparks
are created, the hydrogen gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion.
RMake sure that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact with
vehicle parts.
RNever place metal objects or tools on a battery.
RIt is important that you observe the described order of the battery terminals when connecting
and disconnecting a battery.
RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the battery poles with identical polarity are connected.
RIt is particularly important to observe the described order when connecting and disconnecting
the jumper cables.
RNever connect or disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running.

Breakdown assistance
G WARNING
A discharged battery can freeze at temperatures below freezing point. When jump-starting the
vehicle or charging the battery, gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion.
Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before charging it or jump-starting.

! Vehicles with a gasoline engine: avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts. Otherwise, the
catalytic converter could be damaged by non-combusted fuel.
If the indicator/warning lamps do not light up at low temperatures, it is very likely that the dis-
charged battery has frozen. In this case you may neither jump-start the vehicle nor charge the
battery. The service life of a thawed-out battery may be shorter. The starting characteristics can be
impaired, particularly at low temperatures. Have the thawed-out battery checked at a qualified
specialist workshop.
Do not start the vehicle using a rapid charging device. If your vehicle's battery is discharged, the
engine can be jump-started from another vehicle or from a donor battery using jumper cables.
Observe the following points:
RThe battery is not accessible in all vehicles. If the other vehicle's battery is not accessible, jump-
start the vehicle using a donor battery or a jump-starting device.
RVehicles with a gasoline engine: only jump-start the vehicle when the engine and exhaust
system are cold.
RDo not start the engine if the battery is frozen. Let the battery thaw first.
ROnly jump-start from batteries with a 12 V voltage rating.
ROnly use jumper cables which have a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps.
RIf the battery is fully discharged, leave the battery that is being used to jump-start connected for
a few minutes before attempting to start. This charges the battery slightly.
RMake sure that the two vehicles do not touch.

Z
344 Jump-starting

Make sure that:


RThe jumper cables are not damaged.
RBare parts of the terminal clamp do not come into contact with other metal parts while the jumper
cables are connected to the battery.
RThe jumper cables cannot come into contact with parts which can move when the engine is
running, such as the V-belt pulley or the fan.
X Secure the vehicle by applying the electric parking brake.
X Shift the transmission to position j.
X Make sure that the ignition is switched off. All indicator lamps in the instrument cluster must be
off. When using the SmartKey, turn the SmartKey to position u in the ignition lock and remove it
(Y page 135).
X Switch off all electrical consumers, e.g. rear window defroster, lighting, etc.
X Open the hood.

i Right-hand-drive vehicle: the jump-starting connection points may be located on the other
side of the vehicle.
Breakdown assistance

Position number B identifies the charged battery of the other vehicle or an equivalent jump-starting
device.
X Slide cover : of positive terminal ; in the direction of the arrow.
X Connect positive terminal ; on your vehicle to positive terminal = of donor battery B using the
jumper cable, always begin with positive terminal ; on your own vehicle first.
X Start the engine of the donor vehicle and run it at idling speed.
X Connect negative terminal ? of donor battery B to ground point A of your vehicle using the
jumper cable, beginning with donor battery B first.
X Start the engine.
X Before disconnecting the jumper cables, let the engine run for several minutes.
X First, remove the jumper cables from ground point A and negative terminal ?, then from pos-
itive terminal ; and positive terminal =. Begin each time at the contacts on your own vehicle
first.
X Close cover : of positive terminal ; after removing the jumper cables.
X Have the battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Jump-starting is not considered to be a normal operating condition.
Towing and tow-starting 345

i Jumper cables and further information regarding jump-starting can be obtained at any qualified
specialist workshop.

Towing and tow-starting To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate


these systems in the following or similar sit-
Important safety notes uations:
Rwhen towing the vehicle
Plug-in hybrid: be sure to read the separate
Operator's Manual. You could otherwise fail to Rin the car wash
recognize dangers, e.g. due to high voltage. ! Make sure that the electric parking brake is
G WARNING released. If the electric parking brake is faulty,
visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Functions relevant to safety are restricted or
no longer available if: ! Only secure the tow rope or tow bar at the
towing eyes, or the trailer tow hitch, if availa-
Rthe engine is not running. ble. You could otherwise damage the vehicle.
Rthe brake system or the power steering is
! Observe the following points when towing
malfunctioning. with a tow rope:
Rthere is a malfunction in the voltage supply
RSecure the tow rope on the same side on
or the vehicle's electrical system. both vehicles.

Breakdown assistance
If your vehicle is being towed, much more RMake sure that the tow rope is not longer
force may be necessary to steer or brake. than legally permitted. Mark the tow rope in
There is a risk of an accident. the middle, e.g. with a white cloth
(11.8 x 11.8 in). This will make other road
In such cases, use a tow bar. Before towing, users aware that a vehicle is being towed.
make sure that the steering moves freely. ROnly secure the tow cable to the towing
eyes or, if available, to the trailer tow hitch.
G WARNING RObserve the brake lamps of the towing
When towing or tow-starting another vehicle vehicle while driving. Always maintain a dis-
and its weight is greater than the permissible tance a distance so that the tow rope does
gross weight of your vehicle, the: not sag.
RDo not use steel cables or chains to tow
Rthe towing eye could detach itself your vehicle. You could otherwise damage
Rthe vehicle/trailer combination could roll- the vehicle.
over. ! Do not use the trailer tow hitch for recovery
There is a risk of an accident. or towing. Do not use the towing eye for
When towing or tow-starting another vehicle, recovery. this could damage the vehicle. If in
doubt, have the vehicle recovered using a
its weight should not be greater than the per-
crane.
missible gross weight of your vehicle.
! When towing, pull away slowly and
Details on the permissible gross vehicle weight smoothly. Pull the towed vehicle as straight as
of your vehicle can be found on the vehicle iden- possible and not at an acute angle. Excessive
tification plate (Y page 382). tractive power could damage the vehicles.
! When Active Brake Assist, Distance Pilot When towing, it is preferable to use a rigid tow-
DISTRONIC or the HOLD function is activated, ing bar as opposed to a tow rope. A rigid towing
the vehicle brakes automatically in certain bar helps to keep the tractive power low.
situations. ! When towing away vehicles with KEYLESS-
GO, use the key instead of the Start/Stop
button. The automatic transmission may oth-
erwise shift to position j when you open the

Z
346 Towing and tow-starting

driver's or front-passenger door, which could Installing/removing the towing eye


damage the transmission.
! Do not tow with sling-type equipment. This Installing the towing eye
could damage the vehicle.
! Vehicles with differential locks: make sure
the differential locks are in automatic mode.
When towing, the differential locks must not
be switched on. The transmission may other-
wise be damaged.
! The vehicle can be towed a maximum of
30 miles (50km). The towing speed of 30 mph
(50 km/h) must not be exceeded.
If the vehicle has to be towed more than
30 miles (50km), the entire vehicle must be
raised and transported.
It is better to have the vehicle transported than
to have it towed away.
If the vehicle has suffered transmission damage,
have it transported on a transporter or trailer.
Breakdown assistance

The automatic transmission must be in position


The brackets for the screw-in towing eye are
i when the vehicle is being towed.
located in the bumpers. They are at the front and
The battery must be connected and charged. rear behind covers :;.
Otherwise, you:
X Remove the towing eye from the vehicle tool
Rcannot turn the SmartKey to position 2 in kit (Y page 335).
the ignition lock X To open the cover at the front: press the
Rcannot release the electric parking brake mark on cover : inwards in the direction of
Rcannot shift the automatic transmission to the arrow.
position i X To open the cover at the rear: insert a flat,
Disarm the automatic locking feature before the blunt object into the cutout and lever
vehicle is towed (Y page 239). You could other- cover ; out of the bumper.
wise be locked out when pushing or towing the X Take cover : or ; off the opening.
vehicle. X Screw in the towing eye clockwise as far as it
If the vehicle is in a dangerous area, it can be will go and tighten it.
towed out of that area with both axles on the
ground. In this case, the towing distance must
not be greater than 165 ft (50 m) and must not Removing the towing eye
exceed a towing speed of 6 mph (10 km/h). For
longer distances, have the vehicle loaded and
X Unscrew and remove the towing eye.
transported. X Position cover : or ; in the bumper and
press the cover on until it engages.
X Place the towing eye in the vehicle tool kit.

Towing a vehicle with both axles on


the ground
The automatic transmission shifts to position
j automatically when you open the driver's or
front-passenger door or when you remove the
SmartKey from the ignition lock.
Towing and tow-starting 347

In order to ensure that the automatic transmis- All vehicles


sion stays in position i when towing away the
vehicle, you must observe the following points: ! You may only secure the vehicle by the
wheels, not by parts of the vehicle such as
X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary.
axle or steering components. Otherwise, the
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- vehicle could be damaged.
tion lock.
The towing eye can be used to pull the vehicle
X Depress and hold the brake pedal.
onto a trailer or transporter for transporting pur-
X Shift the automatic transmission to position poses.
i.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
X Leave the SmartKey in position 2 in the igni-
tion lock.
tion lock.
X Shift the automatic transmission to position
X Release the brake pedal.
i.
X Release the electric parking brake.
As soon as the vehicle has been loaded:
X Switch on the hazard warning lamps
(Y page 112). X Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by
applying the electric parking brake.
In order to signal a change of direction when
X Shift the automatic transmission to position
towing the vehicle with the hazard warning
lamps switched on, use the combination switch j.
as usual. In this case, only the indicator lamps X Turn the SmartKey to position u in the igni-
for the direction of travel flash. After resetting tion lock and remove it.

Breakdown assistance
the combination switch, the hazard warning X Secure the vehicle.
lamp starts flashing again.
Securing the vehicle
Transporting the vehicle ! After loading, the vehicle must be secured at
all four wheels. Otherwise, the vehicle could
4MATIC vehicles/vehicles with auto- be damaged.
matic transmission A minimum distance of 8 in (20 cm) up and
4 in (10 cm) down must be maintained to the
transport platform.
X Secure all four wheels after loading the vehi-
cle.

Vehicles with ADS PLUS (Adaptive


Damping System PLUS)
Important safety notes
G WARNING
The weaker damping forces of the vehicle to
! When the vehicle is loaded for transport, the be transported can cause the vehicle/trailer
front and rear axles must be stationary and on combination to swing.
the same transportation vehicle. Positioning
As a result, when transporting vehicles with
over the connection point of the transport
vehicle is not permitted. The drive train may Adaptive Damping System PLUS, the vehicle/
otherwise be damaged. trailer combination may start to skid. Conse-
quently, you could lose control of the vehicle.
There is a risk of accident and injury.

Z
348 Fuses

When transporting, make sure that: Fuses


Rthe vehicle is has been loaded onto the Important safety notes
transporter correctly
Rthe vehicle is secured at all four wheels with G WARNING
suitable tensioning straps If you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or if
Ryou do not exceed the maximum permissi- you replace it with a fuse with a higher amper-
ble speed of 35 mph (60 km/h) age, the electric cables could be overloaded.
This could result in a fire. There is a risk of an
Securing the vehicle accident and injury.
! After loading, the vehicle must be secured at Always replace faulty fuses with the specified
all four wheels. Otherwise, the vehicle could new fuses having the correct amperage.
be damaged.
A minimum distance of 8 in (20 cm) up and ! For the fuse boxes in the engine compart-
4 in (10 cm) down must be maintained to the ment and under the rear bench seat, only use
transport platform. fuses with the suffix "S". Otherwise, compo-
X Secure all four wheels after loading the vehi-
nents or systems could be damaged.
cle. ! Make sure that no moisture can enter the
fuse box when the cover is open.
! When closing the cover, make sure that it is
Breakdown assistance

Information on 4MATIC vehicles lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture seep-
ing in or dirt could otherwise impair the oper-
! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towed ation of the fuses.
with either the front or the rear axle raised, as
doing so will damage the transmission. The fuses in your vehicle serve to close down
faulty circuits. If a fuse blows, all the compo-
Vehicles with 4MATIC may either be towed away
nents on the circuit and their functions stop
with both axles on the ground or be loaded up
operating.
and transported.
Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of the
If the vehicle's transmission, front, or rear axle is
same rating, which you can recognize by the
damaged, have the vehicle transported on a
color and value. The fuse ratings are listed in the
truck or trailer.
fuse allocation chart.
In the event of damage to the electrical sys-
The fuse allocation chart is located in the fuse
tem: if the battery is defective, the automatic
box under the rear bench seat (Y page 350).
transmission will be locked in position P. To shift
the automatic transmission to position N, you If a newly inserted fuse also blows, have the
must provide power to the vehicle's electrical cause traced and rectified at a qualified special-
system in the same way as when jump-starting ist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz
(Y page 342). Center.
Have the vehicle transported on a transporter or
trailer.
Before changing a fuse
Observe the important safety notes
Tow-starting (emergency engine (Y page 348)
starting) X Switch off the engine.
X Switch off all electrical consumers.
! Vehicles with automatic transmission must
not be tow-started. You could otherwise dam-
age the automatic transmission.
You can find information on "Jump-starting"
under (Y page 342).
Fuses 349

X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. Fuse box in the engine compartment
Or, on vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start function
or KEYLESS‑GO: G WARNING
X Open the driver's door. When the hood is open and the windshield
The vehicle electronics are now in key posi- wipers are set in motion, you can be injured by
tion u. This is the same as the SmartKey the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury.
having been removed.
The driver’s door can be closed again. Always switch off the windshield wipers and
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away
the ignition before opening the hood.
(Y page 156).
All indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
must be off.
The fuses are located in various fuse boxes:
RFuse box on the front-passenger side of the
dashboard
RFuse box in the engine compartment on the
right-hand side of the vehicle, when viewed in
the direction of travel
RFuse box under the rear bench seat

Breakdown assistance
X Open the hood (Y page 321).
Dashboard fuse box X Use a dry cloth to remove any moisture from
! Do not use a pointed object such as a screw- the fuse box.
driver to open the cover in the dashboard. You X To open: open clamps ;.
could damage the dashboard or the cover. X Fold up cover : in the direction of the arrow
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have this and remove it.
work performed at a qualified specialist work- X To close: check whether the seal is seated
shop, e.g. at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen- correctly in cover :.
ter.
X Insert cover : at the side of the fuse box into
the retainers.
X Fold down cover : and close clamps ;.
X Close the hood.

X Open the front-passenger door.


X To open: pull cover : outwards in the direc-
tion of the arrow and remove it.
X To close: clip in cover : on the front of the
dashboard.
X Fold cover : inwards until it engages.

Z
350 Fuses

Fuse box under the rear bench seat

X Fold the right-hand rear bench seat forward


(Y page 298).
X To open: lift and fold out carpet : in the
direction of the arrow.
Breakdown assistance

X Release clamps ; by pressing them in the


direction of the arrow.
X Fold cover = up in the direction of the arrow
and remove it.
i The fuse allocation chart is located under
cover =.
X To close: insert cover = into the retainers on
the side of the fuse box.
X Fold down cover = until clamps ; engage
audibly.
X Fold the right-hand rear bench seat back
(Y page 298).
Operation 351

Important safety notes Further information regarding wheels and tires


can be found under "Wheel/tire combinations"
(Y page 376).
G WARNING You can ask for information regarding permitted
If wheels and tires of the wrong size are used, wheel-tire combinations at an authorized
the wheel brakes or suspension components Mercedes-Benz Center.
may be damaged. There is a risk of an acci- Tire pressure information can be found:
dent. Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard
Always replace wheels and tires with those on the B-pillar on the driver's side
that fulfill the specifications of the original Rin the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flap
part. Rin the "Tire pressure" section

When replacing wheels, make sure to use the


correct:
Operation
Rdesignation
Rmodel Information on driving
When replacing tires, make sure to use the Check the tire pressure when the vehicle is
correct: heavily laden and adjust prior to a trip.
While driving, pay attention to vibrations, noises
Rdesignation
and unusual handling characteristics, e.g. pull-
Rmanufacturer ing to one side. This may indicate that the
Rmodel wheels or tires are damaged. If you suspect that
a tire is defective, reduce your speed immedi-
ately. Stop the vehicle as soon as possible to
G WARNING check the wheels and tires for damage. Hidden
A flat tire severely impairs the driving, steer- tire damage could also be causing the unusual

Wheels and tires


ing and braking characteristics of the vehicle. handling characteristics. If you find no signs of
There is a risk of accident. damage, have the tires and wheels checked at a
qualified specialist workshop.
Tires without run-flat characteristics:
When parking your vehicle, make sure that the
Rdo not drive with a flat tire. tires do not get deformed by the curb or other
Rimmediately replace the flat tire with your obstacles. If it is necessary to drive over curbs,
speed humps or similar elevations, try to do so
emergency spare wheel or spare wheel, or slowly and at an obtuse angle. Otherwise, the
consult a qualified specialist workshop. tires, particularly the sidewalls, may be dam-
Tires with run-flat characteristics: aged.
Rpay attention to the information and warn-
ing notices on MOExtended tires (tires with
Regular checking of wheels and tires
run-flat characteristics).
G WARNING
Accessories that are not approved for your vehi-
cle by Mercedes-Benz or are not being used cor- Damaged tires can cause tire inflation pres-
rectly can impair the operating safety. sure loss. As a result, you could lose control of
Before purchasing and using non-approved your vehicle. There is a risk of accident.
accessories, visit a qualified specialist work- Check the tires regularly for signs of damage
shop and inquire about: and replace any damaged tires immediately.
Rsuitability
Rlegal stipulations Check wheels and tires for damage at least once
Rfactory recommendations
a month. Check wheels and tires after driving
off-road or on rough roads. Damaged wheels
can cause a loss of tire pressure.

Z
352 Operation

Pay particular attention to damage such as: For safety reasons, replace the tires before
RCuts in the tires the legally prescribed limit for the minimum
RPunctures in the tires tire tread depth is reached.
RTears in the tires
RBulges on tires
RDeformation or severe corrosion on wheels
Regularly check the tire tread depth and the
condition of the tread across the whole width of
all tires (Y page 352). If necessary, turn the
front wheels to full lock in order to inspect the
inner side of the tire surface.
All wheels must have a valve cap to protect the
valve against dirt and moisture. Do not mount
anything onto the valve other than the standard
valve cap or other valve caps approved by
Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle. Do not use any
other valve caps or systems, e.g. tire pressure Marking : shows where the bar indicator
monitoring systems. (arrow) for tread wear is integrated into the tire
tread.
Regularly check the pressure of all the tires par-
ticularly prior to long trips. Adjust the tire pres- Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by law.
sure as necessary (Y page 354). Six indicators are positioned on the tire tread.
They are visible once a tread depth of approx-
Observe the notes on the emergency spare imately á in (1.6 mm) has been reached. If this
wheel (Y page 376). is the case, the tire is so worn that it must be
The service life of tires depends, among other replaced.
things, on the following factors:
RDriving style
Wheels and tires

RTire pressure Selecting, mounting and replacing


RDistance covered tires
ROnly mount tires and wheels of the same type
and make.
Notes on tire tread Exception: it is permissible to mount a differ-
ent type or make in the event of a flat tire.
G WARNING Observe here the "MOExtended tires (tires
Insufficient tire tread will reduce tire traction. with run-flat characteristics)" section
The tire is no longer able to dissipate water. (Y page 336).
This means that on wet road surfaces, the risk ROnly mount tires of the correct size onto the
of hydroplaning increases, in particular where wheels.
speed is not adapted to suit the driving con- RBreak in new tires at moderate speeds for the
ditions. There is a risk of accident. first 60 miles (100 km). The new tires only
reach their full performance after this dis-
If the tire pressure is too high or too low, tires tance.
may exhibit different levels of wear at differ- RDo not drive with tires which have too little
ent locations on the tire tread. Thus, you tread depth. This significantly reduces the
should regularly check the tread depth and traction on wet roads (hydroplaning).
the condition of the tread across the entire RReplace the tires after six years at the latest,
width of all tires. regardless of wear.
Minimum tire tread depth for: Observe the notes on the emergency spare
wheel (Y page 376).
RSummer tires: â in (3 mm)
RM+S tires: ã in (4 mm)
Winter operation 353

MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat M+S tires


properties)
G WARNING
With MOExtended tires (tires with run flat char-
M+S tires with a tire tread depth of less than
acteristics), you can continue to drive your vehi-
cle even if there is a total loss of pressure in one ã in (4 mm) are not suitable for use in winter
or more tires. and do not provide sufficient traction. There is
MOExtended tires may only be used in conjunc- a risk of an accident.
tion with an active tire pressure loss warning M+S tires with a tread depth of less than ã in
system or with an active tire pressure monitor (4 mm) must be replaced immediately.
and on wheels specifically tested by Mercedes-
Benz. At temperatures below 45 ‡ (+7 †), use winter
Notes on driving with MOExtended tires with a tires or all-season tires. Both types of tire are
flat tire (Y page 336). identified by the M+S marking.
i Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires Only winter tires bearing the i snowflake
are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the fac- symbol in addition to the M+S marking provide
tory. It is therefore recommended that you the best possible grip in wintry road conditions.
additionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT Only these tires will allow driving safety systems
kit if you mount tires that do not feature run- such as ABS and ESP® to function optimally in
flat properties, e.g. winter tires. A TIREFIT kit winter. These tires have been developed specif-
may be obtained from a qualified specialist ically for driving in snow.
workshop. Use M+S tires of the same make and tread on all
wheels to maintain safe handling characteris-
tics.
Winter operation Always observe the maximum permissible
speed specified for the M+S tires you have
General notes mounted.

Wheels and tires


Have your vehicle winter-proofed at a qualified Once the winter tires are mounted:
specialist workshop at the onset of winter. X Check the tire pressures (Y page 357).
Observe the notes in the "Changing a wheel" X Restart the tire pressure monitor
section (Y page 371). (Y page 358).
X Vehicles for Canada: restart the tire pres-
sure loss warning system (Y page 358).
Driving with summer tires Information about driving with an emergency
At temperatures below 45 ‡ (+7 †), the elas- spare wheel (Y page 376).
ticity of summer tires and therefore also the
traction and braking capability are reduced con-
siderably. Change the tires on your vehicle to Snow chains
M+S tires. Using summer tires at very cold tem-
peratures could cause cracks to form, thereby G WARNING
damaging the tires permanently. Mercedes- If snow chains are installed to the front
Benz cannot accept responsibility for this type
of damage. wheels, they may drag against the vehicle
body or chassis components. This could
G WARNING cause damage to the vehicle or the tires.
Damaged tires can cause tire inflation pres- There is a risk of an accident.
sure loss. As a result, you could lose control of
your vehicle. There is a risk of accident.
Check the tires regularly for signs of damage
and replace any damaged tires immediately.

Z
354 Tire pressure

To avoid hazardous situations: RDo not exceed the maximum permissible


speed of 30 mph (50 km/h).
Rnever install snow chains to the front RNever use Parking Pilot when snow chains are
wheels installed (Y page 190).
Ralways install snow chains in pairs to the You may wish to deactivate ESP® (Y page 71)
rear wheels. when pulling away with snow chains mounted.
You can thereby allow the wheels to spin in a
! Check the snow chains for damage before controlled manner, achieving an increased driv-
mounting them. Damaged or worn snow ing force (cutting action).
chains may snap and damage the following Information about driving with an emergency
components: spare wheel (Y page 376).
Rwheel
Rwheel housing
Rwheel suspension
Tire pressure
For this reason, you must use only snow Tire pressure specifications
chains that are free of defects. Observe the
manufacturer's mounting instructions. Important safety notes
! You must drive at raised vehicle level (height G WARNING
1) if snow chains have been installed. The
vehicle may otherwise be damaged. Underinflated or overinflated tires pose the
following risks:
! Vehicles with ADS (Adaptive Damping
System): do not use the sport mode when Rthe tires may burst, especially as the load
driving with snow chains mounted. The vehi- and vehicle speed increase.
cle may otherwise be damaged. Rthe tires may wear excessively and/or
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom- unevenly, which may greatly impair tire
Wheels and tires

mends that you only use snow chains that have traction.
been specially approved for your vehicle by
Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steer-
Mercedes-Benz, or are of a corresponding
standard of quality. For more information, ing and braking, may be greatly impaired.
please contact a qualified specialist workshop. There is a risk of an accident.
Install the snow chains on all driven wheels for Follow recommended tire inflation pressures
maximum tractive power and driving stability. If
and check the pressure of all the tires includ-
you own snow chains for two driven wheels only,
install the snow chains to the wheels on the rear ing the spare wheel:
axle. The vehicle then remains more stable Rmonthly, at least
under braking.
Rif the load changes
If you intend to mount snow chains, please bear
the following points in mind: Rbefore beginning a long journey

RSnow chains may not be mounted on all Runder different operating conditions, e.g.
wheel/tire combinations. Permissible off-road driving
wheel/tire combinations (Y page 376). If necessary, correct the tire pressure.
ROnly use snow chains when driving on roads
completely covered by snow. Remove the Details on tire pressure can be found at the fol-
snow chains as soon as possible when you lowing positions in the vehicle:
come to a road that is not snow-covered. RTire and Loading Information placard on the
RLocal regulations may restrict the use of snow B-pillar on the driver's side
chains. Observe the appropriate regulations if Rtable for tire pressure on the inside of the fuel
you wish to mount snow chains. filler flap
The tire pressure monitor does not warn you of:
Tire pressure 355

Rincorrectly set tire pressure Tire pressure table


Rsudden loss of tire pressure, e.g. from a for-
eign object that has penetrated the tire The tire pressure table is on the inside of the fuel
filler flap. It shows the tire pressure for all tires
The data on the Tire and Loading Information permitted at the factory for this vehicle; see
placard and tire pressure table shown here are illustration (example).
examples. Tire pressure specifications are vehi-
cle-specific and may deviate from the data
shown here. The tire pressure specifications
that are valid for your vehicle can be found on
the Tire and Loading Information placard and
tire pressure table on the vehicle.

General notes
The recommended tire pressures for the tires
mounted at the factory can be found on the
labels described here.
Operation with emergency spare wheel:
information on operation with the emergency The tire pressure table contains the recommen-
spare wheel can be found under "Emergency ded pressures for cold tires for various operat-
spare wheel" (Y page 377). ing conditions, i.e. differing load and speed con-
Operation with a trailer: the applicable value ditions.
for the rear axle is the maximum tire pressure If a tire size precedes a tire pressure, the fol-
value stated in the table inside the fuel filler flap. lowing tire pressure information is only valid for
Further information on tire pressures can be that tire size; see illustration (example).
obtained at a qualified specialist workshop.

Tire and Loading Information placard

Wheels and tires


The load conditions "partially laden" and "fully
laden" are defined in the table for different num-
bers of occupants and amounts of luggage. The
: Recommended tire pressures
actual number of seats may differ.
The Tire and Loading Information placard is on
the B-pillar on the driver's side (Y page 361).
The Tire and Loading Information placard con-
tains the recommended tire pressures for cold
tires. The recommended tire pressures are valid
for the maximum permissible load and up to the
maximum permissible vehicle speed.

Z
356 Tire pressure

Some tire pressure tables show only the rim not permit any reliable conclusion about the tire
diameters instead of the full tire size, e.g. R18. pressure. On vehicles equipped with the elec-
The rim diameter is part of the tire size and can tronic tire pressure monitor, the tire pressure
be found on the tire sidewall (Y page 366). can be checked in the on-board computer.
If the tire pressures have been set to the lower The tire temperature and pressure increase
values for lighter loads and/or lower road when the vehicle is in motion. This is dependent
speeds, the pressures should be reset to the on the driving speed and the load.
higher values: Therefore, you should only correct tire pres-
Rif you want to drive with an increased load sures when the tires are cold.
and/or The tires are cold:
Rif you want to drive at higher road speeds Rif the vehicle has been parked with the tires
The tire pressures for increased loads and/or out of direct sunlight for at least three hours
higher road speeds, shown in the tire pressure and
table, may have a negative effect on driving Rif the vehicle has not been driven further than
comfort. 1 mile (1.6 km)
If the tire pressure is not set correctly, this can The tire temperature changes depending on the
lead to an excessive build up of heat and a sud- outside temperature, the vehicle speed and the
den loss of pressure. tire load. If the tire temperature changes by
For more information, contact a qualified spe- 18 ‡ (10 †), the tire pressure changes by
cialist workshop. approximately 10 kPa (0.1 bar/1.5 psi). Take
this into account when checking the pressure of
warm tires. Only correct the tire pressure if it is
Important notes on tire pressure too low for the current operating conditions. If
you check the tire pressure when the tires are
G WARNING warm, the resulting value will be higher than if
the tires were cold. This is normal. Do not
If the tire pressure drops repeatedly, the reduce the tire pressure to the value specified
Wheels and tires

wheel, valve or tire may be damaged. Tire for cold tires. The tire pressure would otherwise
pressure that is too low may result in a tire be too low.
blow-out. There is a risk of an accident. Observe the recommended tire pressures for
RCheck the tire for foreign objects. cold tires:
RCheck whether the wheel is losing air or the Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard

valve is leaking. on the B-pillar on the driver's side


Rin the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flap
If you are unable to rectify the damage, con- (Y page 152)
tact a qualified specialist workshop. Rprinted in yellow on the rim of the emer-
gency/collapsible spare wheel (depending on
G WARNING vehicle equipment)
If you fit unsuitable accessories onto tire
valves, the tire valves may be overloaded and
malfunction, which can cause tire pressure Underinflated or overinflated tires
loss. Due to their design, retrofitted tire pres-
Underinflated tires
sure monitors keep the tire valve open. This
can also result in tire pressure loss. There is a G WARNING
risk of an accident. Tires with pressure that is too low can over-
Only screw the standard valve cap or other heat and burst as a consequence. In addition,
valve caps approved by Mercedes-Benz for they also suffer from excessive and/or irreg-
your vehicle onto the tire valve. ular wear, which can severely impair the brak-
ing properties and the driving characteristics.
Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the tire
There is a risk of an accident.
pressure. The outer appearance of a tire does
Tire pressure 357

Avoid tire pressures that are too low in all the i The actual values for tires are vehicle-spe-
tires, including the spare wheel. cific and may deviate from the values in the
illustration.
Underinflated tires may:
Roverheat, leading to tire defects
Checking the tire pressures
Radversely affect handling
Rwear excessively and/or unevenly Important safety notes
Rhave an adverse effect on fuel consumption
Observe the notes on tire pressure
(Y page 354).
Overinflated tires Information on air pressure for the tires on your
vehicle can be found:
G WARNING
Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard
Tires with excessively high pressure can burst
on the B-pillar on the driver's side
because they are damaged more easily by
Rin the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flap
road debris, potholes etc. In addition, they
Rin the "Tire pressure" section
also suffer from irregular wear, which can
severely impair the braking properties and the
Checking tire pressures manually
driving characteristics. There is a risk of an
accident. To determine and set the correct tire pressure,
Avoid tire pressures that are too high in all the proceed as follows:
tires, including the spare wheel. X Remove the valve cap of the tire that is to be
checked.
Overinflated tires may: X Press the tire pressure gage securely onto the
Rincrease the braking distance valve.
Radversely affect handling X Read the tire pressure and compare it to the

Wheels and tires


recommended value on the Tire and Loading
Rwear excessively and/or unevenly
Information placard or the tire pressure table
Rhave an adverse effect on ride comfort (Y page 354).
Rbe more susceptible to damage X If the tire pressure is too low, increase the tire
pressure to the recommended value.
Maximum tire pressures X If the tire pressure is too high, release air. To
do so, press down the metal pin in the valve,
using the tip of a pen for example. Then check
the tire pressure again using the tire pressure
checker.
X Screw the valve cap onto the valve.
X Repeat these steps for the other tires.

Tire pressure loss warning system


General notes
: Example: maximum permissible tire pres- While the vehicle is in motion, the tire pressure
sure loss warning system monitors the set tire pres-
sure using the rotational speed of the wheels.
Never exceed the maximum permissible tire This enables the system to detect significant
inflation pressure. Always observe the recom- pressure loss in a tire. If the speed of rotation of
mended tire pressure for your vehicle when a wheel changes as a result of a loss of pressure,
adjusting the tire pressure (Y page 354).

Z
358 Tire pressure

a corresponding warning message will appear in on the B-pillar. Additionally, a tire pressure
the multifunction display. table is attached to the fuel filler flap. The tire
You can recognize the tire pressure loss warning pressure loss warning system can only give
by the Run Flat Indicator Active Press reliable warnings if you have set the correct
'OK' to Restart message which appears in tire pressure. If an incorrect tire pressure is
the Service menu of the multifunction display. set, these incorrect values will be monitored.
Information on the message display can be X Also observe the notes in the section on tire
found in the "Restarting the tire pressure loss pressures (Y page 354).
warning system" section (Y page 358). X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2
in the ignition lock (Y page 135).
Important safety notes X Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the Service menu.
The tire pressure warning system does not warn
X Press the 9 or : button to select
you of an incorrectly set tire pressure. Observe
the notes on the recommended tire pressure Tire Pressure.
Pressure
(Y page 354). X Press the a button.
The tire pressure loss warning does not replace The Run Flat Indicator Active Press
the need to regularly check the tire pressure. An 'OK' to Restart message appears in the
even loss of pressure on several tires at the multifunction display.
same time cannot be detected by the tire pres- If you wish to confirm the restart:
sure loss warning system.
X Press the a button.
The tire pressure monitor is not able to warn you The Tire Pressure Now OK? message
of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the tire is appears in the multifunction display.
penetrated by a foreign object. In the event of a
X Press the 9 or : button to select Yes Yes.
sudden loss of pressure, bring the vehicle to a
halt by braking carefully. Avoid abrupt steering X Press the a button.
movements. The Run Flat Indicator Restarted mes-
The function of the tire pressure loss warning sage appears in the multifunction display.
Wheels and tires

system is limited or delayed if: After a teach-in period, the tire pressure loss
warning system will monitor the set tire pres-
Rsnow chains are mounted on your vehicle's
sures of all four tires.
tires.
Rroad conditions are wintry. If you wish to cancel the restart:
Ryou are driving on sand or gravel. X Press the % button.
Ryou adopt a very sporty driving style (corner- or
ing at high speeds or driving with high rates of X When the Tire Pressure Now OK? message
acceleration). appears, press the 9 or : button to
Ryou are driving with a heavy load (in the vehi- select Cancel.
Cancel
cle or on the roof). X Press the a button.
The tire pressure values stored at the last
Restarting the tire pressure loss warn- restart will continue to be monitored.
ing system
Restart the tire pressure loss warning system if
you have:
Tire pressure monitor
Rchanged the tire pressure General notes
Rchanged the wheels or tires
If a tire pressure monitor is installed, the vehi-
Rmounted new wheels or tires cle's wheels have sensors that monitor the tire
X Before restarting, make sure that the tire pressures in all four tires. The tire pressure mon-
pressures are set properly on all four tires for itor warns you if the pressure drops in one or
the respective operating conditions. more of the tires. The tire pressure monitor only
The recommended tire pressure can be found functions if the corresponding sensors are
on the Tire and Loading Information placard installed in all wheels.
Tire pressure 359

Information on tire pressures is displayed in the pressure, even if underinflation has not
multifunction display. After a few minutes of reached the level to trigger illumination of the
driving, the current tire pressure of each tire is
shown in the Serv. menu of the multifunction TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
display, see illustration (example). USA only:
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate if the
system is not operating properly. The TPMS
malfunction indicator is combined with the
low tire pressure telltale. When the system
detects a malfunction, the warning lamp will
flash for approximately a minute and then
For information on the message display, refer to remain continuously illuminated. This
the "Checking the tire pressure electronically" sequence will be repeated every time the vehi-
section (Y page 360). cle is started as long as the malfunction
exists.
Important safety notes When the malfunction indicator is illuminated,
G WARNING the system may not be able to detect or signal
low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunc-
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
tions may occur for a variety of reasons,
should be checked at least once a month
including the mounting of incompatible
when cold and inflated to the pressure rec-
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on
ommended by the vehicle manufacturer on
the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from func-
the Tire and Loading Information placard on
tioning properly. Always check the TPMS mal-
the driver's door B-pillar or the tire pressure
function telltale after replacing one or more
label on the inside of the fuel filler flap. If your

Wheels and tires


tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that
vehicle has tires of a different size than the
the replacement or alternate tires and wheels
size indicated on the Tire and Loading Infor-
allow the TPMS to continue to function prop-
mation placard or the tire pressure label, you
erly.
should determine the proper tire pressure for
those tires. It is the driver's responsibility to set the tire
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has pressure to that recommended for cold tires
been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring which is suitable for the operating situation
system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres- (Y page 354). Note that the correct tire pressure
for the current operating situation must first be
sure telltale when one or more of your tires taught-in to the tire pressure monitor. If a sub-
are significantly underinflated. Accordingly, stantial loss of pressure occurs, the warning
when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, threshold for the warning message is aligned to
you should stop and check your tires as soon the taught-in reference values. Restart the tire
as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure monitor after adjusting the pressure of
pressure. Driving on a significantly underin- the cold tires (Y page 361). The current pres-
sures are saved as new reference values. As a
flated tire causes the tire to overheat and can result, a warning message will appear if the tire
lead to tire failure. Underinflation also pressure drops significantly.
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and The tire pressure monitor does not warn you of
may affect the vehicle's handling and stop- an incorrectly set tire pressure. Observe the
ping ability. notes on the recommended tire pressure
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute (Y page 354).
for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driv- The tire pressure monitor is not able to warn you
er's responsibility to maintain correct tire of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the tire is
penetrated by a foreign object. In the event of a
Z
360 Tire pressure

sudden loss of pressure, bring the vehicle to a X Press the 9 or : button to select
halt by braking carefully. Avoid abrupt steering Tire Pressure.
Pressure
movements. X Press a.
The tire pressure monitor has a yellow warning The current tire pressure of each tire is shown
lamp in the instrument cluster for indicating in the multifunction display.
pressure loss or a malfunction. Whether the If the vehicle has been parked for longer than
warning lamp flashes or lights up indicates 20 minutes, the Tire pressure will be
whether a tire pressure is too low or the tire displayed after driving a few minutes
pressure monitor is malfunctioning: message appears.
Rif the warning lamp is lit continuously, the tire After a teach-in process, the tire pressure mon-
pressure on one or more tires is significantly itor automatically detects new wheels or new
too low. The tire pressure monitor is not mal- sensors. As long as a clear allocation of the tire
functioning. pressure value to the individual wheels is not
Rif the warning lamp flashes for approximately possible, the Tire Pressure Monitor Active
a minute and then remains lit constantly, the display message is shown instead of the tire
tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning. pressure display. The tire pressures are already
In addition to the warning lamp, a message being monitored.
appears in the multifunction display. Observe If an emergency spare wheel is mounted, the
the information on display messages system may continue to show the tire pressure
(Y page 268). of the wheel that has been removed for a few
It may take up to ten minutes for a malfunction minutes. If this occurs, note that the value dis-
of the tire pressure monitor to be indicated. A played for the position where the spare wheel is
malfunction will be indicated by the tire pres- mounted is not the same as the current tire
sure warning lamp flashing for approximately pressure of the emergency spare wheel.
one minute and then remaining lit. When the
malfunction has been rectified, the tire pressure Tire pressure monitor warning mes-
warning lamp goes out after a few minutes of sages
driving.
Wheels and tires

The tire pressure values indicated by the on- If the tire pressure monitor detects a pressure
board computer may differ from those meas- loss in one or more tires, a warning message is
ured at a gas station with a pressure gage. The shown in the multifunction display. The yellow
tire pressures shown by the on-board computer tire pressure warning lamp then lights up.
refer to those measured at sea level. At high RIf the Please Correct Tire Pressure
altitudes, the tire pressure values indicated by a message appears in the multifunction display,
pressure gage are higher than those shown by the tire pressure in at least one tire is too low.
the on-board computer. In this case, do not The tire pressure must be corrected when the
reduce the tire pressures. opportunity arises.
The operation of the tire pressure monitor can RIf the Check Tires message appears in the
be affected by interference from radio transmit- multifunction display, the tire pressure in at
ting equipment (e.g. radio headphones, two-way least one tire has dropped significantly. The
radios) that may be being operated in or near the tires must be checked.
vehicle. RIf the Warning Tire Malfunction message
appears in the multifunction display, the tire
Checking the tire pressure electroni- pressure in at least one tire has dropped sud-
cally denly. The tires must be checked.
Be sure to observe the instructions and safety
X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2 notes in the display messages in the "Tires" sec-
(Y page 135) in the ignition lock. tion (Y page 268).
X Press the = or ; button on the steering
If the wheel positions on the vehicle are rotated,
wheel to select the Serv. menu. the tire pressures may be displayed for the
wrong positions for a short time. This is rectified
after a few minutes of driving, and the tire pres-
sures are displayed for the correct positions.
Loading the vehicle 361

Restarting the tire pressure monitor Radio type approval for the tire pres-
sure monitor
When you restart the tire pressure monitor, all
existing warning messages are deleted and the
warning lamps go out. The monitor uses the cur- Country Radio type approval number
rently set tire pressures as the reference values USA FCC ID: MRXMW2433A
for monitoring. In most cases, the tire pressure
FCC ID: MRXGG4
monitor will automatically detect the new refer-
ence values after you have changed the tire FCC ID: MRXMC34MA4
pressure. However, you can also set reference Canada IC: 2546A-MW2433A
values manually as described here. The tire
pressure monitor then monitors the new tire IC: 2546A-GG4
pressure values. IC: 2546A-MC34MA4
X Set the tire pressure to the value recommen-
ded for the corresponding driving situation on
the Tire and Loading Information placard on Loading the vehicle
the driver's side B-pillar (Y page 354).
You can find more tire pressure values for Instruction labels for tires and loads
various operating conditions in the tire pres-
sure table inside the fuel filler flap G WARNING
(Y page 355). Overloaded tires can overheat, causing a
X Make sure that the tire pressure is correct on blowout. Overloaded tires can also impair the
all four wheels. steering and driving characteristics and lead
X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2 to brake failure. There is a risk of accident.
in the ignition lock. Observe the load rating of the tires. The load
X Press the = or ; button on the steering
rating must be at least half of the GAWR of
wheel to select the Serv. menu.
your vehicle. Never overload the tires by
X Press the 9 or : button to select

Wheels and tires


exceeding the maximum load.
Pressure
Tire Pressure.
X Press a. Two instruction labels on your vehicle show the
The multifunction display shows the current maximum possible load.
tire pressure for the individual tires or the
Tire pressure will be displayed (1) The Tire and Loading Information placard is
after driving a few minutes message. on the B-pillar on the driver's side. The Tire
X Press the : button.
and Loading Information placard shows the
maximum permissible number of occu-
The Use Current Pressures as New Ref‐
pants and the maximum permissible vehicle
erence Values message appears in the mul-
load. It also contains details of the tire sizes
tifunction display.
and corresponding pressures for tires
If you wish to confirm the restart: mounted at the factory.
X Press the a button. (2) The vehicle identification plate is on the B-
The Tire Press. Monitor Restarted mes- pillar on the driver's side. The vehicle iden-
sage appears in the multifunction display. tification plate informs you of the gross
After driving for a few minutes, the system vehicle weight rating. It is made up of the
checks whether the current tire pressures are vehicle weight, all vehicle occupants, the
within the specified range. The new tire pres- fuel and the cargo. You can also find infor-
sures are then accepted as reference values mation about the maximum gross axle
and monitored. weight rating on the front and rear axle.
The maximum gross axle weight rating is
If you wish to cancel the restart: the maximum weight that can be carried by
X Press the % button. one axle (front or rear axle). Never exceed
The tire pressure values stored at the last the maximum load or the maximum gross
restart will continue to be monitored. axle weight rating for the front or rear axle.

Z
362 Loading the vehicle

Number of seats

Maximum number of seats : indicates the


maximum number of occupants allowed to
travel in the vehicle. This information can be
found on the Tire and Loading Information plac-
: B-pillar, driver's side ard.
i The specifications shown on the Tire and
Loading Information placard in the illustration
Maximum permissible gross vehicle are examples. The number of seats is vehicle-
weight rating specific and can differ from the details shown.
The number of seats in your vehicle can be
found on the Tire and Loading Information
placard.
Wheels and tires

Determining the correct load limit


Step-by-step instructions
The following steps have been developed as
required of all manufacturers under Title 49,
Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pur-
suant to the "National Traffic and Motor Vehicle
X Specification for maximum gross vehicle Safety Act of 1966".
weight : is listed in the Tire and Loading X Step 1: Locate the statement "The combined
Information placard: "The combined weight of weight of occupants and cargo should never
occupants and cargo should never exceed exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on your vehicle’s
XXX kilograms or XXX lbs." Tire and Loading Information placard.
The gross weight of all vehicle occupants, load X Step 2: Determine the combined weight of
and luggage must not exceed the specified the driver and passengers that will be riding in
value. your vehicle.
X Step 3: Subtract the combined weight of the
i The specifications shown on the Tire and driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or
Loading Information placard in the illustration XXX lbs.
are examples. The maximum permissible
X Step 4: The resulting figure equals the avail-
gross vehicle weight rating is vehicle-specific
and may differ from that in the illustration. able amount of cargo and luggage load capa-
You can find the valid maximum permissible city. For example, if the "XXX" amount equals
gross vehicle weight rating for your vehicle on 1400 lbs and there will be five 150-lb pas-
the Tire and Loading Information placard. sengers in your vehicle, the amount of avail-
Loading the vehicle 363

able cargo and luggage load capacity is cle. That weight may not safely exceed the
650 lbs (1400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs). available cargo and luggage load capacity cal-
X Step 5: Determine the combined weight of culated in step 4.
luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehi-

Example: steps 1 to 3
The following table shows examples on how to calculate total and cargo load capacities with varying
seating configurations and number and size of occupants. The following examples use a load limit of
1500 lbs (680 kg). This is for illustration purposes only. Make sure you are using the actual load
limit for your vehicle stated on your vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard (Y page 361).
The greater the combined weight of the occupants, the lower the maximum luggage load.
Additional information when towing a trailer (Y page 220).
Step 1
Example 1 Example 2 Example 3
Combined maximum 1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg)
weight of occupants
and cargo (data from
the Tire and Loading
Information placard)

Step 2
Example 1 Example 2 Example 3

Wheels and tires


Number of people in 5 3 1
the vehicle (driver and
occupants)
Distribution of the Front: 2 Front: 1 Front: 1
occupants Rear: 3 Rear: 2
Weight of the occu- Occupant 1: 150 lbs Occupant 1: 200 lbs Occupant 1: 150 lbs
pants (68 kg) (91 kg) (68 kg)
Occupant 2: 180 lbs Occupant 2: 190 lbs
(82 kg) (86 kg)
Occupant 3: 160 lbs Occupant 3: 150 lbs
(73 kg) (68 kg)
Occupant 4: 140 lbs
(63 kg)
Occupant 5: 120 lbs
(54 kg)
Gross weight of all 750 lbs (340 kg) 540 lbs (245 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg)
occupants

Z
364 All about wheels and tires

Step 3
Example 1 Example 2 Example 3
Permissible load (maxi- 1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò 1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò 1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò
mum gross vehicle 750 lbs (340 kg) = 540 lbs (245 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg) =
weight rating from the 750 lbs (340 kg) =960 lbs (435 kg) 1350 lbs (612 kg)
Tire and Loading Infor-
mation placard minus
the gross weight of all
occupants)

Vehicle identification plate All about wheels and tires


Even if you have calculated the total cargo care- Uniform Tire Quality Grading Stand-
fully, you should still make sure that the gross ards
vehicle weight rating and the gross axle weight
rating are not exceeded. Details can be found on Overview of Tire Quality Grading Stand-
the vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar on ards
the driver's side of the vehicle (Y page 361).
Permissible Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR): the gross weight of the vehicle, all pas-
sengers, load and trailer load/noseweight (if
applicable) must not exceed the permissible
gross vehicle weight.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR): the maxi-
mum permissible weight that can be carried by
one axle (front or rear axle).
Wheels and tires

To ensure that your vehicle does not exceed the


maximum permissible values (gross vehicle
weight and maximum gross axle weight rating),
have your loaded vehicle (including driver, occu-
pants, cargo, and full trailer load if applicable) Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards are U.S.
weighed on a suitable vehicle weighbridge. government specifications. Their purpose is to
provide drivers with uniform reliable information
on tire performance data. Tire manufacturers
Trailer load/noseweight have to grade tires using three performance fac-
tors: : tread wear grade, ; traction grade and
The trailer load/noseweight affects the gross = temperature grade. These regulations do not
weight of the vehicle. If a trailer is attached, the apply to Canada. Nevertheless, all tires sold in
trailer load/noseweight is included in the load North America are provided with the corre-
along with occupants and luggage. The trailer sponding quality grading markings on the side-
load/noseweight is usually approximately 8% of wall of the tire.
the gross weight of the trailer and its cargo. Quality grades can be found, where applicable,
on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
maximum section width.
Example:
RTreadwear grade: 200
RTraction grade: AA
RTemperature grade: A
All about wheels and tires 365

All passenger car tires must conform to the stat- are not icy or covered with snow. Take appro-
utory safety requirements in addition to these priate care when driving.
grades. Further information on winter tires (M+S tires)
i The actual values for tires are vehicle-spe- (Y page 353).
cific and may deviate from the values in the
illustration. Temperature

Treadwear G WARNING
The temperature grade for this tire is estab-
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating lished for a tire that is properly inflated and
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified U.S. not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla-
government course. For example, a tire graded tion, or excessive loading, either separately or
150 would wear one and one-half times as well in combination, can cause excessive heat
on the government course as a tire graded 100. build-up and possible tire failure.
The relative performance of tires depends upon
the actual conditions of their use, however, and The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,
may depart significantly from the norm due to and C, representing the tire's resistance to the
variations in driving habits, service practices generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
and differences in road characteristics and cli- heat when tested under controlled conditions
mate. on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sus-
tained high temperature can cause the material
Traction of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire
G WARNING failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger car tires must
The traction grade assigned to this tire is meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
based on straight-ahead braking traction Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent

Wheels and tires


tests, and does not include acceleration, cor- higher levels of performance on the laboratory
nering, hydroplaning, or peak traction char- test wheel than the minimum required by law.
acteristics.

! Avoid wheelspin. This can lead to damage to


the drive train.
The traction grades – from highest to lowest –
are AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent the
tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as meas-
ured under controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt and con-
crete. A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance.
The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or icy
road is always lower than on dry road surfaces.
You should pay special attention to road condi-
tions when temperatures are around freezing
point.
Mercedes-Benz recommends a minimum tread
depth of ã in (4 mm) on all four winter tires.
Observe the legally required minimum tire tread
depth (Y page 352). Winter tires can reduce the
braking distance on snow-covered surfaces in
comparison with summer tires. The braking dis-
tance is still much further than on surfaces that

Z
366 All about wheels and tires

Tire labeling tire load rating and speed rating required for
your vehicle.
Overview

: Tire width
; Nominal aspect ratio in %
= Tire code
? Rim diameter
A Load bearing index
B Speed rating
: Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards
(Y page 369) General: depending on the manufacturer's
; Department of Transportation, Tire Identifi- standards, the size imprinted in the tire wall may
cation Number (Y page 368) not contain any letters or may contain one letter
= Maximum load rating (Y page 368) that precedes the size description.
? Maximum tire pressures (Y page 357) If there is no letter preceding the size descrip-
tion (as shown above): these are passenger
Wheels and tires

A Manufacturer vehicle tires according to European manufac-


B Tire material (Y page 369) turing standards.
C Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity If "P" precedes the size description: these are
and speed rating (Y page 366) passenger vehicle tires according to U.S. man-
D Load index (Y page 368) ufacturing standards.
E Tire name If "LT" precedes the size description: these are
The markings described above are on the tire in light truck tires according to U.S. manufacturing
addition to the tire name (sales designation) and standards.
the manufacturer's name. If "T" precedes the size description: compact
emergency wheels with high tire pressure that
i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate are only designed for temporary use in an emer-
from the data in the example. gency.
Tire width: tire width : shows the nominal tire
Tire size designation, load-bearing width in millimeters.
capacity and speed rating Height-width ratio: aspect ratio ; is the size
ratio between the tire height and tire width and
G WARNING is shown in percent. The aspect ratio is calcula-
Exceeding the stated tire load-bearing capa- ted by dividing the tire width by the tire height.
city and the approved maximum speed could Tire code: tire code = specifies the tire type.
lead to tire damage or the tire bursting. There "R" represents radial tires; "D" represents diag-
is a risk of accident. onal tires; "B" represents diagonal radial tires.
Therefore, only use tire types and sizes Optionally, tires with a maximum speed of over
approved for your vehicle model. Observe the 149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR" in the size
All about wheels and tires 367

description, depending on the manufacturer ROptionally, tires with a maximum speed of


(e.g. 245/40 ZR 18). over 149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR" in
Rim diameter: rim diameter ? is the diameter the size description, depending on the man-
of the bead seat, not the diameter of the rim ufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR18).
flange. The rim diameter is specified in The service specification is made up of load-
inches (in). bearing index A and speed rating B.
Load-bearing index: load-bearing index A is a RIf the size description of your tire includes
numerical code that specifies the maximum "ZR" and there are no service specifications,
load-bearing capacity of a tire. ask the tire manufacturer in order to find out
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the the maximum speed.
specified load limit. The maximum permissible If a service specification is available, the max-
load can be found on the vehicle's Tire and imum speed is limited according to the speed
Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on rating in the service specification. Example:
the driver's side (Y page 361). 245/40 ZR18 97 Y. In this example, "97 Y" is
Example: the service specification. The letter "Y" rep-
resents the speed rating. The maximum
Load-bearing index 91 indicates a maximum
speed of the tire is limited to 186 mph
load of 1,356 lb (615 kg) that the tires can bear.
(300 km/h).
For further information on the maximum tire
load in kilograms and lbs, see (Y page 368). RThe size description for all tires with maxi-
mum speeds of over 186 mph (300 km/h)
For further information on the load bearing
must include "ZR", and the service specifica-
index, see "Load index" (Y page 368).
tion must be given in parentheses. Example:
Speed rating: speed rating B specifies the 275/40 ZR 18 (99 Y). Speed rating "(Y)" indi-
approved maximum speed of the tire. cates that the maximum speed of the tire is
i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate over 186 mph (300 km/h). Ask the tire man-
from the data in the example. ufacturer about the maximum speed.
All-weather tires and winter tires
Regardless of the speed rating, always observe

Wheels and tires


the speed limits. Drive carefully and adapt your Index Speed rating
driving style to the traffic conditions.
Summer tires Q M+S3 up to 100 mph (160 km/h)

Index Speed rating T M+S3 up to 118 mph (190 km/h)

Q up to 100 mph (160 km/h) H M+S3 up to 130 mph (210 km/h)

R up to 106 mph (170 km/h) V M+S3 up to 149 mph (240 km/h)


S up to 112 mph (180 km/h)
i Not all tires with the M+S marking provide
T up to 118 mph (190 km/h) the driving characteristics of winter tires. In
addition to the M+S marking, winter tires also
H up to 130 mph (210 km/h)
have the i snowflake symbol on the tire
V up to 149 mph (240 km/h) wall. Tires with this marking fulfill the require-
ments of the Rubber Manufacturers Associa-
W up to 168 mph (270 km/h) tion (RMA) and the Rubber Association of
Canada (RAC) regarding the tire traction on
Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h) snow. They have been especially developed
ZR...Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h) for driving on snow.

ZR...(..Y) over 186 mph (300 km/h)


ZR over 149 mph (240 km/h)

3 Or M+S i for winter tires.

Z
368 All about wheels and tires

An electronic speed limiter prevents your vehi- Maximum load rating


cle from exceeding the following speeds:
RAll vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG GLE 63):
130 mph (210 km/h)
RMercedes-AMG GLE 63 vehicles: 155 mph
(250 km/h)
RMercedes-AMG GLE 63 with increased top
speed: 174 mph (280 km/h)
The speed rating of tires mounted at the factory
may be higher than the maximum speed that the
electronic speed limiter permits.
Make sure that your tires have the required
speed rating, e.g. when buying new tires. The
required speed rating for your vehicle can be Maximum tire load : is the maximum permis-
found in the "Tires" section (Y page 376). sible weight for which the tire is approved.
Further information about reading tire data can Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
be obtained from any qualified specialist work- specified load limit. The maximum permissible
shop. load can be found on the vehicle's Tire and
Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on
Load index the driver's side (Y page 361).
i The actual values for tires are vehicle-spe-
cific and may deviate from the values in the
illustration.

DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)


US tire regulations stipulate that every tire man-
Wheels and tires

ufacturer or retreader must imprint a TIN in or on


the sidewall of each tire produced.

In addition to the load bearing index, load


index : may be imprinted after the letters that
identify speed index B on the sidewall of the
tire (Y page 366).
RIf no specification is given: no text (as in the
example above), represents a standard load
(SL) tire
RXL or Extra Load: represents a reinforced tire
RLight Load: represents a light load tire
The TIN is a unique identification number. The
RC, D, E: represents a load range that depends
TIN enables the tire manufacturers or retreaders
on the maximum load that the tire can carry at to inform purchasers of recalls and other safety-
a certain pressure relevant matters. It makes it possible for the
i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate purchaser to easily identify the affected tires.
from the data in the example. The TIN is made up of manufacturer identifica-
tion code ;, tire size =, tire type code ? and
manufacturing date A.
DOT (Department of Transportation): tire
symbol : marks that the tire complies with the
All about wheels and tires 369

requirements of the U.S. Department of Trans- Bar


portation. Metric unit for tire pressure. 14.5038 pounds
Manufacturer identification code: manufac- per square inch (psi) and 100 kilopascals (kPa)
turer identification code ; provides details on are the equivalent of 1 bar.
the tire manufacturer. New tires have a code
with two symbols. Retreaded tires have a code DOT (Department of Transportation)
with four symbols. DOT-marked tires fulfill the requirements of the
For further information about retreaded tires, U S Department of Transportation.
see (Y page 376).
Tire size: identifier = describes the tire size. Normal occupant weight
Tire type code: tire type code ? can be used by The number of occupants for which the vehicle
the manufacturer as a code to describe specific is designed multiplied by 68 kilograms (150 lbs).
characteristics of the tire. Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards
Date of manufacture: date of manufacture A
A uniform standard to grade the quality of tires
provides information about the age of a tire. The with regards to tread quality, tire traction and
first and second positions represent the week of temperature characteristics. The quality grad-
manufacture, starting with "01" for the first cal- ing assessment is made by the manufacturer
endar week. Positions three and four represent following specifications from the U.S. govern-
the year of manufacture. For example, a tire that ment. The ratings are molded into the sidewall of
is marked "3214" was manufactured in week 32 the tire.
in 2014.
i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate Recommended tire pressures
from the data in the example. The recommended tire pressure applies to the
tires mounted at the factory.
Tire characteristics The Tire and Loading Information placard con-
tains the recommended tire pressures for cold
tires on a fully loaded vehicle and for the maxi-

Wheels and tires


mum permissible vehicle speed.
The tire pressure table contains the recommen-
ded pressures for cold tires for various operat-
ing conditions, i.e. differing load and speed con-
ditions.
Increased vehicle weight due to optional
equipment
The combined weight of all standard and
optional equipment available for the vehicle,
regardless of whether it is actually installed on
This information describes the type of tire cord the vehicle or not.
and the number of layers in sidewall : and
under tire tread ;. Rim
This is the part of the wheel on which the tire is
i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate mounted.
from the data in the example.
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)
Definition of terms for tires and loading The GAWR is the maximum gross axle weight
rating. The actual load on an axle must never
Tire ply composition and material used exceed the gross axle weight rating. The gross
Describes the number of plies or the number of axle weight rating can be found on the vehicle
layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire tread identification plate on the B-pillar on the driver's
and sidewall. These are made of steel, nylon, side.
polyester and other materials.

Z
370 All about wheels and tires

Speed rating tem and optional equipment if these are instal-


The speed rating is part of the tire identification. led in the vehicle, but does not include passen-
It specifies the speed range for which the tire is gers or luggage.
approved. Maximum load rating
GTW (Gross Trailer Weight) The maximum tire load is the maximum permis-
The GTW is the weight of a trailer including the sible weight in kilograms or lbs for which a tire is
weight of the load, luggage, accessories etc. on approved.
the trailer. Maximum permissible tire pressure
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) Maximum permissible tire pressure for one tire.
The gross vehicle weight includes the weight of Maximum load on one tire
the vehicle including fuel, tools, the spare wheel,
accessories installed, occupants, luggage and Maximum load on one tire. This is calculated by
the drawbar noseweight, if applicable. The gross dividing the maximum axle load of one axle by
vehicle weight must not exceed the gross vehi- two.
cle weight rating GVWR as specified on the vehi-
cle identification plate on the B-pillar on the
PSI (pounds per square inch)
driver's side. A standard unit of measure for tire pressure.

GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) Aspect ratio


The GVWR is the maximum permissible gross Relationship between tire height and tire width
weight of a fully loaded vehicle (the weight of the in percent.
vehicle including all accessories, occupants,
fuel, luggage and the drawbar noseweight, if Tire pressure
applicable). The gross vehicle weight rating is This is pressure inside the tire applying an out-
specified on the vehicle identification plate on ward force to each square inch of the tire's sur-
the B-pillar on the driver's side. face. The tire pressure is specified in pounds per
Wheels and tires

square inch (psi), in kilopascal (kPa) or in bar.


Maximum loaded vehicle weight The tire pressure should only be corrected when
The maximum weight is the sum of: the tires are cold.
Rthe curb weight of the vehicle Cold tire pressure
Rthe weight of the accessories
The tires are cold:
Rthe load limit
Rif the vehicle has been parked with the tires
Rthe weight of the factory installed optional
out of direct sunlight for at least three hours
equipment and
Kilopascal (kPa) Rif the vehicle has not been driven further than
1 mile (1.6 km)
Metric unit for tire pressure. 6.9 kPa corre-
sponds to 1 psi. Another unit for tire pressure is Tread
bar. 100 kilopascals (kPa) are the equivalent of
The part of the tire that comes into contact with
1 bar.
the road.
Load index
Bead
In addition to the load-bearing index, the load
The tire bead ensures that the tire sits securely
index may also be imprinted on the sidewall of
on the wheel. There are several steel wires in the
the tire. This specifies the load-bearing capacity
bead to prevent the tire from coming loose from
more precisely.
the wheel rim.
Curb weight
The weight of a vehicle with standard equipment
including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and
coolant. It also includes the air-conditioning sys-
Changing a wheel 371

Sidewall Changing a wheel


The part of the tire between the tread and the
bead. Flat tire
Weight of optional extras The "Breakdown assistance" section
(Y page 335) contains information and notes on
The combined weight of those optional extras how to deal with a flat tire. Information on driv-
that weigh more than the replaced standard ing with MOExtended tires in the event of a flat
parts and more than 2.3 kg (5 lbs). These tire can be found under "MOExtended tires (tires
optional extras, such as high-performance with run-flat characteristics" (Y page 336).
brakes, level control, a roof rack or a high-per-
Vehicles with an emergency spare wheel: in
formance battery, are not included in the curb
weight and the weight of the accessories. the event of a flat tire, mount the emergency
spare wheel according to the description under
TIN (Tire Identification Number) "Mounting a wheel" (Y page 372).
This is a unique identifier which can be used by
a tire manufacturer to identify tires, for example
for a product recall, and thus identify the pur- Rotating the wheels
chasers. The TIN is made up of the manufactur-
er's identity code, tire size, tire type code and G WARNING
the manufacturing date. Interchanging the front and rear wheels may
severely impair the driving characteristics if
Load bearing index
the wheels or tires have different dimensions.
The load bearing index (also load index) is a code
The wheel brakes or suspension components
that contains the maximum load bearing capa-
city of a tire. may also be damaged. There is a risk of acci-
dent.
Traction Rotate front and rear wheels only if the wheels
Traction is the result of friction between the tires and tires are of the same dimensions.

Wheels and tires


and the road surface.
TWR (Tongue Weight Rating) ! On vehicles equipped with a tire pressure
monitor, electronic components are located
The TWR specifies the maximum permissible in the wheel.
weight that the ball coupling of the trailer tow Tire-mounting tools should not be used near
hitch can support. the valve. This could damage the electronic
Treadwear indicators components.
Narrow bars (tread wear bars) that are distrib- Only have tires changed at a qualified spe-
uted over the tire tread. If the tire tread is level cialist workshop.
with the bars, the wear limit of á in (1.6 mm) Always observe the instructions and safety
has been reached. notes in the "Mounting a wheel" section
(Y page 372).
Occupant distribution The wear patterns on the front and rear tires
The distribution of occupants in a vehicle at their differ, depending on the operating conditions.
designated seating positions. Rotate the wheels before a clear wear pattern
has formed on the tires. Front tires typically
Total load limit wear more on the shoulders and the rear tires in
Nominal load and luggage load plus 68 kg the center.
(150 lbs) multiplied by the number of seats in On vehicles that have the same size front and
the vehicle. rear wheels, you can rotate the wheels accord-
ing to the intervals in the tire manufacturer's
warranty book in your vehicle documents. If no
warranty book is available, the tires should be
rotated every 3,000 to 6,000 miles (5,000 to
10,000 km). Depending on tire wear, this may

Z
372 Changing a wheel

be required earlier. Do not change the direction X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: open the driv-
of wheel rotation. er's door.
Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel and the The vehicle electronics are now in position
brake disc thoroughly every time a wheel is rota- u. This means no SmartKey is in the ignition
ted. Check the tire pressure and, if necessary, lock.
restart the tire pressure loss warning system or X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: remove the
the tire pressure monitor (Y page 358). Start/Stop button from the ignition lock
(Y page 135).
X Make sure that the engine cannot be started
Direction of rotation via your smartphone (Y page 137).
X If included in the vehicle equipment, remove
Tires with a specified direction of rotation have
additional benefits, e.g. if there is a risk of hydro- the tire-change tool kit from the vehicle.
planing. These advantages can only be gained if X Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away.
the tires are installed corresponding to the
direction of rotation. i Apart from certain country-specific varia-
tions, vehicles are not equipped with a tire-
An arrow on the sidewall of the tire indicates its change tool kit. For more information on
correct direction of rotation. which tools are required to perform a wheel
change on your vehicle, consult a qualified
specialist workshop.
Storing wheels Necessary tire-changing tools can include, for
Store wheels that are not being used in a cool, example:
dry and preferably dark place. Protect the tires RJack
from oil, grease, gasoline and diesel. RWheel chock
RLug wrench

Mounting a wheel Securing the vehicle to prevent it from


Wheels and tires

Preparing the vehicle rolling away


X Vehicle with emergency spare wheel:
when mounting the emergency spare wheel in
the event of a flat tire, follow the additional
notes on vehicle preparation under "Flat tire"
(Y page 335).
X Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and
level ground.
X Apply the electric parking brake manually.
X Bring the front wheels into the straight-ahead
position.
X Vehicles with automatic transmission:
shift the transmission to position j. If your vehicle is equipped with a wheel chock, it
X Vehicles with the AIRMATIC package: can be found in the tire-change tool kit
make sure that the normal vehicle level is (Y page 335).
selected (Y page 185). The folding wheel chock is an additional safety
X Vehicles with the Off-Road Engineering measure to prevent the vehicle from rolling
package: make sure that the normal vehicle away, for example when changing a wheel.
level is selected (Y page 179). X Fold both plates upwards :.
X Switch off the engine.
X Fold out lower plate ;.
X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: remove the
X Guide the lugs on the lower plate fully into the
SmartKey from the ignition lock. openings in base plate =.
Changing a wheel 373

slippery surface, a non-slip underlay must be


used, e.g. rubber mats.
RDo not use wooden blocks or similar objects
as a jack underlay. Otherwise, the jack will not
be able to achieve its load-bearing capacity
due to the restricted height.
RMake sure that the distance between the
underside of the tires and the ground does not
exceed 1.2 in (3 cm).
RDo not place your hands or feet under the
raised vehicle.
RDo not lie under the vehicle.
X Place chocks or other suitable items under RDo not start the engine when the vehicle is
the front and rear of the wheel that is diago- raised.
nally opposite the wheel you wish to change.
RNever open or close a door or the tailgate
when the vehicle is raised.
Raising the vehicle RMake sure that no persons are present in the
vehicle when the vehicle is raised.
G WARNING
If you do not position the jack correctly at the
appropriate jacking point of the vehicle, the
jack could tip over with the vehicle raised.
There is a risk of injury.
Only position the jack at the appropriate jack-
ing point of the vehicle. The base of the jack
must be positioned vertically, directly under

Wheels and tires


the jacking point of the vehicle.

! Only position the jack at the appropriate


jacking point of the vehicle. Otherwise, you
could damage the vehicle.
X Using lug wrench :, loosen the bolts on the
wheel you wish to change by about one full
Observe the following when raising the vehi- turn. Do not unscrew the bolts completely.
cle:
RTo raise the vehicle, only use the vehicle-spe-
cific jack that has been tested and approved
by Mercedes-Benz. If used incorrectly, the
jack could tip over with the vehicle raised.
RThe jack is designed only to raise and hold the
vehicle for a short time while a wheel is being
changed. It must not be used for performing
maintenance work under the vehicle.
RAvoid changing the wheel on uphill and down-
hill slopes.
RBefore raising the vehicle, secure it from roll-
ing away by applying the parking brake and The jacking points are located just behind the
inserting wheel chocks. Do not disengage the front wheel housings and just in front of the rear
parking brake while the vehicle is raised. wheel housings (arrows).
RThe jack must be placed on a firm, flat and
X Take the ratchet wrench out of the vehicle
non-slip surface. On a loose surface, a large, tool kit and place it on the hexagon nut of the
flat, load-bearing underlay must be used. On a jack so that the letters AUF are visible.

Z
374 Changing a wheel

X Position jack = at jacking point ;. X Unscrew the uppermost wheel bolt com-
The alignment bolt on the jack must be inser- pletely.
ted into the intended opening on the jacking X Screw alignment bolt : into the thread
point. instead of the wheel bolt.
X Unscrew the remaining wheel bolts fully.
X Remove the wheel.

Mounting a new wheel


G WARNING
Oiled or greased wheel bolts or damaged
wheel bolts/hub threads can cause the wheel
bolts to come loose. As a result, you could
lose a wheel while driving. There is a risk of
Wheels and tires

accident.
X Make sure the foot of the jack is directly Never oil or grease wheel bolts. In the event of
beneath the jacking point. damage to the threads, contact a qualified
X Turn ratchet wrench ? until jack = sits specialist workshop immediately. Have the
completely on jacking point ; and the base damaged wheel bolts or hub threads
of the jack lies evenly on the ground. replaced/renewed. Do not continue driving.
X Turn ratchet wrench ? until the tire is raised
a maximum of 1.2 in (3 cm) from the ground. G WARNING
If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts
Removing a wheel when the vehicle is raised, the jack could tip
! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on a dirty over. There is a risk of injury.
surface. The bolt and wheel hub threads could Only tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts
otherwise be damaged when you screw them when the vehicle is on the ground.
in.
When mounting/removing wheels, and for as ! To prevent damage to the paintwork, hold
long as the wheels are removed, avoid applying the wheel securely against the wheel hub
any external force on the brake disks. This could while screwing in the first wheel bolt.
impair the level of comfort when braking. Always pay attention to the instructions and
safety notes in the "Changing a wheel" section
(Y page 371).
Only use wheel bolts that have been designed
for the wheel and the vehicle. For safety rea-
sons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you
Changing a wheel 375

only use wheel bolts which have been approved Lowering the vehicle
for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and the respective
wheel. G WARNING
! Always use wheel bolts ; to mount the The wheels could work loose if the wheel nuts
"Minispare" emergency spare wheel. Using and bolts are not tightened to the specified
other wheel bolts to mount the "Minispare" tightening torque. There is a risk of accident.
emergency spare wheel could damage the Have the tightening torque immediately
brake system.
checked at a qualified specialist workshop
after a wheel is changed.

! Mercedes-AMG vehicles with a collapsi-


ble spare wheel: before lowering the vehicle,
inflate the collapsible spare wheel with the
tire inflation compressor. The wheel rim could
otherwise be damaged.
X Place the ratchet wrench onto the hexagon
nut of the jack so that the letters AB are visi-
ble.
X Turn the ratchet wrench until the vehicle is
: Wheel bolts for all wheels supplied by the once again standing firmly on the ground.
factory and for the collapsible spare wheel X Place the jack to one side.
(Mercedes-AMG GLE 63 4MATIC)
; Wheel bolts for the collapsible spare wheel

Wheels and tires


X Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a crosswise
pattern in the sequence indicated (: to A).
X Clean the wheel and wheel hub contact sur- The tightening torque must be 110 lb-ft
faces. (150 Nm).
X Slide the wheel to be mounted onto the align- X Turn the jack back to its initial position.
ment bolt and push it on. X Stow the jack and the rest of the tire-change
X Tighten the wheel bolts until they are finger- tool kit in the stowage well under the cargo
tight. compartment floor again.
X Unscrew the alignment bolt. X Check the tire pressure of the newly mounted
X Tighten the last wheel bolt until it is finger- wheel and adjust it if necessary.
tight. Observe the recommended tire pressure
X Mercedes-AMG vehicles with a collapsi- (Y page 354).
ble spare wheel: inflate the collapsible spare
When you are driving with the collapsible spare
wheel (Y page 379). wheel mounted, the tire pressure loss warning
Only then lower the vehicle. system or the tire pressure monitor cannot func-
tion reliably. Only restart the tire pressure loss
warning system or tire pressure monitor when

Z
376 Emergency spare wheel

the defective wheel has been replaced with a you have no information about their previous
new wheel. usage.
Vehicles with a tire pressure control sys- The recommended pressures for various oper-
tem: all installed wheels must be equipped with ating conditions can be found:
functioning sensors.
Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard
on the B-pillar on the driver's side
Rin the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flap
Wheel and tire combinations
Observe the notes on recommended tire pres-
sures under various operating conditions
Information regarding permitted wheel/tire (Y page 354).
combinations can be found at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center. Check tire pressures regularly, and only when
the tires are cold. Comply with the maintenance
! For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom- recommendations of the tire manufacturer in
mends that you only use tires and wheels the vehicle document wallet.
which have been approved by Mercedes-Benz Notes on the vehicle equipment – always equip
specifically for your vehicle. the vehicle:
These tires have been specially adapted for Rwith tires of the same size on a given axle (left
use with the control systems, such as ABS or and right)
ESP®, and are marked as follows: Rwith the same type of tires at a given time
RMO = Mercedes-Benz Original (summer tires, winter tires, MOExtended
RMOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended tires)
(tires featuring run-flat characteristics)
i Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires
RMO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (only cer- are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the fac-
tain AMG tires) tory. It is therefore recommended that you
Mercedes-Benz Original Extended tires may additionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT
only be used on wheels that have been spe- kit if you mount tires that do not feature run-
Wheels and tires

cifically approved by Mercedes-Benz. flat properties, e.g. winter tires. A TIREFIT kit
Only use tires, wheels or accessories tested may be obtained from a qualified specialist
and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Certain workshop.
characteristics, e.g. handling, vehicle noise
emissions or fuel consumption, may other-
wise be adversely affected. In addition, when Emergency spare wheel
driving with a load, tire dimension variations
could cause the tires to come into contact Important safety notes
with the bodywork and axle components. This
could result in damage to the tires or the vehi- G WARNING
cle. The wheel or tire size as well as the tire type of
Mercedes-Benz accepts no liability for dam- the spare wheel or emergency spare wheel
age resulting from the use of tires, wheels or
and the wheel to be replaced may differ.
accessories other than those tested and
approved. Mounting an emergency spare wheel may
Information on tires, wheels and approved severely impair the driving characteristics.
combinations can be obtained from any quali- There is a risk of an accident.
fied specialist workshop. To avoid hazardous situations:
! Retreaded tires are neither tested nor rec- Radapt your driving style accordingly and
ommended by Mercedes-Benz, since previ- drive carefully.
ous damage cannot always be detected on
Rnever mount more than one spare wheel or
retreaded tires. As a result, Mercedes-Benz
cannot guarantee vehicle safety if retreaded emergency spare wheel that differs in size.
tires are mounted. Do not mount used tires if
Emergency spare wheel 377

Ronly use a spare wheel or emergency spare When you are driving with the collapsible spare
wheel of a different size briefly. wheel mounted, the tire pressure loss warning
system or the tire pressure monitor cannot func-
Rdo not switch ESP® off. tion reliably. Only restart the tire pressure loss
Rhave a spare wheel or emergency spare warning system or tire pressure monitor when
wheel of a different size replaced at the the defective wheel has been replaced with a
new wheel.
nearest qualified specialist workshop.
Vehicles with tire pressure monitor: after
Observe that the wheel and tire dimensions
mounting an emergency spare wheel, the sys-
as well as the tire type must be correct. tem may still display the tire pressure of the
removed wheel for a few minutes. The value dis-
! Mercedes-AMG vehicles with played for the mounted emergency spare wheel
"Minispare" emergency spare wheel: only is not the same as the current tire pressure of
use the "Minispare" emergency spare wheel the emergency spare wheel.
on the rear axle. If you mount the
"Minispare" emergency spare wheel on the
front axle, this could result in damage to the Removing/stowing the emergency
brake system.
spare wheel
If a tire on the front axle is defective, an intact
wheel from the rear axle must first be Vehicles with a "Minispare" emergency
replaced with the "Minispare" emergency spare wheel under the cargo compart-
spare wheel. The damaged wheel on the front
axle can then be replaced by the undamaged ment floor
wheel from the rear axle. Always observe the instructions and safety
Make sure to note the placard on the notes in the "Mounting a wheel" section
"Minispare" emergency spare wheel. (Y page 372).
When using an emergency spare wheel or spare The "Minispare" emergency spare wheel can be
wheel of a different size, you must not exceed found in the stowage well under the cargo com-

Wheels and tires


the maximum speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). partment floor.
You should regularly check the pressure of the
emergency spare wheel, particularly prior to
long trips, and correct the pressure as neces-
sary (Y page 354). The value on the wheel is
valid.
Snow chains must not be mounted on emer-
gency spare wheels.

General notes
Information regarding permitted emergency
spare wheels can be found at an authorized
Removing the emergency spare wheel
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Mounting the emergency spare wheel is descri- X Lift the cargo compartment floor upwards
bed under "Mounting a wheel" (Y page 372). (Y page 303).
An emergency spare wheel may also be moun- X Vehicle without a lockable cargo compart-
ted against the direction of rotation. Observe ment floor: turn emergency spare wheel
the time restriction on use as well as the speed retainer ; counter-clockwise and remove it.
limitation specified on the emergency spare X Remove "Minispare" emergency spare
wheel. wheel :.
Replace the tires after six years at the latest,
regardless of wear. This also applies to the
emergency spare wheel.

Z
378 Emergency spare wheel

X Remove the emergency spare wheel bag with


the "Minispare" emergency spare wheel.
X Open the emergency spare wheel bag and
remove the "Minispare" emergency spare
wheel.
Stowing the emergency spare wheel
X Place the "Minispare" emergency spare wheel
into the emergency spare wheel bag and
close the emergency spare wheel bag.
X Place the emergency spare wheel bag with
the "Minispare" emergency spare wheel into
X Vehicle with a lockable cargo compart- the cargo compartment with the carrying
ment floor: remove the contents of stowage strap at the back.
tray =. X Hook retaining spring hooks : and = of
X Turn the central retaining screw in stowage fastening straps ; into the cargo tie-down
tray = and in "Minispare" emergency spare rings.
wheel : counter-clockwise and remove it. X Tighten fastening straps ;.
X Remove stowage well =.
X Remove "Minispare" emergency spare Mercedes-AMG vehicles with a collaps-
wheel :. ible spare wheel under the cargo com-
partment floor
Vehicles with a "Minispare" emergency
! Only place the collapsible spare wheel in the
spare wheel in the emergency spare vehicle when it is dry. Otherwise, moisture
wheel bag may get into the vehicle.
Always observe the instructions and safety Always observe the instructions and safety
Wheels and tires

notes in the "Mounting a wheel" section notes in the "Mounting a wheel" section
(Y page 372). (Y page 372).
On vehicles with a Bang & Olufsen sound sys- The collapsible spare wheel can be found in the
tem, the "Minispare" emergency spare wheel is stowage well under the cargo compartment
packed in an emergency spare wheel bag. The floor.
emergency spare wheel bag is secured to the
cargo tie-down rings in the cargo compartment.

Removing the emergency spare wheel


X Lift the cargo compartment floor upwards
Removing the emergency spare wheel (Y page 303).
X Detach the fastening straps ;. X Unscrew retaining screw ; counter-clock-
X Unhook retaining spring hooks : and = of wise.
fastening straps ; from the cargo tie-down X Remove collapsible spare wheel : from the
rings. spare wheel well.
Emergency spare wheel 379

Inflating the collapsible spare wheel Removing the emergency spare wheel
(Y page 379). X Unhook retaining spring hooks : of fasten-
Take the following steps to stow a used collaps- ing strap ; from the cargo tie-down rings.
ible spare wheel. Otherwise, it will not fit into the X Remove the emergency spare wheel bag with
spare wheel well. Mercedes-Benz recommends the emergency collapsible spare wheel.
that you have this work performed at a qualified
X Open the bag and remove the emergency col-
specialist workshop, e.g. at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center. lapsible spare wheel.
Stowing the emergency spare wheel Inflating the collapsible spare wheel
(Y page 379).
X Unscrew the valve cap from the valve.
Stowing the emergency spare wheel
X If possible, unscrew the valve insert from the
valve and release the air. X Place the collapsible spare wheel into the

i Fully deflating the tires can take a few emergency spare wheel bag and close the
minutes. emergency spare wheel bag.
X Place the emergency spare wheel bag with
X Screw the valve insert back into the valve. the collapsible spare wheel into the cargo
X Screw the valve cap back on. compartment with the carrying strap at the
X Lay collapsible spare wheel : in the emer- back.
gency spare wheel well. X Hook retaining spring hooks : of fastening
X Screw in retaining screw ; clockwise in the strap ; into the cargo tie-down rings.
collapsible spare wheel to the stop. X Tighten fastening strap ;.
X Swing the cargo compartment floor down
(Y page 303).
Inflating the collapsible spare wheel
Mercedes-AMG vehicles with a collaps- (Mercedes-AMG GLE 63 4MATIC)
ible spare wheel in the emergency
! Inflate the collapsible spare wheel using the

Wheels and tires


spare wheel bag
tire inflation compressor before lowering the
Always observe the instructions and safety vehicle. The wheel rim could otherwise be
notes in the "Mounting a wheel" section damaged.
(Y page 372). ! Do not operate the tire inflation compressor
On Mercedes-AMG vehicles with a Bang & Oluf- for longer than eight minutes at a time without
sen sound system, the collapsible spare wheel is a break. It may otherwise overheat.
packed in an emergency spare wheel bag. The The tire inflation compressor can be operated
emergency spare wheel bag is secured to the again once it has cooled down.
cargo tie-down rings in the cargo compartment.
Comply with the manufacturer's safety instruc-
tions on the tire inflation compressor label and
on the tire sealant bottle.
X Mount the collapsible spare wheel as descri-
bed (Y page 372).
The collapsible spare wheel must be mounted
before it is inflated.
X Remove the tire inflation compressor from
the stowage space under the cargo compart-
ment floor (Y page 335).

Z
380 Emergency spare wheel

X Stow connector ? and hose B in the lower


section of the tire inflation compressor.
X Stow the tire inflation compressor in the vehi-
cle.

X Pull connector ? and hose B out of the


housing.
X Remove the cap from the valve on the col-
lapsible spare wheel.
X Screw union nut ; of hose B onto the valve.
X Make sure on/off switch A of the tire infla-
tion compressor is set to 0.
X Insert connector ? into a socket in your vehi-
cle.
Cigarette lighter socket: (Y page 307)
12 V sockets: (Y page 308)
Observe the notes on the cigarette lighter
(Y page 307). Observe the notes on sockets
(Y page 308).
Wheels and tires

X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the igni-


tion lock (Y page 135).
X Press on and off switch A on the tire inflation
compressor to I.
The tire inflation compressor is switched on.
The tire is inflated. The tire pressure is shown
on pressure gauge =.
X Inflate the tire to the specified tire pressure.
The specified tire pressure is printed on the
yellow label of the emergency spare wheel.
X When the specified tire pressure has been
reached, press on and off switch A on the
tire inflation compressor to 0.
The tire inflation compressor is switched off.
X Turn the SmartKey to position u in the igni-
tion lock.
X If the tire pressure is higher than the specified
pressure, press pressure release valve but-
ton : until the correct tire pressure has been
reached.
X Unscrew union nut ; on hose B from the
valve.
X Screw the cap onto the valve of the collapsi-
ble spare wheel again.
Vehicle electronics 381

Information regarding technical data In particular, the following conditions must be


complied with:
Plug-in hybrid: be sure to read the separate Ronly approved wavebands may be used
Operator's Manual. Otherwise, you may not rec- Robserve the maximum permissible output
ognize dangers. in these wavebands
Ronly approved antenna positions may be
i The data stated here specifically refers to a
vehicle with standard equipment. Consult an used
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for the Excessive levels of electromagnetic radiation
data for all vehicle variants and trim levels. may cause damage to your health and the health
of others. Using an exterior antenna takes into
account current scientific discussions relating
Vehicle electronics to the possible health hazards that may result
from electromagnetic fields.
Installing two-way radios and mobile The following antenna positions may be used for
phones (RF transmitters) the correct installation of two-way radios:

G WARNING
The electromagnetic radiation from two-way
radios can interfere with the vehicle electron-
ics if two-way radios are manipulated or ret-
rofitted incorrectly. This could jeopardize the
operating safety of the vehicle. There is a risk
of an accident.
You should have all work on electrical and
electronic components carried out at a quali-
fied specialist workshop.
Approved antenna positions
G WARNING : Rear roof area
If you incorrectly operate two-way radios in ; Rear fender

Technical data
the vehicle, the electromagnetic radiation i On the rear fenders, it is recommended to
may interfere with the vehicle electronics, for position the antenna on the side of the vehicle
example if: closest to the center of the road.
Rthe two-way radio is not connected to an Use Technical Specification ISO/TS 21609
(Road Vehicles – "EMC guidelines for installa-
exterior antenna tion of aftermarket radio frequency transmitting
Rthe exterior antenna is not correctly moun- equipment") when installing wireless devices.
ted or is not low-reflection Observe the legal requirements for accessory
This could jeopardize the operating safety of parts.
the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. If your vehicle has installations for two-way radio
equipment, use the power supply or antenna
Have the low-reflection exterior antenna connections intended for use with the basic wir-
installed at a qualified specialist workshop. ing. Be sure to observe the manufacturer's Sup-
Always connect two-way radios to the low- plement when installing.
reflection exterior antenna when operating in Deviations with respect to frequency bands,
the vehicle. maximum transmission outputs or antenna
positions must be approved by Mercedes-Benz.
! The operating permit may be invalidated if
the instructions for installation and use of
two-way radios are not observed.

Z
382 Identification plates

The maximum transmission output (PEAK) at the Identification plates


base of the antenna must not exceed the fol-
lowing values: Vehicle identification plate with vehi-
Frequency band Maximum
cle identification number (VIN)
transmission
output
Short wave 100 W
3 - 54 MHz
4 m waveband 30 W
74 - 88 MHz
2 m waveband 50 W
144 - 174 MHz
Trunked radio system/ 10 W
Tetra X Open the driver's door.
380 - 460 MHz You will see vehicle identification plate :.
70 cm waveband 35 W
400 - 460 MHz
Mobile communications 10 W
(2G/3G/4G)

The following can be used in the vehicle without


restrictions:
RTwo-way radios with a maximum transmission
output of up to 100 mW
RTwo-way radios with transmitter frequencies
in the 380 - 410 MHz waveband and a maxi-
Technical data

Example: vehicle identification plate (USA only)


mum transmission output of up to 2 W
(trunked radio/Tetra) ; Paint code
RMobile phones (2G/3G/4G) = VIN
There are no restrictions when positioning the
antenna on the outside of the vehicle for the
following wavebands:
RTrunked radio system/Tetra
R70 cm waveband
R2G/3G/4G

Example: vehicle identification plate (Canada only)


; Paint code
= VIN
i The data shown on the vehicle identification
plate is used only as an example. This data is
different for every vehicle and can deviate
Service products and filling capacities 383

from the data shown here. You can find the Service products and filling capaci-
data applicable to your vehicle on the vehicle ties
identification plate.
Important safety notes
Vehicle identification number (VIN) G WARNING
Service products may be poisonous and haz-
ardous to health. There is a risk of injury.
Comply with instructions on the use, storage
and disposal of service products on the labels
of the respective original containers. Always
store service products sealed in their original
containers. Always keep service products out
of the reach of children.

H Environmental note
Dispose of service products in an environ-
X Open the front right-hand door. mentally responsible manner.
X Open cover : in the direction of the arrow
and remove it. Service products include the following:
You will see the VIN. RFuels
The VIN can also be found in the following loca- RExhaust gas aftertreatment additives, e.g.
tions: DEF
Ron the lower edge of the windshield RLubricants (e.g. engine oil, transmission oil)
(Y page 383) RCoolant
Ron the vehicle identification plate RBrake fluid
(Y page 382) RWindshield washer fluid
RClimate control system refrigerant

Technical data
Components and service products must match.
Engine number You should therefore only use products that
have been tested and approved by Mercedes-
Benz.
You can identify service products approved by
Mercedes-Benz by the following inscriptions on
the container:
RMB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51)
RMB-Approval (e.g. MB-Approval 229.51)
Other designations or recommendations indi-
cate a level of quality or a specification in
accordance with an MB Sheet Number (e.g. MB
229.5). They have not necessarily been
: Emission control information plate, includ-
approved by Mercedes-Benz.
ing the certification of both federal and Cali- Other identifications, for example:
fornian emissions standards R0 W-30
; Engine number (stamped into the crank- R5 W-30
case) R5 W-40
= VIN (on the lower edge of the windshield)

Z
384 Service products and filling capacities

Fuel Model Of which


reserve
Important safety notes
Mercedes-AMG GLE 43 Approx.
G WARNING 4MATIC 3.2 US gal
Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel (12.0 l)
incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explo- Mercedes‑AMG vehicles Approx.
sion. 3.7 US gal
You must avoid fire, open flames, creating (14.0 l)
sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine All other models Approx.
and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before 3.2 US gal
refueling. (12.0 l)

G WARNING Gasoline
Fuel is poisonous and hazardous to health.
There is a risk of injury. Fuel grade
You must make sure that fuel does not come ! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a
gasoline engine. Do not switch on the ignition
into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing
if you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel.
and that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuel Otherwise, the fuel will enter the fuel system.
vapors. Keep fuel away from children. Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could
If you or others come into contact with fuel, result in damage to the fuel system and the
observe the following: engine. Notify a qualified specialist workshop
and have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained
RWash away fuel from skin immediately completely.
using soap and water.
! Only refuel using unleaded premium grade
RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes, gasoline with at least 91 AKI/95 RON.
immediately rinse them thoroughly with
clean water. Seek medical assistance with-
i E10 fuel contains up to 10% bioethanol.
Your vehicle is E10-compatible. You can
out delay.
Technical data

refuel your vehicle using E10 fuel.


RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical assis-
! Only use the fuel recommended. Operating
tance without delay. Do not induce vomit- the vehicle with other fuels can lead to dam-
ing. age to the fuel system, engine and exhaust
RImmediately change out of clothing which system.
has come into contact with fuel. ! Do not use the following:
RGasoline with more than 10% ethanol
Tank capacity RE100 (100% ethanol)
RGasoline with methanol
Model Total capa-
city RM100 (100% methanol)
RGasoline with metalliferous additives
GLE 550 e 4MATIC 21.1 US gal RDiesel
(80.0 l)
Do not mix such fuels with the fuel recom-
All other models 24.6 US gal mended for your vehicle.
(93.0 l)
! To ensure the longevity and full perform-
ance of the engine, only premium-grade
unleaded gasoline must be used.
Service products and filling capacities 385

If standard unleaded gasoline is unavailable Diesel


and you have to refuel with unleaded gasoline
of a lower grade, observe the following pre- Fuel grade
cautions:
G WARNING
ROnly fill the fuel tank to half full with regular
unleaded gasoline and fill the rest with pre- If you mix diesel fuel with gasoline, the flash
mium-grade unleaded gasoline as soon as point is lower than that of pure diesel fuel.
possible. When the engine is running, exhaust system
RDo not drive at the maximum speed. components could overheat without being
RAvoid sudden acceleration and engine noticed. There is a risk of fire.
speeds over 3,000 rpm. Never refuel with gasoline. Never mix gasoline
You will usually find information about the fuel with diesel fuel.
grade on the fuel pump. If you cannot find the
label on the fuel pump, ask the gas station staff. ! Only use Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel (ULSD),
otherwise it may lead to increased wear and
i For more information, please contact a damage to the fuel system, engine and
qualified specialist workshop or visit
exhaust system.
http://www.mbusa.com (USA only).
As a temporary measure, if the recommended ! Do not use the following:
fuel is not available, you may also use regular Rgasoline
unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of Rdiesel with a bio-diesel content greater
87 AKI/91 RON. This may reduce engine per- than 5% (e.g. B20)
formance and increase fuel consumption. Avoid Rbio-diesel
driving at full throttle and sudden acceleration.
Never refuel using gasoline with a lower AKI. Rvegetable oil

Information on refueling (Y page 151). Rparaffin


Rkerosene
Additives Rmarine diesel
! Operating the engine with fuel additives Rheating oil
added later can lead to engine failure. Do not Do not mix such fuels with diesel fuel and do
mix fuel additives with fuel. This does not not use any special additives. Otherwise,

Technical data
include additives for the removal and preven- engine damage may occur.
tion of residue buildup. gasoline must only be
mixed with additives recommended by ! In countries outside USA and Canada, only
Mercedes-Benz. Comply with the instructions use sulfur-free diesel with a sulfur content
for use on the product label. More information under 50 ppm. Otherwise, the emission con-
about recommended additives can be trol system could be damaged.
obtained from any authorized Mercedes-Benz You will usually find information about the fuel
Center. grade on the pump. If you cannot find the label
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use bran- on the pump, ask the staff for assistance.
ded fuels that have additives. Information on refueling (Y page 151).
The fuel quality available in some countries may
not be sufficient. Residue could build up in the Low outside temperatures
fuel injection system as a result. In such cases, i Diesel fuel with improved cold flow proper-
and in consultation with an authorized ties is available during the winter months.
Mercedes-Benz Center, the fuel may be mixed Further information about fuel properties can
with the cleaning additive recommended by be obtained from oil companies, e.g. at gas
Mercedes-Benz. You must observe the notes stations.
and mixing ratios specified on the container.

Z
386 Service products and filling capacities

Flexible Fuel vehicles Fuel consumption


The energy content of E85 fuel is less than that
Important safety notes of the same amount of premium-grade gasoline.
G WARNING The amount of fuel consumed when operating
the vehicle with E85 fuel is therefore higher than
Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel with premium-grade gasoline.
incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explo-
sion. Maintenance
You must avoid fire, open flames, creating Inform your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine that you are operating or have operated the
vehicle with E85 fuel.
and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before
refueling. Low outside temperatures
If the outside temperature is below 32 ‡ (0 †),
G WARNING the starting procedure can take noticeably lon-
Fuel is poisonous and hazardous to health. ger when operating with E85 fuel.
There is a risk of injury. E85 fuel is not suitable for use at outside tem-
peratures under -4 ‡ (-20 †).
You must make sure that fuel does not come
into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing
and that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuel DEF
vapors. Keep fuel away from children.
If you or others come into contact with fuel, Important safety notes
observe the following: Comply with the important safety notes for ser-
RWash away fuel from skin immediately vice products when handling DEF (Y page 383).
using soap and water. DEF is a water-soluble fluid for the exhaust gas
aftertreatment of diesel engines. It is:
RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes,
Rnot poisonous
immediately rinse them thoroughly with
clean water. Seek medical assistance with- Rcolorless and odorless

out delay. Rnot flammable


Technical data

RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical assis- When you open the DEF container, small
amounts of ammonia vapor may be released.
tance without delay. Do not induce vomit-
Ammonia vapors have a pungent odor and are
ing.
particularly irritating to the skin, to mucous
RImmediately change out of clothing which membranes and to the eyes. You may experi-
has come into contact with fuel. ence a burning sensation in your eyes, nose and
throat. Coughing and watering of the eyes are
Flexible Fuel vehicles can be refueled with the possible.
following fuel types: Do not inhale ammonia vapors. Fill the DEF tank
Rpremium-grade unleaded gasoline only in well-ventilated areas.
RE85 fuel
Ra mixture of E85 fuel and premium-grade Low outside temperatures
unleaded gasoline DEF freezes at a temperature of approximately
i Flexible Fuel vehicles can be recognized by 12 ‡ (-11 †). The vehicle is delivered from the
the Ethanol up to E85 sticker on the inside of factory equipped with a DEF preheating system.
the fuel filler flap. Winter operation can thus be guaranteed even
at temperatures below 12 ‡ (-11 †).
Service products and filling capacities 387

Additives Do not change the engine oil or oil filter in


order to set replacement intervals longer than
! Only use DEF in accordance with ISO those prescribed. This could otherwise cause
22241. Do not use additives with DEF and do damage to the engine or exhaust gas after-
not dilute DEF with water. This may destroy treatment.
the BlueTEC exhaust gas aftertreatment sys- Follow the instructions on the service interval
tem. display for changing the engine oil. This could
otherwise cause damage to the engine or
Purity exhaust gas aftertreatment.
! Impurities in DEF (e.g. due to other service When handling engine oil, observe the important
products, cleaning agents or dust) lead to: safety notes on service products (Y page 383).
The engine oils are matched to the performance
Rincreased emission values
of Mercedes-Benz engines and service intervals.
Rdamage to the catalytic converter You should therefore only use engine oils and oil
Rengine damage filters that are approved for vehicles with main-
Rmalfunctions in the BlueTEC exhaust gas tenance systems.
aftertreatment system For a list of approved engine oils and oil filters,
Assuring the purity of DEF is particularly impor- consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
tant with respect to avoiding malfunctions in the Alternatively, visit the website
BlueTEC exhaust gas aftertreatment system. http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
If DEF is pumped out of the DEF tank, e.g. during The table shows which engine oils have been
repair work, it must not be returned to the tank. approved for your vehicle.
The purity of the fluid can no longer be guaran- Gasoline engines MB-Freigabe or
teed. MB-Approval

Filling capacities All models 229.5, 229.6


Mercedes‑AMG vehicles 229.5
Model Total capacity
All models 8.5 US gal Diesel engines MB-Freigabe or
(32.0 l) MB-Approval

Technical data
All models 229.52
Engine oil
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: only use SAE 0W-40
General notes or SAE 5W-40 engine oils.
i MB approval is indicated on the oil contain-
ers.

Filling capacities
The following values refer to an engine oil
change, including the oil filter.
Model Capacity
GLE 300 d 4MATIC 6.9 US qt (6.5 l)
GLE 350 d 4MATIC 8.5 US qt (8.0 l)
! Do not use engine oil or an oil filter with Mercedes-AMG 7.4 US qt (7.0 l)
specifications deviating from those expressly GLE 43 4MATIC
required for the prescribed service intervals.

Z
388 Service products and filling capacities

Model Capacity Coolant


GLE 550 4MATIC 9.0 US qt (8.5 l) Important safety notes
Mercedes-AMG
GLE 63 4MATIC G WARNING
Mercedes-AMG If antifreeze comes into contact with hot com-
GLE 63 S 4MATIC ponents in the engine compartment, it may
All other models 7.4 US qt (7.0 l) ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.
Let the engine cool down before you add anti-
Additives freeze. Make sure that antifreeze is not spilled
next to the filler neck. Thoroughly clean the
! Do not use any additives in the engine oil. antifreeze from components before starting
This could damage the engine. the engine.

! Only add coolant that has been premixed


Brake fluid with the desired antifreeze protection. You
could otherwise damage the engine.
G WARNING Further information on coolants can be found
The brake fluid constantly absorbs moisture in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Ser-
from the air. This lowers the boiling point of vice Products, MB BeVo 310.1, e.g. on the
the brake fluid. If the boiling point of the brake Internet at
http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. Or con-
fluid is too low, vapor pockets may form in the
tact a qualified specialist workshop.
brake system when the brakes are applied
hard. This would impair braking efficiency. ! Always use a suitable coolant mixture, even
There is a risk of an accident. in countries where high temperatures prevail.
Otherwise, the engine cooling system is not
You should have the brake fluid renewed at
sufficiently protected from corrosion and
the specified intervals. overheating.
Comply with the important safety notes for ser- i Have the coolant regularly replaced at a
Technical data

vice products when handling brake fluid qualified specialist workshop and the replace-
(Y page 383). ment confirmed in the service report.
Only use brake fluid approved for Mercedes- Comply with the important safety notes for ser-
Benz according to MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval vice products when handling coolant
331.0. (Y page 383).
Information about approved brake fluid can be The coolant is a mixture of water and anti-
obtained at any qualified specialist workshop or freeze/corrosion inhibitor. It is responsible for
on the Internet at the following:
http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
Ranti-corrosion protection
i Have the brake fluid regularly replaced at a Rantifreeze protection
qualified specialist workshop in accordance Rraising the boiling point
with the replacement intervals and the
replacement confirmed in the service report. If the coolant has antifreeze protection down to
-35 ‡ (-37 †), the boiling point of the coolant
during operation is approximately 266 ‡
(130 †).
Service products and filling capacities 389

The antifreeze concentrate/corrosion inhibitor Windshield washer system


concentration in the engine cooling system
should: Important safety notes
Rbe at least 50%. This will protect the engine
cooling system against freezing down to G WARNING
approximately -35 ‡ (-37 †). Windshield washer concentrate could ignite if
Rnot exceed 55% (antifreeze protection down it comes into contact with hot engine compo-
to -49 ‡ [-45 †]). Otherwise, heat will not be nents or the exhaust system. There is a risk of
dissipated as effectively. fire and injury.
Mercedes-Benz recommends an antifreeze/
Make sure that no windshield washer con-
corrosion inhibitor concentrate in accordance
with MB Specifications for Service Products centrate is spilled next to the filler neck.
310.1.
! Only MB SummerFit and MB WinterFit
i When the vehicle is first delivered, it is filled washer fluid should be mixed together. The
with a coolant mixture that ensures adequate spray nozzles may otherwise become
antifreeze and anti-corrosion protection. blocked.
i The coolant is checked at specified intervals Do not use distilled or de-ionized water. Other-
at a qualified specialist workshop. wise, the level sensor may give a false reading.
When handling washer fluid, observe the impor-
Filling capacities tant safety notes on service products
(Y page 383).
Missing values were not available at time of
At temperatures above freezing:
going to print.
X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture of
Model Capacity water and windshield washer fluid, e.g. MB
SummerFit.
Mercedes‑AMG Approx. 11.9 US qt
vehicles (11.3 l) Add 1 part MB SummerFit to 100 parts water.
At temperatures below freezing:
GLE 300 d 4MATIC Approx. 10.7 US qt
(10.1 l) X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture of
water and washer fluid, e.g. MB WinterFit.

Technical data
GLE 350 Approx. 11.1 US qt For the correct mixing ratio refer to the infor-
(10.5 l) mation on the antifreeze reservoir.
GLE 350 4MATIC Approx. 11.1 US qt
(10.5 l)
i Add windshield washer fluid, e.g. MB Sum-
merFit or MB WinterFit, to the washer fluid all
GLE 350 d 4MATIC Approx. 12.2 US qt year round.
(11.5 l)
GLE 400 4MATIC Approx. 10.3 US qt
(9.7 l)
Climate control system refrigerant

Mercedes-AMG Approx. 10.3 US qt Important safety notes


GLE 43 4MATIC (9.7 l) The climate control system of your vehicle is fil-
GLE 550 4MATIC led with refrigerant R‑134a.
The instruction label regarding the refrigerant
All other models Approx. 10.3 US qt type used can be found on the radiator cross
(9.7 l) member.
! Only the refrigerant R‑134a and the PAG oil
approved by Mercedes-Benz may be used.
The approved PAG oil may not be mixed with
any other PAG oil that is not approved for

Z
390 Vehicle data

R-134a refrigerant. Otherwise, the climate Vehicle data


control system may be damaged.
Service work, such as refilling with refrigerant or General notes
replacing component parts, may only be carried Please note that for the specified vehicle data:
out by a qualified specialist workshop. All appli-
cable regulations, as well as SAE standard J639, Rthe heights specified may vary as a result of:
must be adhered to. - tires
Always have work on the climate control system - load
carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. - condition of the suspension
- optional equipment
Refrigerant instruction label Roptional equipment reduces the maximum
payload
Observe the information relating to level con-
trol:
RAIRMATIC package (Y page 185)
ROffroad Engineering package (Y page 215)

Dimensions and weights

Example: refrigerant instruction label


: Warning symbol
; Refrigerant filling capacity
= Applicable standards
? PAG oil part number
A Type of refrigerant
Warning symbol : advises you about:
Technical data

RPossible dangers
RHaving service work carried out at a qualified Model : ;
specialist workshop Opening Max.
height headroom
Filling capacities
Mercedes‑AM 85 in 76.8 in
Refrigerant Capacity G vehicles 2157 mm - 1949 mm -
2159 mm 1950 mm
All models 37.0 ± 0.4 oz
(1050 ± 10 g)

PAG oil Capacity


All models 3.9 ± 0.4 oz
(110 ± 10 g)
Vehicle data 391

All other mod- : ; Mercedes-AMG GLE 43


els with: Opening Max. 4MATIC
height headroom Vehicle length 189.6 in
Steel suspen- 86.4 in 78.2 in (4816 mm)
sion (2195 mm) (1987 mm) Vehicle width including 84.3 in
AIRMATIC 84.3 in - 76.0 in - exterior mirrors (2141 mm)
package 87.2 in 79.0 in Vehicle width without exte- 76.2 in
(2140 mm - (1931 mm - rior mirrors, without side 1935 mm
2215 mm) 2006 mm) running board
ON&OFFROAD 84.3 in - 76.0 in - Vehicle width without exte-
package 88.4 in 80.2 in rior mirrors, with side run-
(2140 mm - (1931 mm - ning board
2245 mm) 2036 mm)
Maximum vehicle height 69.4 in
(steel suspension) (1762 mm)
Missing values were not available at time of
going to print. Maximum vehicle height 71.6 in
(AIRMATIC package) (1818 mm)
Mercedes‑AMG vehicles
Maximum vehicle height 72.8 in
Vehicle length 191.0 in (ON&OFFROAD package) (1848 mm)
(4852 mm)
Minimum vehicle height 69.2 in
Vehicle width including 84.3 in (AIRMATIC package, (1758 mm)
exterior mirrors (2141 mm) ON&OFFROAD package)
Maximum vehicle height 69.4 in Wheelbase 114.8 in
(1762 mm) (2915 mm)
Maximum vehicle height 69.3 in Maximum ground clear- 8.0 in
(Mercedes-AMG GLE 63 S (1760 mm) ance (steel suspension)

Technical data
(202 mm)
4MATIC)
Maximum ground clear- 10.0 in
Wheelbase 114.8 in ance (AIRMATIC package) (255 mm)
(2915 mm)
Maximum ground clear- 11.2 in
Maximum ground clear- 7.1 in ance (ON&OFFROAD pack-
ance (285 mm)
(180 mm) age)
Turning circle 38.7 ft Minimum ground clear- 7.1 in
(11.80 m) ance (AIRMATIC package, (180 mm)
ON&OFFROAD package)
Maximum roof load 220 lb
(100 kg) Maximum roof load 220 lbs
(100 kg)

Z
392 Vehicle data for off-road driving

All other models Vehicle data for off-road driving


Vehicle width including 84.3 in Fording depth
exterior mirrors (2141 mm)
! The depth of water must not exceed the
Maximum vehicle height 70.7 in value specified in the table. Note that the
(steel suspension) (1796 mm) possible fording depth is less in flowing water.

Maximum vehicle height 71.6 in


(AIRMATIC package) (1818 mm)
Maximum vehicle height 72.8 in
(ON&OFFROAD package) (1848 mm)
Minimum vehicle height 69.2 in
(1758 mm)
Wheelbase 114.8 in
(2915 mm)
Maximum ground clear- 8.0 in : Fording depth
ance (steel suspension) (202 mm) On vehicles with the AIRMATIC package or the
Maximum ground clear- 10.0 in Off-Road Engineering package, loads up to the
ance (AIRMATIC package) maximum permissible load have no influence on
(255 mm)
fording capability.
Maximum ground clear- 11.2 in Missing values were not available at the time of
ance (ON&OFFROAD pack- (285 mm) going to print.
age)
Fording
Minimum ground clear- 7.1 in depth
ance (180 mm) Steel-sprung vehicles 19.7 in
Turning circle 38.7 ft (50 cm)
Technical data

(11.80 m) Vehicles with the AIRMATIC


Maximum roof load 220 lb package
(100 kg) Raised level 19.7 in
(50 cm)
Model Vehicle Vehicles with the Off-Road
length Engineering package
GLE 400 4MATIC 189.5 in Off-road level 1 19.7 in
GLE 550 4MATIC (4813 mm) (50 cm)

All other models 189.7 in Off-road level 2 19.7 in


(50 cm)
(4819 mm)
Off-road level 3 23.6 in
(60 cm)
Mercedes-AMG vehicles
Raised level 19.7 in
(50 cm)
Vehicle data for off-road driving 393

For more information about off-road fording, see Vehicles with AMG bodystyling
(Y page 164).
: ;
Steel-sprung vehi- 23° 26°
Approach/departure angle cles
Vehicles with the
AIRMATIC package
Normal level 22° 24°
Raised level 26° 28°
Vehicles with the
Off-Road Engineer-
ing package
Normal level 22° 24°
Off-road level 1 24° 26°
All vehicles (except vehicles with AMG body-
styling) Off-road level 2 26° 28°

: ; Off-road level 3 28° 29°

Steel-sprung vehi- 26° 26° For further information about approach/depar-


cles ture angles, see (Y page 168).
Vehicles with the
AIRMATIC package
Maximum gradient-climbing capabil-
Normal level 23° 24° ity
Raised level 29° 28° Note that the vehicle's gradient-climbing capa-
Vehicles with the bility depends on the off-road conditions and the

Technical data
Off-Road Engineer- road surface conditions.
ing package Vehicles with the Off-Road Engineering
package: the maximum gradient climbing abil-
Normal level 23° 24° ity is 100 % when the LOW RANGE off-road gear
Off-road level 1 26° 26° is selected.
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the maximum gradi-
Off-road level 2 29° 28° ent climbing ability is 80 %.
Off-road level 3 30° 29° Vehicles without the Off-Road Engineering
package: the maximum gradient climbing abil-
Mercedes-AMG ity is 80 %.
vehicles GLE 550 e 4MATIC: the maximum gradient
Normal level (in sport 21° 24° climbing ability is 50 %.
mode with AMG Accelerate carefully and make sure that the
adaptive sport sus- wheels do not spin when driving on steep ter-
pension system acti- rain.
vated)
i If the load on the front axle is reduced when
Raised level 23° 24° pulling away on a steep uphill slope, the front
wheels have a tendency to spin. 4ETS recog-
nizes this and brakes the wheels accordingly.
The rear wheel torque is increased, making it
easier to drive off.
Z
394 Trailer tow hitch

For further information about the maximum gra- Mercedes-


dient climbing ability, see (Y page 168). AMG GLE 43 4MATI
C

Trailer tow hitch GLE 550 e 4MATIC 4410 lbs (2000 kg)

Mounting dimensions Maximum drawbar noseweight (the


! If you have a trailer tow hitch retrofitted, drawbar noseweight is not included in
changes to the cooling system and drive train the trailer load)
may be necessary, depending on the vehicle
type. Missing values were not available at the time of
going to print.
If you have a trailer tow hitch retrofitted,
observe the anchorage points on the chassis All models 575 lbs (261 kg)
frame.
GLE 300 d 4MATIC 530 lbs (240 kg)
GLE 350 530 lbs (240 kg)
Mercedes-
AMG GLE 43 4MATI
C
GLE 550 e 4MATIC 355 lbs (160 kg)

The actual noseweight may not be higher than


the value which is given. The value can be found
on the trailer tow hitch or trailer identification
plates. The lowest weight applies.
The maximum permissible trailer drawbar nose-
weight is the maximum weight with which the
trailer drawbar can be loaded. Limit for
Mercedes-Benz-approved trailer couplings.
Technical data

: Anchorage points for the trailer tow hitch Gross rear axle weight rating when tow-
; Rear axle center line ing a trailer
Missing values were not available at the time of
going to print.
Trailer loads
All models 3527 lbs (1600 kg)
Permissible trailer load, braked (at a
minimum gradient-climbing capability GLE 300 d 4MATIC 3638 lbs (1650 kg)
of 12% from a standstill) GLE 350 d 4MATIC 3638 lbs (1650 kg)
Missing values were not available at the time of Mercedes-
going to print. AMG GLE 43 4MATI
All models 7200 lbs (3265 kg) C

GLE 300 d 4MATIC 6615 lbs (3000 kg)


GLE 350 6615 lbs (3000 kg)
Trailer tow hitch 395

GLE 550 e 4MATIC 3704 lbs (1680 kg)


Mercedes- 3858 lbs (1750 kg)
AMG GLE 63 4MATI
C
Mercedes-
AMG GLE 63 S 4MA
TIC

Ball position of the ball coupling

: 7.5"
; 2"
= 2.75"
When choosing a ball coupling, the dimensions
stated in the illustration must not be exceeded.

Technical data

Z
396

Вам также может понравиться